UC-NRLF 
 
 ^B ESb 7TD 
 
 
 SKiX/M) CUUKs!: 
 
 XKW YOWK: 
 
 K. __S teigei 
 
 
1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 IN MEMORIAM 
 
 rrof. «J . rienry Senper 
 
 N 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 J 
 
Steiger's French Series. 
 
 AHN'S 
 
 Practical and Easy Method 
 
 OP LEARNING THE 
 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 Dr. P. HENN. 
 
 SECOND COURSE. 
 
 NEW YORK. 
 
 E. Steiger. 
 
 1874. 
 
IN MEMORtAM 
 
 ^'^' I ^*^"^ ^^"^ 
 
 • •• • • 
 
 5ffice oV the ^ Ararian oC (focjpW at ^aaSio^ 
 
 in the Office 
 
 E, Steigkr, New York, 
 Printer and Electrotyper. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The present volume is the thu-d in the AHN Series of 
 French Text-books. Its grade has been carefully adapted 
 to the wants of pupils who have already acquired a fair vocabu- 
 lary of words as well as some facility in easy translations, and 
 a general knowledge of the regular French inflections. In its 
 aim, mode, simplicity of style, progressiveness, and naturalness 
 this Second Course corresponds to the First; it differs only 
 by introducing the more difficult relations of the language, and 
 in regard to this point attention is invited to the following 
 remarks explanatory of the plan adopted. 
 
 A special and distinetive feature are the numerous and 
 copious Exercises on the Irregular Verbs. Each of these, 
 with only a tew exceptions, is taken up separately, and in 
 order to confine the learner's attention to the one point in hand, 
 the exercises are based upon a comprehensive^ clear^ 
 and practical paradigm of the respective verb. The 
 new words to be used are placed at the head of each exercise. 
 In their selection, regard has been had to the fact that it is 
 better to learn a few things thoroughly than many superficially. 
 , For recalling a word which is entirely or partially forgotten, 
 the Vocabularies should be consulted. These contain all 
 words occurring in the book, with their meanings, but only as 
 used in the Exercises. 
 
 The style of the latter is mainly colloquial, so as to enable 
 the pupil to surmount the primary difficulties of French con-- 
 versation, and in order to impart greater fluency, a series of 
 Conversations is added. 
 
 ^^ Example is in all things more powerful than precept," as 
 the proverb has it, and this is especially true in reference to 
 the teaching of languages. No rules should, therefore, be given 
 textually in a book for beginners; practice alone is the great 
 
- IT - ^ 
 
 agent through which the first result must be attained. At a 
 later stage of instruction, however, a regular course of lessons 
 in grammar is not only desirable, but of great importance. 
 
 It is in accordance with this principle that the second part 
 of the book, entitled Elements of French Granimur, 
 has been written. The rules herein given are comprehensive 
 without being prolix, and the examples in illustration so sim- 
 ple and direct as to admit of the most ready and practical 
 application. For those teachers who desire to exercise their 
 pupils orally in the practice of the rules, while they are learning 
 them, references to the corresponding Exercises of \)oih CouraeM 
 are inserted throughout. The little grammar is completed by 
 a full and detailed Indeuc of Subjects^ which cannot fail to 
 prove a valuable help to both teacher and learner. 
 
 A separate Key to the Exercises in the Second Course 
 also is published. Private learners are thereby enabled to test 
 their knowledge of what they have studieii, and teachers may 
 use this inverted series of exercises for the purjwse of training 
 their pupils orally in translation. 
 
 Throughout the work the author has exercised a scrupulous 
 discrimination, whilst aiming at comparative completeness so 
 far as necessary or desirable, to omit that which, being of less 
 importance, would encumber the learner's mind, needlessly take 
 up his time, discourage him. For this reason grammatical 
 niceties, and exceptions of rare occurrence are passed over. 
 
 French grammarians and writers are differing considerably 
 on various points of language, and in view of this fact the 
 author wishes to state expressly that, in the main, he aims to 
 present French grammar as now taught at the Normal College 
 of Paris. 
 
 New York, June, 1874. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 French and English Exercises. 
 
 1. 2. Indicative Moody Preterit Tense of avoir and etre 1 
 
 3. 4. Indicative Moody Preterit Tense of parler, finir cmd vendre 2 
 
 5. 6. Imperative of avoir and etre 3 
 
 7. 8. Imperative of parler, finir and vendre 4 
 
 9. 10. Subjunctive Mood of avoir and etre 5 
 
 11. 12. Subjunctive Mood of parler, finir and vendre 7 
 
 13. 14. Infinitives 8 
 
 15. 16. Participles 9 
 
 17. 18. Irregular Verbs, dire 10 
 
 19. 20. ecrire 11 
 
 21. 22. lire m 12 
 
 23. 24. mettre 14 
 
 25. 26. prendre. 15 
 
 27. 28. faire 16 
 
 29. 30. connaitre 18 
 
 31. 32. croire " 19 
 
 33. 34. boire 20 
 
 35. 36. venir 21 
 
 37. 38. tenir 22 
 
 39. 40. servir 24 
 
 41. 42. sortir 25 
 
 43. 44. partir, dormir 26 
 
 45. 46. sentir, mentir, se repentir 28 
 
 47. 48. couvrir, souffrir, offrir, ouvrir 29 
 
 49. 50. pouvoir 30 
 
 51. 52. savoir 31 
 
 53. 54. valoir 32 
 
 55. 56. voir 34 
 
 57. 58. vouloir 35 
 
69. 
 
 60. 
 
 61. 
 
 62. 
 
 63. 
 
 64. 
 
 65. 
 
 66. 
 
 67. 
 
 68. 
 
 69. 
 
 
 70. 
 
 71. 
 
 72. 
 
 73. 
 
 74. 
 
 
 75. 
 
 76. 
 
 77. 
 
 
 78. 
 
 79. 
 
 80. 
 
 
 81. 
 
 82. 
 
 83. 
 
 84. 
 
 85. 
 
 86. 
 
 87. 
 
 88. 
 
 89. 
 
 90. 
 
 91. 
 
 92. 
 
 93. 
 
 94. 
 
 95. 
 
 96. 
 
 97. 
 
 98. 
 
 99. 
 
 100. 
 
 101- 
 
 -103. 
 
 104. 
 
 
 105. 
 
 106. 
 
 107. 
 
 
 108. 
 
 
 109. 
 
 110. 
 
 Ill- 
 
 -113. 
 
 lU— 116. 
 
 117. 
 
 
 118. 
 
 119. 
 
 120. 
 
 121. 
 
 122. 
 
 
 123. 
 
 124. 
 
 125. 
 
 126. 
 
 127- 
 
 -140. 
 
 — VI — 
 
 devoir 
 
 falloir 
 
 aller, s'en aller. 
 mourir, courir. . 
 
 hair, fair 
 
 cneiUir, acquerir 
 
 craindre, plaimlre, se plaiudrt*. \.i 
 
 bouUlir, cuire , rire 
 
 vivre, paraitre . . 
 suiyre, coudrc . . 
 
 naitre, ofoUra 
 
 86 taire, plaire, se plaire. . 
 
 plenvoir, neiger, gelcr, greler, tonmr 
 
 recevoir, apercevoir, deoeroir, conc«voir, devoir 
 
 8*as8eoir 
 
 toe aasia, etre debout . . 
 
 The Passive Verb 
 
 Jmpersonal Ekprt s skms* U y 
 il est, c*eflt, oela est. . . 
 il fait, il vant mienz. . . 
 ReoapUulalory Eurdses on the Lj 
 
 OttttaveandDaUveOMsts 
 
 The Partmve ArtieU 
 
 Partitive Artide cnUUedi avoir faim, tic.. 
 Ikgree of BquaiUy; si, anssi, tant, antant. . 
 
 plos de, moins de 
 
 plufl^.plns, moins. .moins 
 
 Oon^paraUves and antra, antrpment frith ne . 
 
 Siqterlaiives 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns . 
 
 Rdative Pronouns 
 
 Ind^nite Pronmnis; qnelqne, chaqne,' qnelqn'mi, ohftcnn . 
 personne, rien, aucnn, nul 
 
 tout, meme, tel 
 
 Tun Tantre, certain, plnaimura, autrui 
 
 quiconque, quelconqne, qnelqne, qni que ce soil, rtr 
 
 On the tise cf en and y . 
 Conversations 
 
 SECOND PART. 
 Elements of French Grammar. 
 
 The Alphabet .89 
 
 The Paris cf Speech .90 
 
 The Article . 90 
 
— VII — 
 
 Page 
 
 The Noun 90 
 
 Numbers 90 
 
 Formation of the Plural 90 
 
 Genders 92 
 
 Cases 94 
 
 The Declension of Nouns 94 
 
 Use of the Articles 96 
 
 The Adjective 98 
 
 The Plural of Adjectives 98 
 
 The Feminine of Adjectives 98 
 
 Agreement 100 
 
 Comparison 100 
 
 The Place of Adjectives 101 
 
 The Government of Adjectives 102 
 
 Numerals 103 
 
 Cardinals 103 
 
 Ordinals ^. 104 
 
 Pronouns 105 
 
 Personal Pronouns 105 
 
 Declension of the Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 106 
 
 Declension of the Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. 106 
 
 Pronouns used with reference to Animals and Things 106 
 
 Compound Personals 107 
 
 Use of the Personal Pronouns 107 
 
 Place of the Personal Pronouns 109 
 
 Possessive Pronouns 110 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns Ill 
 
 Relative Pronouns 112 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns 113 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns 114 
 
 The Verb ..,.. 117 
 
 Classes 117 
 
 Modifications 117 
 
 Conjugation 118 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs 118 
 
 Formation of Tenses 122 
 
 Megular Verbs 123 
 
 First Conjugation 123 
 
 Second Conjugation 124 
 
 Fourth Conjugation 126 
 
 Notes to the Conjugations 127 
 
 Forms of Conjugation 128 
 
 The Passive Verb 130 
 
 The Reflective Verb 131 
 
 Impersonal Verbs ,...,., 133 
 
— vm — 
 
 tht Verb, 
 
 Irregular Verbi. ......... 
 
 F^rst (bnjugcUion .... 
 
 Secoml Conjngaiion. 
 
 Tfiinl (hnjwjat'iun. . 
 
 Fourth Conjugation, . 
 
 Agreement of the Verb 
 
 Oovernment of Verbs 
 
 Uses of the Moods (wtl Tnutts 
 
 Indicative 
 
 (hmlitiomil 
 
 Imperative 
 
 S*fhjfnirfirr 
 
 J'artuijMts . 
 
 Adverbs 
 
 Prepositions. . 
 
 Conjunct ions . . 
 
 Interjections . . 
 
 Index of Subject^f . . 
 
 Page 
 135 
 135 
 135 
 136 
 138 
 140 
 140 
 142 
 142 
 144 
 144 
 144 
 146 
 148 
 149 
 152 
 153 
 154 
 155 
 
 1. Frnirlt and Emjlo 
 'I Kti'ilish antl FVcn < 
 
 THIRD PART. 
 
 Vocabularies. 
 
 163 
 
 183 
 
First Part, 
 FRENCH AND ENGLISH EXERCISES. 
 
 >• the news 
 
 1, Indicative Mood, Preterit Tense, 
 
 j'eus, I had je fus, I was 
 
 tu eus, thou hadst tu fus, thou wast 
 
 il eut, he had il fut, he was 
 
 nous euiiies, we had nous fumes, we were 
 
 vous eutes, you had vous ftites, you were 
 
 lis eurent, they had lis furent, they were 
 
 Compound Tenses, 
 j'eus eu, I had had j'eus ete, I had been 
 
 rencontrer, to meet obtenir, to obtain, get 
 
 accompagneFj to accompany la nouvelle, 
 
 passe, passee, past, last les nouvelles, 
 
 inconsolable, inconsolable - Tarrivee (f,), the arrival 
 
 la satisfaction, the satisfaction aussitot que, as soon as 
 
 \2ihont6, the M7idness, goodness oblige, obligee, obliged 
 partir, to go away, depart^ set out, start 
 
 Georges Washington fut un grand general. J'eus hier le 
 plaisir de rencontrer Mr. Belmont; il eut la bonte de m'accom- 
 pagner au theatre. L'annee pass^e nous eumes le malheur de 
 perdre notre pere. Ma m^re en fut inconsolable, mais elle eut 
 la satisfaction d'avoir des enfants bien eleves. Mes freres eu- 
 rent le bonheur d'obtenir de bonnes places. Nous fumes tres- 
 contents lorsque nous eumes la nouvelle de I'arrivee de notre 
 oncle. Aussitot que le me'decin eut et^ chez notre tante, elle 
 fut mieux." Aussitot que nous eumes eu la visite de notre p^re, 
 nous ftimes obliges de partir. 
 
— 2 — 
 
 apr^s que, after 
 le service, the sei^vice 
 rendre service, to do ft ser- 
 vice 
 
 Tavantage (mj, the advantage 
 a i>eine — que, scarcely — when 
 recouvrer, to rexiover 
 la saut(^, the health 
 diner, to dine 
 
 Where were .you yesteniay? We woi:e at the theatri', and 
 our sisters were at tiie concert. AfYei' ihy friends had had the 
 pleasure of seeing their parents, they were obliged to start. 
 We had last week the advantage of dining at Mr. Boisuiard's. 
 We were very pleased to sec our uncle. Had you the kindness 
 to lend nie this book? You had the kindness to do nie this 
 service. How is your father? He had scarcely been three 
 months in the country when he had recovered his health. We 
 had a visit from your :^""» ^^^sterdav. 
 
 3. 
 
 je parlal, / spokr 
 
 tu piirlas, thou spokest 
 
 il paiia, he spoke 
 
 nous parldnies, we spoke 
 
 vous parldtes, you ffpoke 
 
 ils parlerent, they spoke 
 
 IndioftiiTe Mood, Preterit TenM. 
 
 je rtnin, / Jinished 
 
 tu finis, thou Jinishedst 
 
 il fmit, he finished 
 
 nous fiiiiiiies. ire finished 
 
 vous tinites, you finished 
 
 ils linireHt, they finished 
 
 je vendis, I so^ 
 
 tu vendin, tho^i sniihst 
 
 il vend it, lie sitbl 
 
 nous vendimes, tve sold 
 
 vous vendites, you sold 
 
 ils vendirent, tJiey sold 
 
 pour, to, in order to 
 \ la bourse, the purse 
 renfernier, to contain 
 plusieurs, several, many 
 raconter, to telly relate 
 Thistoire (/.j, the story 
 celui-la. the former 
 
 intdressant, -ante, interesting 
 
 la piece, the piece 
 
 en detail, retail 
 
 en gros, wholesale 
 
 la question, the quei^tion 
 
 le maitre, the teacher 
 
 celui-ci, the latter 
 
— 3 — 
 
 Hier je parlai a voire cousin; il me raconta une histoire 
 tres-interessante. Mon ami vendit hier son jardin. II pari a au 
 marchand, et celui-ci lui donna de I'argent. Nous trouvames 
 hier un petit chien. Les enfants furent punis. J'ai 6t6 a 
 Vienne pour y voir mon frdre Francois. Charles trouva une 
 bourse qui renfermait plusieurs pieces d'or. Montrez-moi, s'il 
 vous plait, le canif que vous avez trouve. Nous obeissons 
 avec piaisir a nos parents, et nous remplissons volontiers nos 
 devoirs. Nous ne vendons pas ces rubans en detail, mais en gros, 
 Les ecoliers repondront aux questions de leurs maitres. 
 
 4. 
 
 des que, as soon as, lulien inviter a diner, to invite to 
 
 sonner, to strike^ ring vers, toivards [dinner 
 
 quitter, to leave nombreux, -euse, numerous 
 
 arriver, to arrive <■ ' lasociete, the society , company 
 
 11 y a, ago 
 
 il y a un mois, a month ago 
 
 Yesterday I sold my dog. Last week our uncle sold his 
 house. Three months, ago this poor woman lost her daughter. 
 As soon as it struck four (hours), we set out for Brussels. We 
 left the city towards (the) evening, and we arrived in the country 
 towards eight o'clock. Julius and Henry accompanied us. 
 My sisters will arrive this evening. Mr. Renaud has Invited 
 me to dinner; I think that I shall find a numerous company 
 there. Last year we lost three hundred francs. 
 
 aie, have (thou) 
 ayons, let us have 
 ayez, have (you) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 sois, de (thou) 
 soyons, let us de 
 soyez, be (you) 
 
 la pitie, pity 
 le sort, the lot 
 juste, justj right 
 reconnaissant, -ante, grateful 
 le bienfaiteur, the benefactor 
 
 est-ce que ton frere parle? 
 qu'est-ce que vous avez la? 
 
 I'indulgence (f), forbearance 
 
 autrui, others 
 
 I'indigence (f), need, poverty 
 
 avoir peur, to fear 
 
 le commerce, the intercourse 
 
 does thy brother speak? 
 what have you there? 
 
Aio piti^ des malhenreux. Sois content do ton sort, et tu 
 8cras heureux. Sois reconnaissant envers tea bienfaiteurs. 
 Ayons patience en tout. Soyons justes envers tout le monde. 
 Ayez (le I'indulgence pour les ddfauts d'autrui. Soyons labo- 
 rieux, et nous ne serons jamais dans I'indigence. N'ayez-pas 
 IKJur, mes enfants. N'ayons point <le commerce avec les me- 
 chants. Est-ce que voire socur a ro<;u de jolis cadeaux? 
 Qu'est-ce que vous donnerez k ce pauvre homme? Es^cc que 
 mou th>re vous a raconte cette int^ressante histoire? Est-ce que 
 votre soeur est malade'r Non, niadame, elle se porte tr6s-bien. 
 
 6. gagner, to gain^ make age, ag^e, oldj aged 
 
 les riclu^sses (/J, riches la vertu, (the) virhie 
 
 poll, p<ilie, polite la science, (the) knowledge 
 
 avoir des t*^anls, to have IMoucear, (the) gentleness 
 
 consideration rendre, to make 
 
 la persoiine, the person vraimeiit, really 
 
 Be modest, and yorfwill have friends. Be active, and you 
 will make riches. Be polite towards everybody. Have con- 
 sideration lor aged persons. Virtue, knowledge, and gentleness 
 will make us really amiable. Have the kindness to lend me 
 your book. Do not fear, my friends. Do not be ungrateful to 
 him. Uave the goodness to do me this service. Are you 
 talking to my brother ? Were you at the theatre yesterday ? 
 
 7. Imperative. 
 
 parle, ap^akWhOu) finis, ^finish (thou) vends, s}^ (thou) 
 parloiis, letusspeak finissons, letusjinish vc^dolas, fe^w^^W 
 parlez, speak (you) iiiilssez, finish (yoibJT vendie^ sell (you) 
 regarder, to look at tarder, to loiter 
 
 V ony nev (m.)jtlieivorkman plus haut, louder 
 le toit, tJie roof I'apr^s-midi (/.), the afternoon 
 
 possible, possible sans faute, without fail 
 
 honorer, to lionor le gateau, the cake 
 
 ordonner, to order m^riter, to deserve 
 
 Regardez cet ouvrier qui est sur le toit de notre maison. 
 Finissez, mon ami. Rendez-moi Targent que je vous ai pr^te. 
 
Aimez vos parents. Ne blamez pas vos amis. R-epondez-moi 
 aussitot que possible. Honore ton pere et ta mere, et tu seras 
 honore. Parlez plus haut. Obeissez a votre maitre. Je 
 lui obeis toujours. Avez-vous porte mes bottes an cordonnier ? 
 Fortez-les lui sans faute cette apres-midi. Donnez du gateau 
 a ces enfants. Ne louez pas ce gargon; 11 ne le merite pas. 
 Henri, je vous ai ordonne de m'apporter mon chapeau et ma 
 canne; pourquoi tardez-vous tant? Quelle heure est-il ? Re- 
 gardez a votre montre. II est neuf heures et demie. 
 
 S, garder, to keep faire, to do^ make 
 
 attentif, attentive, attentive cependant, yet 
 
 agir, to actj behave oisif, oisive, idle 
 
 ainsi, thus prudent, prudente, prudent 
 
 Keep the book which I have given you. Do not punisli 
 these scholars; thej are attentive. Are you hungry, my chil- 
 dren ? Eat a piece of bread. Do not lose patience. Finish 
 as soon as possible, gentlemen. You will lose all your Mends, 
 if you act thus. We have many friends; we are happy. You 
 have much to do, and yet you are idle. This misfortune would 
 not have (be) happened to you, if you had been more prudent. 
 Be good, my children. Be honest and just. 
 
 9. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. 
 
 que j'aie, that I may have que je sois, that I may be 
 
 que tu aies, that thou &e. que tu sois, that tliou &g. 
 
 qu'il ait, that he dbc, qu'il soit, that he &c. 
 
 que nous ayons, that we &c, que nous soyons, that we &c, 
 
 que vous ayez, that you (he. que vous soyez, that you dc, 
 
 qu'ils aient, that they &c. qu'ils soient, that they Sc. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. Preterit Tense, 
 
 que j'eusse, that I might have que je fusse, that I might be 
 
 que tu eusses, that thou Sc, que tu fusses, that thou &c, 
 
 qu'il eiit, that he Sc. qu'il fiit, that he &g. 
 
 que nous eussions, that ive Sc, que nous fussions, that we Sc, 
 
 que vous eussiez, that you &c, que vous fussiez, that you <&c, 
 
 qu'ils eussent, that they So, qu'ils fussent, that they dbc. 
 
— 6 ~ 
 
 Sabjonctive Mood. Compoond TensM. 
 que j'aie eu, that I inay fiave had 
 que j'aie ^t<^, that I may have been 
 que j'cusse cu, that 1 might have had 
 que j'eusse ^t^, thcU I might Jiave been 
 il taut, it is necessary vous croyez, you think 
 
 il semble, it seems [comes entendu, heard^ understood 
 
 il convient, it is proper y it be- les gens, (m, df.) people 
 jc xondrmSj I (should) tcishjlike alin que, ) in order t fiat 
 il serait a souhaiter, it tvoiUd be pour que, ( so that 
 desirable quoique, although 
 
 il faut que j*aie de Targent, / must have some money 
 (it is necessary that I may have some money) 
 
 The ConjnnctionH afiii que, pour que, in tn'drr to, quoique, 
 although^ are foUowed by thu Sabjanciiye Mood. 
 
 II faut que nous ajons de Targent aujourd'hui. Parlez plus 
 haut,afin quo vou8 soyez entendus. II est juste que les cnfahts 
 soient reconnaissant.s en vers Icurs parents. II semblc que Sophie 
 u'ait pas 6t6 a Tdcole. II convient que les jeunes gens soient 
 modestes. Quoique vous soyez pauvres, vous ^tes honn^tes. 
 Je voudrais que tu n'eusses pas tant d'amiti(^ pour les cnfants 
 de notre voisin. II serait a souhaiter que tons les homraes fus- 
 sent justes. Yous ne croyez pas que mon Mre ait tort. Faites 
 votre devoir, pour que vous ne soyez pas punis. 
 
 10. jamais, ever la reputation, tJie reputation 
 
 la eonipagnie, the company mauvais, mauvaise, bad 
 
 The ^CJonj unction que, f/i«f, should never be omitted in French. 
 
 Is it possible that a bad man is (be) ever happy? My brother 
 must have a book. I must have some paper, a pen, and some 
 ink. Do you believe my brother is (be) in the garden? It 
 become3 you to be (that you may be) contented with your 
 lot: you have deserved it. I wish you were in my place. It 
 is good that you are {he) here. My father wishes that I ^ere 
 not so often in the company of that young man; he has 
 a bad reputation. We had the pleasure of finding what we 
 were looking for. ^^ 
 
— 7 — 
 
 XX^ Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. Preterit Tense. 
 
 que je parle, that I may speak que je parlasse, that I might sp. 
 
 que tu paries, that thou Sc. que tu parlasses, that thou Sc. 
 
 qu'il parle, that he &c. qu'il parlat, that he &c, 
 
 que nous parlions, that we dec. que nous parlassioiis, that &c. 
 
 que vous parliez, that you Sc. que vous parlassiez, that &c. 
 
 qu'ils parleiit, that they d;c, qu'ils parlassent, that they So, 
 
 q\iQie^nis^e,t7iat I may finish que je finisse, that I might f. 
 
 que tu finisses, that thou dbc. que tu finisses, that thou &c, 
 
 qu'il finisse, that he &c, qu'il finit, that he &c. 
 
 que nous llnisslons, that we Sc. que nous iinissions, that ive &c. 
 
 que vous finlssiez, that you (&c, que vous finissiez, that you &c, 
 
 qu'ils finissent, that they Sc, qu'ils finissent, that they &e. 
 
 queje vende, that I may sell queje vendisse, that I might s. 
 
 que tu vendes, that thou Sc, que tu vendisses, that thou dbc. 
 
 qu'il vende, that he &c. qu'il vendit, that he &c. 
 
 que nous vendions, that we &c. que nous vendissions,^/ia^ <^c. 
 
 que vous vendiez, that you Sc, que vous vendissiez, that Sc. 
 
 qu'ils vendenty that they dbc. qu'ils vendisseiit, tJiat they (bo. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. Compound Tenses. 
 
 que j'aie parle, that I may have spoken 
 que j'aie fini, that I may have finished 
 que j'aie vendu, that I ma;y have sold 
 
 que j'eusse parle, that I might have spoken 
 que j'eusse fini, that I might have finished 
 que j'eusse vendu, that I might have sold 
 
 rester, to remain^ stay longtemps, a long timej long 
 
 rentrer, to come in again la carafe, the decanter 
 
 a la raaison, at home vide, empty 
 
 Taction (f.), action, deed, share marcher, to loalkj march 
 la promenade^j the ivalk, promenade 
 
— 8 — 
 
 Restez k la maison,afin que nous vous trouvions^quand nous 
 rentrerous. D^sirez-vous qu<> je vous accompagne a la pro- 
 menade ? Je ne crois pa.s que votre ami ait fait cette mau vaise 
 action. Ces messieurs souhaitent que nous les rencontrions au 
 tht^atre. Croyez-vous que votre frt^rc reste lougtemps a Paris? 
 Jean, il faut que tu remplisses la carafe; die est vide. II faut 
 que je r^ponde a la lettro de ma cousine. Notre m^ecin 
 d^sirait que nous marchassions deux heures. Vous d^iriez que 
 je vous vendisse ma maison. Nous ddsirons que vous parliez 
 toujours fran(;ais. Nous avons dt^ quinze jours a la campagnCi 
 cl nos amis (U'sirent que nous y iT'tournions. 
 
 1^. rt'ussir, to succeed l'enirepri:5L' (J.J, ihc undertalcing 
 
 We must give these chihlron some bread. I wish (that) 
 you may be well. Your mother desires that you (may) i*emain 
 always here. T (should) wish (that) you would (might) always 
 act well. It would Ix^ desirable that our friends auftVEeped 
 (might answer) our letter. You must finish your exercise 
 to-day. It is proper that you (may) obc} your master. Your 
 mother desires that you may Succeed in all your undertakings. 
 I (should) wish (that) your brothers would (might) sell their 
 dogs and their horses. Your sisters are happy, although they 
 are (be) poor. I desire that you always (may) speak English, 
 
 IS. proposer, to propose venir, to come 
 
 prier, to beg, ask louer, to let 
 
 quelquc, somey any ^rire, to torite 
 
 le neveu, t?ie nephetv 
 
 Mon oncle m'a proniis de me donner un livre. Mon cousin 
 est arrived. Nous lui avons propose de faire une promenade 
 avec nous. Mon neveu m'a prie de lui prater mon cheval pour 
 quelques jours. Je suis oblige de partir demain. Ayez la 
 bonte de me prater ce livre. Faites-moi le plaisir de venir chez 
 moi. Ma tante m'a invito a diner. Mon voisin a un cheval 
 a vendre. Cette maison est a louer. Combien de lettres avez- 
 vous a ecrire ? Cela est tr^s-difficile a faire. Ton p^re a raisen 
 de parler ainsi; tu n'es pas toujours attentif. 
 
— 9 — 
 
 iJ. la harpe, the harp enseigner, to teach 
 
 garni, garniej furnished I'affaire (/J, the affair 
 
 Your brother has adviaad me to wait (still) some--time4onger 
 (some time). Where is thy brother^ My mother has ordered 
 fe^ft- to stay at home. My friend has had the misfortune to lose 
 his father. Mr. Bigot teaches m» to play the harp. I do not 
 like to speak of that affair. My uncle has a fine horse to sell. 
 Furnished rdoms to let. My son has still several letters to 
 write. We have had the pleasure of meeting your uncle at the 
 bookseller'^ These fish are not good to eat. 
 
 IS* " Participles. 
 
 ayant, having eu, Jiad etant, heing ^te, heen 
 parlant, speaking finissant, finishing vendant, selling 
 parle, spoken fini, finished vendu, sold 
 
 j'ai cueilli des fleurs / have gathered some floivers 
 
 les fleurs que j'ai cueillies, the flowers ivhich I have gath- 
 sont belles ered, are beautiful 
 
 tailler, to cut, mend (of a pen) traduit, traduite, translated 
 dieter, to dictate la figure, the figure^ face 
 
 dessiner^ to draw en, ^/^, on, hy 
 
 En rentrant chez moi j'ai trouve votre frere. Nous avons 
 rencontre vos cousines en nous promenant. En agissant ainsi 
 vous serez blame. J'ai vu un homme qui vendait des cerises 
 a une petite fiUe. Yotre frere a-t-il rempli la bouteille ? Oui, 
 madame, il I'a remplie. Les fleurs que j'ai trouv^es, sont tres- 
 belles. Avez-vous taille ma plume ? Non, je ne I'ai pas encore 
 taill^e. Avez-vous vendu votre maison ? Oui, je I'ai vendue. 
 Yoici la lettre que vous m'avez dictde. Les themes que nous 
 avons traduits, sont tres-faciles. La figure que mon frere a 
 dessin^e, est belle. 
 
 16. entrer (dans), to come go in (to) la poste, the post-office 
 
 Being in the country, I met your uncle. Where is my 
 brother? He is in the garden, I spoke to him on coming into the 
 house. Have you gathered any flowers, my children? Yes, 
 
— 10 — 
 
 madam, the fbwers which we have gathered, are very beautl- 
 ftil. The books which I have bought, are very iuterestiug. 
 Have you sold your horses ? Yes, Sir, I have sold them. Have 
 you finished your exercises? No, Sir, I have not yet finished 
 theni. John, have you taken (carried) my letters to the post- 
 otlice? Yes, Sir, I took (have carricil') them thoiv an hoiir ago. 
 
 J 7, <lire, to say, tell 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Pret. je dis, I say, am saying nous disons, we say 
 
 tu dis, tfiou sayest (or sayst) youa dit es, ymi say 
 il dit, he says ils disent, they say 
 
 Imperf. je disais, / was saying 
 Pwt. je dis, / said 
 Fui je dirai, / shaU say 
 Conl je dirais, / should say 
 
 SabjonotiTe Mood. 
 
 Pm. que je dise, thai I may say 
 Pwi que je disse, thai I might say 
 
 PartioiplM. 
 
 Proi. disant, saying 
 Put. dit, said 
 
 quelque chose, something la v^rit^, the truth 
 
 la fois, the time Ton sait, one knows 
 
 le lit, the bed fach^, fach^, angry, sorry 
 
 Foreille (f.), the ear mentir, to lie 
 
 dire a Toreille, to whisper to regretter, to regret 
 
 J'ai quelque chose a vous dire. Qu'avez-vous a me dire ? 
 Je ne vous dis rien. Dites-le-moi, s'il vous plait. Je vous le 
 dirai une autre fois. Yous ne direz pas a mon fr^re ce que je 
 vous ai r^pondu. Ne lui dites pas que je suis encore au lit. 
 Que vous a-t-il dit? Ne vous Tai-je pas dit? Yous ne me I'avez 
 pas encore dit. II ne faut pas dire tout ce que Ton sait. II me 
 
— li- 
 ra dit a Toreille. Qu'est-ce qu'il vous a dit? Nous vous disons 
 la verite. Je suis fache de I'avoir dit. Qu'en dites-vous? Si 
 je disais autrement, je mentirais. J'ai dit hier a mon cousin de 
 venir me voir. II disait souvent qu'il regrettait la mort de son 
 ami. Le temps, e'est de I'argent, dit Franklin. 
 
 18. la guerre, the war plus tot, sooner 
 
 What do you say of my garden? My brother told me that 
 you were here. Bid I tell you to bring this book ? What do 
 they say in town of the war ? My father told me yesterday 
 that you would sell your house. I will say no (nothing) more 
 toJiim. Tell me is there any fault in your exercise ? I have 
 already told you (it) this morning. All that you say is false. 
 Did you say that I Avas there? Who told you so (it) ? Nobody. 
 I think (that) he has said everything. If I had told it sooner, 
 he would have been angry. What has my mother told you? 
 
 19 ^ ^crire, to tvrite 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Pros, j'ecris, I write 
 
 tu ecris, thou writest 
 
 11 ^crit, he writes 
 
 nous ^crivons, we write 
 
 vous ecrivez, you write 
 
 ils ecrivent, they write 
 Imp. j'^crivais, / loas writing 
 Prei j'ecrivis, I wrote 
 Fnt. y6QviY2i\j I shall ivrite 
 . Cond. j'ecrirais, I should write 
 
 Subjunotive Mood. 
 
 Pre8.)^que j'^crive, that I may write 
 Pret. que j'^crivisse, that I might write 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. ^crivant, writing 
 Past, ecritj written 
 
\ _ 12 — 
 
 le loisir, (tfie) leisu/re je reconnais, I recognize 
 
 au long, at length T^riture (f,),the (?iand)toriting 
 
 n^cessaire, necessary encore unc fois, once more 
 
 lentement, slowly mal, badly 
 
 J'dcris une lettre k mon ft-^re; mais vous ne lui ^crivez pas. 
 Ne lui derit-il paH? Non, mais sa sceur lui 6cr\t. J'^rirai a 
 mon p^re aussit6t que j*en aurai le loisir. J't^rivis hier a mon 
 oncle. As-tu ^rit aujourd*hui a ton oncle ? Je lui ai ^rit ce 
 matin. p]crivez-lui cela. Je le lui ai d^ja ^rit. Si j'avais une 
 bonne plume, j'ecrirais aussi. Lorsque j' aurai plus de loisir, je 
 vous dcrirai plus au long. Quand lui dcrirez-vous ? II n'est 
 pas ndcessaire dc lui derire. Vous ^rivez trop vite; ^rivez 
 plus lentement. Montrez-moi ce que vous avez ^rit 11 faut 
 que vous ^crivioz cela encore une fois. Je reconnais ton ^ri- 
 ture. Votrc IrAro (^(Tit trt^s-nial. 
 
 30. MiniiHiiij 'f/fiitmy \c biWvi J Uir note 
 
 My mother has written to me. My friends will certainly 
 write to me. I wrote to him a year ago. You write better 
 than your brother. I have written to him to buy some books 
 fur me. What has he written to yon ? Are you writing to 
 your father ? I would have written to him sooner, if I had not 
 thought he li^d (that he might be) set out for Washington. 
 Wliat are you writing ? Wliat have you written to him ? Will 
 you not write (arc you not wTiting) to him to-day? Who has 
 written this note ? I think that my brother has written it; I 
 recognize his handwriting. 
 
 2 In lire, to read 
 
 Indioative Mood. 
 Pres. je lis, / read nous lisons, we read 
 
 tu lis, thou readest vous lisez, you read 
 11 lit, he reads ils lisent, tliey read 
 
 Imp. je lisais, / was reading 
 Piet. je lus, I read 
 Fui je lirai, / shall read 
 Cond. je lirais, 1 shxruld read 
 
— 13 — 
 
 Subjanotive Mood. 
 Pres. que je lise, that I may read 
 Pret. que je lusse, that I might read 
 
 Participles. 
 Pros, lisant, reading 
 Past, lu, read 
 
 le journal, the (neivs)paper la lecture, reading 
 
 la gazette, the gazette le coeur, the heart 
 
 done, then I'esprit fm. j, the mind 
 
 voulez-vous? do you wish? negliger, to neglect 
 
 retenez, keep, remember le gout, taste 
 
 presque pas, scarcely former, to form, improve 
 
 Que lisez-vous la ? Je lis le journal d'aujourd'hui. Nous le 
 lisons aussi. Mon pere le lisait autrefois, mais a present il ne 
 le lit plus. J'ai lu aujourd'hui la gazette de Baltimore. Mon 
 pere lut hier celle dlllinois. Je lirai bientot un beau livre 
 qu'on m'a pr6te. Nous lirions plus souvent, si nous avions 
 plus de temps. Yous aimez done beaucoup la lecture ? Youlez- 
 vous que je vous lise cette lettre ? Yous ne lisez pas bien. 
 Comment faut-il lire ce mot-ci ? Retenez bien ce que vous avez 
 lu. Mes enfants ne liaent presque pas; ils ont pen de gout pour 
 la lecture. Je leur dis souvent qu'ils ont tort de negliger la 
 lecture, qui forme le coeur et I'esprit. 
 
 22. allemand, -de, German aussi bien que, as well as 
 frangais, -se, French le garcjon, the boy, waiter 
 
 What books do you read ? We read German books; but 
 you are always reading French books. My brother never 
 reads. My sisters used to read (Imp.) every day to my uncle. 
 We used formerly to read much more. Have you already 
 read to-day's paper ? We have not yet read it, but I think that 
 my father has (read it). Will you read your uncle's letter to me ? 
 I would read it willingly, if I had it with (sur) me. Do you wish 
 me to read (that I may read) this letter to you ? That boy 
 has not read this morning. He must read this afternoon. Your 
 brother reads as well as you. 
 
- 14 — 
 
 ^« mettre, th patf place, ptU on 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Prei. je raets, Iput^ I am putting 
 
 tu mets, thou puttest 
 
 il met, he puts 
 
 nous mettons, we put 
 
 V0U8 mcttcz, you put 
 
 lis mottent, tltey put 
 Imp. jo inettais, /if7cwpi/W/7if7 
 Pret. je mis, / put 
 Put. je inettrai, / shall put 
 Oond. je mettrais. f shotihl pftt 
 
 SnbjoneiiTt Mood. 
 Pros, (lue je mette, that I may put 
 Pret. (lue je misse, that I might p^tl 
 
 Puiieiplot. 
 Pwi. mettant, putting 
 PmI mis, put 
 
 en ordre, in order a part, apart, aside 
 
 le pantalon, the trowsers la m^moire, the memory 
 
 Je linge, t?ie linen la gloirc, Uu^^ glory 
 
 86 mettre a table, to sit doum commettre, to commit 
 
 to table rAm^ricain (m,)j the American 
 
 Mettez cette chaisr a >ii place. Je mets mes livres en ordre. 
 Je les mets en ordre. Je mettrai aujourd'hui un autre habit. 
 Oil avcz-vous mis mon chapeau ? Si je mettais d'autres bas, je 
 mettrais aussi d'autres souliers, Je mis hier mon livre sur la 
 table. J*ai mis ce matin mon habit dans le coflfre; il faut que 
 j*y mette aussi mon pantalon. Ou voulez-vous que je mette 
 votre linge ? Croyez-vous que je Taie mis sur le lit ? Mettons- 
 nous a table. Tout est mis en ordre. Je mettrai ceci a part. 
 La m^moire de Washington sera toujonrs ch^re aux Am^ri- 
 cains, parce qu'il mettait sa gloire a les rendre heureux. Voua 
 avez commis en cela une grande faute. 
 
— 15 — 
 
 24, permettre, to permit remettre, to remit, hand over 
 prornettre, to promise Foccasion f/J, the opportunity 
 
 Where have you put my books ? Put this letter on my 
 father's table. I will put your coat in this room. Which coat 
 will you put on to-day? If the weather be (is) fine^ I will put 
 on my white coat. I put your money yesterday on this table; 
 have you found it-? My cousin seldom puts on these stockings. 
 Permit me to (of) come in. Is it permitted to go away ? You 
 have promised to come (and) see me. The weather did not 
 permit me to leave my room yesterday. I promised you to 
 hand him over your letter. Why have you not yet handed it 
 over to him ? I have not yet had the opportunity to remit it to 
 him; I will remit it to him to-morrow. 
 
 2S* prendre, to take, catch 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je prends, / take nous prenons, we take 
 
 tu prendSj thou takest vous prenez, you take 
 il prend, he takes ils prennent, they take 
 
 Imp. je prenais^ / luas taking 
 Pret. je pris, I took 
 Put. je prendrai, I shall take 
 Cond. je prendrais, I should take 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je prenne, that I may take 
 Pret. que je prisse, that I might take 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. prenant, taking 
 Past, pris, taken 
 
 la moitie, the half danser, to dance 
 
 le reste, the remainder comprendre, to comprehend, 
 
 encore un, ane, another understand 
 
 remercier, to thank Thieve, (m. & f.) the pupil 
 
 le bras, the arm la r^gle, the rule 
 
 apprendre, to learn, hear le sot^, la sotte, the fool 
 
— 16 - 
 
 Prenez un morceau de pain; je prends ceci pour moi. Com- 
 bien en prenez- vous? Nous en prenons la inoiti^. Mes IV^reH 
 prenneut le reste. Voulez-vous prendre ma place? Je pri.s 
 hier cet oiseau dans notre jardin. Prenez encore une tasse dr 
 caf(^. Je vous remercie; j'en ai d^ja pris deux lasses. Je n'ai 
 encore rien pris. Je prendrai une tasse de chocolat. Que 
 voulez-vous que je prcnnc? Prenez cet enfant par la main. 
 La servante le prendra sur son bras. Apprenez-vous a danser? 
 Mes fr^res apprennent le fhtnqais. J'ai appris que monsieur 
 Horton est arrivd. Comprenez-vous cela? Je ne vous c(mii- 
 prends pas. J'esp^re que tons mes ^l^ves ont compris c«ite 
 r^gle. Pour qui me prenez-vous? Vous me prenez pour un sot 
 
 26» la lecjon, the lesson expllquer, to explain 
 
 Have you learnt to sing? Do you learn to sing? We are 
 learning to danfte. Your brother is always taking my pen. 
 Why do you not also take his ? We never take the pens of our 
 friends. Do you take a cup of tea ? I thank you, I will take 
 a cup of milk. Have you learnt your lesson ? I have not yet 
 leirnt it; I will learn it this evening. Have you h^ard that 
 your brother has departed for Philadelphia? I understand very 
 well what you are explaining to me. Where did you catch 
 (have you caught) that bird? 
 
 jgy, faire, to niake^ do^ cause 
 
 Indioatiya Mo«d. 
 
 Prei. je fais, / viakCj I am making 
 tu fais, thou mxikest 
 11 fait, he makes 
 nous faisons, toe make 
 vous faites, you make 
 ils font, th£y make 
 
 Imp. je faisais, / was making 
 
 Pret. je fis, I m^de 
 
 Put. je ferai, / shall make 
 
 Oond. je ferais, I should make 
 
11 
 
 * Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Pres. que je fasse^ that I may make 
 Pret. que je fisse, that I might make 
 
 - Participles. 
 
 Pres. faisant, making 
 Past, fait, made 
 
 ne falre que, to do nothing but faire le tour, to walk round 
 
 faire voir, to show, let see non plus, either 
 
 faire batir, to get built allumer, to light 
 
 faire venir, to send for le paysage, the landscape 
 
 Tin et un font deux. Que faites-vous ? Je fais ce que vous 
 m'avez ordonnd. Nous faisons notre devoir. Ces gardens 
 ne font rien. Pourquoi ne font-ils rien? Faroe que vous ne 
 faites rien non plus. Et ces filles, n'ont-elles rien a faire? 
 Ma soeur ne sait que faire. Que faisiez-vous lorsque je suis 
 entre ? J'allumais le feu. Je fis hier le tour de la ville. La 
 servante fera le lit tout a I'heure. Que ferez-vous ce soir ? Je 
 ferai ce soir ce que vous lites liier. Faisons toujours notre de- 
 voir. Ne faites de mal a personne. Si j'etais aussi riche que 
 vous, je ferais batir une belle maison. ^otre frere ne fait que 
 pleurer. 'Ces enfants ne font que jouer et manger. Faites-moi 
 voir ce paysage. Je suis malade, je ferai venir le medecin. 
 
 28. le compliment, tJie compliment frapper, to strike, beat 
 
 What has ttie child done ? Why do you strike him? Have 
 you done what I (have) ordered you ? I think that my unclp 
 will do it. po what you have been ordered (what o»€ has 
 ordered to ybu). We do everything that our teacher orders 
 us (of) to do. We will take (make) a walk this aftern6on. Do 
 you wish me to do (that I may do) my exercise? Give (make) 
 my compUments to your father. What was your brother doing 
 when that (is) happened? Do your duty, in order that you 
 may not be punished. My tailor has,, ipade nie a very pretty 
 coat. This shoemaker does not mak6 good shoes. 
 
— 18 — 
 
 29. connaltre, to know * 
 
 Indioaiiye Mood. 
 Proi. je connais, / know 
 
 tu connais, thou knowest 
 il connait, lie knows 
 nous connaissons, we know 
 vous connaissez, you know 
 -^Is connaissent, Oiey know 
 lap. je connaissais, / was knowing 
 Pwi je connus, / knew 
 Fiii jc connaitrai, / shall know 
 Oond. je connait rais, / should know 
 
 SnbjanoUye Mood. 
 Pwi. que je connaisse, that I may know 
 Prot. que je connusse, that I might know 
 
 P&riioiplo. 
 Pnt. connaissant, knowing 
 Piii connu, knoton 
 
 beaucoup de monde, many people le piano, ihr pifuin 
 on voudrait, one (they) would wish Thonneur fw J, the Itonor 
 la connaissance, tfie acquaintance la voix, the voice 
 recdhnaitre, to recognize 
 
 Connaissez-vous cette dame-ci, ou celle-la? A present je 
 vous connais. . Me connaissez-vous aussi ? Je ne connais per- 
 sonne ici. vofre fr^re me connait trds-bien. Nous connaissons 
 beaucoup de monde ici. J'ai reconnu votre cousin a la voix. 
 J'ai bien connu votre oncle. Si je connaissais votre m^re, je 
 lui parlerais. Mon fr^re ne vous reconnaitra plus. Demandez- 
 lui s'il me connait encore. On voudrait que je fisse la connais- 
 sance de mademoiselle Armand, parce qu'elle joue bien du 
 piano. II faut faire sa connaissance. Je vous ai vu avec une 
 de vos connaissances que je n'ai pas I'honneur de connaitre. 
 
 30. ne . . aucun, aucune, not any plus de monde, morepe/)ple 
 la moiti^ de la ville, half tlie toion sortir, to go out 
 
 These children know everybody. I know this man, I hav^ 
 often seen him at my uncle's. Do you know these ladif.^^ gjgo? 
 
— 19 — 
 
 I do not know any of them. We have known you for (we know 
 you since) a long tinve. ]\fy friend does not recognize me. 
 Does he lio longer know ySu? He will know you very well. 
 We should know more people, if we went out oftener; in Brigh- 
 ton we knew half the town, here we know only one family. I 
 should not know him if he were (was) not with his father. 
 
 31. croire, to believe, think, he of opinion 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je crois, / believe nous croyons, we believe 
 
 tu crois, thou believest vous croyez, you believe 
 11 croit, he believes ils croient, they believe 
 
 Imp. je croyais, I was believing 
 Pret. je crus, / believed 
 Fut. je croirai, / shall believe 
 Cond. je croirais, I should believe 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je croie, that I may believe 
 Pret. que je crusse, that I might believe 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. croyant, believing 
 Past, cru, believed 
 
 la chose, the thing le contraire, the contrary 
 
 incroyable, incredible credule, credulous 
 
 justement, exactly le menteur, the liar 
 
 Je crois qu'il est d^ja tard. Nous ne le croyons pas. Le 
 croyez-vous? Je ne le crois pas. Mon fr^re ne le croit pas 
 non plus. Si je le croyais, je me tromperais. Je n'ai jamais 
 cru cela. Qui aurait cru cela ? Je le croirais, si vous me le 
 disiez. C'est une chose incroyable. Ne croyez pas cela. II ne 
 faut pas tout croire. Nous croyons justement le contraire. 
 Ces messieurs ne le croient pas. Comment voulez-vous que je 
 croie cela? Yotre fr^re croyait tout ce qu'on lui disait; il etait 
 trop crddule. Ne le croyez pas; c'est un menteur. II ne le 
 croirait. pas, s'il vous connaissait. 
 
— 20 — 
 
 32, pas du tout, not at all impossible, impomible 
 
 Do you think (that) my father is right? No, I think (that) 
 he is wrong. Do you think that he has done it ? I do not 
 believe it at all. Your sister is very credulous, she believes 
 all she is told (that which one tclKs her). I will believe you 
 no more. We do not think that he will arrive to-day. I have 
 said so (it) to these children, but they do not Ixjlievc it. They 
 would think so, if their father hail told them. You are writing 
 it to your uncle, but he will not believe it. It is impossible that 
 he should (may) believe it. We shall not believe it either. 
 Believe me, 1 always tell the truth. 
 
 •?•?. bo! re, to dritik 
 
 Indio&iiTe Mood. 
 Prei. je bois, / di'ink nous buvons, we driuh 
 
 tu bois, thou drinkesf vous buvez, i/cni dt-ink 
 il boit, he drinks ils bolvent, they drink 
 
 Imp. je buvais, / was drinking 
 Pifl. je bus, / drank 
 Fnt. je boirai, I shall drink 
 Oond. je Ivoirais, f should 'h'i'>k 
 
 SabjuAotive Mood. 
 Pros, que je boive, that I may drink 
 Pret. que jo husse. that I might drink 
 
 P&rticiples. 
 Pwi. buvant, drinking 
 Past, bu, drunk 
 
 gater, to spoil chacun, uue, ('<irh r. ,n ,,,^r 
 
 ne que, only^ but, nothinrj b'' 
 
 N'avez-vous rien a lx)ire ici? Buvez, s'il vous plait. Je ne 
 bois pas de vin. Nous ne buvons que de Teau, et mon frdre 
 boit de la bi^re. V6us ne buvez pas? . J'ai I'honneur de boire 
 a votre sant^. .Si je buvais avant midi, je gaterais mon app^ti^. 
 Je bus hier un grand verre de bi^e; mais aujourd'hui j'ai bu 
 du vin. Quand j'aurai bu. vous boirez aussi. Mais n'en buvez 
 pas trop. Nous boirons ensemble. II a nn peu trop tu. Qui 
 
..^^-:.. — 21 — 
 
 a bu dans (out of) mon verre ? Nous avons assez bu. Le vin 
 que nous biiraes hier, etait si bon que chacun de nous en but une 
 bouteille. II ne faut pas que nous buvions trop. 
 
 34, trop peu, too little la goutte, the drop 
 
 indisposd, -ee, indisposed ou..ou, either.. or 
 
 aine, ainde, eldest . elle devient, she becomes 
 
 I think (that) he has drunk too much; he has drunk a bottle 
 of wine. If I had some wine, I would not drink this beer. You 
 drink too little. Why do you not drink? I would drink more 
 if I were not indisposed. Will you not drink another glass of 
 wine? I will drink no more to-day. How do you like (find) 
 this wine? This wine is excellent; I have often drunk (of) it. 
 Do your brother and sister also drink wine? My eldest brother 
 drinks nothing but water, and my sister has never drunk a drop 
 of beer. If she drinks either wine or beer, she becomes ill. 
 
 S5, venir, to come 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 PreB. je viens, I come jam coming nous venons, tve come 
 tu viens, thou comest vous venez, you come 
 
 il vient, he comes lis viennent, they come 
 
 Imp. je yeneiis J I was coming 
 Pret. je vins, / came 
 Put. je viendrai, / shall come /\ 
 
 Cond. je viendrais, I should come 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je vienne, that I may come 
 Pret que je vinsse, that I might come 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. venant, coming 
 Past, venu, come 
 
 'V, 
 
 d'ou? whence? pourtant, however ^ yet 
 
 le logis, the house^ dwelling revenir, to return^ come hack 
 
 huit jours, a week se souvenir de, to remember 
 
 fort a propos, quite opportunely 
 je viens de chez mon oncle, / come from my uncle's 
 il vient de sortir, he is Just gone out (he comes from going out) 
 
— 22 — 
 
 D'od venez-vous si tard ? Je viens d^une longue promenade. 
 Nous venona de Tdglise. D^oii veniez-vous ce matin, lorsque 
 je vous ai rencontrd? Jc venais de chez mon onclo qui est 
 arrivd il y a liuit jours. Je vins hier trop tard; mais ce matin 
 je suis venu plus tot. Si j'dtais venu un pcu plus tard, jc serais 
 arrive avec vos soeurs. Je viendrais plus tot, si j'en avais le 
 temps. Je voudrais pourtant que vous vinssiez a huit heures. 
 Monsieur votre ptire cst-il au lo^s ? Non, il vient de sortir. 
 Ou sont mesdcmoiscllcs vos soeurs? Elles vienncnt d'arriver de 
 Newport. Vous vcnez fort a propos, j'ai un mot a vous dire. 
 Quand i>tes-vous revenu? Reviendra-t-il bient6t? Je m*en 
 souviendrai toute raa vie. Vous ne vous ^tes pas souvenu de moi. 
 
 36, avare, avariciotis devenir, to become 
 
 dans pcu de temps, in a short time 
 
 You are (come) very late, my dear CImrles. I come from 
 
 Mr. Horton*8, who is ill. Is my brother come ? Your father 
 
 will come also. When will your sister come to Lexington? 
 
 Will you come to our house to-morrow ? If I have time I will 
 
 come; you used to come (Imp.) almost every day to see us. 
 
 At what o'clock will ^our brother come? My father wishes you 
 
 to come (that you may come) also. My aunt will not return 
 
 'vmorrow. This merchant has '>me very rich in a 
 
 / rt time. This girl will l)o (^bt< .ry beautiful. Your 
 
 ther no longer remembers me. We always remember our 
 
 aiends. Your friends have (are) become very avaricious. Wo 
 
 liave just seen your uncle. Is your brother at home? No, lie 
 
 is just gone out. 
 
 •^y. teuir, to hold, keep 
 
 Indio&tiye Mood. 
 Prei. je tiens, I hold, am holding nous tenons, we hold 
 tu tiens, thou holdest vous tenez, yon hold 
 
 il tient, he holds ils tiennent, they hold 
 
 Imp. je tenais, / Wds holding 
 Pret. je tins, I held 
 Put. je tiendrai, I shall hold 
 Oond. je tiendrais, / should hold 
 
~ 23 — 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je tienne, that I may Jiold 
 Pret. que je tinsse, that I might hold 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. tenant, holding 
 Past, tenu, held 
 
 tenez, here le soutien, the support 
 
 retenir, to keep^ keep hack presse -ee, in a hurry 
 
 appartenir, to belong peut-^tre, perhaps 
 
 soutenir, to sustain, affirm seul, seule, only , alone 
 
 Que tenez-vous dans votre main ? Je tiens un livre. Que 
 croyez-vous que je tienne? Je crois que yous tenez le canif 
 que mon frere a perdu. Tenez, voila un ecu pour le pauvre 
 homme qui est a la porte. Yous retenez le bien d'autrui. 
 Retenez bien ce que vous apprenez par coeur. A qui appar- 
 tient cette maison? Toutes ces maisons et tons ces jardins 
 appartiennent au voisin de notre oncle. Mon frere soutient 
 qu'on I'a trompe. Yous soutenez toujours le contraire de ce 
 que les autres disent. Mon ami a obtenu une bonne place; il 
 est le seul soutien de sa famille. Yous ^tes presse; je vous 
 retiens peut-6tre. Je reviendrai dans une lieure. II vient de 
 parler a son fr^re. Nous venons de trouver le chien. 
 
 38. savant, savante, learned la permission, ^TiepermzmoTi, 
 temv\)f^vo\Q,to keep one' sword leave 
 
 M.J cousin will return to-morrow; he has (is) become very 
 learned. He (holds) has a good place. You have not kept 
 (your) A^brd. You did nof return (are not returned). I held 
 your letter in my hand when my father came yesterday. My 
 uncle affirms that Mr. Somerville will not return. To whom 
 do these beautiful meadows belong? These meadows formerly 
 belonged to my uncle; but now they belong to the town. This 
 book belongs to one of my friends who has lent it to me. He 
 does not remember (of) to have lent it to me. You will not 
 obtain your father's permission. I shall obtain everything from 
 my father, if I am industrious. 
 
— 24 — 
 
 39. servir, to ^erve^ wait an 
 
 IndioAtive Moo4. 
 Pwi. je sers, / serve nous servons, we serve 
 
 tu sers, thou servest vous servez, you serve 
 
 il scrt, he serves Us sen'ent, they serve 
 
 Imp. je scrvais, / was serving 
 Pret. je servis, / served 
 Put. je servirai, / shall serve 
 Oond. je servirais, / should serve 
 
 Snbjoiiotiye Mood. 
 Pwi. que jo serve, that I may serve 
 PM. quo jo servisso, that f utinhf serve 
 
 PaiiioiplM. 
 Prtf. servant, serving 
 
 Pwi sorvi. srrrrd 
 
 servir ii, to serve for^ to he of use to 
 scrvir do, to serve for, or instead of 
 80 scrvir do, to make use of to use 
 on a servi, they have served up 
 * a quoi sort cela ? what is the use of that ? 
 cela no sort do rion, that is quite useless 
 
 r^compenser, to reward le pouvoir, the power 
 le procluun, the neighbor le bouchon, the cork 
 
 Jo sers volontiers mes amis. Nous servons tout le raonde. 
 Votre ami no sort personue. Servez vos parents, ot vous serez 
 r^ompenst^s. J'ai toujours servi mon prochain. Je vous ser- 
 virais volontiers, si cela etait en mon ponv.iir a ^pioi cela 
 8ertr41? Cela sort a plusieurs choses. Cela oiJchon. 
 
 Cela ne vous servira de rien. Je me servirai de vos livres. 
 Jo ne m'en sers plus. Servez-vous des miens. Combien de 
 temps avez-vous servi? Je n'ai seni que trois ans. Je vou- 
 drais avoir servi plus longtemps. Cette action servira a votre 
 gloire. On a servi; mettons-nous a table. Voulez- vous que je 
 vous serve de cela ? 
 
~ 26 — 
 
 40. le regiment, the regiment le plus, the most 
 
 la voiture, the carriage iQ^ioMoxmdiiYe^ the dictionary 
 
 This young man has served in my uncle's regi'ment. We 
 must always serve ou],\ friends, willingly. Your cousin has served 
 me the most. Use this penknife; it is better than that. I shall 
 make use of your book. My servant has waited on me for 
 seven years (waits on aae since seven years). We often make 
 use of this carriage. I wish you to serve (that you may serve) 
 mt> in this affair. I shall be very grateful to you. for (of) it. 
 When I write in French I seldom use the dictipnary. 
 
 4:1. sortir, to go out 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je sors, I go out nous sortons, ive go out 
 
 tu sors, thou goest out vous sortez, you go out 
 il sort, he goes out ils sortent, they go out 
 
 Imp. je sortais, I was going out 
 Pret. je sortis, / went out 
 Fut. je sortirai, / shall go out 
 Cond. je sortirais, / should go out 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je sorte, that I may go out 
 Pret. que je sortisse, that I might go out 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. gortant, going out 
 Past, sorti, gone out 
 
 de boniie heure, early tous les matins, every raorning 
 
 ^" Mes fr&es sortfent souvent. Je sors tous les matins a sept 
 heures. Et toi, a quelle heure sors-tu ? Je ne sors pas de si 
 bonne heure. Nous sortons toutes les apres-midi, mais vous 
 ne sortez presque jamais. Si je sortais apres vous, j'arriverais 
 trop tard. Sortons ensemble; mais ne sortons pas avant midi. 
 Je sortis hier a six heures: demain, je sortirai de tres-bonne 
 heure. Et vous, a quelle heure sortites-vous ? Je suis sorti un 
 peu plus tard aujourd'hui. Yous ^tes sorti sans me le dire. Si 
 j'etais sorti, je vous I'aurais dit. Demain je sortirai de bonne 
 
— 26 — 
 
 heure. Pourquoi n'^tes-vous pas sorti avoo moi ? Tl fjint. que 
 je sorte k sept heures et demi<\ 
 
 42. Why do you not go out ? Arc you ill ? I shall go out 
 later. I shall have two letters to write. TTt» your brother 
 gone out? No, he has not gone out; but he will go out soon. 
 I would go out now if I had finished my letters. Wait a little; 
 we will go out together.jn;^ You very seldom go out. Have 
 you 80 much to do? Wc must go out now; come with us. 
 Every one l£& gone out. I should like to go out also. If I 
 had not so much business, I would come tormorrow morning. 
 Our uncle rises at seven o'clock, and goee out at nine. My 
 friends rise every moming at five, and go out at eight. 
 
 43* partir, to qo fiiray, depart, net out, start 
 
 iDdicaiive Mood. 
 Pwi. j»* [nii7<j J (JO mmy nous pai i»mi.-, u t ij'j ^umy 
 
 tu pars, thou goest away vous partez, you go away 
 il part, he goes away ils partent, they go away 
 
 Imp. je partais, / ivas going away 
 Pret. je partis, / went away 
 Fnt. je partirai, / shall go away 
 Oond. je partirais, / should go axcay 
 
 Sabjanotive Mood. 
 Pr«8. que je parte, that 1 may go away 
 Pwi que je partisse^ tJiat I might go away 
 
 P&rtioiplM. 
 Pres. part ant, going away 
 Paat. parti, gone away 
 
 dormiry to sleep 
 
 Indieatiye Mood. 
 Pwe. je dors, / sleep, am sleeping nous dormons, %ce sleep 
 tu dors, tJiou sleepest vous dormez, you sleep 
 
 il dort, he sleeps ils dorment, they sleep 
 
 Imp. je dormais, / was sleeping 
 Pret. je dormis, / slept 
 , Put. je dormirai, / sliaU sleep 
 
 Oond. je dormirais, I should sleep 
 
-~ 27 — 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je dorme, that I may sleep 
 Pret. que je dormisse, that I might sleep 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. dormant, sleeping 
 Past, dormi, slept 
 apres-demain, the day after to-morrow comment I ivhat ! 
 avant-hier, the day before yesterday laisser, to let, leave 
 s'endormir, to fall asleep le sommeil, {the) sleep 
 
 endormi, -ie, asleep 
 
 Je pars demain pour Wilmington. Nous partons apres- 
 demain pour Savannah. Si vous partez, mon frere ain^ par- 
 tira avec vous. IS'ous partirons done ensemble. II faut que 
 je parte bientot. Croyez-vous que mon oncle soit deja parti? 
 Comment ! vous ^tes encore au lit ! Laissez-moi dormir. Yous 
 dormez beaucoup trop. Avez-vous bien dormi ? Je voudrais 
 dormir encore une heure. J'ai sommeil; je m'endormirai 
 bientot. Je m'endormis {or, je me suis endormi) avant-hier 
 a table. Si j'etais seul, je m'endormirais aussi. Je voudrai^ 
 que cet enfant fut endormi. 
 
 44» I'Angleterre (f), England ^veiller; O 
 
 la Suisse, Switzerland rdveiller' ' j ^^ ^^^^ ^^ 
 
 se rendormir, to fall asleep again 
 
 When shall you set out for England? I shall start to- 
 morrow, or the day after to-morrow. When did (is) your 
 father set out for Switzerland ? He (is) set out the day before 
 yesterday. I would set out for Washington this evening if I 
 had a good horse. At what hour shall you set out? My chil- 
 dren are still asleep; wake them. I awoke (have aw^ed) them 
 two hours ago; but they have fallen asleep againJ^When I 
 (shall) have slept six hours you will wake me up. Where is 
 your brother? Is he' still in bed? He is still sleeping, but I 
 have not (moi, je n'ai pas) slept at all. I should be sleeping 
 now if you had not awaked me. Is your sister at home ? No, 
 she went out (is gone out) an hour ago. Where is your father ? 
 He (is) set out for Switzerland. 
 
— 28 — 
 
 4S» Hentir, to feel^ smell 
 
 Indioatiye Mood. 
 Pw«. jc sens, 1 feel nous scntons, we feel 
 
 tu Hens, thou feelesi vous sentez, you feel 
 il sent, he feela ils sentent, ilx/ey feel 
 
 Imp. je sontuis, I was feeling 
 Pwi jc sentis, / felt 
 Put. je seutirai, / shall feel 
 Cond. je sentirais, / nho^M feel 
 
 SnbjnnoiiTe Mood. 
 Prti. que je sente, Uuii I may feel 
 Piit que je sentisse, that I might fn ' 
 
 Puiieiples. 
 Ptm. sentant, feeling 
 Put senti, felt 
 
 Conjngaie in the sAine mannor: 
 mentirt to lie; 80 rei>eiitir9 to repent 
 
 sentir bon, to smell nice y^ sentir mauvais, to smell bad 
 sentir le brdl^, to smell burnt ne. ;Vt^lus jamais, 7i€ver again 
 Todeur (/.;, tfie odor, smell la douleur, the pain 
 de loin, from afar parf'um^, ~^e, scented 
 
 que, howl 
 
 Cela sent bon. Qu'est-ce qui sent si mauvais? Que ces 
 fleurs sentent bon I C'est une odeur agrdable; je I'ai sentie 
 de loin. Toute la chambre en est encore parfuin^e. Youlez- 
 vous sentir quelque chose de bon ? Je ne sens ricn. La viande 
 sent le brti\6, Pourquoi mentez-vous ? Je ne mens pas. Je 
 n'ai pas menti depuis longtemps. Si j'avais menti, je le dirais. 
 Je ne nientirai plus jamais. Pourquoi mentirais-je ? Voulez- 
 vous que je mente ? II croit que j'ai menti. Je voudraie 
 n'avoir pas menti. Je sens que j'ai tort. Mon p^re sent de 
 grandes douleurs. Je me repens de ma faute. Je m'en repen- 
 tirai toute ma vie. Mon fr^re se repent aussi d'avoir menti. 
 Vous avez fait une grande faute, vous vous en repentirez un 
 jour. Je m'en suis d^ja repenti. 
 
— 29 ~ 
 
 4:6* offenses, to offend une fois, once 
 
 K A parclonnei?^ ,to forgive deux ,fois, twice 
 
 We must never lie/ I should lie, if I said that I have had 
 much business. My brother never lies; he loves the truth. 
 These flowers smell nice; but, thpse smell bad. You have 
 offended me much. '' t am sorry Mr it.^ Forgive me. If you feel 
 that you'are wrong, I will forgive you. I have once lied; but 
 I will never lie again.* My brother also has repented of his 
 fault. I smell something nice. How nice these apples smell ! 
 Does the meat smell burnt? k. r 
 
 4:7. couvrir, to cover 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je couvre, I cover nous couvrons, we cover 
 
 tu couvres, thou coverst vous couvrez, you cover 
 11 couvre, he covers ils couvrent, they cover 
 
 Imp. je couvrais, I was covering 
 Pret. je couvris, I covered 
 Put. je cdlivrirai, I shall cover 
 Cond. je couvrir ais, I should cover 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je couvre, that I may cover 
 Pret. que je couvrisse, that I might cover 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. couvrant, covering 
 ^^^* couvert jt^Qt^erecZ 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner: 
 souflfrir, to suffer; offrir, to offer; ouvrir, to open 
 
 la fen^tre, the window il veut, he wishes 
 
 I'impertinence (f.)^ (the) impertinence le vase, the vessel, vase 
 le tableau, the picture crever, to hurst 
 
 toucher, to touch I'assiette (f.)^ the plate 
 
 Ouvrez la porte. La porte est ouverte. N'ouvrez pas la 
 fen^tre. Qui a ouvert toutes les fenetres? Mon frere ouvre 
 toujours la porte et les fenetres. J'ai rec^u une lettre de ton 
 ami; mais je ne Touvrirai pas. Le domestique qui m'ouvrit 
 
— 30 — 
 
 hier la porte, m*a dit que tu n'^tais pas au logis. Faut-il que 
 je sourt're ccla? J'ai as8ez souflcrt. Jc ne souffrirai plus ces 
 impertinences. Couvrez ce tableau. Je I'ai de^ja couvert. Ne 
 c'ouvrez pas ces fleurs. Le jardinicr ne veut pas qu*on les 
 couvre. Si j'avais couvert ce vase» il aurait crev^. Quoique 
 jaie couvert ces fruits dune assiette, on y a ix>urtant touchd 
 
 48, aussitdt, immediately U y a quelqu'jun, tliere is somebody 
 il fait froid, it is cold se couvrir, to putpn one*s hat 
 
 Who is there: Open the dooi \ , there is some 
 
 one there. Has the servant opene»l un- nuor : No, he has not 
 opened it. Who has led it open ? These soldiers have sulfcred 
 much. Do not cover the vase. We have already covered it. 
 My master does not wish 4t-to^be_xovered (that one may cover 
 it). There is a bad «mell (it smells bad) in this room. Do you 
 wish me to open (that I may open) all the windows? Yes, Sir, 
 open them if you please. Put on your hat; it is cold. 
 
 40, pouvoir, to be able 
 
 Indio&tive Mood. 
 Prei. je puis, je peux, / can nous pouvons, we can 
 
 tu peux, thou canst vous pouvez, you can 
 
 il peut, he can ils peuvent, they can 
 
 Imp. je pouvais, / could 
 
 Prei je pus, / could 
 
 Put. je pourrai, / shall be able 
 
 Cond. jc pourrais, / should be able 
 
 Subjunotiye Mood. 
 Pres. que je puisse, that I may be able 
 Pret. que je pusse, that I might be able 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. pouvant, being able 
 Past, pu, been able 
 
 aller, to go puis-je ? may I ? 
 
 j usque, as far as, up to loin, far 
 
 le marche, the market de retour, returned, on returning 
 
— 31 
 
 Pouvez-vous faire cela? Oui, je le puis; mais mon fr^re ne 
 le peut pas. Nous ne le pouvons pas ^on plus; mais nos soeurs 
 le peuvent bien. Si je pouvais aller jlsqu'au marche, j'ache- 
 terais de la viande. Je n'ai pu sortir hier du logis (de chez 
 moi). Je pourrai peut-^tre sortir demain. Si j'avais pu lui 
 derire, je I'aurais fait avee plaisir. Croyez-vous que je puisse 
 porter cela? II ne croyait pas que je pusse jeter si loin. Je 
 voudrais que nous pussions sortir, et que vous pussiez aller avee 
 nous. Yotre pere n'est-il pas encore de i-etoiir? Non, jgaais il 
 peut revenir aujourd'hui. Je^ ne pus repondrc a votr|Pettrej 
 parce que mon pere n'etait pas encore revenu. 
 
 50. Your brother can carry this letter to the post-Mce. Can 
 you tell me what o'clock it is? L^nnot ^^yoii (it'f^If I had 
 a watch I should be J^e to teliplii (it). I.shSll not be able 
 to go out to-day, beSHfe my father is ill. My brother will not 
 be able to come. I do not think that he can come (|iiay be- 
 able to come) now. When shall^ you be Jlle to fihfeh your 
 exercises ? We shall be able to finish them this afternoon, I 
 have not yet been able to tell him that you have come. These 
 children cannot go out, because they are ill. I should be' able 
 to lend you this book if it belonged^ (Imp.) to me. 
 
 '^^•- ' : -.^^ ( ':''' y ?- ..-^ ■■"''' 
 
 51, savoir, to knotr, know hotv^ be able 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pros, je sais, / know nous savons, we know 
 
 tu sais, thou knoiuest vous savez, you knotv 
 il sait, he knoivs ils savent, they knotv 
 
 Imp. je savais, I knew 
 Pret. je sus, I knew 
 Put. je saurai, / sJiall knoio 
 Cond. je saurais, I should knoiu 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je sache, that I may know 
 Pret. que je susse, that I might know 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. sachant, knoiving 
 Past, su, known 
 
— 32 — 
 
 il sait ^criro, he knows Jioia to write^ he can write 
 
 je ne saurais le t'aire, / should not know how to do ity J cannot do it 
 
 que je sache, that J may knoWy as far as I know 
 
 le grec, Greek savoir bon gr^, to take kindly 
 
 mourir, to die douter fort, to doubt very much 
 
 le nom, the name la languc, the language 
 
 Savez-vous quand mon p^re revieudra ? Je ne le sais pas. 
 Votre soeui- le sait-elle? Elle ne le sait pas non plus. Savez- 
 vous danscr ? Je 1^ su autrefois, mais je ne le sais plus k pre- 
 sent. Votre IVt^re sait-il legrec? Qui, il le sait. Nous savons tous 
 qu'il faut mourir. Yotrc cousin savait plusieurs langues. Je ne 
 saurais rien refuser a mes amis. II ne croit pas que je sache 
 le latin. On doutait fort qu'il le sAt. On voudrait que je Teusse 
 Ru plus tot. II no sait passes regies. Je n*en ai rien su. II n'est 
 pas ici, que jo sache. Je ne saurais vous le dire. Je ne sais 
 que faire, que dire. Je ne vous en sais pas bon gr^. . C^sar, 
 dit-on, savait par coeur les noms de tous ses soldats. Savez-vous 
 pourquoi je Tai fait? II sait Tallemand et le frani;ais/ 
 
 62. I do not know who has taken your knife. Do you know 
 (it) ? My brothers knew that my uncle would come here. I 
 shall soon know who has done that. We do not know yet 
 when we shall set out. Ton will know it to-morrow. Can you 
 draw? I could draw (knew how to draw) very well formerly, 
 but now I draw very badly. Do you know whore he lives? 
 Do you know Latin? I do not know it, but I know French. 
 Do those children know how to road ? They can (know how to) 
 read and write very well. 
 
 53. valoiry to be worth 
 
 Indioative Mood. 
 Pk«. je vaux, / am worth nous valons, lae are worth 
 
 tu vaux, thou art worth vous valez, you are ivorth 
 il vaut, he is worth ils valent, they are worth 
 
 Imp. je valais, / loas worth 
 Pret. je valus, / was worth 
 Put. je vaudrai, / shall be ivorth 
 Cond. je vaudrais, / should be tvorth 
 
— 33 — 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 PreB. que je vaille, that I may he worth 
 Pret. que je valusse, that I might he worth 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. valant, being worth 
 Past, valu, been worth 
 
 pas grand'chose, not much se sau^er^ to make one's escape 
 s'oecuper, to occupy one's self se rendre, tayieldj surrender 
 serieux, -euse, serious s'exposer, to expose one's self 
 
 la maniere, the manner se taire, to be silent 
 
 il vaut mieux, it is better le danger, the danger 
 
 chez sol, at home 
 
 Son livre vaut plus que son cahier. Combien vaut cela? or^ 
 Combien cela vaut-il? Cela ne vaut rien. Que pent valoir cette 
 maison ? Cette maison ne vaut pas grand'chose. Ce gargon 
 ne vaudra jamais rien. Cet homme n'a jamais rien valu. S'il 
 valait quelque chose, il s'occuperait d'une mani^re serieuse. 
 Que croyez-vous que cela vaille? II ne croyait pas que ma 
 montre valut tant d'argent. II vaut mieux se taire que de mal 
 parler. II vaut mieux aller seul que dletre mal accompagne. 
 'Ne valait-il pas mieux se sauver que de se rendre ? II vaut 
 mieux rester chez soi que de s'exposer au danger. Ne vaudrait- 
 11 pas mieux boire un verre de vin que deux verres d'eau? 
 Yaut mieux tard que jamais. 
 
 54» injustement, unjustly 
 
 How much is this cloth worth ? It is worth four francs an 
 (the) ell. Last year is was worth only two francs and a half 
 an (the) ell. In a little time it will be worth'more. This coat is 
 worth nothing. I do not think that this is (may be) worth 
 more. Of these two things, the one is worth as much as the 
 other, it is better to suffer than (of) to act unjustly. It will 
 be better to do that now than (of) to wait any longer. It is 
 better to set out to-day than to-morrow. That man is good for 
 nothing (is worth nothing). Would it not be better to work 
 than (of) to take a walk ? 
 
— 34 — 
 
 55. voir, to see 
 
 Indic&tiye Mood. 
 Pwi. je vols, 1 ser ikkis voyons, we see 
 
 tu vois, thou sttsf VOU3 voyez, you see 
 il voit, ?ie sees ils voient, Uiey see 
 
 Imp. je voyais, / was seeing 
 Prei je vis, / saw 
 Fni je verrai, / s?iall see 
 Ooni je verrais, / should see 
 Subjanotiva Mood. 
 Prei. que je vuie, (hut J may see 
 Prei que je visse, that I might sec 
 
 Pariioipltt. 
 Pwi. voyant, seeing 
 Pui vu, seen 
 
 la peine, the pain^ trouble la lumit^re, the light 
 
 valoir la peine, to be worth while ia chandelle, the candle 
 
 estrce que vous y voyez encore? can you still see? 
 
 Que vois-je? Ne le voyez- vous pas ? Je ne vois rien. Mais 
 voyez done un peu. II vaut bien la peine de le voir. Yoyons 
 ce que c'est. Si je voyais seulement une de mes connaissanees! 
 J'ai vu votre cousin; mais vous ne I'avez pas vu. Je le verrai 
 bient6t, et vous le verrez aussi. Je le vis hier se promener. 
 Ne nie voyez-vous pas? Jean, voyez qui c'est. Nous avons vu 
 aujourd'hui ce que vous vites hier. Nous verrons demain cc 
 que vous avez vu ce matin. Mcs soeurs le verront ausfii. Je 
 vois bien qu'il ne lepeut pas. Voyez-vous quej'avais raison? 
 Ce garc^on gatera tout, vous verrez. Mon cousin est venu me 
 voir. Voulez-vous que j'apporte de la lumi^re, ou est-ce que 
 vous y voyez encore ? Mettez la chandelle sur la table. 
 
 56. je n'y vois plus, / can see no longer 
 j'ai la vue basse, / am short-sighted 
 j'ai la vue bonne, / have good sight 
 j'ai mal aux yeux, / have sore eyes 
 
 entendre, to hear I'oeil, les yeux (m,)^ the eye 
 
— 35 — 
 
 Have you seen it? You see well that I cannot do this. I 
 saw him go away. I saw his mother die. We can see (we 
 there see) no longer; give us a candle. We see with (of) the 
 eyes, and we hear with (of) the ears. We saw yesterday what 
 you have not seen. I shall see many people to-day at the 
 promenade. Do you see (Sing.) how I do this? T do not see 
 your sister; is she ill? Do you think that I see her? I thought 
 that you had seen her. Do your brothers not see you every 
 day? Are you short-sighted? No, I am not short-sighted; but 
 my eyes are sore. Your brother has good sight; he sees 
 everything. 
 
 ^7» vouloir, to wish, he willing, Tiave a mind 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pros, je veux, / wisJi nous voulons, toe wish 
 
 tu veux, thou wishest vous voulez, you ivish 
 il veut, he ivishes • ils veulent, they wisJi 
 
 Imp. je voulais, I was ivishing 
 Pret. }Q yovXm^j I wished 
 Fut. ]q \0Vi&r2Ji, I shall wish 
 Cond. je voudrais, I should tcish 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je veuille, that I may wish 
 Pret. que je voulusse, that I might ivish 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. voulant, wishing 
 Past, voulu, ivished 
 
 la France, France de mauvaise humeur, in a had temper 
 
 envoyer, to send le voyage, the journey 
 
 je veux bien, I am perfectly willing , most willingly ^ with 
 veuillez, he so Mnd, have the kindness [pleasure 
 
 je voudrais bien, / should like very much 
 voudriez-vous ? would you have the kindness ? 
 
 Que voulez-vous faire ? Je veux me promener. Si vous le 
 voulez, je le veux bien aussi. L'un le veut, et I'autre ne le veut 
 pas. Mes soeurs le veulent encore moins. On voulait m'en- 
 
— 36 — 
 
 Toyer en France; mais je ne Tai pas vonliu Si je Tavais voulu, 
 je serais deja parti. Voulez-vous fairt*. une promenade aveo 
 moi? Jo le veux bien; mais attendez un moment; je deman* 
 derai a mon fr^re s'il veut venir avec nous. Je crois qu'il ne le 
 voudra pas, car il est de mauvaise liumcur. Bien ! s'il ne le 
 veut pas, nous nous promc^nerons seuls. Je voudrais bien lairo 
 un petit voyage. Mon oncle ne croit pas que je veuille partir. 
 Je n'aurais jamais voulu faire cela. Voudriez-vous bien mo 
 lairc un plaisir ? Vous Ic pouvcz, si vous le voulez. Veuillez 
 mo rendre ce service. 
 
 S8. tl^tenir, to detain persuade, -^, convinced 
 
 My brothers will not wait any longer. Will you accompany 
 me? Most willingly (I will it well); but I have business frfe^ 
 affaires) whioli will d(,»tain me. We wish you to become (that 
 you nmy l)ecomo) more industrious, and to do (that you may 
 do) your exercises. My sisters do not wish it. Do you think 
 that my father will permit (may l)e willing to permit) it? He 
 will not wish it, I (of it) am convinced. Arc you willing to 
 render me a service ? I will do it with pleasure if I (it) can. 
 These children are not willing to learn their lessons. 
 
 SO. devoir, to owe, muM^ ought 
 
 Indie&tiye Mood. 
 Prea. jo dois, J oive n<ms devons, we owe 
 
 n dois, thou owest vous devez, you owe 
 il doit, he owes ils doivent, they otae 
 
 Imp. je devais, lowed 
 Pret. je dus, / oived 
 Pnt. je devrai, / shall owe 
 Oond. je devrais, I should owe 
 
 Snbjunotiye Mood. 
 Pres. que je doive, that I may owe 
 Pret. que je dusse, that I might owe 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. (levant, owing 
 Pa«t. dii, owed 
 
— - 37 — 
 
 je dois partir, / ara to set outj I have to set out 
 
 tu dois partir, thou art to set out, thou hast to set out 
 
 il doit partir, he is to set out, he has to set out 
 
 il devait partir, he tvas to set out 
 
 il devrait partir, he ought to set outj he should set out 
 
 il aurait du partir, he should have, he ought to have set out 
 
 embarrass^,-ee, troubled le sou, the sou, cent 
 inquiet, inquiete, anxious Fhote, the landlord 
 au lieu de, instead of le pays, tJie country 
 
 Je dois aller au marche. Nous devons partir demain. Je 
 devais venir a deux heures. Yous deviez venir plus tot. Si je 
 devais faire cela, je serais bien embarrasse. Je devrais ecrire 
 a ma soeur, car elle doit (must) etre inquiete. Yous devriez 
 m'attendre, c'est votre devoir. Je devais partir aujourd'hui. 
 Si j'avais du attendre plus longtemps, je n'aurais pas et6 con- 
 tent. Croyez-vous que je doive souffrir cela ? Yous auriez dti 
 venir ici, au lieu d'aller dans ce pays-la. Combien voas dois-je? 
 Yous me devez beaucoup. Yous ne me devez plus rien. « Je 
 ne vous dois rien. Si je vous devais quelque chose, je vous 
 paierais. Je devais beaucoup autrefois; mais je ne dois plus 
 rien a present. Combien devez-vous au tailleur ? Je ne lui dois 
 pas un sou. J'ai du jusqu'a cent francs a mon bote; mais je 
 ne lui dois plus rien. Ce monsieur doit beaucoup. Tons les 
 hommes doivent mourir. 
 
 6*0. se m^ler de, to meddle with a temps, in time 
 
 We ought always to do our duty. I ought to tell you that 
 I do not love you. You should not go out without telling (it) 
 me. These children have (are) to set out to-day. A young 
 man should not (ought not to) meddle with everything. I 
 must go very fast if I wish to arrive in time. Here is the 
 landlord; do you not owe him something? No, I owe him 
 nothing; but my brothers owe him ten dollars. These scholars 
 ought to write their exercises better. Those children ought to 
 obey their parents. You ought to pay (for) the coat which 
 you bought yesterday. 
 
— 38 — 
 
 SI. falloir, to be necessary 
 
 IndioatiTe Mood. 
 Pros, ii taut, // is iwctssart/ 
 Imp. il fallait, it wan necessary 
 Pwt. il lallut, it was necessary 
 Fiii il faudra, it will be necessary 
 Cond. il faudrait, it would he necessary r 
 
 SnbjimeiiTe. 
 Prw. qu'il faille, that it inay be necessary 
 Pret. qn'il falliit, that it might be necessary 
 
 Partioiplet. 
 Pw8. fallu, been necessary 
 
 il faut .^orlir, ire, j/o?/, or one must go out 
 il nc taut pas mcutir, loe^ you or one must iiot lie 
 il faut que je sortc, ) , 
 11 me faut sortir, j" ^ ««»« (/<> «'" 
 il faut que nous parlions, ) 
 il nous faut parlcr, ) «"= "'"'^^ "'""'' 
 
 •il mc faut un livre, / want (must have) a book v 
 
 il lui faut un livre, he wants (must have) a book 
 avoucr, to admit tout de suite, cU once 
 
 par consequent, there/ore emp^chcr, to prevent^ hinder 
 la bouche, t?ie mouth tel, telle, such; bien, certainly 
 
 Nous avons deux yeux et deux oreilles; mai8 nous n'avons 
 qu'une Ixjuche: il faut par consequent beaucoup voir, beaucoup 
 entendre, raais |>eu parler. II faut avouer que cela est tr^j*- 
 beau. Que faut-il faire pour enip^cher un tel inalheur ? Com- 
 ment faut-il dire? II faut toujours travailler; il ne faut pas 
 ^tre paresseux. II faudra avoir patience. Que faites-vous? 
 II faut que j'^crive. Que fait votre cousin ? II faut qu'il ai> 
 prenne sa legon. II fallut que je fisse tout cela. II faudra que 
 je sorte un moment . II faut que tu restes ici. II faut que nous 
 ecrivions. II faut que mes fr^res travaillent. II faut que je 
 lui derive de venir vous voir. II faut toujours faire son devoir. 
 II ne faut point faire le mal. II ne fallait pas faire cela. II 
 faudrait bien le lui dire. II me faut de Tencre. II leur faut 
 des plumes. II me faut tout de suite du feu. 
 
— 39 — 
 
 62, We must do our exercises. You must come back this week. 
 You must say it. You must not do that. What must 1 write? 
 You will be obliged to eat this. You must remain here; you 
 must not go out. Your brother must not write so fast. Your 
 sisters must return soon. My child, you must be more indus- 
 trious. We must set out to-morrow. I must write to my father 
 to-day. Your sister must learn her lesson. If you wish to take 
 a walk, you must go out before two o'clock. We want {or 
 must have) a knife. They want {or must have) pencils. 
 
 63» aller, to go 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 PrM. je vais, I go nous aliens, tve go 
 
 tu vas, thou goest vous allez, you go 
 il va, he goes ils vont, they go 
 
 Imp. j'allais, I teas going 
 Pret. j'allai, I went 
 Fut. yireiij I shall go 
 Cond. yirsils, I should go 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. quej'aille, that I may go 
 Pret. que j'allasse, that I might go 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. allant, going 
 Past, alle, gone 
 
 s'en aller, to go away 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je m'en vais, I go away nous nous en aliens, we go &c. 
 tu t'en vas, thou goest away vous vous en allez, you go &c. 
 il s'en va, he goes aivay ils s'en vont, they go &c. 
 Imp. je m'en allais, / was going aicay 
 Pret. je m'en allai, I went aivay 
 Fut. je m'en irai, I shall go away 
 Oond. je m'en irais, I should go aivay 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pjres. que je m'en aille, that I may go away 
 Pret. que je m'en allasse, that I might go away 
 
— 40 — 
 
 Ta-t*-en, go away (thou) allez-vous-en, go away (you) 
 le college, Vie college le beau-fr^re, the brotJiei'-in-lato 
 
 aller au-devant de quelqu'un, to go to vieet some one 
 
 Od allez-vous ? Je vais chcz moi, et mon fr^re va au college. 
 Oil alliez-vous ce matin, lorsque je vous ai rencontr^? J'allais 
 k notre jardin. Y allez-vous tous lea matins? J'irais volon- 
 tiers m'j proniener si mon frdre dtait ici. Si tous le voulez, 
 j'irai avec vous. Nous irons ensemble. N'allez pas si vite; 
 allez plus lentement. Oil vont ecs jeunes gens? Ne vont-ils 
 pas le m^me chemin que nous? Od est votre soeur? Elle est 
 alldc voir son onclc. Elle doit revenir domain. Nous irons 
 au-devant d'elle.XN'irez-vous pas demain a Albany ? Mon fr^re 
 ne veut pas que j'y allle. Je m'en vais. Vous en allez-vous 
 ddja ? Je no m*en vais pas encore. Mais je m*en irai bient6t. 
 Attendez un moment, nous nous en irons ensemble. Votre 
 soeur ne s'en va pas encore. Pardonncz-moi, ma sopur s'cn est 
 deja all^, et mes fr^res s'en iront tout a Iheure. II faut que 
 je m'en aille. Allons-nous-en, messieiurs. Va-t'en; allez-vous-en. 
 lis ne veulent pas s'en aller. II est all^ a Danville. J'irai 
 bient6t a Londres voir mou beau-l'rdre. 
 
 64. presque, lUmofft le pare, the park 
 
 Where are your sisters going to ? They are going to my 
 cousin's. Where is thy brother going to? He is going to Mr. 
 Charlton's. We are going to Louisville. These gentlemen are 
 going this evening to the concert. Why are you not going 
 with your brother? He does not wish me to go (that I may go) 
 Willi him. Shall we go to-morrow into the country? We shall 
 not go; my father does not wish it.!- I should go to my uncle's 
 if the weather were (was) fine. I wished him to go (that he 
 might go) with me. My father would have gone to the theater 
 if he had had time. Is it late? Thy brother is going away. 
 I shall remain a short time. My brother will soon go away. 
 We shall also go away. My friends, I am going away. Wait 
 a little ; we will go away together. Are they gone to Lima ? I 
 go almost every day to the park. 
 
-- 41 — 
 
 65. mourir, to die 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je meurs, I die 
 
 tu meurs, thou diest 
 11 meurt, he dies 
 nous mourons, ive die 
 vous mourez, you die 
 lis meurent, they die 
 Imp. je mourals, / was dying 
 Pret. je mourus, I died 
 Put. je mourrai; / shall die 
 Cond. je mourrais, I should die 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je meure, that I may die 
 Pret. que je mourusse, that I might die 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. mourant, dying 
 Past, mort, dead 
 
 courir, to run 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je cours, I run 
 
 tu cours, thou runnest 
 11 court, he runs 
 nous courons, we run 
 vous courez, you run 
 lis courent, they run 
 Imp. je courais, / was running 
 Pret. je courus, I ran 
 Put. je courral, / shall run 
 Cond. je courral s, / should run 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 -Pres. que je coure, that I may run 
 Pret. que je courusse, that I might rur.. 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. courant, running 
 Past, couru, run 
 
 \ 
 
— 42 — 
 
 Tenvie (f,), the desire la pbarniacie, tJie drug-store 
 
 revoir, to see again a perte d'haleine, out of breath 
 
 le chagrin, (the) grief fatigu^, fatigu^e, tired 
 
 lafaim, hunger parcourir, to run through 
 
 secourir, to help se mourir, to be dying 
 
 Je meurs d'envie de vous revoir. Nous mourons de chagrin. 
 Ces pauvres enfants meurent de faini. Mon p^re mourut hier 
 dans mes bras. Votre oncle est-il mort? Ma tante mourut la 
 m^mc anode. Ma mdre mourra bicnt6t. Je souhaite que vous 
 no raouriez pas avant moi. Crojez-vous que notrc voisin soit 
 ddja mort? II scrait mort, si on ne I'avait sccouru. Oil courcz- 
 vous si \\^e1 Je cours chercher un mddecin. Mon fn^re se 
 meurt. Oil voulez-vous que je coure? Courons k la pharmacie. 
 J'ai couru a perte d'haleine. Jfe ne courrai plus; je suis trop 
 fatigud. Jc courus hier trop loin. J'ai parcouru la moitie^ de 
 la ville. Mon pt^re ne voulait pas qno jf» rotinis^o oiicf»ro. 
 
 CC Do you know, that mv laUur i> tHaU: Mj» auni ai><» 
 
 died last night. This child will not die. (The) man olten (iies 
 in the flower of his (of the) age. This poor woman died of grief. 
 My brother died in my arms. I wish that all my frieuds 
 may die after me. Where are you running? 1 am running 
 to the post-office, it is already late. Do not run so fast, you 
 will still arrive in time. The soldiers are running through the 
 town. Charles runs as fast as Louis. Do you wish me to run 
 faster (that I may run faster) ? I will run to your uncle's at 
 once, but tell me where he lives. 
 
 C7. hair, to hate 
 
 Indioative Mood. 
 Pm. je hais, I hate nous haissons, tee hate 
 
 tu hais, thou hatest vous haissez, yoxi hate 
 il halt, he hates ils haissent, they hate 
 
 Imp. je haissais, / teas hating 
 Prei je hais, / hated 
 Pnt. je hairai, I shall hate 
 Cond. je hairais, 1 should hate 
 
Pres. 
 Pret. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 — 43 — 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood, 
 que je haisse, that I may hate 
 que je halsse, that I might hate 
 
 Participles, 
 haissant, hating 
 
 Past, hai, hated 
 
 fuir, to flee, run away 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je fuis, / flee nous fuyons, we flee 
 
 tu fuis, thou fleest vous fuyez, you flee 
 11 fuit, he flees lis fuient, they flee 
 
 Imp. je fuyais, I teas fleeing 
 Pret. je fuis, I fled 
 Put. je fuirai, I shall flee 
 Cond. je fuirais, I should flee 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je fuie, that I may flee 
 Pret. que je fuisse, that I might flee 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. fuyant, fleeing 
 Past, fui, fled 
 
 le mensonge, the lie s'enfuir, to run away 
 
 sans cesse, incessantly tie devant, from before 
 
 a cause de, on account of la fuite, the flight 
 
 la conduite, the, conduct Farrn^e (f), the army 
 
 le vice, (the) vice s'approcher, to approach 
 
 Pourquoi me haissez-vous ? Je ne vous hais pas. II ne faut 
 hair personne. Je hais le mensonge. Pourquoi vous hairais- 
 je ? J'ai toujours hai les menteurs et je les hairai sans cesse. 
 Si j'ai hai cet homme, c'est a cause de sa mauvaise conduite. 
 Fuis le mal et fais le bien. Je fuis les mauvaises compagnies. 
 Fuyez les mechants. Fuyons tous le vice. J'ai toujours fui les 
 menteurs, et je les fuirai toujours. Je m'enfuis hier de devant 
 un cheval. Yous vous enfuites aussi. L'ennemi a pris la fuite. 
 Nous nous enfuirons, si I'armee s'approche. Restez, ne fuyez 
 pas. Tout le monde fuira. 
 
— 44 - 
 
 adonn^, -^c, addicted le flatteur, the flatterer 
 
 juste, righteous se livrcr ^, (o give one's self up to 
 
 ni^priser, to despise mettrc a profit, to turn to account 
 
 partout, everywhere roisivetd, (f,), idleness 
 
 OS. I hato this man, he is a liar. Wc hate idleness. Hate a 
 lie, but do not hate your ncighlx>r. We shall always hate those 
 who are addicted to vice. Flee (^from) the naughty and seek tlie 
 company of the rigliteous. This man is everywhere despised; 
 everyone flees (from) him. Wc flee (from) all those who give 
 themselves up to idleness. My uncle has advised me to 
 flee the company of these young men. Let us flee (from) 
 flatterers? (The) time flees, we must turn it to account 
 
 69. oiieilHr, to gnth^ 
 
 Indioative Mood. 
 Pwi. je cucillc, I gather nous ruoillons, we gather 
 
 tu cueilles, thou (juthrrfst vous cueillez, you gather 
 il cueille, he (/<i(h( r^ Is cueillent, they gatfter 
 
 Imp. je cueill:ii>, / : fhering 
 
 Pret. je cueillis, 1 >. I 
 
 Fut. je cueillerai, / 6hull gather 
 Cond. je cueillerais, / should gather 
 
 SnbjunotiTe Mood. 
 Pres. (jue je cueille, that T may gather 
 Pret. que je cueillisse. that I might gather 
 
 P&rticiplef. 
 Pres. cneillant, gathering 
 Part, cueilli. gathei^ed 
 
 acqiiorir, to acquire 
 
 Indioative Mood. 
 Pres. j'acquiers, I acquire nous acqu^rons, we acquire 
 
 tu acquiers, thou acquirest vous acqudrez, you acquire 
 il acquiert, he acquires ils acquierent, they acquire 
 
 Imp. j'acqu^rais, I wa^ acquiring 
 Pret j'acquis, I acquired 
 Put. j'acquerrai, 7 sAaZ/ ocg wire 
 Ooni j'acquerrais, I should acquire 
 
~ 46 — 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 PwB. que j'acquiere, that I may acquire 
 Pret. que j'aequisse, that I might acquire 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. acqudrant, acquiring 
 Past, acquis, acquired 
 
 la fraise, the strawberry puisque, since^ as 
 
 la connaissance, the knowledge la sagesse, {the) wisdom 
 
 se contenter, to he contented le diner, (the) dinner 
 
 Que faites-vous dans ce jardin? Je cueille des fleurs. 
 Cueillez-en aussi pour moi. Je vous cueillerai un joli bouquet 
 de roses. Le jardinier ne veut pas que j'en cueille beaucoup, 
 puisqu'on en a ddja assez cueilli. Hier je cueillis des fraises 
 pour ma soeur; elle les aime tant. Yotre frere est tres-instruit; 
 il aquiert tons les jours de nouvelles connaissances. Yotre 
 voisin a acquis beaucoup de bien. Nous n'en acquerrons pas 
 autant. Je ne veux point de bien mal acquis. Acquiers de la 
 sagesse et de I'honneur, et contente-toi de ce que tu possedes. 
 Cueillez quelques poires pour le diner. 
 
 70* craindre, to fear, to he afraid 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je crains, / fear nous craignons, we fear 
 
 tu crains, thou fearest vous craignez, yoxi fear 
 11 craint, he fears ils craignent, they fear 
 
 Imp. je craignais, / was fearing 
 Pret. je craignis, I feared 
 Put. je craindrai, / shall fear 
 Cond. je craindrais, / should fear 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je craigne, that I may fear 
 Pret. que je craignisse, that I might fear 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. craignant, fearing 
 Past, craint, feared 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner: 
 plaindre, to pity, se plaindre, to co^nplaMi 
 
— 46 — 
 
 vainore, to t^atiquishf defeat 
 
 IndioAtiye Mood. 
 Vm, je vaincs, / vanquish nous vainquons, we vanquUfh 
 
 tu values, tliou vanquishest vous vainquez, yotc vanquish 
 il vaiiK*, lie vanquufieH ils vainquent, they vanquish 
 
 Imp. je vainquais, / was vanquishing 
 Pwt je vainquis, / vanquished 
 Put. je vaiiicrai, / shall vanquish 
 Oond. je vaiucrais, / should VfiJtqvish 
 
 Subjunotiye Mood 
 Pws. que je vaiuque, that J /,.<../ ^' 
 
 Prti quo je vaiuquisse, that 1 in < 
 
 PartieiflM. 
 Pm. vainquant, vanquishing 
 Pui vaincu, vanquished 
 
 la menace, the threat tuer, ^o kill 
 
 Tombre (/". j, <Ac shadow attacher, to tie 
 
 le h^ros, the hero avoir pour, ^o be afraid 
 
 prendre garde, to take care craintif, craintive, timid 
 m^me, even 
 
 Que craignez-vous ? Ne craignez rien. Si vous 6tes avec moi, 
 je ne craindrai pas ses menaces. II ne faut pas 6tre craintif; 
 ma soeur est trt^s-craintive; elle craint m6me son oiubre. J.'ai 
 toujours craint les tlatteurs. II faut vaincre ses passions. Ce 
 h^ros a vaincu tous les ennemis. Nous vaincrons aussi les 
 notres. Ce chien mord. Prenez garde qu'il ne vous morde. 
 A-t-il deja mordu quelquun? II mordit hier notre servante. 
 S'il me mordait, je le tuerais. S'il (^tait attache?, il ne mordrait 
 personne. N'ayez pas peur, il ne vous mordra pas. 
 
 71. ^tre a plaindre, to be to be pitied 
 
 la prononciation, the prontcnciation 
 Where have you gathered these beautiful flowers? I gather 
 flowers every day for my mother. I shall also gather some to- 
 morrow for my aunt. I would gather you a bouquet if the 
 garden were open. We do not acquire anything without trouble. 
 Thou wouldst acquire a better pronunciation if thou wert some 
 
— 47 — 
 
 time in France. What are you afraid of? I am afraid of 
 nothing. This soldier does not fear (the) death. The general 
 has defeated the enemy. You pity me, and I really am to be 
 pitied. Mr. Montgomery always complains. Our neighbor's 
 dog has bitten me. My dogs do not bite. 
 
 7^. bouillir, to boil 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je bous, / boil nous bouillons, we boil 
 
 tu bous, thou holiest vous bouillez, you boil 
 il bout, he boils ils bouillent, they boil 
 
 Imp. je bouillais, I was boiling 
 Pret. je boullis, I boiled 
 Put. je bouillirai, / shall boil 
 Oond. je bouillirais, I should boil 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Pres. que je bouille, that I may boil 
 Pret. que je bouillisse, that I might boil 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. bouillant, boiling 
 Past, bouilh, boiled 
 
 cuire, to cook, bake 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je cuis, I cook nous cuisons, we cook 
 
 tu cuis, thou cookest vous cuisez, you cook 
 il cuit, he cooks- ils cuisent, they cook 
 
 Imp. je cms£iis, I was cooking 
 Pret. je cuisis, I cooked 
 Put. je cuirai, I shall cook 
 Cond. je cuirais, I should cook 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je cuise, that I may cook 
 Pret. que je cuisisse, that J might cook 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. cuisant, cooking 
 Past, cuit, cooked 
 
— 48 — 
 
 rire, to laugh 
 
 Indioftiiye Mood. 
 Pm. je ris, / laugh nous rions, we laugh 
 
 tu ris, thou laughest vous riez, you laugh 
 il rit, }ie laughs ihs rient, they laugh 
 
 Imp. je riais, I was laughing 
 Pret. je ris, / laugfied 
 Put. je rirai, / shall laugh 
 Otnd. je rirais, I should laugh 
 
 Snbjnnotiye Mood. 
 Proi. que je rie, that I may laugh 
 Fret, quo je risse, that I might laugh 
 
 Partittflw. 
 Ptm. riant, laughing 
 Piii ri, UxugHed 
 
 laire cuirc, to cooky get cooked la cuisine, (/<*• J^if'/irn 
 rotir, to broil^ roast, faire la cuisine, (" <>,>,/: 
 
 ni. .ni, neither, .nor bien, very, very much 
 
 Keau bout-elle? Elle a bouilli, mais elle ne bout plus. Elle 
 bouillait tout ;i I'heure. Cette cau bouillira bient6L Elle bouil- 
 lirait ddja, s'il y avait plus de feu. Ce poisson n'est bon ni a 
 rotir ni a bouillir. Que laites-vous cuire aujourd'hui ? Savez-vous 
 faire la cuisine? Ce boulanger cuit bcaucoup de pain tons les 
 jours. Pourquoi riez vous? Je ne ris pas. Je n'ai pas envie de 
 rire. Cos enfants rient toujours. Je rirai bien si cela arrive, 
 et ma soeur rira encore plus. II vaut mieux rire que de pleurer. 
 Vous ne faites que rire. Avez-vous bieht6t fini de rire? Nous 
 avons beaucoup ri. L*un riait, Tautre pleurait. 
 
 75. tandis que, whilst par jour, dailyj a day 
 
 a table, at table il va, it will directly 
 
 You are always laughing, one must not laugh at everything. 
 Thy brother never laughs. When I wish to laugh, I go away. 
 Your friend always laughs whilst you cry. You would also 
 laugh, if you knew why he laughed. Our friend has made us 
 laugh. My uncle will not allow us to laugh at table. The 
 water does not yet boil. How does it happen that it does not 
 
— 4:9 — 
 
 yet boil ? It would have boiled, if the fire were not so low. 
 It will boil directly. This baker bakes (the) bread twice a day. 
 The meat was not done (cooked). Do not laugh at other 
 people's misfortune. If you play with the dog, he will bite 
 your (you the) hand. 
 
 74. vivre, to live 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pros, je vis, 1 live nous vivons, we live 
 
 tu vis, thou livest vous vivez, you live 
 il vit, he lives ils vivent, they live 
 
 Imp. je vivais, I was living 
 Prei je vecus, / lived 
 Put. je vivrai, I shall live 
 Cond. je vivrais, / should live ' • 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je vive, that I may live 
 Pret. que je vecusse, that I might live 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. vivant, living 
 Past, v^cu, lived 
 
 paraitre, to appear* 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je parais, I appear nous paraissons, we appear 
 
 tu parais, thou appearest vous paraissez, you appear 
 il parait, he appears ils paMssent, they appear 
 
 Imp. je paraissais, /i^as appear m^ 
 Pret. je parus, / appeared 
 Put. je paraitrai, / shall appear 
 Cond. je paraitrais, I should appear 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je paraisse, that I may appear 
 Pret. que je parusse, that I might appear 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. paraissant, appearing 
 Past, paru, appeared 
 
— 60 - 
 
 le rcpo8, t?ie peace, repose survivre a, to survive 
 
 vivre de, to live on oser, to dare 
 
 les revenus fmj, tlie income devant, before 
 
 rn vie, liviwj 
 >ous vivunj< rii rcpos. Notre voism vii do ses revenus. 
 Vous vivez heureux et conU?nt. J'ai vecu longtemps dans la 
 inis(^rc. Ce garc-oii iie vivra pas longtemps. II faut que je vive 
 commc je puis. Je ne serais plus en vie, si javais vecu comme 
 lui. II est p<^nil)Ie de survivre a ses enfants. II ne faut pas 
 vivre pour manger, mais il faut manger pour vivre. II faut 
 bien vivn* ix)ur bien mourir. Vous me paraissez un pen triste. 
 Qu'avez-vous fait ? 11 paralt que vous n*^tes pas content. Je n'ose 
 j)araitre devant mon pi^rc. Quoique je vous aie paru fachd, je 
 no ratals pas. Je paraitrais moins triste, si je pouvais sortir. 
 Mon flrdre n'est plus fach^; ii paraitra demain tout change. 
 
 7S. suivre, to follow 
 
 Indioatiye Mood. 
 Profl. je suis, I follow nous suivons, tve follow 
 
 tu suis, thou foUoweM vous suivez, you follotc 
 il suit, hv follows ils suiveut, they follow 
 
 Imp. je suivais, / was following 
 Pret. je suivis, / foUowed' 
 Fut. je suivrai, / shall follow 
 Cond. je suivrais, / should follow 
 
 SubjuDotive Mood. 
 Pres. que je suive, that I may follow 
 Pret. que je suivisse, that I might follow 
 
 Participles. 
 Prea. suivant, following ^ 
 
 Pwi suivi, followed 
 
 coudre, to sew 
 
 Indieative Mood. 
 Proi. je couds, / seiv nous cousons, we sew 
 
 tu couds, thou sewest vous cousez, you sew 
 il coud, he setvs ils cou^ient, thty new • 
 
— 51 — 
 
 Imp. je cousais, I was sewing 
 Pret. je cousis, I sewed 
 Put. je coudrai, I shall sew 
 Oond. je coudrais, / should sew 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je couse, that I may sew 
 Pret. que je cousisse, that I might sew 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. cousant, sewing 
 Past, cousu, seioed 
 
 le conseil, the advice le rempart, the rampart 
 poursuivre, to pursue dependre, to depend 
 le rat, the rat sous, under 
 
 Pourquoi me suivez-vous ? Je ne vous suis pas. Yous ne 
 voulez pas que je yous suive. Yous m'avez defendu de vous 
 suivre. Je ne vous suivrai plus. Ce chieu me suivait autrefois, 
 il me suivrait encore, si je voulais. Suivons les bons conseils 
 qu'on nous donne. Get homme me poursuit; il m'a poursuivi 
 toute la journee. Je voudrais qu'il ne me poursuivit plus. Les 
 chats poursuivent les rats. Nous poursuivimes Tennemi jusque 
 sous les remparts. Que cousez-vous la, mesdemoiselles ? Nous 
 cousons des habits pour les pauvres. Nous avons cousa toute 
 la journee. Coudrez-vous encore domain ? Nous coudrions toute 
 la semaine, si cela dependait de nous. 
 
 76. sobrement, soberly gai, gaie, lively 
 
 avoir de quoi vivre, to have I'exemple fm. j, the example 
 
 means to live on le cr^ancier, the creditor 
 
 le sein, the bosom tranquillement, quietly 
 
 VdiGGident (m.)jthe accident probablement, probably 
 
 Those who wish to live long, must live soberly. Has your 
 friend means to live on ? He lives on his income. I live quietly 
 in the (au) bosom of my family. You will still live long. My 
 uncle would probably still be living, if he had not met with 
 (had) that accident. I wish that he was still living. This child 
 was still living this morning. It has not lived long. His sister 
 
~ 52 — 
 
 will not live long either. You appear to be sad. How do you 
 do, my fViend? It seems that you are not always well. Your 
 brothers seem to be very lively. Follow me. I will follow you. 
 Your brother was the first, and the others followed him. We 
 will follow your example. Who pui*sues thee ? We are pursued 
 by (de) our creditors. j 
 
 77, nuitre, to be bom 
 
 Indio&Uve Mood. 
 Pwf. j<* iKus, y fnn u'l- nous naissons, we are bom 
 
 tu nais, thou or' vou< ii;ii«oz, yon are bom 
 
 il nait, he isbor , they are bom 
 
 Imp. j^ iiai--.ii-, / 
 Pwt. jc naqiiis. / / 
 Fut. J'* naitrai. / 
 Cond. jr iiailraU, / 
 
 Subjanotive Mood. 
 Pwi. que je uaisse, Uiat I U' born 
 Prti que je naquisse, that I were bom 
 
 Partioiplat. 
 Pres. iiaissant, being bom 
 Put. lie, born 
 
 croltr©, to grow 
 
 IndioatiTO Mood. 
 Ptm. je crois, I grow nous eroissons, ive grow 
 
 tu crois, thou growest vous croissez, you grow 
 il croit, he grows ils croissent, they grow 
 
 Imp. je croissais, I was qrowinq 
 Pwt. je crAs, I grew 
 Fnt. je croitrai, / shall yrow 
 Cond. je croitrais, T should grow 
 
 Subjanotive Mood. 
 Prw. que je croissc, that I may grow 
 Pret. que je crusse, that I might grow 
 
 Paiiieiplofl. 
 Pros, croissant, growing 
 Past, crti, grown 
 
— 53 — 
 
 mil, thousand le doigt, the finger 
 
 feu, late^ deceased ksuQ d'oeil, visibly 
 grandir, to grow tall mauvaise herbe, ill weed 
 
 Quand 6tes-vous n^? Je suis ne I'an mil huit cent dix. Si 
 j'etais lie un an plus tot, je serais ne la m^me amiee que vous. 
 Feu mon pere naquit avant ma tante. Mon oncle est ne apr^s 
 la mort de son pere. Nous naissons tons pour mourir. Je suis 
 ne pour etre malheureux. Ma petite soeur est nee au mois 
 d'Aoiit. Elle ne grandit pas. Yous avez bien grandi depuis 
 que je ne vous ai vu. Je ne sais si je grandirai encore. Si je 
 grandissais encore d^un doigt, je serais aussi grand que vous. 
 Get arbre croit bien. Les jours commencent a croitre. Yous 
 ^tes bien petit; vous ne grandirez plus. Yotre frere grandit a 
 vue d'oeil. Mauvaise herbe croit toujours. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 7Sm se taire, to he silent 
 
 Indicative Mood, 
 je me tais, / am silent 
 tu te tais, thou art silent 
 il se tait, he is silent 
 nous nous taisons, we are silent 
 vous vous taisez, you are silent 
 ils se taisent, they are silent 
 
 je me taisais, / ivas silent 
 je me tus, / was silent 
 je me tairai, / shall he silent 
 Cond. je me tairais, I should he silent 
 Subjunctive Mood, 
 que je me taise, that I he silent 
 que je me tusse, that I were silent 
 
 Participles, 
 sq taisant, heing' silent 
 tu, heen silent 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner: 
 
 plaire, to please ; se plaire, to take pleasure^ 
 
 to enjoy one^s self 
 
 Imp. 
 Pret. 
 Put. 
 
 Pres. 
 Pret. 
 
 Pres. 
 Past. 
 
- 54 — 
 
 aimer inieux, to prefer j like better ravcnir Cm.), (Jie future 
 
 Ce jardin me plait bcaucoup, mais ces prairies ne me plai- 
 sent pas. Je ne me plais pas a la campagne. Je iiie plai.sais 
 mieux a la ville. Vous plaisez-vous ici? Nous nous plaisons 
 ici mieux que chez nous. Cela vous plait k dire. Venez ici, 
 s'il vous plait. Faites-le quand il vous plaira. Quo vous plait- 
 il? Cela ne m'a pas plu. Taisez-vous. Ma sceur ne pent se 
 taire. J'aime mieux me taire que de parler mal. Nous nous 
 taisons quand tout le moude parle. On veut que je me taise. 
 Pourquoi me tairais-je? Je ne me tairai plus a Tavenir. 
 
 79. la Kussie, Russia deplaire, to displease 
 le grain, the corn davantage, more 
 je suis nd, I'(liaue been) UHis bom 
 Do you know when you (have been) were bom? 1 (have 
 been) was born in winter. This girl (has been) was born in 
 Russia. Every Ixxly is born to die. This boy (has been) was 
 born after the death of his father. I wish (that) we were (Pwi 
 Salg.) born in this country. This tree will not grow any more. 
 The corn grows visibly. This book pleases me. This garden 
 would please me better, if it were larger. My bonnet will pro- 
 bably not please you. I always enjoy myself better in the 
 country than in town. Why are you not silent? I cannot be 
 silent, when I see something which displeases me. 
 
 SOm pleuvoir, to rain 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. il pleut, it rains 
 Imp. il pleuvait, it toas raining 
 Prei il plut, it rained 
 Fut. il pleuvra, it ivill rain 
 Oond. il pleuvrait, it would rain 
 
 Sabjunctive Mood. 
 Pws. qu'il pleuve, that it may rain 
 Pwt. qu'il plut, that it might rain 
 
 Purticiples. 
 Pros, pleuvant, raining 
 Past, plu, rained 
 
— 55 — 
 
 neiger, tx> snow tonner, to thunder 
 
 geler, to freeze le vent, the wind 
 
 greler, to hail I'^clair fm.j, the lightning 
 
 faire des dclairs, to lighten 
 II va pleuvoir. II pleut ddja. Pleut-il? Non, il ne pleut 
 pas. II pleuvait lorsque je suis venu. II a plu toute la nuit. 
 II pleuvra surement. II pleuvrait, s'il ne faisait pas tant de 
 vent. Je voudrais qu'il plut. Je crois qu'il neige. Neige-t-il ? 
 Non^ il ne neige pas. N'a-t-il pas neige ? Oui, il a neige toute 
 la nuit. S'il neigeait, 11 ne pleuvrait pas. II neigerait, s'il ne 
 faisait pas si froid. Je voudrais qu'il neigeat. II commence 
 ddja a geler. II a gele cette nuit. Yoyez comme il gr^le. 
 II commence a tonner. Oui, il tonne, je I'entends. II ne 
 tonne plus, il fait seulement des eclairs. II tonnerait, s'il 
 faisait plus chaud. 
 
 SI, recevoir, to receive; apercevoir, s'apercevoir, to 
 perceive^ notice, see; to he aware of 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je reqois, / receive nous recevons, lue receive 
 
 tu regois, thou receivest vous recevez, yoio 7'eceive 
 il regoit, he receives ils regoivent, they receive 
 
 Imp. je recevais, / tvas receiving 
 Pret. je rectus, I received 
 Put. ]e receyrsii, I shall receive 
 Cond. je recevrais, / should receive 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Pres. que je reqoive, that I may receive 
 Pret. que je regusse, that I might receive 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. recevant, receiving 
 Past, rec^u, received 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Pres. je m'apercois, I perceive 
 
 tu t'apergois, thoio perceivesi 
 il s'aperqoit, he perceives 
 nous nous apercevons, we perceive 
 vous vous apercevez, you perceive 
 ils s'aper^oivent, they perceive 
 
— o6 — 
 
 Imp. j'apercevais, / was perceiving 
 Pret, j'aperi^us, I perceived 
 Put. j'ai)crcevrai, / 8?iall perceive 
 Oond. j'apercevrais, I should perceive 
 
 Snbjonoiiye Mood. 
 Pres. que j'apei^oive, that I may perceive 
 Pwi que j'a|)cr(;usse, that I might perceive 
 
 PartlotplM. 
 Pwi. apcrccvant, perceiving 
 Put aper(;u, perceived 
 
 Gbi\jugate in the fvune niAimer: 
 d^cevoir, to deceive, cGucevoir» to conceive, devoir, to o¥}e 
 
 la com^te, the comet la ruse, (the) cunning, trick 
 
 tranquille, quiet rofflcier (m.)j the officer 
 
 avertiis to warn le remade, the remedy 
 
 apportor remMe^ to remedy 
 
 •rai>or(joi8 un homnie dc loin. Nous raporcovons aussL 
 J'apor^us liior une coin^tc. Nous Tavons aix»r(;ue avant voua. 
 Je m'apcnjois bieu do la ruse, niais vous ne vou8 en apercevez 
 pas. Si mon fi'^i'c 8'apercevait du danger, il Berait nioins tran- 
 quille. Je m'en suis ft|)er(ju aujourd'hui. Si je nfen ^tais 
 aperqu plus tot, j y aurais apiM)rtd reniMe. Quand je m'en 
 aperce^Tai, je vous le diraL Ne vous en apercevez- vous pas? 
 Mon cousin s'en apercevra bien. On ne pent s'en apercevoir; 
 je ne m'en suis jamais apert^u. Je m'en serais peut-^tre aper(;u, 
 si Ton m'en avail averti. J'ai re(;u une lettre d'un ofRcier qui 
 etait en France Tannde demi^re avec mon fr^re. 
 
 82. ne — gu^re, scarcely, hardly 
 
 Do you perceive that tree there? I do not perceive it. 
 These children perceive it. If you i>erceive anything, you must 
 tell (it). We will tell you when we perceive it. I (have) 
 soon perceived this. My mother will not j)erceive it. Has 
 thy brother not perceived it? No, he scarcely perceives such 
 things. If I should perceive, that you deceive me, I would tell (it) 
 to your father. Thy cousin is very idle; his master has also per- 
 ceived it. I do not think that he perceives (may perceive) it. 
 
61 - 
 
 83. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Imp. 
 Pret. 
 Fut. 
 
 Oond. 
 
 Pres. 
 Pret. 
 
 Pres. 
 Past. 
 
 s'asseoir, to sit down 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 je m'assieds, I sit down 
 
 tu t'assieds, thou sitst down 
 
 il s'assied, he sits down 
 
 nous nous asseyons, we sit doion 
 
 vous vous asseyez, you sit down 
 
 lis s'asseyent, they sit down 
 
 je m'asseyais, I ivas sitting doion 
 je m'assis, / sat down 
 
 jem'assidrai \ i shall sit down 
 je m'asseyerai ) 
 
 je m'assierais \ j ^nould M down 
 je m'asseyerais ) 
 
 Subjunctive Mood, 
 que je m'asseye, that I may sit doion 
 que je m'assisse, that I might sit doion 
 
 Participles, 
 s'asseyant, sitting doion 
 assis, sat down 
 
 faire place^ to malm room 
 le canape, the sofa 
 (de) si tot, so soon 
 
 Je suis deja assis. Je m-as- 
 Ne Yous plait-il pas de vous 
 
 la place, (the) place^ room 
 le fauteuil, the arm-chair 
 aupres de, near 
 
 Asseyez-vous, s'il vous plait, 
 sieds la ou je trouve une place, 
 asseoir? Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. Je m'assierai pour 
 vous obeir. Dites-lui qu'elle s'asseye; dites-lui de s'asseoir. Je 
 m'asseyais souvent a terre, quand j'etais dans mon jardin. Je 
 m'assis hier dans un fauteuil, et ma soeur s'assit sur un canape. 
 Ou voulez-vous que je m'asseye? Je m'assierai aupres de vous. 
 Je me suis assis ou j'ai trouve une place. Mes soeurs ne se sont 
 pas encore assises. Si je m'etais assis, je ne me serais pas leve 
 de sit6t. Pourquoi ne vous asseyez-vous pas ? II n'y a plus 
 de place pour s'asseoir. Faites place, pour que ce monsieur 
 puisse s'asseoir. 
 
i 
 
 — 58 -^ 
 
 84. las, lasse, tired casser, to break 
 
 la pierre, t?ie stone fi c6t<^ de, by (he side of^ beside 
 
 tiiWndrej to expecty uiiti n^r derri^re, l>ehind 
 
 Sit down, my child. I am not tired. I seldom sit down. 
 Sit down, I shall sit down too. I sat down on a stone to 
 wait for my brother. Do not sit dov^Ti on that chair, it is broken. 
 We will .sit down on that sofa. Do you wish me to (that I may) 
 sit down beside you ? I sat down under the tree, thy brother sat 
 down behind me. Your sisters do not generally sit do\Mi. I 
 will not sit do^Ti, I am not tired. My uncle wished me to sit 
 down (that I might sit down) by the side of my sister. 
 
 85. 6tre asais, to be seated ^tre delx3ut, to be standing 
 roster assis, to remain seated entire, between 
 
 Je suis assis ici, mais Je ne snis pas bien assis. Ne suis-je 
 pas assis a ma place? Yous n*^tes pas bien assise, mademoi- 
 selle. Je n't5tais pas bien assis la. Si j'avais €i6 assis un quart 
 d'heure, je ne serais plus las. D^s que je ftis assis un moment, 
 je me levai. J'ai ^td assis entre vos deux soeurs. Restez assis 
 encore un pen. Je voudrais que je ne fosse pas assis ici. Je ne 
 veux pas ^tre assis la. Je voudrais ^tre assis aupr^s de ma 
 m^re. Oii dtiez-vous assise a Tc^glise, madame? J'etais assise 
 aupr^s de nm tante. Je n'y ai ^i6 assise que deux fois. 
 Pourquoi ^tes-vous dcbout, messieurs? 
 
 86. le berceau, the artxyr autour de, round 
 
 Why do you not sit down ? I have been seated too long. 
 I cannot sit down, any more. It is impossible for me to remain 
 seated the whole day. Where is your brother? He is sitting 
 before the door. My sisters sat yesterday in the garden. The 
 whole family was sitting round the table. I have been seated 
 (I have already been sitting) more than three hours. My father 
 wishes me always to be (that I be) seated. I do not like sitting. 
 If I had been sitting as long as you, I should no longer be tired. 
 To-morrow wc will sit in our arbor. Yesterday we sat there 
 the whole afternoon. These ladies are always standing, they 
 will not sit down. I cannot stand a long time, I am tired at once. 
 
59 
 
 87. ^tre aim^, to he loved 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present. je suis aime, / am loved 
 
 ' Imperfect. j'etais aime, I was loved 
 Preterit. je fus aime, / loas loved 
 
 Perfect. j'ai ete aime, I have been loved 
 
 Pret. anterior, j'eus ete aimey I had been loved 
 Pluperfect. j 'avals ete aimey I had been loved 
 Future. je serai aime, / shall be loved 
 
 Second Put. j'aurai ete aime, I shall have been loved 
 Pros. Cond. je serais aime, I should be loved 
 Past Oond. j'aurais ete aime, I should have been loved 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. que je sois aime, that I may be loved 
 
 Imperfect. que je fusse aime, that I might be loved 
 Perfect. que j'aie ete aime, that I may have been loved 
 
 Pluperfect. que j'eusse ete aioie, that I might have been loved 
 
 Imperative Mood, 
 sois aime, be (thou) loved 
 soyons aimes, let us be loved 
 soyez aimes, be (you) loved 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 Pros, ^tre aime, to be loved 
 Pret. avoir ete aime, to have been loved 
 
 Participles. 
 Pres. etant aime, being loved 
 Past, ayant ete aime, having been loved 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner: 
 je ne suis pas aime; suis-je aime ? ne suis-je pas aime ? 
 
 abandonner, to abandon babiller, to chatter 
 
 par, by; de, by relier, to bind 
 
 chatier, to chastise de tout raon coeur, with all my heart 
 
 Tu es aime de tes amis. Le pauvre est abandonne de tout 
 le monde. Honore ton pere et ta mdre, et tu seras honore. 
 Un enfant sage ne sera jamais hai. Les mechants seront punis. 
 Tu as ete chatie par ton maitre pour avoir babille. Quand mon 
 
— GO — 
 
 liTre sera reli^, je vous le pr^terai de tout mon coenr. Ta soeur 
 est aiinde de ses maitres, parce quVlle est toujours appliqu^ et 
 attentive. Cliarles a dte puui ix)ur n'avoir pas lait son tht^ine. 
 Faites votre devoir, pour que vous ne soyez pas punis. Si vous 
 remplissez vos devoirs, vous serez aimds et louds. Ces oiifantr^ 
 seraient aimers de leurs amis, s'ils dtaient plus modeste.-^. 
 
 S8. lid^lement, faithfully achever, to finish 
 
 Thy brother is loved and praise<i by his masters, because he 
 is industrious and attentive; but thou art blamed, because thou 
 dost not like (to) work. Charles has been punished, Iwcause he 
 had not finished his exercises. Finish yours that you too may not 
 be punished. Always Ikj honest antl <liligent ; (the) honest and 
 diligent men arc never despised. We were always loved by our 
 masters, because we were diligent and liked (to) work. If you 
 raithlully fulfil your duties, you will be loved and praised. I 
 hope that you will be well received by your uncle. You have 
 not followed my advice, you will eertaiuly be punished for it 
 My books have been bound. 
 
 80. il y a, i^ is, there is, there are 
 
 le mille, the mile la cave, the cellar 
 
 ii > a iiii an que je ne Tai vu. II y a une heure que je suis 
 de retour. II y a trois jours que je suis malade. II y a quatre 
 semaines que je n'y ai ^16. II y a longtemps qu'on me la dit. 
 II y a deux milles d'ici a Harlem. II y a ici un hommc qui vous 
 cherche. II y a assez de vin dans la cave. II y a une voiture 
 a la porte. II y a d(5ja des cerises. Dites-moi ce qu'il y a a 
 faire. II y a beaucoup de personnes qui disent cela. II n'y a 
 personne au logis. J'ai ^te chez vous, il n'y a qu'un moment. 
 II n'y a qu'un quart d'heure qu'il est parti. Y a-t-il de la viamle 
 au marchd? II y en a beaucoup. 
 
 90. la fabrique, the manufax^tory 
 
 les Etats-Unis (m,), the United States 
 
 Were there many people at the concert yesterday ? There 
 were a great many there. There are a great number of manu- 
 factories in the United States. There will be much fruit this 
 
— 61 — 
 
 year. Is there somebody (there) ? I see no one. Have you been 
 learning this language long? Only six months. How long 
 have you been here? Only a fortnight. Is there any more 
 (still some) wine in the bottle? There is only one glass. What 
 is there to fear? Is it far from here to Mount Yernon? It is 
 only twenty miles. 
 
 91. il est, c'est, cela est, it is, that is 
 
 c'est is used when followed by a Noun, a Pronoun, or a single Adjective: 
 il est is used when followed by an Adjective with a Verb, and in all 
 denominations of time, as: temps, midi, etc. 
 
 c'est mon frere, it is my brother c'est bon, it is good 
 
 c'est moi, it is I il est facile de plaire, it is easy to please 
 
 certain, -aine, certain douteux, -euse, doubtful 
 
 Men, very; fort, very a son gre, to his (her) satisfaction 
 
 II est vrai que vous me I'avez promis. Yous me I'avez 
 promis, c'est tres-certain. II est triste qu'il ait perdu son pere. 
 Oui, c'est bien triste. II est necessaire que je le lui disc. Oui, 
 c'est tres-necessaire. Ma soeur nous apportera peut-^tre de 
 bonnes nouvelles; cela serait bien agreable, mais c'est fort dou- 
 teux. II est difficile de faire quelque chose a son grd. II est 
 temps de partir. II n'est pas encore neuf heures et trois 
 quarts. Qu'est ce que c'est? C'est du vinaigre; ce n'est pas 
 du vin. C'est la vdrite. Ce n'est qu'un mensonge. 
 
 92. causer, to cause, give d'ou vient? how is it? 
 mal a la tete, the head-ache maigre, thin, meagre 
 c'est dommage, it is a pity faire du bien, to do good 
 
 I have been for a little walk, that has done me good. Do 
 not stay in the sun, that would give you a head-ache. It is a 
 pity you have lost your penknife. It is the first time I have 
 lost anything. It would be desirable for it to (that it might) rain 
 soon. Yes, certainly, it would be very desirable. What o'clock 
 is it ? It is still early: it is noon, it is not late. What o'clock 
 is it striking? I believe it is one .o'clock. How is it that you 
 are so thin ? Because I have been ill. Who told me that? It 
 is I who told it to you. 
 
— 62 — 
 
 93. il ftiit, U h; il vaut mieux, it is better 
 
 la rue, the street rester chez soi, to stay at home 
 
 sale, dirty dtouffant, -ante, sultry 
 
 ^pais, -aisscy thicks heavy rentrer chez soi, to return home 
 
 le pas, the step continucr, to continue 
 
 dcvant soi, before one' 8 self se niettrc a couvert, to get 
 Mger, Idg^rc, light under sMter 
 
 le brouillard, the fog V6t6 (jn.)f the summer 
 
 il fait (111 brouillard, it is foggy 
 
 il fait un brouillard tres-<»pai8, it is very foggy 
 
 il fait bien froid, it is very cold 
 
 il fait asscz beau temps, it is pretty fine weather 
 
 Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui? II fait assez beau temps; 
 mais les rues sont tr^s-salcs. Le brouillard ^tait si dpais qu'on 
 ne voyait pas a dix ])a8 devant soi. II a fait bien froid Thiver 
 dernier, et oct dtt^ il fait un chaud dtouffant. Le vent se l^ve. 
 Quel brouillard ! Cc nest qu'un l<^ger brouillard. II vaut mieux 
 rester chez soi quo do sortir par (in) co mauvais temps. II vau- 
 dra mieux rentrer chez nous que de continuer notre promenade. 
 Fait-il trop ftoid |K)ur vous dans cctte chambre ? II n y fait ni 
 trop froid, ni trop ehuud. Ne vaudra-t-il pas mieux nous mettre 
 a coiivfMt dans cette maison-la? Vous avez raison, entrons! 
 
 94, il fait du vent, it is windy 
 
 il fait beaucoup de vent, it is very windy 
 
 il fait de la poussi^re, it is dusty (la poussi^re, the dust) 
 
 point du tout, not at all, rien du tout, nothing at all 
 
 Is it warm? Is it cold? Is it fine weather? Is it not 
 ^oggy? Are you going out to-day? No, Sir, I am obliged to 
 stay at home to-ila}*. That is a pity: for it is pretty fine 
 weather. But, is it not dusty ? Not at all. Will there be much 
 wine this year? There will be very little (of it), because it has 
 been too cold this summer: but there will be much fruit. It is 
 better to work than to play. It is better to arrive too early 
 than too late. Last night it was very windy; but now the 
 weather is fine. It is better to play than to do nothing at all. 
 
-~ 63 — 
 
 95. je suis bien aise, I am very glad 
 je suis charm^, / am delighted 
 je suis fache, / am sorry 
 
 je me repens, I repent 
 
 je m'etonne, I ivonder 
 
 je me trouve bien, mal, I feel well, ill 
 
 je me plais ici, Hike being here 
 
 se baigner, to bathe consulter, to consult 
 
 habile, skillful faire tous ses efforts, to do one's 
 
 guerir, to cure utmost 
 
 le mal, the complaint I'emploi, (m,) the office 
 
 jusqu' aujourd'hui, till to-day 
 
 Je suis bien aise de vous trouver ici. Nous sommes charmes 
 d'apprendre que vous ne nous quitterez pas. II parait que vous 
 vous plaisez chez nous. Yotre frere sera fache de n'avoir pu 
 vous accompagner. Je ne m'etonne plus de vous voir de si 
 bonne humeur. Mon oncle m'a dit que vous vous baignez tous 
 les jours; comment vous en trouvez-vous ? Je m'en trouve tres- 
 bien; je m'en suis fort bien trouve jusqu' aujourd'hui. Le me- 
 decin a reussi a guerir mon mal. C'est un homme fort habile; 
 il reussit en tout. Je ne me repens pas de I'avoir consulte. 
 Suivez son conseil, vous vous en trouverez bien. Mon ami ne 
 se plait plus a la campagne; il fait tous ses efforts pour obtenir 
 un emploi; mais je crains qu'il ne reussisse pas. 
 
 96. simple, simple la maladie, (the) illness 
 
 beaucoup de bien, a great deal of good 
 
 How do you like being here ? I like being here very much; 
 but I should like it still better, if I had a little more work. I 
 (have) always liked to be in the country. Your brother takes a 
 walk every day; it does him a great deal of good; he repents (of) 
 not having followed your advice sooner. If he continue (s) to 
 lead a simple and active life, he will feel (find himself) very 
 well. The physician will not succeed in curing him of this 
 illness. I am delighted to see you again. We are delighted 
 to be able to do you this service. 
 
— 64 — . 
 
 97, flu jardin, from the garden 
 
 au jardin, to the garden^ into the garden 
 
 le cocher, the coachman le tiroir, tJie dratver 
 
 Tc^curie (/J, tJie stable le cabaret, t/t^ inn 
 
 le spectacle, t/ie theater la bourse, </«€ Exchange 
 
 la serviette, t/ie napkin rh6tel de ville CmJ, City-Hall 
 
 Ou avez-vous et(^, mes enfants ? Nous avons ^t^ a I'i^cole et 
 a rdglise. Le cocher est-il k T^urie? La servaute est^lle dans 
 la cave ? Ma m^rc a 6l6 au raarchd, et mou pi^re a la poste. 
 Nous irons ce soir au concert. Mes fr^res iront au 8i>ectaclc. 
 Mes cousins sont a la campagne depuis six mois; ils y rcsteront 
 encore huit ou quinze jonrs. Od avez-vous mis les serviettes, 
 Marie? Je me souviens de les avoir mises au tiroir. Cet homme 
 va tons les jours nu calmret. Nous avons 6i6 aujourd'hui a la 
 l)ourse. DVnl venoz-vous k present? Nous venons de la pro- 
 menade. Ma tante vient de T^glise, et i^on oncle vient de 
 ThAtel de ville. Est-ce votre Mrc qui sort <Im jnnliny Par- 
 donnez-moi, c*est le flls de notre voisin. 
 
 OS. de la, thence j from there avant d'aller, be/ore going 
 la for^t, the forest le maire, the Mayor 
 
 Where is thy brother? I think that he is in the garden or 
 in the kitchen. Have you been to school tonlay? My sister 
 has been (is) in the country since the day before yesterday; she 
 is not well. Where are you going now? I am going to church 
 with my brother, and from there I will go to the Exchange. 
 Take (carry) this letter to the post-oflBce before going to the 
 theater. Where have 3'ou put my penknife? I have put it 
 in the drawer. Whence do these boys come ? I think (that) 
 they come from the forest. When Charles comes from school, 
 send him to City-Hall; the Mayor will give him a book for me. 
 
 90^ duchagTln, (jruj] annoyance dcs connaissances, learning 
 de Tesprit, witj intelligence de vrais amis, true friends 
 arrogant, -ante, haughty des amis riches, ric7i/rie7i(Z« 
 persecuter, to persecute de la modestie, modesty 
 
 11 se peut, it may he 
 
— 65 — 
 
 Si nous avions de Fargent, nous aurions aussi des amis. Si 
 vous aviez du chagrin, vous ne seriez pas si gai. Nous aurions 
 eu du plaisir a la campagne, si vous aviez 6t6 avec nous. Si 
 vous aviez de I'esprit, vous ne seriez pas si arrogant. II se pent 
 que vous ayez des connaissanceSj mais vous n'etes pas modeste. 
 Si cet homme avait eu du bonheur, il ne serait pas si pauvre. 
 II est triste d'avoir des ennemis, qui nous persecutent. Yous 
 avez de I'argent et du bien, mais je voudrais que vous eussiez 
 aussi de la modestie et des connaissances. 
 
 100. le credit, the credit le sapin, theflr 
 pourtant, nevertheless la mine, the mine 
 avoir I'air triste, to look sad fournir, to furnish (with) 
 le chene, the oak le cuivre, copper 
 
 le hetre, the beech le plomb, lead 
 
 Have you had pleasure in the country? Have you any rela- 
 tives in New Haven? My neighbor has money and credit, but 
 nevertheless he is not satisfied. This young man has intelli- 
 gence and learning; he is very modest. I have had mis- 
 fortunes. Has your brother had some annoyance ? he looks so 
 sad. Bring me salt, pepper, mustard, and oil. In the forests 
 there are oaks, beeches, and firs. (The) mines furnish us 
 (with) gold, silver, copper, lead, and iron. Has the gardener 
 still flowers and fruit? If I had good bread, fresh water, and 
 a piece of cheese, I should be satisfied. 
 
 101. avoir faim, to be hungry avoirfroid,fo be cold 
 avoir soif, to be thirsty avoir sommeil, to be sleepy 
 avoir raison, to be right avoir besoin de, to be in need 
 former, to close, shut of, loant 
 
 a I'heure qu'il est, at this hour profondement, soundly, deeply 
 je vous demande pardon, I beg your pardon 
 
 J'ai faim. J'ai grand' faim. J'ai de Tappetit. Donnez-moi 
 a manger, s'il vous plait. Que desirez-TOus? Youlez-vous du 
 jambon ou du fromage? Je vous demanderai un peu de soupe 
 et de viande. N'avez-vous pas soif? J'ai bien soif. Yoici du via 
 
— 66 — 
 
 et de la bi^re, prenez ce que vous vondrcz. Je vais me coucher. 
 Oomment, vous voulez-vous coucher a Theurc qu'il est? J'ai 
 BorameiL Je n'ai pas dormi la nuit pass^e; j'ai besoin dc 
 repos. Vous avez dormi prolbnd^ment. Je vous deinande par- 
 don, je n'ai pas fcrmd Toeil ^de) toute la nuit. J'ai eu hieu 
 froid; il n'y avait pas de feu dans ma chain l)i^. Vous vous 
 trompez; il j avait un bon feu. 
 
 102, £LyoirhoTite,tobeas?iam€d avoir coutumc, to 6^ aocw^tomed 
 avoir peur, to be afraid avoir patience, to be patient 
 avoir piti^, to have pity avoir envic, to have a mind 
 dur, dure, hard Y\\d\nl\x\l(t(f,\thc habit ^cnatom 
 dormir lagrasse matinde, to sleep late in the morning 
 
 {the fat morning) 
 
 Comment, vous (^tes encore au lit? N'avez-vous paa honte 
 de dormir la grasse matinee ? J'aurais honte de me lever si 
 tard. Je ne puis me lever aujourd'hui, j'ai mal a la t^te. Vous 
 6tes un petit paresseux, Quand il faut aller a I'dcole, vous 
 avez toujours quelque mal. Vous avez coutume de vous cou- 
 cher de bonne heure et de vous lever tard. C'est uue mauvaisc 
 habitude. Je vous prie d'avoir patience un moment; je mo 
 l^verai aussitot. Je n*ai pas envie d'attendre plus longtemps. 
 J'ai peur d'arriver trop tard a Tdgliso. Vous avez le coeur 
 bien dur; vous n'avez pas piti<5 d'un pauvrc maladc. Vous 
 n'^tes pas mahide, vous n'avcz pas envic d'aller a lecole; vous 
 n'aimez pas Tdtude. 
 
 103, luire, to shine merci, th/ink you 
 
 How do you do, Henry? will you not take a walk with me? 
 Thank you, I have no mind to go out now. I am sleepy. Are 
 you not ashamed to be so idle ? Come, we will go to our uncle's 
 garden. What o'clock is it? It is only six o'clock; the sun is 
 still shining. You are right, it is still early; I will go with you. 
 I am accustomed to take a walk every day before going to bed. 
 That is a good habit. But we are walking too fast (quickly). 
 Let us rest a little. I am very tired. You must have patience, 
 I am very thirsty, I should like to drink some water. 
 
~ 67 — 
 
 104. commode, comfortable occupy, -ee, busy 
 
 laporcelaine,^^eporc6^am ^U^Mr^i^-iQ^thoughtlesHj giddy 
 le marbre, the marble le chatiment, the chastisement 
 
 si, aussi, as, quite as tant, autant, as much, as many 
 
 Je suis aussi grand que toi, I am as tall as you 
 
 Tu n'es pas si grand que moi, ) ^^^^ ^,,^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^ 
 
 Tu n es pas aussi grand que moi, ) 
 
 Je travaille autant que vous, / work quite as much as you. 
 Yous ne travaillez pas tant que moi, ] you do not work as 
 Yous ne travaillez pas autant que moi, J much as L 
 
 Yotre frere est-il aussi grand que moi? II n'est pas si 
 grand que vous. A-t-il autant de livres que moi ? II n'a pas 
 tant de livres que vous. La maison de votre oncle est aussi 
 commode que la notre. Ce jardin est tres-grand, mais il n'est 
 pas si beau que le notre. Yous ne m'aimez pas tant que je 
 vous aime. La porcelaine est aussi blanche que le marbre. 
 Yotre cousin etait si occupe, quil ne me vit point. II n'est pas 
 si heureux qu'il le parait. Yotre soeur est si etourdie qu'elle a 
 deja oublie le chatiment. Mon fils ne travaille pas autant que 
 vous. Yous n'avez pas travaille aussi longtemps que moi. 
 
 lOS* plus, more; le plus,^/ie most moms,less; le moins,^/ie least 
 plus de, more than moins de, less than 
 
 plus de, moins de are used for more tltari^ less tJian^ 
 
 before a Number. 
 
 Yous etes plus grand que mon frere, mais vous ^tes moins 
 sage que lui. Yotre medecin est moins habile que le notre. 
 Ce monsieur est tres-riche; il a plus de trente maisons. Yotre 
 fils est tres-applique; il a fait aujourd'hui plus de six themes. 
 Notre jardinier a beaucoup d'enfants; je crois qu'il en a plus 
 de douze. Tu as beaucoup d'affaires; mon fr^re en a plus que 
 toi; mais mon cousin en a le plus. Get ouvrier ne demande 
 pas moins de cmq ecus par jour. L'armee ne faisait pas plus 
 de quinze milles par jour. L'enfant a dormi plus de deux heures. 
 Yos ireres out ete tr^s-appliques aujourd'hui; lis ont fait trois 
 themes de plus. 
 
106. la carte, the card, map ddpoiiser, to spend 
 la recompense, tlie reward copier, to copy 
 
 Thou art taller than I; but thy brother is not so tall as I. 
 My uncle is quite as rich as thy father. We have quite as 
 many l)ooks as you; but we have not so many maps. My son, 
 thou hast been so lilligent, that thou deservest a reward. I 
 liave not spent so much as you think. 1 am quite us much 
 delighted at it as you. My sons do not work so much as yours. 
 Mr. Belmont has more children than his brother. We have 
 been more diligent to-^lay than yesterday; we have done two 
 exercises {de) more. I have much patience, but you have still 
 more (of it). Henry has copied more than te?) I'^ttir^ ti».ilay. 
 You cannot give him less than two francs. 
 
 107, tant, aOy so much d aiiiant. so much 
 
 plus plus, tfie mo7'e tht nmn 
 
 moins moins, the less — t?ie less 
 
 enrou^, -<^, hoarse encourager, to encourage 
 
 distinguer, to distinguish la gaitd, cheerfulness 
 faible, weak s'attrister, to grieve 
 
 ^onome, saving observer, to observe 
 
 qu'avez-vous ? what is tlie matter with you ? 
 Cet enfant est tout enroud, tant il a cri^. Je ne puis 
 distinguer ces lettres, tant mes yeux sont faibles. Plus on a 
 d'argent, plus on a d'amis. Plus il boit, plus il a soif. Plus le 
 drap est fin, i)lus il est lx)n. Plus on le prie, moins il le fait. 
 Moins il a d'argent, plus il est ^conome. Plus on est instruit, 
 plus il faut ^tre modeste. Je ne sais ce que vous pouvez avoir, 
 ma ch^re Julie, plus on rit ici, plus vous pleurez; plus on vous 
 encourage a vous livrer a la gaite, j)lus vous vous attristez. 
 Plus je vous observe, moins je comprends ce qui vous fait 
 tant plcurer. 0, mon cher oncle, vous ne savez pas tout 
 ce que je souflfre. Plus nous poss^dons, moins nous sommes 
 contents. Plus le jour est long, plus la nuit est courte. Moins 
 Ton ddsire, plus on est content. Plus on est ag^, plus on de- 
 vrait 6tre sens^. 
 
— 69 — 
 
 108. The Adjectives meilleur, better; pire, worse; autre, 
 oth^r^ different; and the Adverbs plus, more; moins, less; 
 mieux, better ; pis, worse ; autrement, otherwise require ne 
 before the verb following, unless the preceding verb be used negatively or 
 interrogatively: 
 
 il est plus heureux qu'on ne croit, he is happier than one thinks J 
 
 il n'est pas plus heureux qu'on croit, he is not happier than one thinks \^ 
 
 dejeuner, to breakfast s'imaginer, to imagine 
 so r^tablir, to get better souper, to sup 
 
 Ma soeur chante mieux qu'elle ne joue. Yous ^tes plus heu- 
 reux que vous ne le meritez. A la campagne j'ai eu plus de 
 plaisir que je n'en avals a la ville. Les dames parlent ordinai- 
 rement mieux qu'elles n'ecrivent. Le riche n'est pas si heu- 
 reux que le pauvre se I'imagine. Yous etes venu plus tot 
 que je ne croyais. Le menteur parle autrement qu'il ne pense. 
 Nous avons eu tant de plaisir a la campagne que nous y som- 
 mes restes plus longtemps qu'on ne nous I'avait permis. Nous 
 souperons mieux que nous n'avons dejeun^. Ma soeur s'est 
 retablie beaucoup plus tot qu'on ne I'avait espere. Un jeune 
 homme modeste parle moins qu'il n'ecoute. 
 
 109. rhomme le plus aimable^ the most amiable man 
 
 de I'homme le plus aim able, of the most amiable man 
 a I'homme le plus aim able, to the most amiable man 
 les hommes les plus aimables, the most amiable men 
 s'adresser, to address one's self important, ^ante, important 
 corrompu, -ue, corrupted positif, -ive, positive 
 
 la circonstance, the circumstance remarquable, remarkable 
 
 C'est le medecin le plus habile que je connaisse. Nous par- 
 Ions du medecin le plus habile de la ville. Yous vous etes 
 adresse a I'homme le plus corrompu de tons. Londres est la 
 plus grande ville du monde. Je me souviens encore des circon- 
 stances les plus importantes. II m'a promis de la mani^re la 
 plus positive de m'ecrire, mais il n'a pas tenu parole. J'ai 6t6 
 hier a Philadelphie; c'est une des villes les plus remarquables 
 des Etats-Unis. Nous prendrons le chemin le plus court 
 pour aller a Hastings. C'est la plus belle maison de la ville, 
 L'homme le plus riche n'est pas toujours le plus heureux. 
 
— TO - 
 
 no. rinprratitude (/J, ingraiiiude m^irc, to speak ill 
 quelquerois, sometimes affligcr, to grieve 
 
 par cxcmple, for instance prdsumer, to suppose 
 
 You complain of the ingratitude of (the) men; one some- 
 times rewards badly the most important services, and it hap- 
 pens pretty often, that those to whom one has done a great 
 deal of good, an* the most ungrateful. Your nelghljt)r Clark, 
 for instance, is the most ungrateful man in the world, lie 
 si>eaks ill of everylKxly,evcn of iiis benefactors. That grieves me 
 more than you think. Mr. Clark 8i)eak8 dilTerently from what 
 he thinks. He is not so bad as you supjxwe. The honest 
 man never speaks otherwise than he thinks. This is the most 
 learned man (that) I know. I have written more than ten letters. 
 
 Ill* qui ? qui est-oe qui ? who f 
 
 dc qui? de qui est-cc que? of tvhovi f 
 
 a qui? a qui e.'^t-ce que ? to whom? 
 
 qui ? qui est-ce que ? wliom ? 
 
 que 't quo! ? qu'est-<'e qui ? what ? 
 
 de quoi ? of what ? 
 
 i\ quoi t to what ? 
 
 que? qu'est-ce que? tvluit? 
 
 la modiste, the milliner il est question, the question is 
 Te^tudiant (m.j, the student tourmenter, to vex 
 Qui est cet homme-la ? C'est un homme tr^instruit. C^est 
 un officier franqais. Qui est cette femme-la? C'est une 
 modiste. Qui sont ces messieurs? Ce sont des dtudiants. 
 Qui sont ces dames ? Ce sont les soeurs de madame Tournon. 
 De qui parlez-vous? A qui avez-vous dcrit? Qui est-ce qui a 
 fait cela? Qui est-ce que vous cherchez? Qui cherchcz-vous ? 
 De quoi avez-vous besoin ? A qui est-ce que vous avez donn^ 
 ma canne ? De qui estK^e qu'il est question ? Pour qui est-ce 
 que vous travaillez? Quoi, vous ^tes encore ici ? Dc quoi vous 
 occupez-vous done? A quoi pensez-vous? Que dites-vous? 
 Que sommes-nous? Que vous a-t-il r^pondu? Qu'avez- 
 vous pris? Qu'est-ce que vous ecrivez? Qu'est-ce qui vous 
 tourmente ? 
 
11 
 
 112. 
 
 Singnlar. 
 
 Plural 
 
 m. 
 
 f. 
 
 m. 
 
 f. 
 
 quel 
 
 quelle? 
 
 quels 
 
 quelles ? wliich ? what ? 
 
 lequel 
 
 laquelle? 
 
 lesq'uels 
 
 lesquelles? which? 
 
 duquel 
 
 de laquelle? 
 
 desquels 
 
 desquelles? of which? 
 
 auquel 
 
 a laquelle? 
 
 auxquels 
 
 auxquelles? to ivhich? 
 
 lequel 
 
 laquelle ? 
 
 lesquels 
 
 lesquelles? which? 
 
 quel homme ? what, ivhich man ? 
 
 quelles sont ses intentions? what are his intentions? 
 
 lequel de ces hommes? which (one) of these men? 
 
 lesquelles de ces femmes ? which of these women? 
 la preference^ the preference la condition, the condition 
 
 la saison, the season accepter, to accept 
 
 Quel livre lisez-vous ? Quels fruits aimez-YOus le plus? De 
 quelles fleurs prendrez-vous ? A quels tableaux donnez-vous 
 la preference ? De quelles maisons parlez-vous ? Quels sont 
 les noms des saisons? Sous quelles conditions I'accepterez- 
 Yous ? Quel age a-t-elle ? Quel temps fait-il ? Quelle heure 
 est-il? Lequel de ces jardins yous plait le plus? Laquelle de 
 ces dames est Yotre soeur? Lesquels de ces messieurs parlent 
 frangais? Lesquelles de yos soeurs sont malades? Mon frere 
 est-il parti? Lequel? L'alnd. Ma soeur est-elle arriY^e? 
 Laquelle ? J^ai donne Yotre liYre a une de yos filles. A laquelle ? 
 J'ai regu ce cadeau d'un de mes amis. Duquel? Auxquels de 
 ces messieurs aYcz-Yous parle ? 
 
 113. blesser, to ivound la piece d'argent,if7ie piece o/mone]/ 
 iQ^e^'^m^the drawing le combat, the combat^ fight 
 le maltre de dessin, the drawing-master 
 Ya Ycnir, is going to come, is coming 
 What are you doing there ? We are drawing. What are 
 you drawing then ? Flowers. Which is your drawing, Charles ? 
 This is it. That is not badly done. Where is Louisa? She 
 is in the garden. What is she doing there? I do not know 
 (it). Does she not know that the drawing-master is coming? 
 What would he say, if she were not here ! What do you wish 
 to do with (of) this piece of money? I will giYC it to one of 
 these poor men. Who has been in my room ? To whom haYe 
 
— 72 — 
 
 you toUl it? From whom have yon heard (learned) it? In 
 which combat has your brother been wounded y Ol' which com- 
 bat did you speak? Of whom are you thinking? Which of 
 your brothers has arrived? Which of your sisters is ill? To 
 which of these girls did you give the letter ? 
 
 114. 
 
 8. k PI- Singnl&r. PlnrtL 
 
 qui lequel laquelle Icsquels lesquelles / - . ..*/. 
 
 ,^^" jduquel de laquelle dcsquels desquelles ichosc^ of which 
 
 k qui auquel alaquelle auxquels auxquelles to whom^to which 
 que lequel laquelle lesquels lesquelles tohom, which 
 
 qui, aH ihi* complement of a prepoHition, can only be oaed for peraoDS, 
 or for UiingH iH>rHonifie<l; for animalM and things not penonified we 
 uKc lequel, laquelle^ leHqiieLs, lesquelleH. 
 
 la facilitd, tase^ fluency la probite, honcMy 
 
 s'entretenir, to talk, converse voyager, to travel 
 
 Yoila un jeune hommc qui (5crit tr^s-bien. C'est une jeune 
 dame qui parlc avec beaucoup de facility. J'aime m'entrctenir 
 avec des hommes qui ont beaucoup voyag^. C'est le mddecin 
 que j'ai vu, la demoiselle que vous connaissez. Ce sont les 
 livres que vous cherchez, les tleurs que vous aimez. Oil est la 
 lettre dont vous parlez? Avez-vous vu les personnes dont on 
 dit tant de bien? C'est un horame dont je connais la probity, 
 Elle ne sait ce qu'elle dit; ils ne savent ce qu'ils font. Monsieur 
 Geri^on m'dcrivit un billet, auquel je n'ai pas r^pondu. C'est 
 de quoi jc me plains. C'est a quoi je pense souvent. 
 
 llo. sauver, to save passer, to spend (time) 
 
 lii-bas, yonder la feuille, the leaf 
 
 habiter, to inhabit tomber, to fall 
 
 convenir, to suit la valeur, tJie value 
 
 Here is the young man who has saved the child of our 
 neighbor. The house wiiich you see yonder, is that which my 
 aunt has bought. The rooms which you inhabit, are very com- 
 fortable. Do you know the lady of whom we are talking? 
 Where is the poor man to whom you have given a glass of 
 
— T3 — 
 
 water? Have you seen the child whose father is so ill? The 
 ribbons you have sent me, suit me. The days which I have 
 spent with you, have been very agreeable to me. There is the 
 tree under which we have rested so often, and whose leaves are 
 already falling. These are things whose value I do not know. 
 The young man of whom you are speaking, has departed. 
 
 116. eviter, to avoid les habillements (m. j, the clothing 
 nuisible, hurtful renvoyer, to put off 
 
 ce qui, ce que are employed for that which, or its equivalent what, 
 Trouvez-vous ce que vous cherchez ? Ce que vous apprenez 
 est utile. Comprenez-vous ce que je vous dis? Nous parlous 
 de ce dont vous parlez. Nous faisons ce que nous pouvons. Ce 
 que vous nous dites, est-il vrai? Ce que je vous dis est vrai. 
 Que mettez-vous dans votre cotfre? Nous-y mettons ce que 
 nous avons, nos habillements et nos livres. Ce jeune homme 
 sait41 ce qu'il fait ? II salt ce qn'il fait et ce qu'il dit. Faites- 
 vous ce que le maitre vous ordonne ? Nous faisons ce qu'il 
 nous dit. Yoila ce que vous desirez. Prenez ce qui vous plait. 
 Ce qui est beau n'est pas toujours utile. Pensez toujours a ce 
 que vous dites, mais ne dites pas toujours ce que vous pensez. 
 Ne renvoyez pas a demain ce que vous pouvez faire aujourd'hui. 
 Evitez ce qui est nuisible a la sant^. 
 
 117. quelque, some, amj quelqu'un, -une, ) some one 
 chaque, every ^ each quelques-uns, -unes, ) some 
 interesser, to interest chacun, -une, every one, each one 
 r^tat, the position remettre, to put hack 
 
 Avez-vous vu quelqu'un dans le jardin? Mon oncle m'a 
 donne de I'argent. Pretez-moi quelques plumes. Quelqu'un 
 viendra diner avec nous. J'ai vu quelques etudiants. Je parle 
 de quelqu'un que vous connaissez. Quelques-uns de nos amis 
 viendront ce soir. Je me servirai de quelques-uns de vos livres. 
 Voila quelque chose de beau. Nous parlous de quelque chose 
 qui vous interesse. Chaque etat a ses plaisirs. Chacun vit a sa 
 maniere. Chacun doit remplir ses devoirs. Le maitre a parld a 
 chacun de ses ecoliers. Kemettez ces livres chacun a sa place. 
 Donnez-moi quelques-unes de ces fleurs. 
 
— 74 — 
 
 118. personuCy no anejnoboily rien, noViing 
 
 aucun, -une, no, no one nul, nulle, nOj no <me 
 
 The pronouDH persoiiue, rien, nn<*iiii, mil, ore generally ac- 
 oompouied by the motive ue. 
 
 m" lacher, to get anyry uu litMi, a trifle 
 
 (^pargner, to spare rimpression (f,),the impression 
 
 lereprochCy the reproacJi rcxccption (/J, the exception 
 
 Jc n'ai rien k faire. Hien ne me fait plaisir. Je ne oais rien 
 de tout ccla. La iiiort irt^pargno p^Tsoniu*. Xiil ne ronnaft 
 Ic sort qui ratt(*ncl. Ceganjon .«e tacho pour un rien. Personne 
 ne le sait. Je ne connais i^rsonne ici. N*en ditcs rien k 
 pcrsonno. Je ne lo dirai i\ personne. Pcrsonne ne me I'a 
 donumdr. Nu! dc vou.s ne sait dossinor. Nul ne sait s'il sera 
 en vie dcmain. I^os repnK'hes ne font nulle impression sur lui. 
 Je n'ai pris aucun de ees livres. Aucun de mes amis ne viendra. 
 Nulle r^gle sans exception. Avez-vous vu quelques-unes de ces 
 dames ? Je if en ai vu aueune. Je n'ai parle a aucun de ces 
 messieurs. Je ne conn a is porsonne si savant tpie vous. Vous 
 ne plaisez a personnr. ^ m1 quelquim ici? Personne. 
 
 110. le bruit, the noiae le doUar, the dollar 
 
 rare, rare le nitrite, the merit 
 
 8'aiT^ter, to stop (one's self) veritable, trut 
 
 Every age has its pleasures. Everybody has fulfilled his duty. 
 Every noise frightens him. He stops before every mn. Each 
 of these houses costs six thousand dollars. He has made a 
 present to every one. Every one has his faults. Every book 
 has its merits. One must employ each day well. Do you know 
 any of these ladies ? I know some of these gentlemen, but I 
 know none of these ladies. Eat some pears. There are fine 
 apples, give me some. Some one has told me that you would 
 depart to-morrow. We are speaking nf s(>nielx)dy whom you 
 know. No one of my friends has (isj arrived. I have lost none 
 of my books. Nobody knows that you are here. Nothing is 
 more rai-e than a true friend. Some of these young ladies have 
 not yet linished their work. 
 
— 75 — 
 
 120. tout, everything tout, toute, every ^ whole, all 
 le tout, the whole tout (adv.), quite 
 
 m6me, same, self, even tel, telle, many a one, such 
 moi-meme, myself nous-m^mes, ourselves 
 
 toi-meme, thyself vous-m^ines, yourselves 
 
 lui-m^me, himself eux-m6mes, ) 
 
 elle-meme, herself elles-m^mes, j ^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 soi-m^me, one's self vous-meme, yourself 
 
 tout homme, every man le m^me homme, the same man 
 
 toute femme, every ivoman le roi m6me, the king himself 
 
 toute la ville, the whole city tel rit, many a one laughs 
 
 tous les hommes, all men de tels amis, such friends 
 
 Tout est perdu. Tous les hommes sont mortels. Je vous 
 servirai en toute occasion. Je vous vols tous les jours. Je Tai 
 vu moi-m6me. Le roi m^me en a parld. C'est tout le meme 
 homme que vous avez connu. Ce sont les m^mes enfants. 
 Yous ^tes toujours le m6me. J^ai achete du meme drap, de la 
 meme toile. Mes soeurs viendront elles-m^mes. Nous I'avons 
 vu nous-memes. Monsieur Charlier a ecrit cette lettre lui-m^me. 
 Yotre pere vous I'a dit (a) vous-m^me. Je te le donnerai moi- 
 m^me. II ne faut pas parler toujours de soi-m6me. Tel en 
 parle qui n'en salt rien. Le tout est plus grand que la partie. 
 Je n'aime pas de tels livres, de telles plumes. 
 
 121. les meubles (m.), the furniture la reponse, the answer 
 arranger, to arrange I'idee (f), the idea 
 communiquer, to communicate la raison, the reason 
 
 All this furniture is very beautiful. All the ladies have 
 danced. All the children have taken a walk. The whole garden 
 is well arranged. We have worked the whole day. We have 
 communicated it to all our friends. Our neighbor has bought 
 the whole. All those who were here, have heard it. It is the 
 same gentleman whom we saw (have seen) yesterday. It is always 
 the same answer. These are the same reasons which he has 
 already explained. I had the same idea. Give me some of 
 the same wine. We have sent it to the same merchant. I have 
 been there myself. Thou hast done it thyself. 
 
— 7(5 — 
 
 122. Tun, the one certain, -amo.rertain^sorm 
 
 Tautre, the other plusieurg, several 
 
 Tuu Tautre ) each other^ autre chose, something else 
 lesunslesautres) one ano^Aer autrui, others {after pre- 
 Tun ct Tautre, both 2^8itions (ndy) 
 
 Fun et Tautre Tont dit ) , ,, , 
 il8 I'ont .lit run et r.u.tro S ^"' '*"'''' '""^ " 
 ni I'uu ni I'autre no lout dit, neither the one nor the 
 otlier has said it 
 Tentr^e (/.), the entrance^ admission cnvier, to envy 
 
 II n'y a rien dc plus certain. Un certain monsieur, une cer- 
 taine dame me Ta racont<5. J'ai donne votre livre a un certain 
 ^colier. Certains ^ar^ons, certaines fillcs sent ici. Vous parlez 
 d'un certain negotiant que je connais trt>s-l)ien. II me Ta promis 
 sous certaines conditions. La clioso n'est pas encore certaine. 
 Plusieui^ dc mes amis le savent. J'ai recju aujourd'hui plu- 
 sieurs lettres. On a refttsd Tentrde a plusieurs personnes. Par- 
 lez-moi d 'autre chose. Donnez-moi un autre habit. Kun dit 
 ceci, I'autre dit cela. N'avez-vous pas d'autrc encre, d'autres 
 plumes? Ces deux fr^res s'aiment I'un Tautre. lis sont ai> 
 pliquds Tun et Tautre. J'ai pris Tun pour I'autre. Les homraes 
 doivcnt s'aimer les uns les autres. N'enviez pas le bonheur 
 d*autriil. Ne faites pas a autrui ce que vous nc voudriez pas 
 qu'ou vous fit. Ni I'un ni I'autre n'en ont parle. 
 
 123, quiconque, whoever^ every body who 
 quelconqiie, whatever 
 quelque, however^ as 
 quelque, wTiatever 
 quel que, quelle que Ac, 7vhatever 
 qui que ce soit, tvhoever he may be 
 quoi que ce soit, whatever it may be 
 queloonqiie, whateve^\ alu-ays stands after its Notin. 
 quelque, however^ with an Adjective is indeclinable. 
 quelque, whatever^ followed by a Nonn with any other Verb than 
 
 Otre, to be 9 takes an 8 before a Noun Plural. 
 quel que, whnterer, followed by the Verb ^tre, o he with a Nonn, 
 must be written in two words: quel que, quelle que, quels que, 
 quelles que, according to the Oender and Number of the Noun. 
 
— 77 — 
 
 bienfaisant, -ante, liberal aider, to help 
 
 ropinion f/J, the opinion s'y prendre, to manage 
 
 en imposer, to deceive inutile, useless 
 
 Quiconque est riche, doit 6tre bienfaisant. Je donnerai ce 
 livre a quiconque le voudra. On n'a pas bonne opinion de qui- 
 conque parle mal de ses amis. Pr^tez-moi un livre quelconque. 
 Qui que vous soyez, yous n'obtiendrez rien. Quoi que vous 
 disiez, on ne vous ecoutera pas. Qui que ce soit qui vous ait 
 dit cela, on vous en a impose. Je n'ai pas parle a qui que ce 
 soit. Quel que soit cet emploi, il veut I'accepter. Quelle que 
 soit son intention, je ne I'aiderai pas. Quelque riche que vous 
 soyez, il y en a encore de plus riches que vous. De quelque 
 maniere qu'on s'y prenne, tout sera inutile. 
 
 124. faire des reproches, to reproach attaquer, to attack 
 prendre conge, to take leave traduire, to translate 
 
 He gives to one what he takes from the other. Both are 
 vt^rong. He has reproached both; but neither the one nor the 
 other has deserved it. I have taken leave of both. These 
 brothers love each other very much; they always go out to- 
 gether. They seem to have been born for each other. Give 
 me another hat and another stick. Do not speak ill (badly) 
 of others. I have already heard the news from several persons. 
 We have spent several days in this town. I tell it to every one 
 who is wilUng to hear it. We shall defend ourselves against 
 everybody who will attack us. The law will punish everybody 
 who does not obey it. Give me any (an) exercise whatever 
 to translate. However learned you may be, there are still many 
 things which you do not know. Whatever he may say, I shall 
 not listen to him. 
 
 125. en, y. 
 
 songer, to think la hoix, the nut 
 
 Si vous allez au concert, j'y irai aussi. Yous allez peut-^tre 
 a Teglise, j'y vais aussi. Yous dites que mon livre est sur la 
 table; il y etait, mais il n'y est plus. Songez-y un pen. Qui, 
 j'y songerai. Yous venez de la ville; j'en viens aussi. Avez- 
 
— 78 — 
 
 V0U8 du papier? J'en avals, mais je n'en ai plus. Qu'en pcnsez- 
 vous? Je n'en sais rien. Je vous en parlerai une autre fois. 
 Etes-vous content de nion tils ? Oui, j'en suis content. Voila 
 (lu gateau; en voulez-vousy Donnez m'en un niorceau. Voila 
 <le IVau; donnez nfen un verre. Je n'en veux plus. Voila des 
 poinnies; donnez-lui-en quelques-unes. Voila d'excellentes noix. 
 Je n'en mange point 
 
 126. verser, to pour planter, to plant 
 
 le banc, the bench la couple, the couple 
 
 My father has gone there this morning. I was not yet 
 there. My brother has gained nothing by it. I shall remain 
 1 hen* three days. Do not speak any more of it. 1 have 
 promised it to him, and I shall think of it. The ink was a little 
 too thick; 1 have jwured some water into it. Will you sit down 
 on this bench? Yes, I will sit down on it. Is your father in 
 (lie room? No, Sir, he is not there. What have you planted 
 by the side of your flowers? I have plantetl vegetables there. 
 Charles has made ten mistakes in his exercise, and I have made 
 nine (of them). Have you any money? No, I have none. 
 Have you any friends? I have still a bottle of wine, will you 
 have a glass? I thank you. I have already drunk some. I 
 have some apples, will you have any? Give me a couple 
 of I hem. 
 
CONVERSATIONS. 
 
 ±27 • Jacques et Chretien. 
 
 Jacques. Avez-vous vu le pauvre Antoine? 
 
 Chretien. Non. 
 
 J. Ah, il fallait voir comme il etait d^sol^ tout-a-l'heure ! 
 
 Cli. Qu'est-ce qu'il lui est done arrive ? 
 
 J. II etait convert de boue depuis les pieds jusqu'a la tete. 
 
 Oh. Qui Favait mis dans cet etat-la ? 
 
 J. II etait dans la prairie avec Charles et Louis. 
 
 Oh. Eh bien ? 
 
 J. Yous savez qu'il y a un fosse d'un cote. 
 
 Oh. Oui. 
 
 J. lis voulaient jouer a qui sauterait le mieux par-dessus ce 
 foss^. 
 
 Oh. Et il est tombe au beau milieu ? 
 
 J. Precisement. 
 
 Oh. II ne s'est pas blesse, j'espere ? 
 
 J. II dit que non. 
 
 Oh. Est-ce lui qui a saute le premier? 
 
 J. Oui, et les autres n'ont plus ete tentes de faire preuve 
 de leur adresse. 
 
 Oh. Ou est-il a present ? 
 
 J. Le pauvre malheureux! II est dans sa chambre pour 
 toute la journee. 
 
 127. il faUait voir, you should have seen par-dessus, over 
 
 desole, -ee, distressed le beau milieu, the very middle 
 
 la boue, the mud precisement, exactly 
 
 depuis, from * blesser, to hurt 
 
 Tetat (mj, the state tenter, to tempt 
 
 le fosse, the ditch faire preuve, to make a trial 
 
 le cote, the side Tadresse (f.Jithe skill 
 
 sauter, to jump 
 
— 80 — 
 
 "128. FK'cl^ric et Antoine. 
 
 Friderio. Savez-voua co que papa va nous achcter ? 
 Antoine. Non, qu'est-ec que c'cst ? 
 F. Je suis silr, que vous ne le deviucricz jamais. 
 A. Eh bien ! dites-lc-nioi. 
 
 P. II va nous achcter a chacun dc nous un petit cheval. 
 A. Un cheval, Frckidric ? vous badinez, vous voulez dire un 
 cheval de bois ? 
 
 F. Comnftent ! a notre ^ge un cheval de l)ois I 
 A. Je m'aniuso bien avec un choval ([(* Ixjis. 
 F. Mais n'ainieriez-vous ruis iiiitnix un vrai rhoval ? 
 A. Oh, assurdmei 
 
 F. Eh bien, je Voii> ni> qur umi.'* aunms uii siiii • I' vai. 
 
 A. Oh, (jue jo suis content I 
 
 F. Nous ponrrons faire une promenade a cheval avec papa. 
 
 A. Trotter, galo|)er, oli, (piel plaisir! 
 
 F. Vous verrez, que je serai bon cavalier. 
 
 A. Papa nous fora ajiprendro sans doute a montor a rhcval ? 
 
 F. Oui, il a <lit qu<» nous irions au printcmps au manege. 
 
 /;>,9, i:iuaut^ -i UeoflVol. 
 
 Etienne. II sera bient6t temps de nous coucher. 
 Geoffroi. I am not sorry for that, for I am very sleepy. 
 S. Je ne voudrais jamais me coucher avant dix heures. 
 
 G. And at what time would you like to get up ? 
 
 B. A huit heures. 
 
 d. I like to get up early. 
 
 B. Quand je suis a la campagne, j'aime a me lever d'assez 
 bonne heure. 
 
 G. Have you ever seen the sun rise? 
 
 12S, Biir, sure, sure trotter, to trot 
 
 deriner, to g\i£ss galoper, to gallop 
 
 badiner, to joke le cavalier, ihe horseman 
 
 le cheval de bois, the rocking-horse monter a cheval, to ride on hors^ 
 vrai, vraie, real back 
 
 asBiirement, certainly le printemps, the spring 
 
 la promenade a cheval, the ride on le manege, the riding-school 
 horseback 
 
— 81 — 
 
 B. Oui, quelquefois au bord de la mer. 
 
 G. It is very beautiful to see, is it not ? 
 
 B. Papa dit que c'est un spectacle magnifique. 
 
 G. I hope (that) I shall often see the sun rise next 
 summer. 
 
 B. Ou irez-vous ? 
 
 Gr. I do not know yet, but I think, we shall go to Saratoga. 
 
 130. Auguste et Nicolas. 
 
 Auguste. Nicolas I Nicolas ! 
 
 Nicolas. What do you want ? 
 
 A. Yenez ici. Aurons-nous aujourd'hui une legon de 
 frangais ? 
 
 N. I do not think so. Our master cannot come. Some 
 strangers have come to see him. 
 
 A. Eh bien, nous nous amuserons cette apres-midi. 
 
 N. No, my dear. Papa wishes me to do (that I may do) 
 my exercise, and to learn my lesson. 
 
 A. Mais savez-vGus ce qu'il faut faire, si monsieur Yiard ne 
 vient pas ? 
 
 N. No matter. Papa does not wish me to lose (that I may 
 lose) my time. 
 
 A. Et moi, je ne veux pas etre toute la journee clou6 sur 
 mes livres. 
 
 N. You will do as you please. But if you do not apply 
 yourself better, you never will be (anything) but an ignorant 
 (boy). You have been taking French lessons three years, and 
 you know nothing. 
 
 A. Est-ce ma faute ? 
 
 N. Certainly. It is not enough to take a few lessons a 
 (the) week, you must also apply yourself, if you wish to make 
 (des) progress. 
 
 129, le bord de la mer, the sea-side n'importe, no matter 
 le spectacle, the sight clone, -ee sur, nailed to 
 magnifique, magnificent s'appliquer, to apply one's self 
 prochain,-aine, next leprogres, the progress 
 
 130, I'etranger (in.), the stranger 
 
— 8L' -- 
 
 131. Ad^le et Elvire. 
 
 Adele. Etes-vous pr^te, Elvire ? 
 
 Blrire. Pas encore; pourquoi cela? 
 
 A. Mainan nous attend; nous allons 80itir cette apr^s-midi. 
 
 1. Oh, tant inieux! J'aime a sortir avcc maman. Atten- 
 dez un monuMit. Ai\ cours cIh rclirr nion clmpeau: od sont 
 mes gants? 
 
 A. Ne sont-iis pas (ians votre iinur : 
 
 B. Non, je les ai 6t^ ce matin. 
 
 A. Et vous ne savez pas ou vomj les avez mis? 
 
 B. Non, vraiment. 
 
 A. Vous perdez toiyours vos gants. 
 
 B. Je les ai peut-^^trc l * * ilon. 
 
 A. Je vais voir, d(»iH'« ^ liabiller. 
 
 B. Les avez-vous trouves ? 
 
 A. Oui, lis dtaient sur la table. 
 
 B. Oh, nierci, Adi^le. 
 
 A. Maman nous appello. 
 
 B. Elle sera lach^e, que nous Tayons fait attendre si 
 longtemps. 
 
 132. Alphonse et Henri. 
 
 Alphonia. Will you come with me into the garden ? 
 
 Henri. Very willingly; but I do not trust the wr-itiu.r T)^o 
 sky is getting cloudy. There will be a storm. 
 
 A. I should like it, for the land has need of rain. iiuL 1 do 
 not think that the weather will change (changes). 
 
 H. You will see (are going to see), that it will rain. Do you 
 not see the storm which is forming (itself) yonder y The wind 
 is rismg. The thunder is pealing from afar. 
 
 A. I think you are right. Did you see that lightning ? 
 
 131, pret, prete, ready se couvrir, to get cloudy 
 
 oter, to take out I'orage (m.), tfie storm 
 
 laisser, to lexive les terres (f.), the Umd 
 
 le salon, the drawing-room la pluie, the rain 
 
 se depecher, to make ftaste se former, to form 
 
 139, 86 fier a, to trust le tonnerre, the thunder 
 
 le ciel, les cieux, the sky. Heaven gronder, to peal 
 
H. Do you see those whirls of dust ? 
 A. There is the rain (which is) beginning. Heaven, what 
 a flood ! 
 
 H. It is a cloud (which is) bursting. 
 
 A. The water will certainly do great damage. 
 
 ±33, Guillaunie et Liouis. 
 
 Guillaume. Est-il vrai, Louis, que tu dois partir domain ? 
 
 Louis. Not to-morrow, but at this very moment. 
 
 G. Et pourquoi done si vite? 
 
 L. Because my father is dangerously ill, and he wishes to 
 see me. 
 
 6. Ah! quelmalheur! J'espere pourtant qu'il se retablira. 
 
 L. (May) God grant it! My mother is in (at the) despair. 
 I have done nothing but cry all (this) night. 
 
 G. Aliens, ne perds pas courage. Mon coeur me dit, que 
 ton pere en rechappera,et que je te reverrai bientot. 
 
 L. May it please Heaven! but there is not much (to) hope. 
 Good-bye, William! 
 
 G. Adieu, mon cher Louis ! Que le ciel te conserve ton pere ! 
 
 L. I thank you with all my heart. 
 
 G. Bon voyage ! 
 
 134:. Guillaunie et Ernest. 
 
 Guillaume. Sais-tu, Ernest, que le pere de Louis est a I'ex- 
 tremite ? 
 
 Ernest. I know it but too well (too much). He has been 
 struck with (fallen into) apoplexy, and there is nothing more 
 to hope. He has lost his speech (the use of the speech). 
 
 132. le tourbiUon, the whirl le courage, courage 
 I'ondee (f.), thejiood rechapper, to escape 
 le nuage, the cloud conserver, to preserve 
 les degats, (m.), damage [ment le voyage, the journey 
 
 133. a I'instant meme, at this very mo- 134. etre a Textremite, to be dying 
 dangereusement, dangerously I'apoplexie (f.), apoplexy 
 vouloir, to grant I'usage (m.), the use 
 
 le desespoir, despair la parole, the speech 
 
— 84 — . 
 
 G. Cc pauvre Louis me fait bien de la peine. Nous ne le 
 reverrons plus, si son j)^re vient a niourir. On dit qu'il ne 
 lulssii point de Ibrtunc a sa lain i lie. 
 
 E. No, he only had his salary. His widow and his children 
 are much to Ix? pitied. 
 
 G. 11 faudra (^ue Louis apprennc un m(5tior. 
 
 E Yes, without doul» 
 
 G. C'est bien dommag« , ' .11 i i.-i uuc ca.miuh il a 
 
 beaucoup de disposition p<jur I'^tude. 
 
 E. And all that now becomes useless to him. 
 
 G. Nous soiiiniL'S heureux (rjivoir tiH^ore nos parents. 
 
 13S. Jules : 31atthicu. 
 
 Jules. Did you see (the) poor little Robert? 
 MatUuen. Was it ho who was here? 
 J. Yes. 
 
 M. He was going out as I came in, but I did not know him 
 again. 
 
 J. Hbw I pity him I 
 
 M. What has happened to him? 
 
 J. He is crippled for (the) life. 
 
 M I saw (that) he had crutches. 
 
 J. He will never be able to walk, nor to do any work. 
 
 M. J low did that happen? 
 
 J. He fell down in climbing up a tree. 
 
 M. Poor fellow! Did you give him something? 
 
 J. 1 had no money, but nianuna gave him half a dollar. 
 
 M. All that is in my purse shall be for him. 
 
 J. 1 know where he lives, w(» will go (and) take it to liim. 
 
 M. Where does he live ? 
 
 J. At the other end of the village. 
 
 M. We can go there this afternoon. 
 
 184, les appointements f / . . - s; .'•/ la bequiile, the crutch 
 
 la veuve, the icidoir ni, nor 
 
 le metier, the trade grimper snr, to dimb up 
 
 la disposition, the disposUion le gar^on, the fellow 
 
 135, reconnaitre, to know again le bout, the end 
 
 estropi^ -4e, crippled le ^'illi^e, the village 
 
-- 85 — 
 X36^ I^G p^re, Martin, Robert, Elise, 
 
 Martin. Sais-tu, Kobert, que nous allons nous promener en 
 voiture ? 
 
 Robert. Oui, Elise vient de me le dire. Ou allons-nous ? 
 
 M. Je n'en sais rien. Je m'imagine que papa nous menera 
 a Fordham. 
 
 R. Ah, je voudrais bien y aller. J'aime tant les fraises 
 d^licieuses qu'on y mange. 
 
 M. Et moi, j'aime beaucoup a sortir avec papa; il a tou- 
 jours quelque histoire interessante a nous raconter. 
 
 R. A quelle heure partirons-nous ? 
 
 M. A trois heures. Ou est Elise ? 
 
 R. Elle fait sa toilette. Yoila papa, qui vient. 
 
 Pere. Eh bien, mes enfants, etes-vous prets ? La voiture est 
 a la porte. 
 
 M. Oui, papa; il n'y a qu'a prendre nos chapeaux. Est-il 
 vrai que nous irons a Fordham ? 
 
 P. Oui, puisque je sais que les fraises sont tant de votre 
 gout. Mais ou est votre soeur ? 
 
 M. Je ne I'ai pas vue, depuis que je suis rentre. Je vais 
 I'appeler. 
 
 137. Le pere, Martin, Robert, Elise, 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 Martin. Elise ! Elise I 
 
 Elise. Qu'est-ce que c'est ? 
 
 M. Papa te demande. Nous allons partir. 
 
 B. Attendez un petit moment. Je ne croyais pas qu'il fiit 
 ddja temps. 
 
 M. Tu te fais toujours attendre. Depeche-toi done. Si au 
 bout de cinq minutes tu n'es pas pr^te, nous partirons sans toi, 
 et tu resteras a la maison. 
 
 R Yoila enfin Elise. Montons vite en voiture. 
 
 136, se promener en voiture, to ride 137. enfin, at last 
 
 in a carriage monter en voiture, to get into the 
 
 delicieux, -euse, delicious carriage. 
 
 iaire sa toilette, to dress 
 
-- 86 — 
 
 B. Jo V0U8 demandc pardon, pnpa; je regrretU bcaucoup de 
 vous avoir fait attendre. 
 
 Piw. Je sais que tu avai^ (luelque cluK-^e ii laire, ma fllle. 
 Desccndons vite, le cochcr nous attend. 
 
 B. Est<*e une voiture a quatre personncs, papa ? 
 
 P. Qui, ma fille. 
 
 E. Est-clle couverte ? Peut-on la fermer en caa d'orage ? 
 
 P. Je crois que oui. Martin, |)oux-tu ouvrir la ]X)rti6rc? 
 
 M. Non, papa, cela rnVst im|K)ssihle. 
 
 P. La voilii ouverto. Elise, tu te placeras dans le fond a 
 cotd do »n(>i Et vous, mes<i«'«n< v()U8 vous mettrez sur lo 
 devant. 
 
 K Mais piApa, vous savcz bieu que je ne peux pas aUer 
 en arrierc; je men trouvc mal. 
 
 P. Nous changerons de place hors de la ville. Fouette, 
 cocher ! 
 
 138. Phillppo rt Jean. 
 
 Philippe. Veux-tu venir avec moi ? 
 
 Joan. Where do you ^jgint to go ? 
 
 Ph. A Harlem. Mes parcnU^ y sont, et ils m'attendent, 
 
 J. I certaiidy will, if Mamma allows it (me). 
 
 Ph. Va vit€ lui en demander la permission. Mes parents ont 
 une voiture: nous rcviendrons en voiture. 
 
 J. So much the better. But why did you not go with them ? 
 
 PL C'est que je n'avais pas encore achev^ ma tache. 
 
 J. Thus they have made you stay at home as a fin) penance. 
 
 Ph. Point du tout; jc ne me divertis jamais qu'aprt^s avoir 
 fait mon devoir. 
 
 J. Wait for me a moment; I am going to return imme- 
 diately. 
 
 137. descendre, to go doion en arriere, backtoards 
 
 le cas, Ihe case hore de, ottiside 
 
 la portiere, the (carriage^) door fouctter, to tchip (drive on) 
 
 ae placer, to take a seal 138, la tache, the task 
 le foud, ihe h(ick en peuiteuce, as a penance 
 
 le devant, ti^ front 
 
— 87 — 
 
 PL Ehbien? 
 
 J. I knew that Mamma would allow it (me). She knows 
 that I am in good company. 
 
 PL Mais que ferons-nous a Harlem pour nous amuser? 
 . J. Do you know how to play (at) billiards? 
 
 Ph. I know (it) a little; but my father does not wish me to 
 play (at it) (that I may play). 
 
 J. Sais-tu ce que nous ferons ? Nous jouerons aux quilles. 
 
 PL It is a game which I like much. 
 
 J. II y a tant de plaisir a voir tomber les quilles a droite et 
 a gauche. 
 
 PL There are my parents (who are) coming. 
 
 13i). Catherine et Jeannette. 
 
 Catherine. Where are you going so fast, Jane ? 
 
 Jeannette. I am going to make some purchases. Mamma 
 wants (would like) to have a few (some) ells of fine pink ribbon. 
 Do you not know where one may find some ? 
 
 C. Nobody is better supplied with (in) ribbons than Mr. 
 Robert. He has (of them) splendid ones, at very moderate 
 prices. 
 
 J. Yery well, come (then) with me. You will help me to 
 choose and to bargain. 
 
 C. Certainly, provided (that) it does not take long. 
 
 J. Are you then in such a hurry ? 
 
 C. (It is that) I have an errand to do. 
 
 J. Well; we shall have done in a moment. Another time 
 I will accompany you, too. 
 
 138. se divertir, to play [Hards assorti, -ie, supplied 
 jouer au biUard, to play (at) Ml- superbe, splendid 
 
 les quiUes (/.), the skittles (ten' modere, -ee, moderate 
 
 pins) choisir, to choose 
 
 a droite, (to the) right marchander, to bargain 
 
 a gauche, (to the) left pourvii, provided 
 
 139. Templette (f.), the purchase ne soit pas, does not take 
 ruban rose, pink ribbon la commission, the errand 
 
^ 88 — 
 
 140, Mile. Jeaimette et Mr. Robert. 
 
 Jeannette. Good day ! Mr. Robert. Can (could) one find at 
 jour hou^e fine pink riblxjns? 
 
 Robert. Oli. >t's. liHrns. TTcri' is a ctmiuN'tc* as80rtnicnt of 
 theui. 
 
 J. At how iiiucli uii {.tiic; eiLdo yuu :?ou ihc^sc i 
 
 R. Twenty-four cents. 
 
 J. You arc joking, Mr. Robert, I have bought wider ones 
 (of them) at eighteen cents. 
 
 R. I am sure, Miss, that is impossible. One can easily be 
 mistaken in (upon) tlie quality. I have some as wide at the 
 same price, (of) eighteen cents. But you will H(H)n find the 
 diflbrence between them (of them). 
 
 J. We are in a hurry, Mr. Robert, li ym i an Wi lue huvc 
 them (can give them to me) at twenty cents, I will take six ells. 
 
 R. Very well, Miss, take them. 
 
 140. riu»ortiment {m,\ (he assortment tMrnenU e€uUy 
 
 complet, -^ con^pUU ne tromper, to be mistaken 
 
 large, wide 1a difference, the difference 
 
Second Part. 
 ELEMENTS OF FRENCH aRAMMAR. 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 i. The French Alphabet consists of the following twenty-five letters: 
 
 Names 
 
 enn 
 
 o 
 
 pay 
 
 s 
 
 err * 
 
 ess 
 tay 
 
 8 
 
 vay 
 
 ix 
 
 ee greek 
 
 zed 
 
 2. The letters are divided into two general classes: Vowels and Con- 
 sonants; the vowels are: a, e, i, O, U, y. All other letters are consonants. 
 
 3. For a full explanation of the Principles of French Pronunciation, 
 the learner is referred to the Short Guide to French Pronunciation, preceding 
 the First Course of this Method. For oral exercises .in French Eeading 
 and Spelling with pupils of a tender age, AHN'S French Primer and 
 Reading-Charts should be employed. 
 
 
 Names 
 
 
 a A 
 
 ah 
 
 n N 
 
 b B 
 
 bay 
 
 o O 
 
 c C 
 d I> 
 e E 
 
 say 
 day 
 eh 
 
 P P 
 q Q 
 r R 
 
 f F 
 
 eff 
 
 s S 
 
 h H 
 
 jay ^ 
 ash * 
 
 t T 
 u U 
 
 i I 
 
 ee 
 
 V V 
 
 J J 
 k K 
 
 jee^ 
 kah 
 
 X X 
 
 y Y 
 
 1 L. 
 
 ell 
 
 z Z 
 
 iiiM 
 
 emm 
 
 
 1 j to be pronounced like s in pleasure. 
 
 2 a to be pronounced as in fast. 
 
 3 The French name of this letter cannot be represented by English letters; it must 
 be learned from the. mouth of the teacher. 
 
 4 err to be pronounced as in ferry, 
 
 89 
 
— 90 — 
 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 4. The Parte of Speech in French are nine, namely: the Article, the 
 Noon, the Adjective, the I*ronoun, the Verb, the Adverb, the Preposition, 
 the Conjunction, and the Interjection. Articles, Nouuk, Adjectiven, and 
 Pronouns are declined; Verbs are conjugated; Adverbs, Prepositions, Con- 
 jnnotioiiB, and Intezjections are oninflected. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 5. Articles are little words which we put before noons to limit their sig- 
 nification. In French, they are distmgaiahed as: 
 
 Singiitar. Plural. 
 
 mtuc. ftm, boikffendert, 
 
 the Definite Article: le, la les the 
 
 the Indefinite Article: on, line — a, an 
 
 the Partitive Article: du, de la des some, tmy 
 
 [L 1. 9. 7. «.r 
 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 6. A Norm is the name of a person, place, or thing, as: femme, tooman; 
 G^es,(?fnoa; maison, house. The noons are divided, as in Finglish, into 
 two general classes: lYoper and Conmion. Proper noons aie the names of 
 individual persons, or Uiings, as: Pierre, Peter; Londres, London; common 
 nouns are the names of a class of persons, or things, as: oiseao, bird; homme, 
 ftutn, 
 
 7. Nouns have modifications of three kinds, namely: Numbers, Genden, 
 and Cases. 
 
 Numbers. 
 8* Number is the distinction between one and more than one, usually 
 expressed by some difference in t^^rmination. 
 
 9. There are two numl>ers, the Singular and the Plural; the singular 
 denotes one object, as: un livre, a book; the plural denotes more than one 
 object, as: les enfants, the cfiUdren. 
 
 Formation of the Plural. 
 
 10. The Pluml is regularly formed by adding s to the singular, as: la 
 feuille, the leaf; les feuilks. the leaves. 
 
 11. Nouns which eud in the singular in Sy Xy or z, are alike in both 
 numbers, as: le fils,^ son; les fils, the sons; la voix, the voice; les voix, the 
 voices. 
 
 12. Nouns ending in au or eu add x for the plural, as: le chapeau, the 
 hat; les chapeaux, the hats; le jeu, tiie game, les jeux, the games. 
 
 13. Nouns ending in al change this termination into aux^ as: le 
 choval, the horse; les chevaux, the hones. 
 
 * These numbers cite the Exercises which refer directly to the Roles in question; 
 the BoQUUi figures indicate the Cowrtet, the Arabic figures the Excrdsa. 
 
— 91 — 
 
 I4i Mark the following exceptions: 
 
 le bijou, the jewel les bijoux, the jewels 
 
 le caillou, the pebble les cailloux, the pebbles 
 
 le chou, the cabbage les choux, the cabbages 
 
 le genou, the knee les genoux, the knees 
 
 le hibou, the owl les hiboux, the ends 
 
 le joujou, the plaything les joujoux, the playthings 
 
 le bal, the ball les bals, the balls 
 
 le carnaval, the carnival les carnavals, the carnivals 
 
 le cal, the callosity les cals, the callosities 
 
 le chacal, the jackal les chacals, the jackals 
 
 le regal, the regale '' les regals, the regales ' - 
 
 le bail, the lease les baux, the leases 
 
 le corail, the coral les coraux, the corals 
 
 I'emaU (m.), the enamel les emaux, the enamels 
 
 le soupirail, the air-hole les soupiraux, the air-holes 
 
 le travail, the work * les travaux, the works 
 le vantail, ^/ie leaf (of folding-doors) les vantaux, ^/le leaves (of folding-doors) 
 
 I5i The following are still more irregular: 
 
 le ciel, the sky, Heaven les cieux, the heavens 
 
 I'oeil (m,), the eye les yeux, the eyes 
 
 raieul Cm ) //le arandfaiher \ ^^^ ''"'^''^^' ^^'' Orandfathers 
 1 aieul rm. ;, t/ie granajaJm j j^^ ^..^^^^ ^^^ ancestors 
 
 [I. 49. 50. 73. 74. 7S. 76.] 
 
 16. Compound nouns consisting of a noun and an adjective, or of a noun 
 and a pronoun, or of two nouns, vary both parts to form the plural, as: 
 la basse-cour, the poultry-yard; les basses-cours, the poultry-yards; madame, 
 'Madam; mesdames, ladies; un chou-fleur, a cauliflower; des choux-fleurs, 
 caulijiowers. [i. 9j. gg,] 
 
 17. When a compound noun is formed of two nouns, with a preposition 
 between them, the sign of the plural is added to the first noun only, as: 
 un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow; des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 
 
 18. In words compounded of a noun with a verb or a preposition, the 
 noun alone takes the mark of the plural, as: I'avant-coureur, the forerunner, 
 lesavant-coureurs, the forerunners. 
 
 19. Compound nouns consisting of two indeclinable parts of speech, are 
 alike in both numbers, as: le passe-partout, the pass-key; les passe-partout, 
 the pass-keys. To these a few others may be added, which follow the same 
 rule, although one or even both of the component parts are nouns, as: 
 le reveille-matin, the alarm-clock; des reveille-matin, alarm-clocks ; le tete- 
 a-tete, the private interview; des tete-a-tete, private interviews. 
 
 • I© travail, the trave, becomes les travails, the trave$. 
 
— 92 — 
 
 20. Some noons (from the nature of things meant) hare no plural, as: 
 Tor, gold; le vif-argent, quicksiiver: la jeimease, ywih; others have uo 
 singular, as: les environs, the environs; les frais, esqMfises; lee moeurs, mo/t- 
 fiers; les gens, people; les yivres, victuals, 
 
 21. Several nouns have two different meanings for the singular, and for 
 the plural; in the plural, however, the greater part of them are frequently 
 used with either meaning. 
 
 le ciscau, the chisel IflS dseaux, the sducrs 
 
 la d^fense^ the defence les dtfenses, the tu^es 
 
 le fer, iron les fers, the chains, fetters 
 
 le gage, the pled^je les gages, the wages 
 
 la lettre, the letter les lettres, the literature 
 
 la lunette, the spy-glass les lunettes, the speetades 
 
 le neveu, the nephew les neveuz, the descendants 
 
 la petite maison, the little house les petitas-maisons, the lunaHe asytum 
 
 la tablette, the shelf les tablettes, the table-book 
 
 la troupe, the crowd les troupes, the droops, soldiers 
 
 Cendsrt. 
 
 22. There are only two Genders in French, the Mssouline and the 
 Feminine. The Bfasculine Gender is that which denotes perMUis or animals 
 of the male kind, au: le p^ the father, le lion« the lion; the Feminine 
 Gender is that which denotes persons or animals of tho feimilo kiiul. as: 
 la mere, the mother, la lionne, the lioness 
 
 23. The sexes are generally distinguisned ny the use oi (iittrniu ur- 
 minations. Many nouns become feminine by merely adding a mute e to the 
 masculine, as: 
 
 un commer9ant, a trader une commer9ante, a tradesiooman 
 
 un Fran9ais, a Frenchman une Fran9ai8e, a French woman 
 
 le berger, the shepherd la bergtee. the shepherdess 
 
 le cousin, the cousin (masc.) la oousine, the cousin (fern.) 
 
 un ours, a he4>ear une ourse, a sAe-6ear 
 
 24^ Nouns ending iu an, on, ien, become feminine by doubling the 
 final n, and adding e, as: 
 
 le baron, the baron la baronne, the baroness 
 
 le paysan, the peasant (masc) la paysanne, the peasant (fern.) 
 
 le musician, the musician (masc.) la musicienne, the musician (fern.) 
 
 25. Many nouns in e become feminine by adding 886, as: 
 le comte, the count la comtesse, the countess 
 le tigre, ^e tiger la tigresse, the tigress 
 
 26. Nouns ending in eur, if derived from French verbs, become 
 feminine by changing eur into euse, as: 
 
 le chanteur, the singer (masc.) la chanteuse, the singer (fern.) 
 le danseur, the dancer (masc.) la danseuse, the dancer (fern.) 
 
93 
 
 27. Nouns ending in teur, and not derived from French verbs, be- 
 come feminine by changing teur into trice, as: 
 
 I'acteur, the actor I'actrice, the actress 
 
 I'instituteur, the teacher I'institutrice, the lady-teacher 
 
 28. To the foregoing rules there are many exceptions. The following 
 are worthy of notice: 
 
 le loup, the he-wolf 
 
 I'epoux, the husband 
 
 le juif, the Jew 
 
 le veuf, the widower 
 
 un abbe, an abbot 
 
 Dieu, God 
 
 un larron, a thief (masc.) 
 
 im due, a duke 
 
 le gouvemeur, the governor^ tutor 
 
 le roi, the king 
 
 I'empereur, the emperor 
 
 la louve, the she-wolf 
 
 I'epouse, the wife 
 
 la juive, the Jewess 
 
 la veuve, the widow 
 
 ime abbesse, an abbess 
 
 une deesse, a goddess 
 
 une larronnesse, a thief (fetn. ) 
 
 une duchesse, a duchess 
 
 la gouvemante, the governess 
 
 la reine, the queen 
 
 rimperatrice, the empress [i. 39, 40.] 
 
 29 1 The noun gens, people ^ has the peculiarity that all adjectives 
 before it are used in the feminine, and all adjectives after it in the mas- 
 culine gender. To this there is only one exception, namely the adjective 
 tout, all^ which remains masculine before g'ens, if not accompanied 
 by another adjective which has a particular feminine termination; thus, we 
 say: 
 
 dangerous people 
 
 very dangerous people 
 
 all sensible people 
 
 all honest people 
 
 all this good people 
 
 all this bad people. 
 
 business-men, gens de lettres, literary meUf 
 
 de dangereuses gens 
 des gens fort dangereux 
 tous les gens senses 
 tons les honnetes gens 
 toutes ces bonnes gens 
 toutes ces mechantes gens 
 
 30. The nouns: gens d'affaires, 
 and the like, are always masculine. 
 
 31. The names of things without life have no particular gender in 
 French, but are said to be either masculine or feminine, according to rules 
 which do not here admit of explicit statement. In the main, therefore, the 
 gender of these nouns must be learned by experience, but the following 
 practical rules will be found of value. 
 
 Gender as determined by the meaning. 
 
 32. Masculine are the names of the seasons, months, and days of the 
 week, of metals, and trees, as: le printemps, spring; le dimanche, Sunday; le 
 chene, the oak; le fer, iron. 
 
 33. Feminine are most names of plants, fruits, and flowers, the names of 
 sciences, virtues, and vices, as: la poire, the pear; la prune, the plum; la 
 chimie, chemistry; la paresse, idleness. 
 
— 94 — 
 
 Gender at determined by the ending. 
 94% IfMeoline are the greater number of words in al, et, ant, ent; 
 Also those in au. eu. OU, age, and 6ge; an: lo metal, the metal; le 
 secret, the secret; le chaut, the song; le btttiment, the buUding; le marteau, 
 Uie tiamttier; le feu, the fire; le cou, tU neck; le dommage, the damage; le 
 piege, the trap. 
 
 35. Feminine ure most iimius m eur. 6886, ance, and eilCC; abw 
 those in 6e, t^. tie, uml in son or ion; as: lerreur, the error; la vitesse, 
 the quicknesg; la patience, pat it nm^, the day; la bont^ the kitid- 
 
 ness; la maiaon, the hmue; la ^ creation; la paanon, passion. 
 
 36i A considerable number of nouns are of both gendeiB, with a diffe- 
 rent meaning for each gender, as: 
 
 Ma. 
 
 ^aid^ ihs ei89iakmi Taide, ih$ aasialanm 
 
 Tanne, (he aider Taime, 1h$ eU 
 
 le liyre, (Ae 6oofe Hlim, (ktpoui^ 
 
 lo manche, the handle la manche, the sleeve 
 
 le page, the patje (serving^bcy) la page, (he page (of a book) 
 
 le somme, the nap, sleep la aomme, the sum 
 
 le soiiris, the smile la sonris, (he mottse 
 
 le tour, the tour, turn la tour, (he tower 
 
 le voile, (he veil la Toile, (he sail 
 
 Cases. 
 
 37. Gasea denote the relation which a noun sustaina to other words in 
 the sentence. 
 
 38. There are four casee: the KominatiTe answering to the English No- 
 minative, the Genitive answering nearly to the English Possessive, or Ob- 
 jective with of; the Dative corresponding to the English Objective with to oi 
 for; the Accusative nearly the same with the English Objective. The 
 nominative and accusative of nouns are always alike. 
 
 The Declension of Nouns. 
 
 39. The declension of a noun is a regular arrangement of its nnmberF 
 and cases. 
 
 40 Nouns preceded by the Definite Article are declined as follows: 
 
 Singular. * Wurtl. 
 
 Norn, le pere, the father les peres, the fathers 
 
 Gen, du pere, of the father, thefather^s des peres, of the fathers, the faUiers* 
 Ott au pere, to the father aux p^res, to the fathers 
 
 Aoc le p^, the father les peres, the fathers. 
 
— 95 — 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. la mere, the mother les m^res, the mothers 
 
 Gen. de la mere, of the mother des meres, of the mothers 
 
 Dat. a la mere, to the mother aux meres, to the mothers 
 
 Ace. la mere, the mother les meres, the mothers 
 
 Nom. I'enfant, the child les enfants, the children 
 
 Gen. deVenfamtjOf the child des enianiE, of the children 
 
 Dat a I'enfant, to the child aux enfants, to the children 
 
 Ace. I'enfant, the child les enfants, the children 
 
 Nom. I'heure, the hour les heures, the hours 
 
 Gen. de I'heure, of the hour des heures, of the hours 
 
 Dat. a I'heure, to the hour aux heures, to the hours 
 
 Ace. I'heure, the hour les heures, the hours 
 
 p. 33. 34, 35. 36.] 
 
 41. All nouns that begin with a vowel, • or non-aspirated li take 1' 
 (with the apostrophe) instead of le or la; instead of le arbr^, we say 
 I'arbre, the tree; instead of la ecole, I'ecole, the school. [l- 37. 38.] 
 
 42. The characteristic of the French declension is that it forms the 
 genitive and dative cases by prefixing de and a to the nominative; at the 
 same time, the articles le and les, thus preceded by de and a, are 
 contracted as follows: 
 
 de le into du de les into des 
 
 a le *' au a les '* aux 
 
 The contractions du and au are never used with nouns beginning with 
 a vowel, or non-aspirated li. [I- ^1- ^^' ^3- ^^' ^3- ^^'1 
 
 43. Nouns with the Indefinite Article are declined as follows: 
 Worn, un jardin, a garden une ville, a town 
 Gen. d'un jar din, of a garden d'une ville, of a town 
 Dat. a un jardin, to a garden a une ville, to a town 
 Aec. un jardin, a garden une ville, a town 
 
 Mark the elision of the e in d'un, d'unc. 
 
 44. Nouns preceded by the Partitive Article are declined as follows: 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. du pain, some bread de la viande, some meat 
 
 Gen. de pain, of some bread de viande, of some meat 
 
 Dat. a du pain, to some bread a de la viande, to some meat 
 
 Ace. du pain, some bread de la viande, some meat. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. des cerises, some cherries 
 
 Gen. de cerises, of some cherries 
 
 Dat a des cerises, to some cherries 
 
 Ace. des cerises, some cherries [i. 77. 78, II. 99. too.} 
 
— 96 — 
 
 45. Partitive notms prcce<icfl by an adjectire, take in all casos the pre- 
 position do inHtead of du, de la, de V, des; with a following ad- 
 jective, however, a partitive noun retains its article. 
 
 Horn, de bon pain, good bread de belles flours, beautiful jlomers 
 
 Qoo. de bon pain, of good brmd de belles fleurs, of beautiful fiowera 
 
 Oat k de bon pain, to good bread k de belles fleors, to beavlifvdfiovDera 
 
 Ace de bon pain, good bread de belles flenrs, beauiiful floicera 
 
 Norn, du vin rouge, red voim de la bi^ f^che, fresh beer 
 
 Gen. de vin rouge, of red toiiM de bi^ firalohe, of fresh beer 
 
 Dat & du vin rouge, to rtd wbiM hde]^ hikre fralobe, to fresh be^r 
 Ace du vin rouge, red wine de la bi^ Iraiche, fresh beer 
 
 (I. 179, ISO. 181. 1S9.] 
 
 46. Proper nouns are declined by prefixing the prepositions de and &• 
 
 Norn. Paris, Paris Emilie, F 
 
 Gen. de Paris, of or from Paris d'Emilie, 
 
 Ott & Paris, to Paris k Emilie, iu EmiLy 
 
 ^oc Paris, Paris Emilie, Emiiy 
 
 47* Proper nouns strictly used as sach, have no plural. When several 
 persons of Uie same name are spoken of, the noun takes the article IcSy 
 as: les deux Caton, the tiDo Oatos; but when such nouns are used to denote 
 character, they follow the rule of common nouns, as: La France a eu ses 
 G&MO^; F)rance has had her Oossara. [L <7. 4S,] 
 
 48. The French uses capital initial letters at the beginning of sentences, 
 of lines in |>oetry, and for all Proper Names; but adjectives derived from 
 proper names of persons or places should begin with small letters, as: 
 anglais, English. 
 
 Use of the Articles. 
 
 49. The Definite Article regularly stands in French before a noun when 
 taken without limitation, in its most universal sense, as: lliomme est mortel, 
 man is mortal. It should always be repeated before several nouns in the 
 same construction, as: les soldatset les oflaciers, the soldiers and officers. 
 
 50. It is also prefixed to the names of countries, continents, and of the 
 points of compass, as: la France, France; I'Angleterre, England; TEurope, 
 Europe; le nord, the North. After the preposition en, however, the article 
 is omitted: en France, in FYaJice. 
 
 51. In genen\l, the Indefinite Article is used in French nearly as in En- 
 glish, but there are a few differences of importance. 
 
 52. The Indefinite Article is used in English, and nO article in French, 
 before nouns which express titles, professions, nationalities, etc., as: 
 
 votre frere est medecin your brother is a physician 
 
 etes-vous Fran^ais ? are you a Erenchman ? 
 
— 9t — 
 
 53. By a like usage no article is employed in French before a noun 
 used to explain a preceding noun or pronoun, and in the titles of books; as: 
 
 Paris, capitale de la France Paris, tJie capital of France 
 
 Grammaire de la langue fran^aise A. grammar of the French langiLage. 
 
 54. In place of the indefinite article a, an^ with a distributive sense, 
 before nouns of measure, weight, and number, the French employs the 
 definite article le, la, as: 
 
 les oeufs valent trente sous la douzaine; eggs are worth thirty cents a dozen 
 le beurre se vend vingt sous la livre; butter is sold for twenty cents a pound. 
 
 55. The Partitive Article du, de la, de 1', des, is used in French 
 when we want to express an indeterminate number, or a part of a thing; it 
 answers to the English some or any expressed, or understood; as: 
 donnez-moi du pain, de la viande give me some bread, some meat, 
 
 et des oeufs; and some eggs. 
 
 [I. 77. 75. II. 99. 100.] 
 
 56. If the substantive is preceded by an adjective, the preposition de 
 is used for both genders and numbers, instead of the partitive article du, 
 de la, de r, des; as: 
 
 donnez-moi de bon pain, de bonne give me some good bread, some good 
 viande et de bons oeufs; meat, and some good eggs. 
 
 [I. 179. ISO. 181. 182.] 
 
 57. In the same manner the preposition de is substituted for the par- 
 titive article after nouns signifying measure of extent, quantity, weight, or 
 number, and after the adverbs of quantity: 
 
 beaucoup, much, many trop, too much, too many 
 
 plus, more assez, enough 
 
 peu, little, few rien, nothing 
 
 moins, less pas, ) , 
 
 , . « , ^ . \ >no, not any 
 
 combien ? how much ? how many ? point, j 
 
 tant, autant, as much, as many jamais, never. 
 
 Thus we say: 
 
 vous avez beaucoup d'esprit; you have much wit. 
 
 vous faites trop de bruit; you make too much noise. 
 
 une livre de beurre a pound of butter 
 
 une bouteille de bon vin a bottle of good wine. 
 
 [I. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72.] 
 
 58. The words bien, rntich^ m^any, and la plupart, m^ost, 
 
 are always followed by the definite article; as: 
 
 bien du chagrin, mwc/i ^rowWe la plupart du monde, \,^ostmen 
 
 bien des livres, many books la plupart des hommes, J ^^^ ^^^' 
 
 59. When nouns are joined in a close connection with a verb or a 
 preposition, the partitive article is usually omitted. The commonest cases 
 of this omission are the following: 
 
— 98 — 
 
 aToir ooaiame, to b< aomuhmtd faire mention, to mefdUm 
 
 avoir peur, to bt afraid ftiirc crtiiit, to trutt 
 
 avoir houU;, to ttt ashamed faire atteution* to pay aUeniUm 
 
 avoir fuiui, to 6e hungry faire pbicv, to iiuUce room 
 
 avoir »uif, to be thirsty faire ])laiAir, <o yiue pleasure 
 
 avoir Hommeil, (o 6e «/ffpj/ preocbre oong6, (o (aA» (eatw 
 
 avoir cnvie, to have a inittd prendre garde, to take cart 
 
 avoir riiiKon, to l*e r'ujht prendre courage, to take courage 
 
 avoir tort, to be xcrtnyj tenir |>iirole, to keep (o)ie*s) word 
 
 avoir patience, to have patience trouvcr nioyen, to find means 
 
 avoir besoiu, to he in need of reudre seniioe, to do a service 
 
 avoir inal, to feel pain rendre vifute, to pay a visit 
 
 avGo ploisir, with pleasure Hans la^on, toUhoui oemmony 
 
 aveo patience, wiih poiimm i^ar ordre, by command 
 
 BUT teire, by land nans peril, without danger 
 
 enr mer, by sea par amiti^ ikrwigh friendship. 
 
 [U. iOl. 109. 103.] 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE 
 
 60. A!i A<lj» itivf iH a word which qualifieB or ill: .'., 
 bleu, the hlur r,7*'...;i; un grand arbre, a large tree; / 
 flower. 
 
 61. All a4)6otive8 are declinable in Frmoh, and agree in number aud 
 gender with the noun or pronoun which thej qualify. 
 
 The Plural of Adjectives. 
 
 62. In forming the plural, adjcctiveH are generally subject i. - 
 rule A as nouns. To this there are only a few exoeptiona, namely, M 
 which has bleus, and a few adjectives in at, which form their plural ■»,> »a- 
 diug 8, instead of changing al into aux. These are: 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 SI119. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 amical 
 
 amicals 
 
 frimdkf 
 
 initial 
 
 initials 
 
 initial 
 
 fatal 
 
 fatals 
 
 faUd 
 
 
 matinals 
 
 early 
 
 final 
 
 finals 
 
 anal 
 
 naval 
 
 navals 
 
 yuivdl 
 
 glacial 
 
 glacials 
 
 frigid 
 
 p<?nal 
 
 penals 
 
 penal 
 
 The Feminine of Adjectives. 
 
 63. As a general rule, Fronrh adjectives become feminine by adding e 
 mute to the masculine. Of course, adjectives ending in e mute in the mas- 
 culine, are alike in both genders. Thus we say: 
 
 le petit garcjon, the Utile hoy la petite fille, the Utile giri 
 
 un livre utile, a im^ul book mie chose utile, a xisefid iking 
 
 To this there are many exceptions. [I. 11, 19, 87, 88. 48. 44,] 
 
— 99 — 
 
 64. Adjectives which end in x in the masculine, become feminine by 
 changing x into se; as: 
 
 un homme heureux, a happy man une mere heureuse, a happy mother, 
 
 65. Adjectives in f, change this letter into ve; as: 
 
 nn homme actif, an active man une vie active, an active life. 
 
 66. Most adjectives ending in el, eil, et, en, on, as, double their 
 final consonant and add e; as: 
 
 un maitre cruel, a cruel master une bete cruelle, a cruel heast 
 
 un bon pere, a good father xme bonne mere, a good mother 
 
 du vin net, pure wine une chambre nette, a clean room 
 
 un siege bas, a low seat une maison basse, a low house. 
 
 67. Adjectives in eur when derived from French verbs, change eur 
 into euse; those with the ending teur change it into trice# The prim- 
 itive adjectives in eur, however, as, meilleur, exterieur, etc., follow the 
 general rule. [woman 
 
 un valet trompeiir, a deceitful valet une fern me trompeuse, a deceitful 
 un muscle moteur, a motory muscle une force motrlce, a motive power 
 le meiUeur homme, the best man la meillem^e le9on, the hestlesson 
 
 68. The following adjectives form their feminine irregularly: 
 epais, epaisse, thick faux, fansse, false 
 gros, grosse, large doux, douce, sweet 
 sot, sotte, stupid roux, rousse, red 
 secret, secrete, secret frais, fraiclie, fresh 
 discret, discrete, discreet blanc, blanelie, white 
 inquiet, inqaiete,. uneasy franc, franclie, frank 
 complet, comj^l^te, complete sec, seclie, dry 
 
 long, longue, long caduc, caduque, decaying 
 
 benin, benig-ne, benign public, publique, public 
 
 malin, maligne, malign turc, turque, Turkish 
 
 favori, favorite, favorite grec, grecque, Greek 
 
 69. There are five adjectives which have two masculine terminations: 
 
 / Masc.—^ . Fem. . Masc. > Fern. 
 
 beau bel belle beautiful fou fol foUe foolish 
 
 nouveau nouvel nouvelle new vieux vieil vieille old 
 
 mou mol moUe soft 
 
 The second masculine form is used in the singular only, and immediately 
 before masculine nouns beginning with a vowel, or non - aspirated h. 
 
 un beau palais, a beautiful palace un vieux soldat, an old soldier 
 un bel arbre, a fine tree un vieil habit, an old coat 
 
 de beaux arbres, fine trees cet habit est vieux, this coat is old 
 
 ime belle fleur, a beautiful flower \me vieille femme, an old woman. 
 
 [I. 105. 106. 107. 108.] 
 
— 100 — ^^ 
 
 Agreement 
 
 70. Adjectivei miut agree with tbi-ir nowns in f?onder and number, no 
 matter whether they are before them, or after then), or cousidembly remote. 
 ThuH we say: 
 
 le petit gar9on, the litiU boy nn verre oaas^ a broken glass 
 
 \a petite fille, the little tjirl nne canne caas^, a broken cane 
 
 lea petits gar9ons, the lUtle boys dee Terres caaads, broken glasses 
 
 lee petites filles, the ttttle girUt dea Cannes oeaa^s, broken canes 
 
 ce diamant est cher, mais il est bean; this diamond is dear, but it utjine, 
 
 oea tableaux sout chors, maia ila aont these pU3kHrts are dear, but they are 
 
 beaox; >bM> 
 
 oette maiaon eat oh^re, maia eUe eat this house is dear, but U is fine, 
 
 beUe; 
 
 oea maisons sent chores, mais ellea these houses are dear, bul they are fine, 
 aont belles ; 
 
 71. With the pronouns nous and vous, denoting only one penon» 
 the a4iective ia alwaya in the aingular; aa: 
 
 dtea-Yona content de mon fila? are you saHjffied wUk my son f 
 
 72. When an acfjectiTe belonga to aereral noona, CTen of different gen- 
 ders, it is alwaya pat in the maacoline plnral, onleaa all the noniiH bo femin- 
 ine; then, of course, it should be in the feminine plural; as: 
 
 mon pere et mon frfere aont aavanta; my father and brother are lenmed. 
 mon tihie et ma aoeur sont morta; my brotfier and sister are dead, 
 
 Yotre mdre et Totse aoBor aont aaTantea; your mother and sister are learned. 
 
 Comparison. 
 
 73. In French, the different degreea of quality are ezpreaaed by prefixing 
 to the adjective the adverbs plus, inore^ and le plus, the fnost as: 
 
 grand, great plus grand, greater le plus j^n^md, the greatest 
 petit, sjnaU plus petit, 5?naZ/fr le plus petit, the smallest 
 
 74. The following adjectives are compared irregularly: 
 
 bon, good meilleur, better le meilleur, the best 
 
 mauvais, bad pire, tcorse le pire, the worst 
 
 petit, little moindre, less le moindre, the least 
 
 75. The Comparatives and Superlatives must agree in gender and num- 
 ber with their nouns, the same as the simple adjectives. 
 
 [I. 41. 42. 81, 82, n. 109. IIO.] 
 
 76. All Comparatives are to be construed with the conjunction que, 
 thaUf introducing the latter term of comparison; before a numeral, how- 
 ever, plus de, moins de are used for more than, less than ; thus, 
 
 il est plus beureux que vous; he is more fortunate than you, 
 
 j'ai plus de quiuze aus; lam more than fifteen years of a/je. 
 
 [IL ids. 106.] 
 
— 101 — 
 
 77. The degree of equality is expressed by the adverbs aiissi, si, 
 as, before fidjectives and adverbs, and autant, tant, as muchf as 
 
 Tnany^ before nouns and verbs. In negative sentences these adverbs are 
 
 applied indifferently; in affirmative sentences, however, only the full forms 
 
 aussi, autant, should be employed. Examples: 
 
 je travaille aussi bien que lui I work as well as he (does) 
 
 je souffre autant que lui lam suffering as much as he (does) 
 
 .'; ie ne suis pas si grand que vous ) ^ 
 
 • . T y I am not so tall as vou 
 
 je ne suis pas aussi grand que vous [ ^ 
 
 il n'a pas tant de bonte que vous ) he has not so much kindness as you 
 il n'a pas autant de bonte que vous j (have) 
 
 pi. 104, 106.} 
 
 78. All Comparatives, and the words autre, other; autrement, 
 
 othertvise^ require ne before the verb following, unless the preceding 
 verb be used negatively or interrogatively; thus, 
 
 il est plus heureux qu'on ne croit he is happier than one thinks 
 
 il n'est pas plus heureux qu'on croit he is not happier than one thinks 
 
 [II. 108.] 
 
 79. The Superlative commonly governs, in French, the noun following in 
 the genitive case, and the verb following in the subjunctive mood; thus we say: 
 Londres est la plus grande ville du monde London is the largest city in the world 
 c'est I'ami le plus fidele que j'aie this is the truest friend I have 
 
 The Place of Adjectives. 
 
 80. French adjectives are either placed before their nouns, or after 
 them, according to the following rules. * 
 
 81. Adjectives which generally precede the noun, are: 
 
 1. beau, fine^' bon, good; grand, great; gros, hig ; jeune, young; 
 joli, pretty; mauvais, 6ad; mechant, wicked; meilleur, heiier; 
 petit, small; vaste, vast; vieux, old; vilain, ugly; 
 
 2. the Ordinals, when used wdth the definite article; 
 
 3. those which denote a characteristic quality of the whole class. 
 Thus we say: 
 
 un bon livre, a good hook le premier livre, the first hook 
 
 une petite maison, a small house un riche proprietaire, a rich proprietor 
 
 quelle jolie maison ! what a nice house! le ruse renard, the cunning fox. 
 
 82. In the following instances, the adjective follows the noun to which 
 it belongs': 
 
 1. when such qualities are specified, as are perceptible by the senses; 
 thus, 
 un habit bleu, a hlue coat une table ronde, a round tahle 
 
 dvL lait chaiid, warm milk une table carree, a square table 
 
 * For the placing of Adjectives, only the leading principles are given. To illustrate 
 their application in detail, and explain the many modifications which they admit, can- 
 not be attempted here. 
 
— 102 — 
 
 S. when the adjective is derived from the proper noon of a person, 
 nation, country, or town, as: 
 
 la laugue fran^aiae, the Eren^ kmgwig$ 
 Tempire allemand, the Oerman Brngrin 
 8. when a participle ia need as an adjective; as: 
 un verre aiRfi^ a broken glass 
 une action briUante, a brUliant action 
 A. when other words depend on the adjective, and when several 
 adjectivcH belong to the same noun; as: 
 
 un ^crivain tite-oAMire, a very celebrated writer 
 un momirque fler et puissant, a proud and mighty monarch. 
 83. In certain cases, adjectives can cither follow or precede the noun, at 
 the option of the writer. Among these adjectives a few need some attention 
 as having a different meaning, when preceding, and when following the 
 aoun. Examples: 
 une certaine nouvelle, emiabi nsies nne nouvelle certaine, sure netos 
 un honnete homme, an honeti man on homme honndte, a polite man 
 un brave homme, a good mem un homme brave, o courageous man 
 
 nne fauasedef; afalse key une clef fauase, a wrong hey 
 
 The Government of Adjectivet. 
 84* Many a4jeetivefl, when used predicatively, have some noun or pro- 
 noun for their object, which is commonly introduced by de, of; &, fo, or 
 some other preposition. Among tlu-^ie adjectives mark the following of most 
 frequent occurrence: 
 
 85. Adjectives followed by de: 
 
 absent, absent from incapable, incapable of 
 
 aflligiS, qJfUeted with inconsolnble, incon-siAuhlt for 
 
 capable, capable of indigne, xmicorihy of 
 
 content, pleased wUh las. tceary of 
 
 different, different from libre, free from 
 
 digne, icorthy cf, to m^content, displeased voith 
 
 floigne, far from plein, full of 
 
 envieux, envious of rempli, JiUed tcilh 
 
 ftich^, sorry for sur, sure of 
 
 86. Adjectives followed by &: 
 
 accessible, accessible to exact, eaad in 
 
 agreable, agreeable to facile, easy to 
 
 assidu, assiduous in inutile, useless to 
 
 attentif, attentive to necessaire, necessary to 
 
 bon, g(pod for, fit for nuisible, hurtful to 
 
 cher, dear to semblable, similar to 
 conforme, cojformable, similar to sensible, sensible of 
 
 contraire, contrary to sujet, sttbject to 
 
 difficile, difficult to utile, useful to 
 
— 103 — 
 
 87i Adjectives followed by other prepositions: 
 
 bon pour, kind towards ignorant en, not versed in 
 
 celebre par, pour, celebrated for insolent avec, insolent to 
 
 civil envers, polite to poll envers, polite to 
 
 88. The adjectives haut, hight long, long^ large, broad, require de aftei 
 them, as: 
 
 une maison haute de vingt pieds a house twenty feet high 
 
 une table longue de six pieds a table six feet long 
 
 89. In place of these adjectives, the corresponding nouns hauteur, hdght, 
 profondeur, depth, longueur, length, largeur, breadth, are more commonly 
 used in this way: 
 
 une maison de vingt pieds de hauteur a house twenty feet high 
 une table de six pieds de longueur a table six feet long. 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 90. Although the Numerals are not regarded in the proper sense as a 
 distinct part of speech, their peculiarities of form and use are such, that they 
 require to be treated as a class by themselves. 
 
 
 91. 
 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 un, une 
 
 27. 
 
 vingt-sept 
 
 53. 
 
 cinquante-trois 
 
 2. 
 
 deux 
 
 28. 
 
 vingt-huit 
 
 54. 
 
 c inquante-quatre 
 
 3. 
 
 trois 
 
 29. 
 
 vingt-neuf 
 
 55. 
 
 cinquante-cinq 
 
 4. 
 
 quatre 
 
 30. 
 
 trente 
 
 56. 
 
 cinquante-six 
 
 5. 
 
 cinq 
 
 31. 
 
 trente et un 
 
 57. 
 
 cinquante-sept 
 
 6. 
 
 six 
 
 32. 
 
 trente-deux 
 
 58. 
 
 cinquante-huit 
 
 7. 
 
 sept 
 
 33. 
 
 trente-trois 
 
 59. 
 
 cinquante-neuf 
 
 8. 
 
 huit* 
 
 34. 
 
 trente-quatre 
 
 60. 
 
 soixante 
 
 9. 
 
 neuf 
 
 35. 
 
 trente-cinq 
 
 61. 
 
 soixante et un 
 
 10. 
 
 dix 
 
 36. 
 
 trente-six 
 
 62. 
 
 soixante-deux 
 
 11. 
 
 onze* 
 
 37. 
 
 trente-sept 
 
 63. 
 
 soixante-trois 
 
 12. 
 
 douze 
 
 38. 
 
 trente-huit 
 
 64. 
 
 Boixante-quatre 
 
 13. 
 
 treize 
 
 39. 
 
 trente-neuf 
 
 65. 
 
 soixante-cinq 
 
 U. 
 
 quatorze 
 
 40. 
 
 quarante 
 
 QQ. 
 
 soixante-six 
 
 15. 
 
 quinze 
 
 41. 
 
 quarante et un 
 
 67. 
 
 soixante-sept 
 
 16. 
 
 seize 
 
 42. 
 
 qiiarante-deux 
 
 68. 
 
 soixante-huit 
 
 17. 
 
 dix-sept 
 
 43. 
 
 quarante-trois 
 
 69. 
 
 soixante-neuf 
 
 18. 
 
 dix-huit 
 
 44. 
 
 quarante-quatre 
 
 70. 
 
 soixante-dix 
 
 19. 
 
 dix-neuf 
 
 45. 
 
 quarante-cinq 
 
 71. 
 
 soixante et onze 
 
 20. 
 
 vingt 
 
 46. 
 
 qiiarknte-six 
 
 72. 
 
 soixant6-donze 
 
 21. 
 
 vingt et un 
 
 47. 
 
 quarante-sept 
 
 73. 
 
 soixante-ireize 
 
 22. 
 
 vingt- deux 
 
 48. 
 
 quarante-huit 
 
 74. 
 
 soixante-quatorze 
 
 23. 
 
 vingt-trois 
 
 49. 
 
 quarante-neuf 
 
 75. 
 
 soixante-quinzG 
 
 24. 
 
 vingt-quatre 
 
 50. 
 
 cinquante 
 
 76. 
 
 soixante-seizo 
 
 25. 
 
 vingt-cinq 
 
 51. 
 
 cinquante et un 
 
 77. 
 
 soixante-dix-sep b 
 
 26. 
 
 vingt-six 
 
 52. 
 
 cinquante-deux 
 
 78. 
 
 soixante-dix-huit 
 
 * Note that before huit, huitihne, and onze, onzilme, no apostroplae is used. 
 le Tiuit, le huitilme, du onae, etc. 
 
 We say 
 
104 — 
 
 79. 
 80. 
 81. 
 82. 
 83l 
 84. 
 85. 
 86. 
 87. 
 88. 
 
 Boixante-dix-nenf 
 
 quatre-yingts 
 
 quatre-Tingt-on 
 
 qmitre-vingt-deax 
 
 qiiatre-Tingt^trois 
 
 90. qiiatre-vingt-dix 
 
 91. quatre-vingt-onze 
 
 92. quatre-vingtrdouze 
 
 93. quatre-vingt-treize 
 
 94. qoatre-Tingt-quatorze 
 
 100. 
 
 cent 
 
 200. 
 
 deux ocntB 
 
 300. 
 
 trois cento 
 
 400. 
 
 quatre cents 
 
 500. 
 
 cinq cento 
 
 600. 
 
 81 X cento 
 
 700. 
 
 sept cento 
 
 800. 
 
 hiiit cento 
 
 9oa 
 
 neof cento 
 
 1000. 
 
 mille. 
 
 qoatre-yingtKjuatro 95. qoatre-Tingtrquinze 
 
 qiiatre-vingt-cinq 96. quatre-vingt^eize 
 
 quatre-viugt-8ix 97. qoatre-viuKt-dix-sept 
 
 quAtre-vingtr«ept 98. quatw-nngt-dix-buit 
 
 qnatre-yingt-hoit 99. quatre-yingUiiz-neaf 
 89. qoatre-yingt-neaf 
 
 92. Oardinal nomeialB hare no modifioationa, ezoept nn, which fonns 
 the feminine und» and Tingrt and cent, which take the pliirul termina- 
 tion 8, when seTeral acon-n or himdroda aie spoken of, and they are not 
 followed by another nnmber. Both remain nninfWwtiwl when followed by 
 another number, or nacd in plaoe of the ordinala. We mj: 
 
 nn espaoe de qnatre-yingta ana a period </ eighi^f yean 
 
 qnatre-yingts livrea 
 ^iscenta soldate 
 qnatre-Tingt-diz liTres 
 trois cent vingt-eiz aoldala 
 page cent qnatre-Tingt 
 en mil huit cent 
 
 eighty pounds 
 
 three kiaidndm)ldkn 
 
 f dn t iy poumde 
 
 three hmdredandhoeniy six eoldien 
 
 page om hmdred and eighty 
 
 in ths year eighteen hundred 
 
 93. The word millet meaning a fhausandf nerer takes an 8; 
 we say deux mille, two ihousand; when meaning a tnilCf it takes an a; as: 
 nn mille, a mile; deux milles, /tro mUes. When used for the date of the year| 
 it is \iTitteu mil; as: Tan mil huit cent soizante^oatorze, in the year 1874 
 
 94. The French say simply cent, a hwulred: uiille, a thouttand, 
 
 [L 31. 59.] 
 Ordinals. 
 95. 
 
 ist. 
 
 premier, premi^ 
 
 re 17th, 
 
 ilix-*»eptiteie 
 
 2na, 
 
 second, seoonde 
 
 (deuxiime) 18th, 
 
 dix-huiti^me 
 
 3d, 
 
 troisitae 
 
 19th, 
 
 dix-neuW^e 
 
 4th, 
 
 quatri^e 
 
 20th, 
 
 %'ingtifemo 
 
 5th, 
 
 cinqui^e 
 
 21st, 
 
 vingt et unifeme 
 
 6th, 
 
 sixieme 
 
 22nd, 
 
 \'ingt-deuxieme 
 
 7th, 
 
 septi^e 
 
 30th, 
 
 trentieme 
 
 8tli, 
 
 huiti^e 
 
 40th, 
 
 quarantieme 
 
 9th, 
 
 neuvi^e 
 
 50th, 
 
 cinqnantieme 
 
 10th, 
 
 dixieme 
 
 60th, 
 
 soixanti^me 
 
 11th, 
 
 onzieme 
 
 70th, 
 
 Boixante-dixieme 
 
 12th, 
 
 doiizieme 
 
 80th, 
 
 quatre-vingtifeme 
 
 13th, 
 
 treizieme 
 
 90th. 
 
 quatre-vingt-diiitoe 
 
 Uth, 
 
 quatorzieme 
 
 lOOth, 
 
 centieme 
 
 15th, 
 
 quinziemo 
 
 lOOOth, 
 
 millieme 
 
 leih, 
 
 seizi^me 
 
 last, 
 
 dernier, demi^ro 
 
— 105 — 
 
 96. Except le premier and le second, the Ordinals are formed from the 
 Cardinals by the addition of ieme, subject to slight variations. Those in 
 e change e into ienie ; cinq takes u before ieme, cinquieme, and those 
 ending in 1* change this final letter into vieme; as: neuf, neuvieme. 
 Compound numbers add, as in English, the ordinal ending only to their 
 last number. 
 
 97. In place of our Ordinals the French employs the Cardinals: 
 
 1. to denote the day of the month, except the first, which is always 
 le premier; 
 
 2. after the Christian name of a sovereign. In this case, too, the first 
 is premier; the second may be second, or deux; but always 
 without any article. 
 
 Thus we say: 
 
 le premier Mai, the first of May Henri premier, Henry the First 
 
 le deux Mars, the second of March Charles second, I m i 4r. q ^ 
 , i. T • 77 /• ,7 /. T- ^11-. r Charles me becona 
 
 le quatre Jmn, the fourth of June Charles deux, 3 
 
 lo onze Avril, the eleventh of April Charles dix, Charles the Tenth 
 
 98. Besides the Cardinals and Ordinals, the following classes of numerals 
 require to be especially noticed: 
 
 1. the Collectives; as: une huitaine, a number of eight; une douzaine, 
 a dozen; une vingtaine, a score, etc. ; 
 
 2. the Fractionals, as: la moitie, the half; demi, demie, half: un 
 tiers, a third; un quart, a quarter; un cinquieme, a fifth; from 
 here upwards, they are essentially the same as the Ordinals; as: 
 cinq sixiemes, five-sixths, etc. ; 
 
 3. the Multiplicatives; as: le double, double, twofold; le triple, tr-iple; 
 quadruple, fourfold^ etc. p. 87, 88.] 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 99i A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun; as: notre maison est 
 belle, je ne la vendrai pas, je la garderai; our house is fine, I will not 
 sell it, I will keep it. Pronouns are divided into six classes: Personal, Pos- 
 sessive, Demonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, Indefinite. 
 
 Personal Pronouns. 
 
 100. A personal pronoun is a pronoun whose form shows of what person 
 it is. There are three persons, the first, the second, and the third. The 
 first person is that which denotes the speaker or writer; the second denotes 
 the hearer or person addressed; and the third the person or thing spoken of. 
 
 101. In French, personal pronouns are divided into two classes. Con- 
 junctive and Disjunctive. 
 
 102. Conjunctive personal pronouns are those indispensably joined to a 
 verb; as: je parle, I speak; a disjunctive personal pronoun is one used ab- 
 solutely, or after a preposition; as: c'est lui, it is he; venez avec moi, 
 come with me. 
 
— 106 — 
 
 Declension of the Conjunctive Personal Pronouns* 
 103. FiBST PSBflOlf. fiaooND Pmbsom. 
 
 Sinouter. Ptvral. tkufutttr. PhirtL 
 
 Nom. je I nous toe to thou youb yon 
 
 Gen. 
 Oat 
 Ace. 
 
 me 
 
 tome 
 
 nouB 
 
 tout 
 
 te 
 
 tothoe 
 
 TOOS 
 
 lOJfOM 
 
 me 
 
 m$ 
 
 nolle 
 
 us 
 
 te 
 
 thee 
 
 voas 
 
 you 
 
 
 
 
 Tribd PKBeoir. 
 
 
 
 
 
 MoKuHm, 
 
 
 
 Ikmmimt. 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 he 
 
 Ue 
 
 ih^ 
 
 eUe she 
 
 eUes 
 
 th^ 
 
 Dat loi to him leor to them lui to h$r leur (o them 
 
 Ace. 1i> Aim h'H them la A«r U>m (A<rfu 
 
 Of boa gmdert. 
 Singular. PtimL 
 
 Norn. — 
 
 Gen. — 
 
 Oet se looM^sse^ te loiKmnsdves 
 
 Aee. 08 ofie'e se^ we 1hem»tives 
 
 ICH. All GonjonctiTc PereonalB irant the genitive caee. 
 
 Declension of the Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. 
 
 105 
 
 FntBT Pkbson. 
 
 SrmM) 
 
 l^KlfflOW. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 PiMraL 
 
 Singular 
 
 Plural 
 
 Norn. 
 
 moi / 
 
 nous toe 
 
 toi /'. 
 
 s you 
 
 Gen. 
 
 do moi of me 
 
 de none of us 
 
 de toi of Uice 
 
 devous cfyou 
 
 DaL 
 
 k moi to me 
 
 h none to us 
 
 k toi to th^f< 
 
 a voua to you 
 
 Ace 
 
 moi me 
 
 none us 
 
 toi 
 
 im ' you 
 
 
 
 TatBD Pbbson. 
 
 
 
 MatnUine. 
 lui he eiix they 
 
 
 iine. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 cU» 
 
 elles /^ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 de lui of him 
 
 d'enx of them 
 
 d'ellc uj Uer 
 
 d'ellee of them 
 
 Dat. 
 
 k lui ^ohim 
 
 k eux to them 
 
 k elle fo A«r 
 
 a ellee to (/lem 
 
 Ace. 
 
 lui him 
 
 eux them 
 
 OfbotJn 
 
 elle her 
 gendtrt. 
 
 ellee them 
 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 mom. — — 
 
 Gen. de soi of one^s self — 
 
 Dat a soi to one*s self — 
 
 Ace. Boi one*s se!f — 
 
 Pronouns used with reference to Animals and Things. 
 
 106. 
 
 V 
 
 ; 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 11, elle, ce 
 
 it 
 
 lis, elles, ce 
 
 they 
 
 Gen. 
 
 en 
 
 ofU 
 
 en 
 
 of them 
 
 Dat 
 
 lui, y 
 
 ioU 
 
 leur, y 
 
 to them 
 
 Acc 
 
 le, la 
 
 U 
 
 les 
 
 them 
 
— lOY — 
 
 Compound Personals. 
 
 107. The word m^me, self, added to the disjunctive personals, forms 
 the class of compound personal pronouns: 
 
 moi-meme, myself nous-memes, ourselves 
 
 toi-meme, thyself vous-memes, yourselves 
 
 lui-meme, himself eux-memes, / 
 
 elle-meme, herself elles-memes, \ ^'^emseZves 
 
 soi-meme, one's self . vous-meme, yourself 
 
 They take the preposition de in the genitive case, and a in the dative. 
 
 Use of the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 108. The personal pronouns, /, thou, he, she, loe, you, they, are always 
 expressed by the conjunctive pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, 
 
 elles, when they are the subject of a verb, provided they are not con- 
 nected by a conjunction with another noun or pronoun; as: je lis, 1 read' 
 elle vient, she comes, etc. Of course, the pronoun of the third person always 
 takes the gender of the noun to which it relates; thus: they are rich, is in 
 French, ils sont riches, with reference to men, and elles sont riches, with 
 reference to women. 
 
 109. The same personal pronouns, I, thou, he, she, we, you, they, become 
 disjunctive in French, and are to be expressed by moi, toi, lui, elle, 
 nous, vous, eux, elles, under the following circumstances: 
 
 1. when they come before or after the words qui, que, seul; 
 
 2. when they are used as an answer to a question; 
 
 3. when they are joined to a noun or pronoun by a conjunction; 
 
 4. when they come before a noun or verb used in opposition to another 
 
 noun or pronoun; as: 
 
 je suis plus jeune que lui. lam younger than he. 
 
 qui a fait cela? c'est moi. who has done that ? It is I. 
 
 mon frere et moi, nous appre- my brother and I, we learn French. 
 
 nons le fran9ais. 
 
 vous reviendrez a la ville, et moi you will return to town, and I will go 
 
 j'irai a la campagne. into the country. 
 
 1 10. The genitive case of personal pronouns is always expressed by the 
 disjunctive pronouns de nioi, de toi, de lui, d'elle, de nous, de 
 vous, d'eux, d'elles, after the verb; as, 
 
 il se plaint de moi he complaiyis of me 
 
 je ne parle pas de lui / do not speak of him 
 
 111. The dative case of personal pronouns is most commonly expressed 
 by the conjunctive pronouns, me, te, lui, nous, VOUS, leur, before 
 the verb; thus: 
 
 il me plait, he pleases me il lui a dit, he has told him 
 
 je leur parlerai, J wiU speak to thm> il nous a dit, he has told U9 
 
— 108 — 
 
 112. They become diBJanctive, and arc to be expressed by A moi, 
 A toi, a liii* & elle^ A iiouh, & voii8y 4 eux^ H elles after the 
 verb, iu thre« cnaea, viz: 
 
 1. ^^'heu tht'y come after a noon or pronoun to which they are joined 
 by a conjunction; 
 
 2. when they are goyemed by a reflective verb; 
 
 3. when they are goyemed by any of the following rerfos: 
 
 aller, to go bofre, to drink 
 
 courir, to run penser, songer, to think- 
 
 iiccourir, to run to venir, to cowi^ 
 
 je vous ]»:irl. ausHi bien qn'A oiix ; I speak to you as wfU as to thein 
 il h'ikIk s. a iiioi; jc nic tiv i\ liii ; h$ applies to me; I trust him 
 
 il viint a nous; ullez li liti; he eomes to usf go to him 
 
 je pons(> i\ voiis et H elle; Ithinkqfyou and qf her. 
 
 113. Whrii the ]x^rH(inal pronouns are in the aocnsativc (i>bjcctiYe) case, 
 Ihcy aro ^vuiTally conjunctive, and expressed by me, tc, Ic, la, »»oii«, 
 VOUM, IcH Iwfore the verb; as: 
 
 je le connais; je la verrai; I know him; I tciU see her 
 
 je les estime; on uoiis voit; / esteem them; one sees us. 
 
 114^ PerHoiuil pronouns after a preposition are always disjunctive, and 
 expressed by inoi, toi, liii, eUe» nous, vous* euXy elles; m: 
 pour inoi, jo ptUHe niu.si as for me, J think so 
 
 vouH iMirlerez aprus eux, you triS speak c^ter them 
 
 115. For things without life, in French, only the conjunctive pronouns 
 are used, namely: il, elle» lis, elles* for t7. they, in the nominative 
 case, and le, la, les, for i7, them, in the objective case. For the 
 genitive case is substituted en, which may be rendered by of it, from U, 
 toith it, for it, of them, from them, some^ any ; and for the dative case y, which 
 means to ii, in it, to them, in them, y and eii nre also used as adverbs of 
 place; eii stands for hence, thence; and y for f A«?rc or thither. Examples: 
 voil^ notTt^ maison; elle est vieille, there is our house, it is old, IvdUI sell 
 
 je la vendrai; n'eii parlez plus; it; do not speak any more of it 
 
 c'est une entreprise difficile, vous ii is a difficult undertaking, you toiU 
 
 n'y reussirez pas; not succeed in it 
 
 avez-vous ete en France ? j'en viens; have you been to FVance ? I come tlietice 
 
 non, je n'y ai jamais ete no, I have never been there, 
 
 116. The pronoun le, it, is often a mere expletive, representing a word 
 already used. When it stands for an adjective, or a noun not referring to 
 some definite object, it always remains invariable. But when it stands for 
 a noun, or adjective, referring to a definite object, it is made to agree with 
 its antecedent; then it is le for the masculine of the singular, la for the 
 feminine, and les for both genders of the plural. When so used, these pro- 
 nouns are not expressed in English. Examples are: 
 
— 109 — 
 
 vos freres sont-ils appliques? are your brothers diligeni? 
 
 non, ils ne le sont pas no, they are not 
 
 ces messieurs sont-ils freres? are these gentlemen brothers? 
 
 oui, monsieur, ils le sont yes, Sir, they are 
 
 etes-vous le frere de Guillaume? are you William's brother? 
 
 oui, je le suis yes, I am 
 
 etes-vous la malade ? oui, je la suis are you the patient ? yes, I am 
 
 sont-ce la vos livres ? oui, ce les sont are these your books? yes, they are, 
 
 1 1 7. The compound pronouns, himself, herself, themselves, one's self, are 
 expressed by se when reflective; by lui-m^nie, elle-m^llie, eux- 
 memes, elles-memes, to denote emphasis; by soi when referring 
 to persons in a general sense, or to the pronouns, on, one; chacun, every- 
 body^ quelqu'un, somebody; and by lui, elle, eux, elles, when referring 
 to some definite person or persons. The word itself, relating to things with- 
 out life, is generally expressed by soi, Mark that this pronoun is confined 
 to nouns in the singular. 
 
 il se soumet a vos ordres he submits himself to yovr orders 
 
 elle parle toujours d'elle-m^me she always speaks of herself 
 chacun agit pour soi every one acts for himself 
 
 men frere a de I'argent sur lui my brother has money about him(self) 
 
 I'aimant attire le fer a SOi the loadstone attracts iron to itself 
 
 [I. 155, 156. 157, 158. 159. 160. 161. 162. 175. 176. 177. 178. II. 125. 126.] 
 
 Place of the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 118. The personal pronouns je, tu, il, elle,nous, VOUS, ils, elles, 
 
 usually precede the verb; they may be separated from it by the particle 
 ne, or the conjunctive pronouns of the dative and the accusative case, but 
 never by an adverb; they follow the verb only in interrogative sentences, as: 
 j'apprends, il ecrit, nous lisons I learn, he lorites, we read 
 VOUS dites toujours la verite you ahoays speak the truth 
 
 parlez-vous fran9ais ? do you speak French ? 
 
 119. The personal pronoims of the dative and the accusative case, namely : 
 me, te^ se, nous, vous, le, la, les, lui, lour, y, and en, are 
 
 always put immediately before the verb in a simple tense, and before its 
 auxiliary in a compound one. When two or more pronouns are governed by 
 the same verb, those of the first and the second person precede those of the 
 third; and if they are both of the third, the accusative goes before the da- 
 tive, y and en go last. The conjunctive pronouns are placed before the 
 verb in the following order: 
 
 me, te, se, nous, vous go before every other 
 
 le, la, les go before lui, leur, y, en 
 
 lui, leur go before y, en 
 
 y goes before en 
 
— 110 — 
 
 Examples: 
 il me le do&ne, il vona I'a preu^ iit gh^s U to me, he has knt U to you 
 il uoiw lea a envoys he has sent them to us 
 
 il me lea enverra he will send them to me 
 
 je vons las porterai / shall bring them to you 
 
 il le lui doiine, il le leur pn tera he (jives it to him, he will lend it to them 
 il loB hu a euvoy^s he has setU them to him 
 
 je VOU8 y en porterai / iri// carry you some there 
 
 120. When the verb is used in the impemtive affirmfttive, all pronounH 
 are put nfU-r it, and connected by hyphenH; in this ca«e mo! in OHcd instead 
 of ine; toi instead of te, and le, la. Ie» come Ixifore nil othrr pronouns. 
 y and en, ah usually, go last Hut if the imiK-mdve be uegaUve. the pro- 
 nouns go before it, as in all other icntum. Examples: 
 
 p.irlez-leur; toiveB-lais voyes-les speak to them; tcrUe to him; see them 
 pretcz-le-moi; Tendes-le-leiir lend U to me; seU it to them 
 
 ne le leur Yeodespta donotseUit to them, 
 
 [I. i6S. 164, IBS, 166, 167. IBS. ie». 170,] 
 
 Posses&ive Pronouns. 
 
 121. A PttMOOoive Pkononn is a pronoun which denotes the relation of 
 property. In French, the possessiTe pronouns are distinguished as powcn 
 siTO acUectiTes, which are always joine<i to a noun; and absolute poflseadYet, 
 which are used alone, but always with reference to a preceding noun. 
 
 122. The following are the Po oooori ve Adjectives: 
 
 Singular. Plural. Slaguter. Plural. 
 
 m. / m, ^ f, «. tf /. M. <# /. 
 
 mon ma mes my notre noe our 
 
 ton ta U>s thy votre voe your 
 
 son sa ses, his, her, Ua leur leurs their 
 
 123. They are varied for number and gender, and agree in these parti- 
 culars with the noun they qualify, and not, as in Engl i sh, with their ante- 
 cedent, as: 
 
 ma tante a vendu SOU jardin my aunl htis sold her garden 
 
 ma soeur m'a prete ses gants my sister has lent me her gloves 
 
 124. For the sake of euphony, before feminine nouns beginning with 
 a vowel or uon-aspirated h, the masculine pronouns mon, ton, son, are 
 used instead of ma, ta, sa; as: mon ame, my soul; nion humeur, 
 my temper, 
 
 125. When nouns are joined in construction, the poasessive adjectives 
 must be repented before each of them; as: 
 
 mon i^re, ma mere et mes freres my father, mother, and brothers 
 
 126. The French avoids the use of the possessives in many situations, 
 where they are employed in English, either putting in their stead the defin- 
 ite article only, or using with the article the dative of the personal pronoun; as: 
 
— Ill — 
 
 vons Ini avez rompn le bras you have broken his arm 
 j'ai mal au cote I have pain in my side 
 
 127. The following are the Absolute Possessive pronouns: 
 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 le mien, la mienne les miens, les miennes, mine 
 
 le tien, la tienne les tiens, les tiennes, thine 
 
 le sien, la sienne les siens, les siennes, his, hers, its 
 
 le notre, la notre les notres, ours 
 
 le votre, la votre les votres, yours 
 
 le leur, la leur les leurs, theirs 
 
 1 28. These pronouns agree in gender and number with their antecedent, 
 and are declined like nouns with the definite article; as: ton couteau et le 
 mien, thy knife and mine. 
 
 [I. S, 6. 9, 10, 19. 20. SI, 32, 4.1. 42. 53. 54. 55. 56. 85. 86.] 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 129. A Demonstrative Pronoun is a pronoun which points out the object 
 to which it relates. In French, there are two demonstrative pronouns, one 
 to be used adjectively before nouns only, and the other to be used absolutely. 
 The former is: 
 
 ce, cet, cette, this, ces, tJiese 
 
 ce before a masculine noun, cet before a masculine noun beginning with 
 
 a vowel or non-aspirated h; cette before a feminine noun; the plural ces 
 
 is for both genders. To determine more precisely the object spoken of, 
 
 add the particle ci or la to the noun preceded by a demonstrative; thus, 
 
 ce jar din, this garden cet homme-la, that man 
 
 cet oiseau, this bird ces plumes-ci, these pens 
 
 cet homme, this man ces femmes-la, those women 
 
 cette maison, this house ces hommes-ci, these men 
 
 [I. 27. 28. 57. 58.] 
 
 130. The Absolute Demonstrative is: 
 
 celui, celle, this ceux, celles, tliese 
 
 131. When followed by a relative pronoun, it relates to persons only, as: 
 celui qui est content, est heureux; he who is contented, is happy 
 
 ceux qui ont vecu avant nous • those who lived before us. 
 
 132. When followed by the preposition de, it refers to persons as well 
 as to things, and is used in such phrases, as: mon livre et celui de monfrere, 
 my book and that of my brother. 
 
 133. When compounded with the words ci and 1^, thus: 
 celui-ci, celle-ci, this celiii-la, celle-l^i, tJiat 
 ceux-ci, celles-ci, these ceux-1^, celles-la, tJiose 
 
 celui-ci refers to the nearest object, and celui-la to the more distant, and if 
 both are contrasted, celui-ci means the latter, and celui-la the former; as: 
 voici de bonslivres: lesquels voulez- here are good books, which do you 
 vous, ceux-ci ou ceux-la? wantj these or those? 
 
— 112 — 
 
 134. The demoDflnitiTW ceci, this, and cela, that, which are ap- 
 plied to things only, have the force of mere pronouu^ iu like ummier ce 
 is used abeolately before the verb etre, to 6f , or a relative prouoim ; thus, 
 
 ceoi est bon, oela ne vaut hen this is good, that is worth nothing 
 
 ce n'est pas mon frhte this is not my brother 
 
 prenez ce qui vous plait take what you like. 
 
 [I. 4:f.46,83,34. IL 110.] 
 
 Relative Pronouns. 
 
 135. A Belative Pronoun is a pronoun that stands for a pnn^eding word 
 or phrase, and serves to connect propositions. The relative pronouns are: 
 
 Quiy who; qnoif what; Icquel, laquello, which. 
 They are declined as follows: 
 
 JfOJC. d /faR., JSit^, d PUw. 
 
 Horn, qui 10^ (quoi), ce (pii trhnt 
 
 Gen. de qui, or dont cf VDhom dc quoi.'oTnuui </ ichat 
 
 Dai h qui to vohom k qnoi to u^kot 
 
 Ace ( ^ uc iMom (qnoi), oe que iMol 
 
 M(uc. /tan. Mate 
 
 lequel laquelle lesqueU lesqaeUee uihich 
 
 Qm. duquel de laquelle desquels deaqnelles <f vohidi 
 
 Oat auquel jk hiquelle aozqnels anzqaeUes to which 
 
 Ace. lequel laquelle lesquels leeqnelles tofdch 
 
 136. The nominative qui and the aocoaative que are applied indiffer- 
 ently to persons and thiugH in the iiingnlar and plural, as: 
 
 lliomme qui parle the man toAo speafe* 
 
 les livres qui sont ear la table the books which are on the iahle 
 
 la femme que j*ai vue the woman whom I have seen 
 
 les plumes que vous oherohes the pens whidi you are looking for 
 
 137. The genitive de ffiii is confined to persona, but is usually replaced 
 by dont^ which may 1)6 applied indifferently to persons and th ings in the 
 singular and plim\l; as: 
 
 j'ai vu la porsonne dont vous parlez I have seen the person cf whom you speak 
 rhomme dont vous parlez, est mort the man of whom you speak, is dead 
 voici rhomme de qui vous avez parl^ there is the man cf tchom you hm-f ftnok-fm 
 Tofiaire dont je vous ai parle (he business of which I told yo 
 
 138. The dative case iV qui is applied to persons only; for uMimis 
 and things the dative of lequel, laquelle, is to be used, as: 
 
 rhomme a qui j'ai ouvert la porte the man to whom I opened the door 
 
 les amis a qui nous ecrivons the friends to whom toe write 
 
 c'est un mal auquel je suis sujet this is a complaint to which I am subject. 
 
 139. In gener:\l, after any preposition, qui is used for persons, and 
 lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, for animals and things; thus, 
 
 la dame avec qui je suis arrive ike lady with whom I arrived 
 voici Tarbre sur lequel il montA there is the tree an xohich he climbed 
 
— 113 — 
 
 140. The English pronoun whose is usually to be rendered by dont; 
 but if preceded by any preposition, it is expressed by de qui, duquel^ 
 de laquelle, etc., as: 
 
 rhomme dont le fils est malade the man whose son is sick 
 I'homme avec le fils duquel vous the man with whose son you have ar- 
 etes arrive rived 
 
 141. The relative quo! is used in the sense of what (thing), or that 
 (thing) which, but not otherwise than after a preposition; if a nominative or 
 an accusative is required, ce qui or ce que is used instead; as: 
 
 voila de quoi je me plains that is what I complain about 
 
 ce que j'ai mange etait excellent what I have eaten was very good. 
 
 142. The relative, often omitted in English, must always be expressed in 
 French; as: lelivre que vous lisez, estamoi, the hook you read, belongs to me. 
 
 [I. 23. 24. n. 114. 115. 116.] 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 143. An Interrogative Pronoun is a pronoun with which a question is 
 asked. The interrogative pronouns are: 
 
 qui, who? lequel, laquelle, which? que, wTiat? 
 quoi, tvhat? quel, quelle, which? 
 
 They are declined as follows: 
 
 Sing. & Plur. Singular. Plural. 
 
 M. & F. Masc. Ftm. Masc. Fern. 
 
 Norn, qui? who? lequel laquelle? lesquels lesquelles? which? 
 
 Gen. dequi? of whom? duquel de laquelle ? desquels desquelles ? o/ lo/iic/L^ 
 Dat. a qui ? to whom? auquel a laquelle ? auxquels auxquelles ? to which? 
 Ace. qui? whom? lequel laquelle? lesquels lesquelles? which? 
 
 Nom. que,quoi? lo/ia/.^ quel quelle? quels quelles? what? 
 
 Gen. de quoi ? of what? de quel de quelle ? de quels de quelles ? of what? 
 
 Dat. a quoi ? to what? a quel a quelle ? a quels a quelles ? to what? 
 
 Ace. que? what? quel quelle? quels quelles? ichat? 
 
 144. qui, who? is applied to persons only. Instead of €[\ii, tvlw? 
 we may use: qui est-ce qui? and instead of qui, wTioni? qui 
 est-ce que? 
 
 qui est la ? qui est-ce qui est-la ? who is there? 
 
 quicherchez-voTis? I whom do you look for? 
 
 qui est-ce que vous cherchez ? 3 
 
 145. The pronoun lequel, laquelle ? is applied to both persons and 
 things, and always relates to a preceding or following noun, with which it 
 agrees in gender; it corresponds to the English interrogative whichy followed 
 
 ^y of 
 
 lequel devosfreresapprendlefran^ais? which of your brothers learns French? 
 lequel de ces jardins est a vous ? which of these gardens belongs to you? 
 
— 114 -• 
 
 146, The word qael^ quelle? 'is prefixed to nounfi an an interrogatiTd 
 adjective, the same as tehicK ^hat * in Euglifth. It iH applied to persons as 
 well as things, and agrees with itii noiin in gender and number; as: 
 
 & qnel jen jonepons-nons ? vthat game shall tte play at? 
 
 qnellee plumes cherchez-vous ? ichat prns art you looking for? 
 
 147. que ? and quoi ? answer precisely to the English pronoun 
 uihcU ? denoting things. The former oooon only in the nominative and 
 accusative, and the latter is nearly alwa3r8 governed by a pre|)08ition. In- 
 stead of que* we may also use qa*e8t*ce qui for the nominative, and 
 qu'e8t-ce <iue for the accusative; as: 
 
 que lisez-vous? qu'est-ce que vous Uses? what are ycu reading? 
 de quoi parlez-vous? tchal are ywi speaking of? 
 
 fl. «9. 90. lOO. IIO, n. 111. 119, 113,] 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns. 
 148* When a pronoun stands for some' person or thing indeterminate, 
 or unknown to the speaker, it is called an indefinite pronoun. In English, 
 such words are usually Haarified with pronominal adjeotives. 
 
 149. The following are always joined to a noun: 
 
 quelque, quelqoes, some quelconque, queloonques. whattver 
 
 chaque, eachy every certain, >aine, «ome, certain 
 
 150. quelque, and its plural quelques are employed for both gen- 
 ders, in the meaning of some, any, %Dhatever; as: prdtee-moi quelque livre, 
 lend me some book. [H. 117,] 
 
 151. ehaque is used for both genders, but in the singular only, as: 
 ohaque homme, each or every man; chaque femme, each or every woman, 
 
 m. 117,] 
 
 1 52. quelconque, plural quelconques, has the same form for both 
 genders, and always follows its noun, as: pretes-moi un livre quelconque, 
 lend me any book whaUver, pL 193. 194.] 
 
 153. certain before a noun means some, certain, and after it stire, 
 
 rn. 129.] 
 
 154% The following are employed with or without a noun : 
 
 nul, nulle ] ni Tun ni Tautre, neither 
 
 pas un, pas une > no one meme, same, self 
 
 aucun, aucune j tel, telle, such 
 
 autre, other plusieurs, several 
 
 Tun et Tftutre, both tout, everything 
 
 Tun on I'autre, either tout, toute, every, whole, all 
 
 155. mil, pas un, aucun, no one, nobody, a]wa3rB require ne before 
 the verb; as: 
 
 aucun ami ne me reste no friend remains to me 
 
 pas un ne I'a vu no one has seen it 
 
 nul n'est immortel nobody is immortal, [H. 118, 119,] 
 
— 115 — 
 
 156. m^me, and iis plural monies are used for persons and things 
 of both genders; as: le meme homme, the same man; la meme chose, the 
 same thing. After a noun, or pronoun m^me answers to the English 
 compounds m2/.9eZf, himself, herself, &c., as: 
 
 la religion meme le defend religion itself forbids it 
 
 le roi meme s'y opposa the king himself opposed it 
 
 [II. 120. 121.] 
 
 157. tel, telle, as a pronoun, is applied to persons only, and has no 
 plural. As an adjective, it is translated by such, and may be used in the 
 singular and plural for persons and things; thus, 
 
 tel rit aujourd'hui qui pleurera m/xny a one laughs to-day, who will 
 
 demain; weep to-morrow. 
 
 une telle conduite me deplait; such a conduct displeases me. 
 
 [II. 120. 121.] 
 
 158. tout, everything, and le tout, the whole, are used without a noun 
 in the singular only; in the sense of every, tout is immediately joined to 
 a noun in the singular, and agrees with it in gender. When meaning whole, 
 all, it is used in the singular and plural number, with the article or some 
 pronoun between it and the substantive ; as an adverb it means quite. 
 
 tout est vanite en ce monde all is vanity in this world 
 
 je prendrai le tout I will take the whole 
 
 toute la maison est pleine de monde the whole house is full of people 
 
 tout homme est mortel every man is mortal 
 
 c'est tout le meme homme thxit is quite the same man 
 
 [I. 59. 60. n. 1»0. 121.] 
 
 159. The following are never joined to a noun: 
 
 on, one, people, they Tun I'autre, one another 
 
 quelqu'un, -une ) somebody autrui, others 
 
 quelques-uns,-unes f some personne, nobody 
 
 quiconque, whoever rien, nothing 
 
 chacun, every one la plupart, most 
 
 160. I'on is used instead of on after et, and; si, if; OU, where; OU, 
 or; que, that, provided the following word does not begin with an 1; as: 
 
 le temps oul'onvit, leslieux oul'on the time in which one lives, the places 
 
 est; where one is 
 
 le soir, on se promene, ou on lit; in the evenings one goes out for a walk, 
 
 or reads p. 101. 102.] 
 
 161. quelqu'un corresponds to the English somebody, anybody; 
 quelques-uns, quelques-unes are employed for some in such 
 phrases, as: 
 
 je me servirai de quelques-uns de vos TidHI make use of some of your books 
 
 I livres; 
 
 connaissez-vous quelques-unes de ces do you know any of these ladies ? 
 dames? * * [H, I17.J 
 
— 116 — 
 
 162. quioonque, loftoeMr, and chacun, every one, are oonfliied to 
 
 penu)ns in the Niugubir. The lattt^r, bowcver, when it relatm to a preceding 
 
 uouii, limy \)e applied to thiiigR as well an to perHons. In this case, it has 
 
 two terminations, chaciin for the masculine, chaciiue for the feminine. 
 
 Thus we aay: 
 
 je parie k qoioonqne vent m'entendre, / speak to whoever untt hear me 
 
 Chacon vit i aa manidre, every <me Uvea ofler hU own way 
 
 remettee cea liTrea chacon k aa pUoe, put these books each in Us place 
 
 [n. 1 17. 193.194.} 
 
 163. Tun Pantre, om anolher, endi other, admits of l)oth Renders 
 and numbers, and takes the mark of declension between Vun and Taut re; 
 
 thUA, 
 
 mon frhre et Totre soonr parlent ton- my brother and yoyr sisUr always 
 jours Tun de Tantrc; speak of each ether, 
 
 (IL l«t.] 
 
 164. aiitriil, others, is applied to persons only, and most always 
 depend on u pn^poHition, rb: 
 
 il ne laut pas d^iurer le bien d'autrui we rnusi not eovel other peopte^s prfmerty, 
 
 165. perHonne, nobody, and rlen, nothing, always require ne be- 
 fore the verb; as: 
 
 je n*ai rien yn de pins bean Ihave seen nofhtng finer 
 ▼ons ne plaisei k penonne you please nobody. 
 
 In interrogative aeotenoea ancon, person no, rien are used without 
 ne; in this case they mean: any, anybody, anything; as: 
 
 est-il rien de plus bean ? Is there anything more beautiful ? 
 
 [L 113. 114. n. IIH, 119.] 
 
 166. If aiieiin, personne and rien are used without a verb, in 
 answer to a queHtion, they retain their negatiye meaning, eren without ne; 
 as: 
 
 qui m*appelle ? personne who oaUs met nobody 
 
 qu'apportez-vous ? rien what do you bring t nothing, 
 
 167. There are a few indefinite pronouns which are always followed by 
 que: 
 
 qui que, whoever quelque que, whatever 
 
 quoi que, whatever tel que, such as 
 
 quel que, whoever, whatever tant que, however 
 
 168. ^^^len the English words however, howsoever precede an adjective 
 or participle, they are expressed in French by quelque indeclinable; as: 
 quelque grande que soitsa faute, however great his fauU may he, luriU 
 
 je lui pardonnerai ; forgive him. 
 
 169. The English word whatever, followed by a noun and any other 
 verb than to be, is expressed by quelque before a noun singular, and by 
 quelques before a noun plural, as: 
 
 quelques fautes qu'il ait commises, whatever faults he has committed, I wiH 
 je lui p^donnerai; forgive him. 
 
— in — 
 
 170. The English word whatever, followed by a noun and the verb to &e, 
 is expressed by quel que in two words, the first of which is an adjective, 
 and agrees with its noun in number and gender; thus: 
 
 quelle que soit sa faute, je lui whatever his fault may he, I will for- 
 pardonnerai; give him. [Ii. 123, 124,] 
 
 THE VERB. 
 
 171. A Verb is a word that signifies to he, to act, to he acted upon; as: je 
 suis, lam; j'aime, I love; je suis aime, lam loved. 
 
 Classes. 
 
 172. Verbs are divided with respect to their signification into five 
 classes: active, passive, neuter, reflective, impersonal. 
 
 1 73. An active verb expresses an action which has some person or thing 
 for its object: as: Charles etudie sa le^on, Charles studies his lesson. 
 
 174. A passive verb expresses an action received by its subject; as: les 
 mechants seront punis, the loicked will he punished. 
 
 175. A neuter verb expresses simply a state of being; as: je dors, I sleep. 
 
 176. A reflective verb is a verb that has for subject and object the same 
 person or thing; as: je m'habille, I dress myself, 
 
 177. An impersonal verb is a verb that is used only in the third person 
 singular of each tense, as: il neige, it snows. 
 
 Modifications. 
 
 178. Verbs have modifications of four kinds; namely: Moods, Tenses, 
 Persons, and Numbers. 
 
 179. There are five moods: the Indicative, the Conditional, the Impera- 
 tive, the Subjunctive, the Infinitive. 
 
 180. The Indicative simply declares a thing, as: j'ecris, I write. 
 
 181. The Conditional represents the being, action, or passion under a 
 condition, as: j'irais, si je n'etais pas malade, I should go, if I were not sick. 
 
 182. The Imperative expresses the will of the speaker, as: repondez- 
 moi, answer me. 
 
 183. The Subjunctive asserts with modifications, in a subordinate 
 manner, as: je desire que vous reussissiez, I wish you may succeed. 
 
 184. The Infinitive expresses the being, action, or passion in an inde- 
 finite manner, as: parler, to speak. 
 
 185. Tenses are those forms of the verb, which distinguish time; they 
 are divided into two classes, simple and compound tenses. 
 
 186. There are four simple tenses: the Present, the Imperfect, the Pret- 
 erit, the Future; and four compound tenses, namely: the Perfect, the Plu- 
 perfect, the Preterit Anterior, and the Second Future. 
 
 187. The Person and Number of a verb are those forms in which it 
 agrees with its subject. Verbs have three persons, first, second, and third, 
 and two numbers, the singular and the plural. 
 
-~ 118 — 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 188. Conjugation of % yerb in a rt)gular dUtribuiiou of its moods, tousefl, 
 nomberu, and peiBOiiB. There are four conjugatioDJH in French, luimely: 
 
 the First with the present Infinitive in er. sm aimer, to love 
 the Second with the pre^nt lulinitive in Ir, iis tiiJr, tojinish 
 the Third with the present Infinitive in oir, jw drvoir, to owe 
 the Fourth with the present Infinitive in re, as vendre, to seU. 
 
 189. With respect to their form, the verbs of the four conjugations are 
 divided into two cUisses, rfgnUir and irrtyitUir. But in regard to the Third 
 Conjugation, containing the verbs in oir. gmmmariiuis are gristly at 
 variance, and some sup|)osing these verlw to bo all irregular, tven deny the 
 existence of a Third liegular Conjugation altogether. On this point the 
 following remarks require special notice on the jxirt of the learner. Betddes 
 avoir, to have^ then? are in French twelve simple verbs in oir. which 
 are all mhnitted to be irregular, except devoir, to owe^ and rcfCVOlr, 
 to receive; and oven these two must be included in the irreguhir list, 
 if we adopt the common definition, a retjular verb is a verb ichich does iiot 
 chaiuje Us root According to this view, they should be classified as Irrtgular 
 verbs in oir; so much the more as there is neither p gopri e ^, noradTBOtage 
 for the learner in treating two Terbt as a aeparate oonjngation. 
 
 I9CX As the French oonjngation oonsists. partly of yariation, acoom- 
 pUshed by means of the two auxiliaries avoir, to have, and 6tre, to he, 
 they are to be learned in the first place. 
 
 •91. aTOir, to have 
 
 Sdcpiji Tknsbs. Coxpound Tmmm. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present Peffect 
 
 j'ai, Tha\'>e j*ai en, T have had 
 
 in as, than hast ta as en, thou hast had 
 
 il a, he has il a en, A« has had 
 
 nous avons, ire have nonaavons en, toe- have had 
 
 vons avez, you fuive vons avez en, you have had 
 
 Us out, they have ils <mi en, they have had 
 
 Imperfect Piuperfeet 
 
 j'avais, 7/}a</ y&YtAs en, I had had 
 
 tu avals, thou hadsi' tn avals eu, thou hadst had 
 
 11 a\'ait, he had il avait en, he had had 
 
 nous avions, we had nous avions eu, toe had had 
 
 vons aviez, you had vous aviez eu, you had had 
 
 ils avaient, they had ils avaient eu, they had had 
 
— 119 - 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 Preterit. 
 
 j'eus, I had 
 til eus, thou hadst 
 il eut, he had 
 nous eumes, we had 
 vous elites, you had 
 ils eurent, they had 
 
 Future. 
 
 j'aurai, I shall have 
 til auras, thou wilt have 
 il aura, he will have 
 nous aurons, we shall have 
 vous aurez, you will have 
 ils auront, they will have 
 
 Present. 
 
 j'aurais, I should have 
 tu aurais, thou wouldst have 
 il aurait, he would have 
 nous aurions, we should have 
 vous auriez, you would have 
 ils auraient, they would have 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 Preterit Anterior. 
 
 j'eus eu, I had had 
 tu eus eu, thou hadst had 
 il eut eu, he had had 
 nous eumes eu, we had had 
 vous elites eu, you had had 
 ils eurent eu, they had liad 
 
 Second Future, 
 j'aurai eu, I shall have had 
 tu auras eu, thou wilt have had 
 il aura eu, he will have had 
 nous aurons eu, we shall have had 
 vous aurez eu, you will have had 
 ils auront eu, they will have had 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Past. 
 
 j 'aurais eu, I should have had 
 
 tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have had 
 
 il aurait eu, he loould have had 
 
 nous aurions eu, we should have had 
 
 vous auriez eu, you would have had 
 
 ils auraient eu, they would have had 
 
 aie, have (thou) 
 
 Present. 
 
 que j'aie, I may have 
 
 que tu aies, them mayest have 
 
 qu'il ait, he may have 
 
 que nous ayons, we may have 
 
 que vous ayez, you may have 
 
 qu'ils aient, they may have 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 que j'eusse, I might have 
 
 que tu eusses, thou mighiest have 
 
 qu'il eut, he might have 
 
 que nous eussions, we might have 
 
 que vous eussiez, you might have 
 
 qu'ils eussent, they might have 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ayons, let us have 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 ayez, have (you) 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 que j'aie eu, I may have had 
 que tu aies eu, thou mayest have had 
 qu'il ait eu, he may have had 
 que nous ayons eu, we may have had 
 que vous ayez eu, you jnay have had 
 qu'ils aient eu, they may have had 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 que j'eusse eu, I might have had 
 
 que tu eusses eu, thou mightest have had 
 
 qu'il eiit eu, he might have had 
 
 que nous eussions eu, we might have had 
 
 que vous eussiez eu, you might have had 
 
 qu'ils eussent eu, they might have had 
 
 Perf. avoir eu, to have had 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Pres. avoir, to have 
 
 Participle. 
 Pres. ayant, having Perf. ayant eu, having had 
 
 Past, eu, had. [i. 13. 14. IS. 16. 17. 18. 97. 98. 103. 104. 111. 
 
 112. 117. 118. 119. 120. n. 1. 2. 5. 6. 9. 10. IS. 16.] 
 
— 120 — 
 
 Sdcpuc Tsmbis. 
 
 192. 
 
 je Btiis, / am 
 ta e8» thou art 
 ileei, he is 
 noQs Bommee, we c 
 TOU8 etes, jfou are 
 il sont, they are 
 
 tu etais, thou ttast 
 il ^tait he ttax 
 I10U8 <!>tionH, tee 
 VOU8 etiez, you 
 ilK ^taieut, they 
 
 je ftis, / tros 
 tu fns, /Aou iMU< 
 il fat> A0 iMM 
 nous f&mes, toe were 
 vouB futes, yem were 
 iis furent, M^ iwre 
 
 fit re, to be 
 
 COMFOTTND TsNSBL 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Pened 
 j'ai I'te, / have been 
 tu lus ete, thou had been 
 ilaete, hehasbeen 
 noos aTOHB M, we have been 
 YOOB Bvee ^t^ yott have been 
 ils ont ^ they have been 
 
 je serai, / shtiU be 
 tu sems, thtm tciii be 
 il sera, he \tiU be 
 noos serous, we shall be 
 vous seres, you wUl be 
 ils seront, they wiU be 
 
 j*anus M, I had been 
 tu avaia ^ thcu hadsl been 
 il avait M, he had been 
 nous aTions ^ we haul ^tem 
 ▼ous aries M, you had been 
 lis avaient M, they had been 
 
 yeaa 6t6, I had been 
 to eos ^ thou hadal been 
 U eat M, he had been 
 nooa eAmes M, we had been 
 vooB efttes M, ycu had been 
 ils «arent 4i6^ they had been 
 
 j norai M/6, I shall have been 
 tu auras dt^ fKou witt have been 
 il aura M, he wUl have been 
 noos aorons M, we ehaU have been 
 Toos aurez et&, you wQl have been 
 ils aurout ^U>, they wiU have been 
 
 Present 
 je serais, / should be 
 tu serais, thou icouldst be 
 il serait, he xixntld be 
 nous serious, we should be 
 vous seriez, you would be 
 ils seraient, they xjdoxM be 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Past 
 j'aurais ete, / should have been 
 tu aiurais ete, thou wouldst have been 
 il aiu*ait ete, he would have been 
 nous aurions ete, toe should have been 
 vous auriez ete, you would have been 
 ils auraient ete, they iDOuld have been 
 
 Bois, be (thou) 
 
 Imperative, 
 soyons, let us be 
 
 soyez, be (you) 
 
^ 121 — 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 Present 
 
 que je sois, I may he 
 que tu sois, thou mayest he 
 qu'il soit, he may he 
 que nous soyons, we may he 
 que vous soyez, you may he 
 qu'ils soient, they may he 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 que je fusse, I might he 
 
 que tu fusses, thou mightest he 
 
 qu'il fut, he might he 
 
 que nous fussions, we might he 
 
 que vous fussiez, you might he 
 
 qu'ils fussent, they might he 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 Subjunctive. ^^^^^ 
 
 que j'aie ete, I may have heen 
 
 que tu aies ete, thou mayest have heen 
 
 qu'il ait ete, he may have heen 
 
 que nous ayons ete, we m/iy have heen 
 
 que vous ayez ete, you m/xy have heen 
 
 qu'ils aient ete, they ma,y have heen 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 que j'eusse ete, I might have heen 
 
 que tu eusses ete, thou mightest have heen 
 
 qu'il eut ete, he might have heen 
 
 que nous eussions ete,ioe might have heen 
 
 que vous eussiez ete, you might have heen 
 
 qu'ils eussent ete, ih^ might have heen 
 
 Pres. etre, to he 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Perf. 
 
 avoir ete, to have heen 
 
 Participle. 
 Pres. etant, heing Perf- ayant ete, having heen 
 
 Past, ete, heen [L 93, 94. 95. 96. 101. 102. 103. 104. Ill, 112. 
 
 117. 118, 119. 120. n. 1. 2. S. 6. 9. 10. 15. 16.] 
 
 193. lu general, the French auxiliaries are used nearly the same as to 
 have and to he in English, namely, avoir for the compound tenses of the 
 active voice, and ^tre for the passive. But there are also not a few active 
 verbs in French, which form their compound tenses with 6tre, where 
 to have in English is employed. These are: 
 
 1. All reflective verbs, as: se lever, to rise; je mesuis leve, I have risen; 
 
 2. The following neuter verbs: 
 
 aller, to go retoumer, to come hack 
 
 aiTiver, to arrive sortir, to go out 
 
 entrer, to come wi tomber, to fall 
 
 mourir, to die venir, to come 
 
 naitre, to he horn parvenir, to attain 
 
 partir, to set out devenir, to hecome 
 
 rester, to remain revenir, to come hack 
 
 194. A few verbs may take either auxiliary; namely, avoip, when the 
 action of the verb is had in view, and ^tre, when reference is had to the 
 condition or state which the verb expresses. These are : 
 
 accourir, to run to 
 cesser, to cease 
 changer, to change 
 croitre, to grow 
 descendre, to descend 
 
 echapper, to escape, evade 
 grandir, to grow tall 
 monter, to ascend 
 perir, to perish 
 vieillir, to grow old 
 
— 122 — 
 
 195. Some fiire uaed with different meanings, 
 demeurer, with avoir: to reside with etre: to remain 
 conveuir, *• to suit " (o agree 
 Vf^^^otf ♦' iogotikrcugh fo pass away, go 
 expiier, '; to die ^> expire 
 
 Formation of the Tenses. 
 
 196. There are five principal parth in the conjugation of French verV)R, 
 niuiicly, the I*rc8ent Infin itive, the Prewent Parti ciple, th e fi^^ ^iirtic-iplt? . 
 the Present indicati ve, and the Preterit »Indim£iaL They are nxlh-A prin- 
 cipai or pnmiUve parts, beoanse when they am known, all others wm be in- 
 ferred from them. 
 
 197. From the Present Infinitive are formed: 
 the Future by changing r or re into rai, and 
 
 the Pkeseut Conditional by changing r or re into raiR. 
 
 Pret. IniBitfve. Future. Pret. CondMonaL 
 
 parler to upeak y- iwirhral je parlerais 
 
 llnir to finiaii je finiral je finirals 
 
 vend re to aeif je vendral jo vend ra 1 8 
 
 198. From the Present Participle are formed: 
 
 the Plural of the Indicative Preaenft faj changing ant into oiiM, es, ent 
 the Imperfect Inilicative by changing ailt into ai8; and 
 the Present Subjimctive by changing ant into e. 
 
 Pres. Part lod. Prat. Plur. Imperl. Ind. Pret. Sut 
 
 pnrlant, frpftskimj nous pftrlons je jwirlais qut-jt 
 rtniHsailt, ^*ni-«Aiik; nou8 fini-i^OI18 je fmi.'vsai.s que je liiii-sc 
 vendant, selling nons veudous je vemlais que je veude 
 
 199. From the Past Participle all comiwimd tensctj are formed by means 
 of the anxiliarit^ avoir, to h 'ce^ and etre. to he. 
 
 Past Part. — C owpoe ad Taaaea. ^ 
 
 parl^, spoken j'ai parl6 j'avais porW jaurai parle etc. 
 pnni, punished j'ens puni j'anrais puni je suis puni etc. 
 vendu, soid j*ai vendu j'aurai vendu j'ai et^ vendu etc 
 
 2CX). From the Present Indicative the Im]>erative is formed by sim- 
 ply omitting the pronouns Je^ noUH* YOUSy thus: 
 Prea. Indie Imperative, 
 
 je parle, / spetUc parle 
 
 nous finissons, toe fimsh finissons 
 
 VOU8 vendez, you sell vendez 
 
 201. Prom the Preterit Indicative the Subjunctive of the same tense is 
 formed by changing ai into asse for verbs of the first Conjugation, and by 
 adding se to all other verbs, as: 
 
 Pret Indicative. Pret Subjunctive. 
 
 je parlai, / spf>ke que je parlasse 
 
 je finis, I finished que je finlsse 
 
 je vendis, Isold que je vendisse 
 
— . 123 — 
 
 EEGULAK VEKBS. — FIKST CONJUGATION. 
 
 202. parler, to speak 
 
 SiMPiiE Tenses. Compound Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Perfect, 
 j'ai parle, I have spoken 
 tu as parle, thou hast spoken 
 il a parle, he has spoken 
 nous avons parle, we have spoken 
 vous avez parle, you have spoken 
 ils ont parle, they have spoken 
 
 Present. 
 
 je parle, / speak 
 tu paries, thou speakest 
 il parle, he speaks 
 nous parlons, we speak 
 vous parlez, you speak 
 ils parlent, they speak 
 
 Imperfect, 
 je parlais, I was speaking 
 tu parlais, thou wast speaking 
 il parlait, he was speaking 
 nous parlions, we were speaking 
 vous parliez, you were speaking 
 ils parlaient, they were speaking 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 je parlai, I spoke 
 
 tu parlas, thou spokest 
 
 il parla, he spoke 
 
 nous parlames, ice spoke 
 
 vous parlates, you spoke 
 
 ils parlor ent, they spoke 
 
 Future. 
 
 je parler ai, / shall speak 
 tu parler as, thou wilt speak 
 il parlera, he will speak 
 nous parler ons, we shall speak 
 vous parlerez, you will speak 
 ils parleront, they will speak 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 j'avais parle, I had spoken 
 tu avals parle, thou hadst spoken 
 il avait parle, he had spoken 
 nous avions parle, we had spoken 
 vous aviez parle, you had spoken 
 ils avaient parle, they had spoken 
 
 Preterit Anterior. 
 
 j'eus parle, I had spoken 
 tu eus parle, thou hadst spoken, 
 il eut parle, he had spoken 
 nous eiimes parle, we had spoken 
 vous eutes parle, you had spoken 
 ils eurent parle, they had spoken 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 j'aurai parle, I shall have spoken 
 tu auras parle, thou wilt have spoken 
 il aura parle, he will have spoken 
 nous aurons parle, we shall have spoken 
 vous aurez parle, you will have spoken 
 ils auront parle, they will have spoken 
 
 Present. 
 
 je parlerais, I should speak 
 tu parlerais, thou wouldst speak 
 il parler ait, he would speak 
 nous parler ions, we should speak 
 vous parleriez, you would speak 
 ils parleraient, they would speak 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Past. 
 
 j'aurais parle, I should have spoken 
 tu aurais parle, thou wouldst have spoken 
 il aurait parle, he would have spoken 
 nous aurions parle, we should have sp. 
 vous auriez parle, you would have spoken 
 ils auraient parle, they would have sp. 
 
 parle, speak (thou) 
 
 Imperative, 
 parlpns, let us speak 
 
 parlez, speak (you) 
 
— 124 — 
 
 Sddxa 
 
 CoxpowD TmsM. 
 
 Present 
 que je pMrle, I may speak 
 que ta paries, thou maytst speak 
 qu'il parle, he may speak 
 que nous parlions, toe may speak 
 que vouH parliez. you may speak 
 qa'ils parleilt, they may speak 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Perfect 
 que j'aie parks / may havf sjyiikeu 
 quo tu aie8 jxirle, thou maytst have sp. 
 qu'il nit j»irle, he may hare symken 
 que nouw ayou« jxirle, ire- may have sp. 
 que vou« ayez |>arle, you may have sp. 
 qa'ils aieut ixirle, they may have spoken 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 que je parlasse, / might speak que j^enaee parl^ / might have spoken 
 
 que ta parlasses, thou mighiest speak qae ta eoases porl^, thim mighiest etc. 
 qa*il parlAt, he mighl speak qu'il eftt parl^ he might have >- 
 
 qaenoos parlassions, tee might sp. que noos eosnons parld, tee m 
 queyoos parlassiez, youmtght spieak que toos eovieK park*, you mijht dc. 
 qa'ils parlassent, they might speak qa'ils coasent porl^, thry might etc. 
 
 Infinitive, 
 parler, to speak Ptri aroir parie, to have spoken 
 
 Partioiple. 
 Perf. 
 
 ayant parl^ having spoken 
 
 Pret. parlant, speaking 
 Past parl6, spoken 
 
 (L IMS. UM. 19S. 196, Vil. i9S. 1^. l.'iO. 131. 139. 
 
 n. .'1. •/- 7. s. //. /•.*. /.'{. It, IS. itf.] 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 203. 
 
 y Present 
 
 je finis, Ifinhh 
 tu finis, thoafinishest 
 il fiuit, he finishes 
 nous finissons, xte finish 
 Tous fiuissez, you finish 
 lis finissent, they finish 
 
 Imperfect 
 jc ii.ii.-.-iii>>. / icas finishing 
 tu tiiiissais, thou icaM finishing 
 il finissait, he icti.s finishing 
 nous finisslons, toe were finish i Jig 
 ' vcus finiKsiez, you xoere finishing 
 ils finissaieilt, ihey tcere finishing 
 
 finir, to finish 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Perfect "^^'^-^ 
 
 j'fti fini, 1 hnv jliish'd 
 
 tu as fini, th-ni hastjlnisf^d 
 
 il a fini, he has finished 
 nous avons fini, toe have finished 
 vous avez fini, you have finished 
 ils ont fini, they have finished 
 
 f^uperfect 
 j'avais fini, / had finished 
 tu avais fini, thou hftdst finished 
 il avail fini, he h(ul finished 
 nous av-ions fini, ice had finished 
 vous aviez fini, you had finished 
 ils avaient fini, they had finished 
 
— 125 — 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 Preterit. 
 
 je finis, I finished 
 
 tu finis, thou finishedst 
 
 il finit, lie finished 
 
 nous fininies, loe finished 
 
 vous finites, you finished 
 
 ils finirent, they finished 
 
 Future. 
 
 je finirai, / shall finish 
 tu finiras, thou wilt finish 
 il finira, he will finish 
 nous finiroiis, we shall finish 
 vous finirez, you will finish 
 ils finiroilt, they will finish 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 Preterit Anterior. 
 
 j'eusfini, I had finished 
 
 tu eus fini, thou hadst finished 
 
 il eut fini, he Imd finished 
 
 nous eumes fini, we had finished 
 
 vous eutes fini, you had finished 
 
 ils eurent fini, they had finished 
 
 Second Future, 
 j'aurai fini, I shall have finished 
 tu auras fini, thou wilt have finished 
 il aura fini, he will have finished 
 nous aurons fini, we shall have finished 
 vous aurez fini, you will have finished 
 ils auront fini, they will have finished 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Present, 
 je finirais, I should finish 
 tu finirais, thou icouldst finish 
 il finirait, he icould finish 
 nous finirions, we should finish 
 vous finiriez, you loould finish 
 ■ ils finiraient, they would finish 
 
 Past. 
 
 j'aurais fini, I should have finished 
 tu aurais fini, thou wouldst have finished 
 il aurait fini, he would have finished 
 nous aurions fini, we should havefinished 
 vous auriez fini, you would havefinished 
 ils auraient fini, they would havefinished 
 
 finis, finish (thou) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 finissons, let us finish 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 finissez, finish (you) 
 
 Present. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 que je finisse, I may finish 
 
 que tu finisses, thou rnayest finish 
 
 qu'il finisse, he may fiyiish 
 
 que nous finissions, we may finish 
 
 que vous finissiez, you may finish 
 
 qu'ils finissent, they may finish 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 que je finisse, I might finish 
 
 que tu finisses, thou mightest finish 
 
 qu'il finit, he might finish 
 
 que nous finissions, we might finish 
 
 que vous finissiez, you might fiyiish 
 
 qu'ils finissent, they might finish 
 
 que j'aie fini, I may have finished 
 que tu aies fini, thou may est havefinished 
 qu'il ait fini, he may have finished 
 que nous ayons fini, toe may havefinished 
 que vous ayez fini, you may havefinished 
 qu'ils aient fini, they may havefinished 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 que j'eusse fini, I might have finished 
 que tu eusses fini, thou mightest etc. 
 qu'il eut fini, he might etc. 
 que nous eussions fini, we might etc. 
 que vous eussiez fini, you might etc. 
 qu'ils eussent fini, they might etc. 
 
— 126 — 
 
 SocPLB TiNfOH!. Compound Txkbv. 
 
 Infinitive* 
 
 Prtt. flnir, to finish P»H. avoir fini, to hat^ finished 
 
 Participle. 
 Pr«i. finiHSant« finishing Peri ayant fini, fiaving finished 
 
 PtiL liui, fiiusfaed [I. 1S3. 134, 135, 130. 137, 138. 
 
 n. 3. 4, 7. 8. 11, 1^, 13. 14. 18. 16,] 
 
 204. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 
 vend re, to sell 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Pretwit 
 je Tends, / sell 
 tu vends, thou stUesl 
 il vendt he seUs 
 nous vendons, toe M 
 Youa vendez. you seU 
 ils vendent, they mU 
 
 je vendais, I was uBbug 
 tn vendais. ihcu waat atiUng 
 il veudait. he was aeUing 
 nous vvndioiis» we toers mOing 
 Yons vendiez. you were aeOing 
 ils vendaieut, they were sdUng 
 
 PretenCi 
 
 je vendis, / sold 
 
 ta vendis, thou soldest 
 
 il vendit, he sold 
 
 nous veudiines, we sold 
 
 vous vendites, you sold 
 
 ils vendirent, they sold 
 
 Future, 
 je vendrai, / shall sell 
 in vendras, thou witt sdl 
 il vcndra. he wiS seU 
 nous vendrons, loe shall sell 
 Yona vendrez, you will sell 
 ils vendront, they tcHl seU 
 
 jai vttudu, I have sold 
 toMTendu, thou had wold 
 il a Tendo, he has Mold 
 noQ8 ayoDB vendo, we ham aM 
 TOQB aves vendo, you have aM 
 ils ont yendn, they have sold 
 
 j*aTai8 Tendo, 1 had add 
 to avais Tendu, thcu hadst acid 
 il avait vendu, he had sold 
 nona avioDa Tendn, we had aold 
 Tons avies vendii, you had aM 
 ils avaient vendo, they had aold 
 
 Prelenl MBienof . 
 j'ens vendn, I had aold 
 ixL ens vendu, thou hadat aold 
 il eut vendn, he had sold 
 nous edmes vendu, ire had aold 
 vons efttes vendu, you had aold 
 ils enrent vendu, they had sold 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 jaurai vendu, IshaU have sold 
 tu auras vendu, thou wili Jiave sold 
 il aura vendu, he trill Iiave sold 
 nous aurons vendu, we shall have sold 
 vous aurez vendu, you wiU have sold 
 ils auront vendu, they wUl have sold 
 
— 121 — 
 
 Simple Tenses. 
 
 Present. 
 
 je vendrais, / should sell 
 ill vendrais, thou wouldst sell 
 il vendrait, he would sell 
 nous vendrions, we should sell 
 vous vendriez, you would sell 
 ils vendraient, they would sell 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 Conditional. 
 
 Past. 
 
 j'aurais vendu, I should Jmve sold 
 tu aurais vendu, thou wouldst have sold 
 il aurait vendu, he would have sold 
 nous aurions vendu, we should have sold 
 vous auriez vendu, you would have sold 
 ils auraient vendu, they would have sold 
 
 vends, sell (thou) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 vendons, let us seU 
 
 vendez, sell (you) 
 
 Present. 
 
 que je vende, I may sell 
 
 que tu vendes, thou rnayest sell 
 
 qu'il vende, he may sell 
 
 que nous vendions, we may sell 
 
 que vous vendiez, you may sell 
 
 qu'ils vendent, they may sell 
 
 Preterit. 
 que je vendisse, I might sell 
 que tu vendisses, thou mightest sell 
 qu'il vendit, he might sell 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 que j'aie vendu, Imxiy have sold 
 que tu aies vendu, thou mayest have sold 
 qu'il ait vendu, he may have sold 
 que nous ayons vendu, we may have s. 
 que vous ayez vendu, you may have sold 
 qu'ils aient vendu, they may have sold 
 
 Pluperfect, 
 que j'eusse vendu, I might have sold 
 que tu eusses vendu, thou mightest have s. 
 qu'il eut vendu, he might have sold 
 
 que nous vendissions, we might sell que nous eussions vendu, we might etc. 
 que vous vendissiez, you might sell que vous eussiez vendu, you might etc. 
 qu'ils vendissent, they might sell qu'ils eussent vendu, they might have s. 
 
 Infinite 
 
 Pres. vendre, to sell 
 
 Per', avoir vendu, to have sold 
 
 Pres. 
 Past 
 
 vendant, selling 
 vendu, sold 
 
 Participle. 
 Perf. 
 
 ayant vendu, having sold 
 
 [I. 130. 140. 141. 142. 143. 144. 145. 146. 
 II. 3. 4. 7. 8. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.] 
 
 Notes to the Conjugations. 
 
 205. Verbs ending in the infinitive in cer, take ^ (with the cedilla) 
 instead of c before a and o; as: placer, to place, nous pla9ons, we place. 
 
 206. Verbs ending in the infinitive in ger, always take a silent e after 
 g' when followed by a or o; as: manger, to eat, nous mangeons, we eat. 
 
 207. Vert)S ending in the infinitive in eler or eter as : appeler, to call; 
 Jeter, to throw, double the 1 or t before a silent e, as: j'appelle, I call, but 
 nous appelons, we call,' je jette, I throw, but nous jetons, we throw. Only 
 three are excepted, namely; acheter, to buy, geler, to freeze, and peler, to peal 
 
— 128 — 
 
 20a The three verbs, acheter, to buy, g^eler, to freete, and peler, 
 to pwl, and all those which hnve a nilent e or 6 in the second syllable from 
 the end, change e or 6 into ^ when the following syllable is silent; as: 
 acheter, to buy; j'ach^te, I buy; lever, toraiaty je l^ve; rep^ter, to rgjeat, 
 je repute. 
 
 209. Verbe ending in the infinitive in yer change the y into i before 
 a silent e; as: balayer, to stt^, je balale, I gwttp. Hark that these verbs 
 retain the i tifter y in the first and second persons plural of the imperfoct 
 indicative and pn»ent subjunctive: thus, from employer, to fnq^toy, we 
 
 y< fonn nous employions, vous employlez (Imperfect Indicative and Present 
 ^' Subjunctive). 
 
 210. In a like manner, verbs ending in the infinitive in ier, are written 
 with double i in the first and second persons plural of the imperfect indica- 
 te tive, and of the present subjunctive; thos we say: prier, to beg; nous 
 
 priions, vk begged. [i. i47. 14S, 149. ISO, 151. 159. 155. iJ^] 
 
 Forms of Conjugation. 
 
 211. For the three forms of conjugating a verb in English, the Freneh 
 has but one, the simple form; thus, 
 
 je vends I aell lammBkig IdoaeU 
 
 nousvendons toe se0 1M ore siOlii^ tosdoMff 
 
 ilsvendent they sell ftcy are jaBfaig thgydoseU 
 
 je vondais / soid I waa aeOing IMseU 
 
 noiis vendions tcf sold we leere aeOing tcedid aeU 
 
 ilA vendaient they aold they were aMng they did aeU 
 
 212. A verb is conjugated negatively by placing the adverb ne before 
 it, and pa.s or point after it, or after the first auxiliaiy. In the present 
 infinitive ne >md ims are both placed before it In general, point implies 
 a strougtr negation than pas. Examples: 
 
 ne pas donner, not to give. 
 je ne donnc pas, I do not give je n*ai pas donn^ I have noi given 
 
 tu ne donues pas, thou dost iiot give tu n'l^s pas donn^ thou haat not given 
 ii ne donue pas, he does not give il n*a pas donn^ he has not given 
 nous ne dounous pas fite do not give nous n uvons pas donn^ toe have net g. 
 vous lie dounez pas, you do not give vous n*avez pas donn^ you have not g. 
 ils ne donnent pas, they do not give ils n'ont pas donne, they have notg. 
 
 213. The negatives pas and point maybe omitted after the verbs 
 cesser, to cea,se, OSer, to dare, poiivoir, to be able, and in the negative 
 conditional of savoir, je ne saiirais, when meaning, I cannot; thus, 
 
 il ne 06886 de 86 plaindre he does not cease complaining 
 
 je n*ose lui parler I dare not speak to him 
 
 je ne puis marcher I cannot waOc 
 
 vous ne sauriez le refuser you cannot refuse it 
 
— 129 — 
 
 214. A verb is conjugated interrogatively by placing the pronoun after 
 it, or after the first auxiliary. In this form, a hyphen should always be 
 inserted before the pronoun; and if the verb or the first auxiliary ends in a 
 vowel, and the pronoun l3egins with another, for the sake of euphony, -t- 
 (with a hyphen before it and after it) is inserted. Examples: 
 
 punissais-je, did I punish ? ai-je puni, have I punished ? 
 
 punissais-tu, didsi thou punish ? as-tu puni, hast thou punished ? 
 
 punissait-il, did he punish ? a-t-il puni, has he punished ? 
 
 punissions-nous, did we punish ? avons-nous puni, have we punished ? 
 
 punissiez-vous, did you punish ? avez-vous puni, have you punished ? 
 
 punissaient-ils, did they punish ? ont-ils puni, have they punished ? 
 
 215. When a question is asked, with a noun or any of the following 
 pronouns, ceci, cela, aucun, quelqu'un, personne, or rien as 
 
 subject, the noun or pronoun belongs at the head of the sentence, and the 
 verb follows in the interrogative form, thus, 
 
 le diner est-il pret? is dinner ready ? 
 
 cela est-il bon a manger? is that good to eat ? 
 
 quelqu'un m'a-t-il demande ? did anybody ask for me ? 
 
 la compagnie est-elle arrivee ? has the company arrived ? 
 
 216. A verb ending in a mute e in the first person singular, takes an 
 acute accent when used interrogatively, thus, 
 
 je parle, I speak je ne respire pas, I do not breathe 
 
 parle-je, do I speak ? ne respire-je pas, do I not breathe? 
 
 217. When a verb used interrogatively has but one syllable in the first 
 person singular, the expression est-ce que should be employed instead of 
 the simple form of question; thus, 
 
 est-ce que je perds, do Hose ? est-ce que je dors, do I sleep ? 
 With some verbs, this rule appears to be disregarded; as ai-je, have I? 
 suis-je, am I? dis-je, do I say? sais-je, do I know? puis-je, can I? 
 
 218. A verb is conjugated interrogatively and negatively by placing the 
 adverb ne before it, and the pronoun with pas or point after it, or 
 after the first auxiliary, thus, 
 
 ne pleurai-je pas, did I not cry ? n'ai-je pas fini, have I not finished ? 
 
 ne pleuras-tu pas, didst thou not cry ? n'as-tu pas fini, hast thou not finished ? 
 ne pleura-t-il pas, did he not cry ? n'a-t-il pas fini, has he not finished ? 
 
 ne pleurames-nous pas, did we not cry ? n'avons-nous pas fini, have we not f ? 
 ne pleurates-vous pas, die? you not cry ? n'avez-vous pas fini, have you not f. ? 
 ne pleurerent-ils pas, did they not cry ? n'ont-ils pas fini, have they not f. ? 
 
 [I. 103, 104. til. U2, 113. 114, 115. 116, 1^1, 129,} 
 
— 130 — 
 
 219. 
 
 PrttMt 
 
 je suis aim6, / am loved 
 tu 68 aim^, thou art loved 
 il est aiiii^, he is hved 
 elle est aim6e. she ia loved 
 nous sommes aim^, toe are loved 
 Toos dtes aim^, you are hved 
 ilssontaimto 1,j,^,^k,,^ 
 
 The Passive Verb. 
 6tre aiiu<^, to be loved 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 fteis aim^ I was hved 
 tu^taisaim^ thouwasthved 
 il 4tait aim^ he was hved 
 nous ^ons aim^ we were hved 
 ▼OQB ^ties aim^ you were hved 
 ibteientaim^ ihtywenhved 
 
 je tuB aim^ I was hved 
 tu fas aim^ thou wasi hved 
 il fat aim^. Aa was hved 
 noos f&mes aim^ we were hved 
 ▼0118 f^tee aim^ you were hved 
 ils fiirent aim^ ihey were hved 
 
 Future, 
 je serai aim^ I shall be hved 
 ta seias aime, ihou wiU he hved 
 il sera aim^ he will be hved 
 nous serons aim^ toe shall be hved 
 yooB sereE aim^ you wiU be hved 
 ils seiont aim^ Ihey wiU be hved 
 
 Perfect 
 
 j'ai ^t^ aim^, / hair Wen loved 
 ta as ^ aim^ thou hast been hved 
 il a ^ aim^ he has been hved 
 elle a M aimte, she has been hved 
 nooB aroDB M aim^, we havebeenhved 
 yciOBtLweiKMMim^, you have been hved 
 ilsontMaimto K^ ^ ,_ , 
 elleBantMaimtes, \'^'^^oeenl. 
 
 ynyniM M aim^ I had been hved 
 ta afais M aiM ihou hadsl been hved 
 U avait M tami, he had been hved 
 nooBnyUmmMtdBMiBfWehadbeenhved 
 ▼oll8a▼ieE^aim&^ you had been hved 
 ihrnysMoaiMnuDiis, they had been hved 
 
 j*ei» M aim^ I had been hved 
 taeosMaim^ thou hadsl been hved 
 HwAM^m^hehadbeenhved 
 jiovBeAiDMMsiUDAB, we had been hved 
 V01I8 efttes ^ aim^ you Aod been iotwi 
 ils earent M aimds, they had been hved 
 
 j'aozai ^ aim^ I shall have been hved 
 taBxuMM/6tami,thouwiUhavebeenhved 
 ilaara^aim^ he wiU have been hved 
 noos aorons M aim^s, toe shaU have etc 
 ▼oos aaree M aim^ youwOlhave etc. 
 ils auroni M tdmie, (hey wHl have etc 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Ptti 
 
 je serais aim^ I should be laved j'aoiais ^t^ aim4 I should have been hved 
 
 tn serais aime. ihou wouldsi be hved ta aorais 4i6 aim^ ihou wouldst have etc 
 
 il serait aime, he uxnild be hved il anrait ete aim^ he would have etc 
 
 nous serions aime8,toe should be hved nous aorions ete aim^ we should ett 
 
 Tons seriez aimes, you loould be hved yons anriez ete aim^ you would etc. 
 
 ils seraient aimes, they would be hved ils nuraient isU aim^ they uxmld etc 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 sois aim^, he (thou) hved 
 Boyons aim^, Id us he loved 
 Boyez aiinfe, he (you) hved 
 
131 
 
 Subjunctive. ^ ^ ^ 
 
 Present Perfect 
 
 que je sois aime, I may be loved que j'aie ete aime, I may have heenloved 
 
 que tu sois aime, thou may est he loved que tu aies ete Q,im.e,thou mayest have etc. 
 
 qu'il soit aime, he may be loved qu'il ait ete aime, he may have etc. 
 
 que nous soyons aimes, we may be loved que nous ayons ete aimes, we may etc. 
 
 que vous soyez aimes, you may be loved que vous ayez ete aimes, you may etc. 
 
 qu'ils soient aimes, they may be loved qu'ils aient ete aimes, they may etc. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 que j'eusse ete aime, I might have been I. 
 que tu eusses ete aime, thou mightest etc. 
 qu'il eut ete aime, he might have been I. 
 que nous eussions ete aimes, ice might etc. 
 que vous eussiez ete aimes, i/ow might etc. 
 qu'ils eussent ete aimes, they might etc. 
 
 imperfect 
 
 que je fusse aime, I might be loved 
 que tu fusses aime, thou mightest be I. 
 qu'il fut aime, he might be loved 
 que nous fussions aimes, we might etc. 
 que vous fussiez aimes, you might etc. 
 qu'ils f ussent aimes, they might etc. 
 
 Pres. etre aime, to be loved 
 
 Pres. etant aime, being loved 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Pert 
 
 Participle. 
 Perf. 
 
 avoir ete aime, to have been loved 
 
 ayant ete aime, having been loved 
 [H. 87. 88.] 
 
 The Reflective Verb. 
 220. se lever, to rise 
 
 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. „ , ^ 
 
 Perfect 
 
 je me suis leve, 1 have risen 
 
 tu t'es leve, thou hast risen 
 
 il s'est leve, he has risen 
 
 nous nous sonimes leves, we have r. 
 
 vous vous etes leves, you have risen 
 
 ils se sont leves, they have risen 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 je m'etais leve, I had risen 
 
 tu t'etais leve, thou hadst risen 
 
 il s'etait leve, he had risen 
 
 nous nous etions leves, we had risen 
 
 vous vous etiez leves, you had risen 
 
 ils s'etaient leves, they had risen 
 
 Present 
 je me leve, I rise 
 tu te leves, thou risest 
 11 se leve, he rises 
 nous nous levons, we rise 
 vous vous levez, you rise 
 lis se levent, they rise 
 
 Imperfect 
 je me levais, I was rising 
 tu te levais, thou wast rising 
 11 se levait, he loas rising 
 nous nous levions, we were rising 
 vons vous leviez, you were rising 
 ils se levaient, they imre rising 
 
 Preterit, 
 je me levai, I rose 
 tu te levas, thou rosest 
 il se leva, he rose 
 nous nous levames, we rose 
 vous vous levates, you rose 
 ils se leverent, they rose 
 
 Preterit Anterior. 
 
 je me fus leve, I had risen 
 
 tu te fus leve, thou hadst risen 
 
 11 se fut leve, he had risen 
 
 nous nous fumes leves, we had risen 
 
 vous vous futes leves, you had risen 
 
 ils se furent leves, they had risen 
 
— 182 — 
 
 Sdcflb Twnam, Compound Tscbib. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 je me l^verai, / shcJl rise je me seiai lev^ I shall have rimn 
 
 tu te liveras, thou will rise tu te aena ler^ thou wiU have risen 
 
 il 86 l^vera, he will rise il se sera ler^ he ttiU have risen 
 
 nous nous leverooB, we shaU rise nous noosseroiiB leT^ we shall have etc 
 
 ▼ous voos levereK, you wiU rise yooh toos aerez lev^ you will have etc 
 
 ilfl se l^veront, they wiU rise ils ae aeront \er4m, thsy will have etc 
 
 CondttionaL ^^ 
 
 Pnem/i. Pitt 
 
 je me l^eraia, / shovid riss y me aeroia leT^ IshoMhave risen 
 
 ixL te l^YenM, thoti wouldsl rise in teaemiHleY^ thou wouldsl have risen 
 
 il ae l^erait, Ae wtndd rise il ae aerait lev^ he would have risen 
 
 uooa nous l^veriona, tee shoM riss nooa noaa aeriona ler^ toe ^uwld etc 
 
 voua Totts l^veriez, you would rise votia Toua aeries lev^ you would etc 
 
 ila ae l^emient, they would riss ila ae aeraieni lev6^ thsy would etc 
 
 Imperative, 
 l^ve-toi, rise (thou) leYous-nooa, let us rise leres-Tona, rise (you) 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Present Perfect 
 
 que je me 16ve» / may rise que je me sola levt% /f»'/// have risen 
 
 que tu te l^vee, thou mayest rise quetuteaoialev^ thou mnytst havt risen 
 
 qu'il ae l&ve, he may rise qa*il ae aoit leT^, he may have risen 
 
 que nous noua leTions, tea tnay riss que nodia nooa aoyons K■vl3^ we may etc. 
 
 que Yona voua levies, you may rise que Toua Toua aoTes ler^ you may etc. 
 
 quails ae l^Tent» thsy majf rise qvCUs ae aoient leWa, thsy may have risen 
 
 que je me levaaae, / might rise que je me fnaae ler^ J might have risen 
 
 que tu te levaaaea, Ihou mighUst rise que tu te ftaaaea ler^ thou mighiest etc 
 
 qu*il ae levat. he migJU rise qu'il ae fftt ler^ he mSghi have risen 
 
 que nous noua leTaaaiona, we might r. que noaanoiiafiiaBioiialeT^ wemight etr, 
 
 que vous voua levaaaiez, you might r. que YousTouafnaalez ler^^ youmighi etc. 
 
 qu*il8 ae levaaaent, they might rise qu'ils ae fussent lev&, they might etc 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Prat, ae lever, to rise Perf. s'etre lev^ to have risen 
 
 Participle. 
 Prv- se levant, rising Perf. s'^tant lev^ having risen 
 
 Past leve, risen p^ ,7^ ^7^, ^^3 i7^,j 
 
 221. All reflective verbs take as their object a reflective pronoun of the 
 same person and number \*ith their subject, and ^tre as their auxiliary. 
 In the first and second persons, singular and phiral, the reflective pronoun 
 is the same with the conjunctive personal; in the third person, there is a 
 special reflective pronoim se ; it has the value of both dative and accusative 
 of either number and gender. 
 
— 133 — 
 
 222. Instead of the passive voice, which is less frequentty used in 
 French than in English, a reflective phrase is usually substituted in such 
 sentences as the following: 
 
 ce mot ne s'ecrit pas ainsi this word is not written thus 
 
 ce cheval ne se vend pas this horse is not for sale 
 
 cela se voit tous les jours that is seen every day 
 
 223. A reflective verb is often used in a reciprocal sense, but in the 
 plural only. In this case, the reflective pronoun answers to the English one 
 another, each other. 
 
 224. A large number of French reflective verbs correspond to English 
 intransitives, and require, therefore, special attention. Such are: 
 
 s'abstenir, to abstain s'evaporer, to evaporate 
 
 s'accorder, to agree se fier, to trust 
 
 s'amuser, to be amused se figurer, to fancy 
 
 s'apercevoir, to perceive se fondre, to melt 
 
 s'appeler, to be called se hater, to make haste 
 
 s'asseoir, to sit down s'imaginer, to imagine 
 
 se baigner, to bathe se lever, to rise 
 
 se coucher, to go to bed se moquer, to make fun 
 
 se defier, to distrust se plaindre, to complain 
 
 se depecher, to make haste se porter, to be (of health) 
 
 s'echapper, to escape se promener, to take a icalk 
 
 s'ecrier, to cry out se rejouir, to rejoice 
 
 s'emparer, to seize upon se repentir, to repent 
 
 s'empresser, to hasten se reposer, to rest 
 
 s'en aller, to go away se reveiller, to aioake 
 
 s'endormir, to fall asleep se rire de, to laugh at 
 
 s*enfuir, to run away se soumettre, to submit 
 
 s*enrichir, to grow rich se souvenir, to remember 
 
 s*entretenir, to talk se taire, to be silent 
 
 s'etonner, to wonder se tromper, to be mistaken 
 
 s'evanouir, to faint se vanter, to boast 
 
 Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 225. Some verbs, which, in virtue of their meaning, can be used only in 
 the third person singular, with the indefinite subject il, it, have been called 
 Impersonal Verbs. Such are: 
 
 11 neige, it snows il gresille, it sleets il pleut, it rains 
 
 il gele, it freezes il eclaire, it lightens il degele, it thaws 
 11 grele, it hails il tonne, it thunders 11 faut, it is necessary 
 
 [II. 80.] 
 
 226. The impersonal verb il faut corresponds to the English must, 
 to be obliged to, to have to, and the like. It is followed by an infinitive, or by 
 que mth a verb in the subjunctive; thus, 
 
 il faut instruire les enfants children must be instructed 
 
 il faudra que votre frere lui ecrive your brother shall have to write to him. 
 
— 134 — 
 
 227. Whf^n il fant mennfl to he in need of, to tt<tnt, it takes the stibjeet 
 of the English senteiioe in the dative, and the tiling wanted in the nomina- 
 tive, thtis, 
 
 il fiiut un cliapeau k votre fi^re yotir brother tcanis a hat 
 
 il lui falliiit de Torgent he i«m in tciDii of money [U. 61. 6V.J 
 
 228. There are many verbs in French, transitive as well as intransitive, 
 which are also used impersonally, as: 
 
 il importe, it matters il parait, it itppeara 
 
 il sufflt, a IB sufficieni il semble, it teems 
 
 il s'agit, the question is U arrive, i^ happens 
 
 il couvient» it becomes il vaut mMoz, it is better 
 
 229. Impezsonal plu»aeB formed with the verbs BTolr. Mro and 
 faire, are very fireqaent, and deMrve special notioe. 
 
 230. il y a corresponds closely to the Eofi^ish there i.v. therr <n: md 
 is nsed i nearly the same manner. Very often, it refers in a parUcuhir l.-rm 
 to time and pkce. Examples: 
 
 il y a une voitore k la porta ihsre is a oaniage at the door 
 
 il y a d^jk des cerises there are cherries abreadff 
 
 oombien y a4-il d'ici k Albaigr? how far is ii from here to Albany T 
 combien y a-t-il que Totn Mrs how long has your brother been dead T 
 est mort ? il y a qQimoe joozs Uisa fortnight 
 
 [I. 51. 59, n. 89. 90.] 
 
 231. The impersonal verb it is, it was, Ac, is expressed in French by 
 it esty i! ^taity Ac, when followed by an adjective without reference to 
 anything mentioned before, and in all denominations of time. But when 
 followed by a nonn, a pronoun, a verb in the infinitive, or a single adjective 
 (which th**" nlvtov" T'f-^y^ ♦'^ ^r.T»,« ]ireceding obi.rti it i^ rendered by c'est. 
 Examples 
 
 il est six heurcs. 1 1 est toinps do ])anir it is six «' niHK, U is time to set out 
 
 il est possible que j'aie eu tort it may be tftnt /t/vw wromg 
 
 ce fdt une grande joie pour nous if was a great joy for us 
 
 o'est xm malheur, c*est agr&ble it is a misfortune^ it is agreeabte. 
 
 232. Before a noun in the plural, and the pronoun eux, elles, we 
 shoiild alT^-ays employ oe sont instead of c'est; thus, 
 
 ce sont vos frere« qui out raison t7 ifi your brothers who are rigid 
 
 ce sont eux qui Tout vu it is they who hat^ seen him 
 
 [H. 91. 99.] 
 
 233. The impersonal expression il fait (lit it makes) is commonly used 
 to describe the operations of nature and the state of the weather; thus, 
 
 il fait beau temps anjourd*hui U is fine weather to^ay 
 
 il faisait mauvais temps hier U was had weather yesterday 
 
 il fait froid, il fait dii vent it is cold, it is wii^dy 
 
 il fait jour, il fait nuit U is daylight, U is night \u. 9S. 94.\ 
 
— 135 — 
 
 234. Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation. 
 
 Infinitive, aller, to go Pres. je vais, I go 
 
 Pres. Part, allant, going Pret. j'allai, Iwerd 
 
 Past Part. aWe, gone F"*- yimi, I shall go [11.63,64,]* 
 
 Infinitive. enY oyer, to send Pres. j'envoie, J send 
 
 Pres. Part, envoyant, sending Pret. j'envoyai, I sent 
 
 Past Part, envoye, sen^ Put- ^ euNQxmi, I shall send 
 
 235. 
 
 Infinitive, acquerir, to acquire 
 
 Pres. Part, acquerant, acquiring 
 
 Past Part, acquis, acquired 
 
 Infinitive. bouillir, to boil 
 Pres. Part, bouillant, hailing 
 Past Part, bouilli, boiled 
 
 Infinitive. courir, to run 
 Pres. Part, courant, running 
 Past Part, couru, run 
 
 Infinitive. convrir, to cover 
 Pres. Part, coiivrant, covering 
 Past Part, couvert, covered 
 
 infinitive. cueillir, to gather 
 Pres. Part, ciieillant, gathering 
 Past Part, cueilli, gathered 
 
 Infinitive. dormir, to sleep 
 Pres. Part, dormant, sleeping 
 Past Part, dormi, slept 
 
 Infinitive. fuir, to flee 
 Pres. Part, fuyant, fleeing 
 Past Part, fui, fled 
 
 Infinitive. hair, to hate 
 Pres. Part, haissant, hating 
 Past Part, hai, hated 
 
 Infinitive. mentir, to lie 
 Pres. Part mentant," lying 
 Past Part, menti, lied 
 
 Infinitive. mourir, to die 
 Pres. Part, mourant, dying 
 Past Part, mort, died 
 
 Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation. 
 
 Pres. j'acquiers, I acquire 
 Pret. j 'acquis, I acquired 
 Fut. ysLcqueviSii, I shall acquire [ii. 69.] 
 
 Pres. je bous, I boil 
 Pret. je bouillis, / boiled 
 
 [II. 72. 73.] 
 
 Pres. je cours, I run 
 
 Pret. je courus, Iran 
 
 Fut. je courrai, I shall run [11.65,66.] 
 
 Pres. je couvre, I cover 
 Pret. je couvris, I covered 
 
 [U. 47, 48.] 
 
 Pres. je cueille, I gather 
 
 Pret. je cueillis, I gathered 
 
 Fut. je cneillerai,i"5/ia?^ gather [H. 69,] 
 
 Pres. je cueille, I gather 
 Pret. je cueillis, I gathered 
 Fut. je cueillerai,/5/ia7' "■ 
 
 Pres. je dors, I sleep 
 Pret. je dormis, I slept 
 
 pi. 43, 44.] 
 
 Pres. je fuis, I flee 
 Pret. je fuis, I fled 
 
 [II. 67. 68.] 
 
 Pres. je hais, I hate 
 Pret. je hais, I hated 
 
 [II. 67. 68.] 
 
 Pres. je mens, Hie 
 Pret. je mentis, I lied 
 
 [II. 45. 46.] 
 
 Pres. je meurs, Tarn dying 
 
 Pret. je mourus, I died 
 
 Fut. je mourrai, I shall die [H. 65. 66^ 
 
 * For the full paradigms see the Exercises here referred to, 
 
136 — 
 
 offirir, ioi^tr 
 Pret. Pari offraut, offering 
 Pist Pari offert, offered 
 
 Infinitive, onvrir, to opm 
 Pret. Part ouvrant, opening 
 Past Pari onTert, opened 
 
 laMttvt. partir, to go away 
 Prta. Part partant, going away 
 Pait Part, parti, gone away 
 
 Infinitive, so repentir, to repent 
 Pres. Part. 86 repentant, repejdiii>j 
 Paet Pari repenti, repented 
 
 InflnHive. sentir, to fee^ rnndl 
 Pres. Pari sentant, feeiing 
 Pait Pari scnti,/^ 
 
 Infinitive, serrir, to serve 
 Pret. Pari servant, serving 
 Pa§t Pari servi, served 
 
 Infinittve. sortir, to go out 
 Pre«. Pari Rortant, going out 
 Patt Pari Borti, gone out 
 
 Inrintttve. RonflHr, to siffer 
 Pres. Pari sonffrant, altering 
 Past Pari sonfRert, suffered 
 
 Infinitive, tenir, to hM 
 Pres. Pari tenant, holding 
 Past Pari tenu, held 
 
 Inrinitive. venir, to come 
 Pres. Pari venant, coming 
 Past Part, venii, come 
 
 Infinitive. vetir, to dothe 
 Pres. Part, vetant, clothing 
 Past Part, vetu, doihed 
 
 (a. 47. 48.] 
 
 fn. ^7. 4S.] 
 
 Prea. foifre, Iqffir 
 Prei j'offris, /offered 
 
 Praa. j'ouvre, I open 
 Prei j*ou>Tia, I opened 
 
 Prat, jc pttra, J go away 
 Prat je partis, / tcent away 
 
 (n. 4:i. -iS.] 
 
 Prei, jo me repens, I repent 
 Prei je me repentia, / rtpenietl 
 
 [TI 41 4/11 
 
 Praa. je sens, I feel 
 Prtt je aentia, JfeU 
 
 (D. ■I,';. 4C] 
 
 [a. 99, 40.] 
 
 [n. 41, 49,] 
 
 fn. 17. 4H.] 
 
 . jeaen, /« 
 Prtt jeaania, I served 
 
 Praa. je aora, J go out 
 Prtt je sortia, / went out 
 
 Praa. je aonflire, I suffer 
 Prtt jaaofoifria, I suffered 
 
 Prta. je tiena, /AoU 
 
 Prtt je tins, / held 
 
 Put je tiendrai, 7 aW7 ^oU 
 
 (n. .?7. ««.l 
 
 Prta. je viens, J come 
 
 Prei je vins, / came 
 
 Fui je viendrai, I shall come 
 
 [IL 55. 36,] 
 
 Pret. je vets, 7 clothe 
 Prtt je vetis, 7 clothed 
 
 236. 
 
 Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 
 
 Infinitive. aperoevoir, io perceive 
 Pres. Part, apercevant, perceiving 
 Past Part. aper9n, perceived 
 
 Pres. j'ftp€r9ois, I perceive 
 Prei j'apeitjus, I perceived 
 Fui j'apercevrai, I ahaU perceive 
 
— 137 — 
 
 Infinitive, s'asseoir, to sit down 
 Pres. Part, s'asseyant, sitting down 
 Past Part, assis, sat down 
 
 Infinitive, concevoir, to conceive 
 Pres. Part, concevant, conceiving 
 Past Part. con9U, conceived 
 
 Infinitive, decevoir, to deceive 
 Pres. Part, decevant, deceiving 
 Past Part. de9u, deceived 
 
 Infinitive. devoir, to owe 
 Pres. Part, devant, owing 
 Past Part, du, owed 
 
 Infinitive, falloir, to he necessary 
 
 Pres. Part. 
 
 Past Part, fallu, heen necessary 
 
 Infinitive. mouvoir, to move 
 Pres. Part, mouvant, moving 
 Past Part, mu, moved 
 
 Infinitive, pleuvoir, to rain 
 Pres. Part, pleuvant, raining 
 Past Part, plu, rained 
 
 Infinitive, pouvoir, to he ahle 
 Pres. Part, pouvant, heing ahle 
 Past Part, pu, heen ahle 
 
 Infinitive, recevoir, to receive 
 Pres. Part, recevant, receiving 
 Past Part. re9u, received 
 
 Infinitive. savoir, to know 
 Pres. Part, sachant, knowing 
 Past Part, su, known 
 
 Infinitive, valoir, to he worth 
 Pres. Part, valant, heing worth 
 Past Part, valu, heen worth 
 
 Infinitive, voir, to see 
 Pres. Part, voyant, seeing 
 Past Part, vu, seen 
 
 Pres. je m'assieds, I sit down 
 
 Pret. ]e m'&ssis, I sat down 
 
 Fut. je m'asseyerai, I shall sit down 
 
 [n. 83. 84. 8S. 86.] 
 
 Pres. je conQois, / conceive 
 Pret. je con9Us, I conceived 
 Fut. je concevrai, I shall conceive 
 
 [H. 81, 8^.] 
 Pres. je de9ois, I deceive 
 Pret. je de9us, I deceived 
 
 je decevrai, I shall deceive 
 
 [H. 81. 82.] 
 
 je dois, I owe 
 Pret. je dus, I owed 
 Fut. je devrai, I shall owe [n. 39. 60.] 
 
 Pres. il faut, il is necessary 
 Pret. il fallut, it was necessary 
 Fut. il faudra, it will be necessary 
 
 [n, 61. 62.] 
 
 Pres. je meus, I move 
 Pret. je mus, / moved 
 Fut. je mouvrai, I slwdl move 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Pres. il plent, it rains 
 Pret. il pint, it rained 
 Fut. il pleuvra, it will rain 
 
 [H. 80.] 
 
 Pres. 
 Pret. 
 Fut. 
 
 je peux, je puis, I can 
 
 je pus, I was ahle 
 
 je pourrai, I shall he ahle 
 
 [H. 49. 
 
 50.1 
 
 Pres. 
 Pret. 
 Fut. 
 
 je re9ois, I receive 
 
 je re9us, I received 
 
 je recevrai, I shall receive 
 
 [H. 81. 
 
 82.] 
 
 Pres. 
 
 je sais, I know 
 
 
 Pret. 
 
 je sus, I knew 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 je saurai, I shall know [H. 51, 
 
 .52.] 
 
 Pres. je vaux, lam worth 
 
 Pret. je valus, I was worth 
 
 Fut. je vaudrai, I shall he worth 
 
 pi. 53. 54.] 
 
 Pres. je vois, I see 
 Pret. je vis, I saw 
 Fut. je verrai, I shaU see pl. 55. 56.] 
 
— 138 — 
 
 Infinitive, vouloir, to he \Jo(Bing 
 pr«s. Part voolant, being wilUng 
 Pift Ptrt Toulu, been uiUling 
 
 237. Irregular Verbs of 
 
 Infiniliv*. atteiodre, to reach 
 
 Pr«i. Pirt. atteignant, reaching 
 
 PMt Part atteint, reacKed 
 
 InMthrt. battre, to heed 
 PrM. Part battant, beating 
 Pm\ Part batta, beaUn 
 
 Inflnilive. boire, to dHmk 
 Pet. Part bnvani, drimidng 
 Past Part bu, drunk 
 
 Infinitive, condaire, to oondud 
 Pres. Part condiiiaant, eonducUng 
 Past Part oonduit, eondueUd 
 
 Infinitive, oonnaltre, to know 
 Pres. Part connaiasant, knowing 
 Past Part oonnu, known 
 
 Infinitive, ooudre, to aew 
 Pres. Part oouaant* tewing 
 Past Part couflo, eewed 
 
 Infinitive, oraindre, to fear 
 Pres. Part oraignant, fearing 
 Past Part craini» feared 
 
 Infinitive, oroire, to heReve 
 Pres. Part croyant, betieving 
 Past Part cm, believed 
 
 Infinitive, croitre, to grow 
 Pres. Part croissant, growing 
 Past Part cru, grown 
 
 Infinitive. cuire, to cook 
 
 Pres. Part cnisant, cooking 
 
 Past Part ctiit, cooked 
 
 Infinitive. dire, to say 
 
 Pres. Part disant, saying 
 
 Past Part dit, said 
 
 Infinitive. ecrire, to lortie 
 Pres. Part ecrivant, turiiing 
 Past Part ^rit, wriUen 
 
 Pret. je Teas, lam wiUing 
 Pret je Toulaa, / was wiUing 
 Fut je voadrai, / shaU be wUHMg 
 
 [n. 57. S8,] 
 
 the Fourth Conjugation. 
 Pret. j'tttteiuH, I reach 
 Pret j'atteigiiiB, Ireaohed 
 
 (IL 70. 71.] 
 
 Pree. je bats, I beat 
 Pret jdbattiB, Ibeai 
 
 Pret. jebois, I drink 
 Pret iebCM, I drank 
 
 [IL3X84.\ 
 
 Pree. Jo condnis, / oondud 
 Pret je oopdiiieii, / oondueled 
 
 Pree. je coimaia, Iknow 
 fret je oonnns, I knew 
 
 Pree. je ooads, Jeeto 
 Pret je consis. J sewed 
 
 Pret. je crains, I fear 
 Pret je craignis, I feared 
 
 Pree. je crois, Ibeiieve 
 Pret je cros, IbeHeved 
 
 Pret. je crois, I grow 
 Pret je crfta, I grew 
 
 Pres. je cnis, J cook 
 Pret je cuisis, / cooked 
 
 Pres. je dis, I say 
 Pret je dis, I eaid 
 
 Pres. j*ecris, Iwriie 
 Pret j'ecrivis, I wrote 
 
 [ILSP.ML1 
 
 [n. 75. 7«.l 
 
 [n. 70. 71.] 
 
 pL 31. 5;?.) 
 
 pi. 77.1 
 
 [H. 7J9. 73.) 
 
 [H. 17. l«.l 
 
 PL 19. »0.] 
 
139 — 
 
 Infinitive, faire, to do Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, faisant, doing Pret. 
 
 Past Part, fait, done Fut. 
 
 Infinitive, lire, to read Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, lisant, reading Pret. 
 
 Past Part, lu, read 
 
 Infinitive, mettre, to put Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, mettant, putting Pret. 
 
 Past Part, mis, put 
 
 Infinitive, naitre, to be born Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, naissant, being born Pret. 
 
 Past Part, ne, born 
 
 Infinitive, paraitre, to appear Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, paraissant, appearing Ppef. 
 
 Past Part, paru, appeared 
 
 Infinitive. plaindre, to pity Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, plaignant, pitying Pret. 
 
 Past Part, plaint, pitied 
 
 Infinitive, plaire, to please Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, plaisant, pleasing Pret. 
 
 Past Part, plu, pleased 
 
 Infinitive. prendre, io take Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, prenant, talcing Pret. 
 
 Past Part, pris, taken 
 
 Infinitive. rire, to laugh Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, riant, laughing Pret. 
 
 Past Part, ri, laughed 
 
 Infinitive, suivre, to follow Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, siiivant, following Pret. 
 
 Past Part, suivi, followed 
 
 Infinitive, se taire, to he silent Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, se taisant, being silent Pret. 
 
 Past Part, tu, been silent 
 
 Infinitive, vaincre, to vanquish Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, vainquant, vanquishing Pret. 
 
 Past Part, vaincu, vanquished 
 
 Infinitive, vlvre, to live Pres. 
 
 Pres. Part, vivant, living Pret. 
 
 Past Part, vecu, lived 
 
 je fais, I do 
 je fis, / did 
 je ferai, I shall do [H. 27. 28.] 
 
 je lis, I read 
 je lus, / read 
 
 [II. 21. 22.] 
 
 je mets, I put 
 ie mis, I put 
 
 je nais, I am born 
 je naquis, / was born 
 
 je parais, I appear 
 je parus, I appeared 
 
 je plains, I pity 
 je plaignis, I pitied 
 
 je plais, I please 
 je plus, I pleased 
 
 je prends, 1 take 
 je pris, I took 
 
 je ris, I laugh 
 je ris, Ilaugi 
 
 [II. 23. 24.] 
 
 [II. 77.] 
 
 [H. 74.] 
 
 [H. 70. 71.] 
 
 [II. 78, 79.] 
 
 [H. 25. 26.] 
 
 [H. 72. 73.] 
 
 [II. 75. 76.] 
 
 je suis, I follow 
 je suivis, I followed 
 
 je me tais, lam silent 
 je me tus, I was silent 
 
 [II. 78. 79.] 
 
 je vaincs, I vanquish 
 je vainquis, I vanquished 
 
 {JI. 70. 71,] 
 
 je vis, I live 
 je vecus, Hived 
 
 [H, 74.] 
 
-^ 140 — 
 
 Agreement of the Verb. 
 
 238. In general, the verb is of the same person and nmnber as its 
 subject; thiitt, 
 
 mon pte est mort my father ii dead 
 
 mes fi!^re8 sont morta my brtMhen art dead 
 
 nous aimons nos amis toe love our friauls. 
 
 239. When a verb has two or more subjeots connected by et, it most 
 agree with them in the ploral number, thus, 
 
 le papier et I'encre ne valent rien the paper and ink art good far nothing 
 moQ p^ et ma mhte Tiendront my father and mother wiU come, 
 
 240. When the imbjects of the same Torb aw of diffeient persons, tba 
 verb must be in the plural number, and most agree with the first person 
 rather than the second, and with the seoon^ rather than the third. The verb, 
 then, is preceded by nous, if it be in the first person, r? -I »>v vouh, if in 
 the second. Thus we say: 
 
 mon ttkn et moi, nous aUons It la my brother and I gn lo \ue jnay 
 
 oomWe 
 Toos et votre sosor, V0118 restens you and yomr Mater w4U etay at home, 
 
 klAmaiaon 
 
 241. When a veib has two or mora sabjeols oonneoted by on, it must 
 agree with that which is nearest Wbenthesobjectsarsofdifierent persons, 
 the verb agrees with the first person in pr eference to the second, and with 
 the second in preference to the third, but always in the plural number; au: 
 
 le vice ou la vertn tEiomphera vice or virtue wiU triumph 
 vous ou votre ttkte viendrez you or your brother vciU come, 
 
 242. When a verb has for its subject the relative qui» it agrees with 
 the antecedent of the relative, thus, 
 
 c'est moi qui Tai vu it is I who hone seen Mm 
 
 c*est vous qui en avez parl^ Hie you who have spoken of U 
 
 oe sont eux qui Tout pris U is they who have taken it 
 
 Government of Verbs. 
 
 243. All transitive verbs govern the accusative case. The characteristic 
 of these verbs is, that they are convertible into passives in the following 
 manner. The accusative after the verb in the active voice becomes the nom- 
 inative before the verb in the passive voice. The nominative before the verb 
 in the active voice is joined to the passive by the preposition de or 
 par, by. 
 
 Some verbs which in English are regarded as transitive, take in French 
 the genitive or the dative case; thus we say: we obey the Inics, nous 
 obeissons aux lois. And again, some verbs which are in English in- 
 transitive, are in French transitive, as, le chien cherche son maitre, the dog 
 looks for his master . 
 
— 141 -- 
 
 244. Some transitive verbs govern a genitive in addition to their direct 
 object, the accusative. Such are: 
 
 absoudre, to absolve combler, to Jill up emplir, to fill 
 
 accuser, to accuse delivrer, to free informer, to inform 
 
 avertir, to warn detourner, to divert priver, to deprive 
 
 accuser un bomme de vol, to accuse a man of theft 
 emplir une bouteille de vin, to fill a bottle with wine 
 delivrer le pays des tyrans, to free the country from the tyrants 
 
 245. A large number of transitive verbs govern, together with the ac- 
 cusative, a dative as modal complement of their action. Mark the following: 
 accorder, to grant demander, to ask for preferer, to prefer 
 adresser, to direct devoir, to owe presenter, to present 
 annoncer, to announce dire, to tell preter, to lend 
 apporter, to bring donner, to give procurer, to procure 
 attribuer, to attribute ecrire, to write promettre, to promise 
 avouer, to own [icate enseigner, to teach raconter, to tell, relate 
 communiquer, to commun- envoyer, to send rapporter, to bring back 
 confesser, to confess epargner, to spare refuser, to refuse 
 confier, to trust expliquer, to explain rendre, to give back 
 conseiller, to advise oter, to take away renvoyer, to send back 
 declarer, to declare pardonner, to forgive repondre, to answer 
 dedier, to dedicate predire, to foretell vendre, to sell 
 
 accordez-lui cette grace grant him this favor 
 
 il nous raconta ses voyages he told us his voyages. 
 
 246. Some verbs take a genitive only, after the manner of a direct ob- 
 ject, as: 
 
 abuser, to abuse heriter, to inherit medire, to slander 
 
 convenir, to admit jouir, to enjoy profiter, to improve 
 
 douter, to doubt manquer, to want user, to use 
 
 jouir d'une bonne sante to enjoy good health 
 medire de son prochain to slandei' one's neighbor 
 
 247. A large number of reflective verbs admit a genitive in addition to 
 their reflective object. Examples of these are: 
 
 ^"ob^eniex, to absent one' ss. s'ennuyer, to get weary se rejouir, to rejoice 
 s'abstenir, to abstain s'enorgueillir, to get proud se repentir, to repent 
 s'apercevoir, to perceive s'entremettre, to intervene se retirer, to withdraw 
 s'attrister, to grieve se ^cher, to be angry se saisir, to seize 
 
 s'aviser, to bethink one* ss. se flatter, to flatter one's s. se soucier, to care 
 se demettre, to resign se garder, to beware se souvenir, to remember 
 
 se desister, to give over se plaindre, to complain se vanter, to boast 
 se saisir de quelque chose to seize upon something 
 
 se souvenir d'une histoire to remember a history. 
 
— 142 — 
 
 248. Tho following yeibs take a dative as their sole object: 
 
 nuire, to hwi 
 obUr, to obey 
 obvier, to olwicUe 
 parler, to speak 
 parrenir, to aUain 
 penaer, to think qf 
 plaire, topLease 
 
 aco^er, to acotde 
 
 appartenir» to belong 
 
 oon^mtir, to ootiserU 
 
 contreveuir, to contravene 
 
 contribuer, to contribute 
 
 deplaire, to displease 
 
 d^beir, to disobey 
 
 ne d^b^iaaes pas Ik voa iMirontH 
 je pense k votte aflkire 
 
 249. There are also many n ilv< t : . 
 tion to their reflectiye object Such .u< 
 s'abandonner, to abandon one*s se^ 
 s*aoooatiimer, to aeeutiom on€*s sejf 
 s'adonner, to addict one's s^ 
 B'amtiser, to amuse one's se^ 
 s*appUqaer, to apply one's stff 
 B*appreter, to gd ready 
 s'attaoher, to stick to 
 s'adrener, to tipply onufs setf 
 se d^tetminer, to resolve iipon 
 se disposer, to prepare one's self 
 
 accoutumez-vous k lYlnde 
 
 je m'appliqae aux 
 
 remwlier, to remedy 
 r^iwUT, to resist 
 ressembler, to resemble 
 Bonger, to thifJc of 
 fiubveiiir, to nlieve 
 Buccctler, to succeed 
 snrvivre, to survive 
 
 lo not disobey your parents 
 
 I hiiJc of your business. 
 
 I ' ^ which admit a dative in addi* 
 
 ques 
 
 sengager, to engage 
 8*expo8er, to eipose one's $etf 
 se fier, to trust 
 
 8*habituer, to aeeustom oik's se^ 
 s'obstiner, to 6e obstinate 
 s'oocnper, to occupy onfs mSjf 
 8*opiniiltrer, to be opiniative 
 B'appoeeat, to oppose one's se{f 
 86 plaire» to toJtce delight in 
 se preparer, to prepare one's self 
 aeeustom yourself to study 
 lapfiy myseff to mathematies 
 
 250. Notice that no French verb gorenis two noons, the one denoting 
 a (>erson and the other a thing, each in the aoouaatiTe, as is the case with 
 the £ugli8h verbs signifying to altoie, ask, give, qfer, pray, send, teach, 
 tell, etc. Such verbs take in French the pexsonal object in the dative, thns, 
 
 il lui euseignera cette langne he ioiU teach him tlus language 
 
 il lui a demand^ son nom Ae asked him for his name. 
 
 Uses of the Moods and Tenses. 
 Indicative. 
 
 251. The value and use of the tenses iu the indicative mood are, in 
 general, the same in French as in English. The principal points of differ- 
 ence will be stated below. 
 
 252. The Present is often substitnted for the Preterit in lively narra- 
 tion, as: 
 
 j'ai vu votre malheureux fils trains I have seen your unhappy son dragged 
 
 par ses chevaux, il veut les by his horses; he wishes to recall 
 
 rappeler et sa voix les effraye, them, his voice frightens them, 
 
 ils courent they run, etc. 
 
— 143 — 
 
 253i In expressing a past action or state which is continued so as to 
 be present also, the French employs the Present, while in English the 
 tense must be the Perfect, thus, 
 
 depuis quand ^tes-vous ici? how long have you been here ? 
 
 je SUis ici depuis longtemps IJiave been here a long time, 
 
 254. The Present is often used instead of the Future, thus, 
 
 je pars ce soir pour Londres Isliall depart to-night for Lcyndon 
 
 je suis pret dans un moment I shall be ready in a moment 
 
 255. The Imperfect answers nearly to the progressive form of the Eng- 
 lish Preterit, and represents the action as unfinished at a certain specified 
 time. Very often, it implies a habit on the part of the subject, in the sense 
 of the phrase I used to do. Examples: 
 
 je vous ecrivais une lettre, quand je I was writing you a letter ^ when Ire- 
 
 re9us la votre ceived yours 
 
 j'etais malade, quand vous etes venu I was sick when you came 
 
 quand j'etais enfant, je jouais souvent when I was a child, I often played. 
 
 256. The Preterit represents an action which took place at some time 
 completely past, as, 
 
 je me promenai hier I walked yesterday 
 
 je fus malade la semaine passee I was sick last week 
 
 j'allai hier voir votre pere I went yesterday to see your father. 
 
 257i The Perfect represents an action as having been finished in some 
 time past reckoning from the present; thus, 
 
 je me suis promene ce matin I have taken a walk this morning 
 
 j'ai ete bien malade cette semaine I have been very sick this week 
 
 notre siecle a produit de grands our age has produced great men. 
 hommes 
 
 258i The Pluperfect represents the action as past before some other 
 past time, as: j 'avals ecrit ma lettre, quand il entra, I had written my letter 
 when she came in. K a particular time be mentioned, especially after the 
 words quand^ lorsque, ichen, aussitdt que, des que, as soon as, 
 apres que, after, and the like, the tense must be the Preterit Anterior; thus, 
 je sortis des que j'eus dine I went out as soon as I had dined 
 
 quand j'eus fini ma lettre, il entra when I had finished my letter, he entered. 
 
 259. The Future tenses ordinarily agree with their English correspon- 
 dents. In such cases, however, where in English the Present may be used 
 instead of the Future, and the Perfect instead of the Second Future, the 
 Future tenses are more strictly required in French than in English, thus, 
 
 quand je serai a la campagne, vou- when I aiu in the country, loill you 
 lez-vous venir me voir ? come to see me ? 
 
 vousjouerez, quand vous aurez fini you will play when you have fitl^ 
 votre le9on ished your lesson. 
 
— 144 — 
 
 260. The verb venir followed by de with an InfinitiTe, forms an idio- 
 matio expreiHhiou of paai time, and repreBents an action as just finished, 
 thns, je Tiens da faire cela, I have Just done ViaL 
 
 261. The verb allcr with an infinitiTe after it, is an idiomatic form 
 for expressing future time in the sense of to 6e about; thus, mon fr^ va 
 partir, my brciher is about to dqpwt 
 
 262* The Conditional Mood is used to expveBB a result dependent upon 
 certain conditions. It corresponds in general to the Potential Mood in Eng- 
 lish, when used with the auxiliary ahoxtid^ or tcouid, thus, 
 si vous avieE des amis, toqs series if you had friends, you wmid be more 
 
 plus content saU^fied 
 
 ▼008 anries M plus henreaz, si Tons you wmki have been more happy, if you 
 avieE soiTi mee oonseils had followed my advice, 
 
 263* There is something particular in the use of the conjunction si. 
 When it means in ease thai, it requires the verb in the present or the imper- 
 fect; when it stands for xphdher, it takes the ftitnre or the conditional, accord- 
 ing to the requirements of the sense; thus, 
 j'ind demain ^ la campagne, s*il fait / nAoA^oto-fnorroto^iUpt^ootmfry, if 
 
 bean temps iheweatherfBiUbefine 
 
 s*il reTenait, toos series fort embar- if he eame bade, you toould be much 
 
 rasB^ embarrassed 
 
 dites-moi si TOOS ires li? UO me vhslhier you wiU go there t 
 
 je ne sais si mon frkre riendrait, si Idonoi know whether my brother would 
 je Veil priais come, should I request him. 
 
 264. The use of the ImperatiTe requires no explanation, being the same 
 in French as in English. (IL S. 6, 7, 8.] 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 265. The Subjunctive Mood denotes something doubtful or contingent, 
 and its tenses are generally subjoined to other verbs. 
 
 266. The Subjunctive Mood is employed: 
 
 1. when the governing verb expresses doubt, uncertainiyy fear desire, 
 command, joy, sorrow, Ac. Such verbs are: 
 commander, to command douter, to doubt etre cbarme, to be very glad 
 
 craindre, to fear s'etonner, to wonder etre ffiche, to be sorry 
 
 defendre, to forbid nier, to deny etre surpris, to be surprised 
 
 desirer, to wish ordonner, to order etre content, to be satisfied 
 
 Examples: 
 je doute qu'il soit arrive I doubt that he has come 
 
 je souhaite qu'on fasse la palx / wish ihey tcould make peace 
 
 je crains que ma soeur ne soit morte I fear my sister is dead 
 je suis facie qu*on vous ait tromp^ I am sorry they Jiave deceived you 
 
— 145 — 
 
 2. when the governing verb is used interrogatively, negatively, or condi- 
 tionally; thus, 
 
 croyez-vous qu'il ait raison ? do you believe he is right ? 
 
 je ne crois pas qu'il ait raison I do not believe he is right 
 
 partons, si vous pensez qu'il fasse let us go, if you think it wiU be fine 
 beau temps weather. 
 
 When the verb is used affirmatively, or when the question con- 
 tains a fact, the Indicative Mood is required, thus, 
 je crois qu'il a raison I Relieve he is right 
 
 j'espere qu'il viendra I hope he will come 
 
 vous ai-je dit que mon pere est mort? did I tell you that my father is dead f 
 
 3. after most impersonal verbs and expressions, as: 
 
 il convient que vous y alliez it is proper for you to go there 
 
 il est temps que nous partions it is time for us to depart 
 
 il faut que j'aille en ville I must go to town. 
 
 Excepted from this rule are: il s'ensuit, il resulte, it follows; il ar- 
 rive, it happens, and such impersonal expressions as contain a posi- 
 tive statement, as: il est vrai, it is true; il est certain, it is certain, etc. 
 Again, the same expressions require the subjunctive in the sub- 
 ordinate sentence when they are used interrogativel/y, negatively, or 
 conditionally; thus, 
 
 il est certain que vous avez tort it is certain that you are wrong 
 
 il n'est pas certain que j'aie raison it is not certain that lam right 
 
 il est probable qu'on fera la paix it is probable that they will make peace 
 
 est-il probable qu'on fasse la paix ? is it probable that they will make peace ? 
 
 4. after a superlative, and the words le premier, the first, le 
 dernier, the last, le seul or I'unique, the only; personiie, 
 
 nobody, aucun, none, rien, nothing, where the subordinate sen- 
 tence is introduced by the relative pronoun qui or que. In these 
 constructions, the indicative is also met with, when the subordinate 
 sentence defines a fact, and not a mere supposition. Examples: 
 
 vous etes le plus savant que je con- you are the most learned man 1 know 
 
 naisse dans cette ville in this town 
 
 vous etes le x^remier ami que j'aie you are the first friend I have met in 
 
 rencontre a New York New York 
 
 mon fils est le seul a qui je puisse my son is the only one upon whom lean 
 
 me fier rely 
 
 il n'y avait personne que je connusse there was nobody whom I knew. 
 
 5. after the words quelque que, quel que, qui que, quoi 
 
 que, (see 167—170.) 
 quoi que vous fassiez pour moi, je whateoer you do for me, I will reward 
 vous en recompenserai ycm for it. 
 
— 146 — 
 
 6. after the conjunctioiis whioh exprens a fntore contingency or a snp- 
 poeition, as: pourvu que, provided; au can qiiey in case^ etc 
 For the luit of them bee under Conjunctions 302. 
 je Homi prC't, avant qnlls soient venus / wiU be ready brfore iKey have come 
 pretez-moi votre livre, aftn que je le liae fend me yowr book thai I may read it 
 
 267. In regard to the distinction of tenses, a sqbjonctive verb is put in 
 the present or perfect, when the goYeming verb was in the present or future; 
 and in the preti^rit or pluperfect after a verb in the past or conditional ten- 
 ses. Sometimes a subjunctive imperfect &b met with after a governing verb 
 in the present, especially in conditional expressions whioh imply both doubt 
 and futurity. Examples: 
 
 il fiuit (faudra) que je le fiiase / am (shall be) obliged to do U 
 
 jenecroLBposquilaitapprissale^oii I do noi betteve he has leami his ieiwn 
 je craignais que vous ue >'ina8i6S I feared iul you wriUd eome 
 
 il faudrait quo je le flsse / shoM be obHged todoU 
 
 je ne croyais pas qu'il e&t appris sa le9on J did not beUem he had hand hie lesmm 
 oroyes-vous qu'ils ma nftuMWut, si do yo^ think they woM r^fuM me if I 
 jelesenpriais? requeskd it cf them ? 
 
 (IL 9, 10. It. 19. 13, 14.] 
 
 268. The Infinitive is not limited to any particular person or number, 
 and is properly the verbal noun. As snob it may stand for a subject, predi- 
 cate, or object (direct as well as indirect) of a sentence. There are, how- 
 ever, only a few infinitives which have become nonns, and may be used 
 with the article, as: le rire, laughing; le manger, eating; le boire, drinking, 
 
 269. In French, the infinitive is employed by itself^ or preceded by 
 dCy ^9 or some other preixjsition. 
 
 270. The infinitive is used without any preposition in the following cases : 
 
 1. when it stands for the subject, or predicate of a sentence; thns, 
 chanter est nne occupation agreable singing is an agreeable occupation 
 voir c*e8t croire seeing is believing. 
 
 2. when it stands as the direct object of the following verbs: 
 aller, to go envoyer, to send pouvoir, to be able 
 courir, to run esperer, to hope savoir, to know 
 croire, to believe faire, to do sembler, to appear 
 diiigner, to deign laisser, to let souhaiter, to toish 
 declarer, to declare nier, to deny soutenir, to maintain 
 desirer, to icish oser, to dare venir, to come 
 devoir, to oice pen.ser, to think voir, to see 
 entendre, to hear paraitre, to appear vouloir, to be toiUing 
 
 allez voir votre ami go and see your friend 
 
 croye25-vous avoir raison? do you believe to be right? 
 vous paraissez etre content you seem to be satisfied. 
 
— 147 
 
 271. The infinitive, preceded by the preposition de, is used 
 1. after the verbs 
 
 ecrire, to write parler, to speak 
 
 empecher, to hinder permettre, to permit 
 
 enjoindre, to enjoin persuader, to persuade 
 
 entreprendre, to undertake plaindre, to pity 
 
 accuser, to accuse 
 affecter, to affect 
 avertir, to inform 
 blamer, to blame . 
 cesser, to cease 
 commander, to command 
 conseiller, to advise 
 craindre, to fear 
 defendre, to forbid 
 detourner, to turn aside 
 differer, to differ 
 dire, to tell 
 dispenser, to exempt 
 dissuader, to dissuade 
 
 prescrire, to prescribe 
 presser, to urge 
 prier, to pray 
 promettre, to promise 
 proposer, to propose 
 refuser, to refuse 
 remercier, to tlmnk 
 resoudre, to resolve 
 soup9onner, to suspect 
 supplier, to beg 
 
 essayer, to t7'y 
 
 feindre, to feign 
 
 finir, to finish 
 
 menacer, to threaten 
 
 meriter, to deserve 
 
 negliger, to neglect 
 
 offrir, to offer 
 
 omettre, to omit 
 
 ordonner, to order 
 
 oublier, to forget 
 and generally after such verbs as govern the genitive; see 24-6, 247, 
 Examples: 
 
 il ne cesse de se plaindre he does not cease complaining 
 
 je vous conseille de rester ici I advise you to stay here 
 
 je vous prie de lui pardonner I beg you to forgive him. 
 
 2. after the impersonal verbs: il convient, il importe, il suf- 
 
 lit, and il est, followed by an adjective; thus, 
 
 il suffira de lui parler it will be enough to speak to him 
 
 il est dangereux de se fier a cet homme it is dangerous to trust this man. 
 
 3. after nouns, and such adjectives as govern the preposition de ; 
 (see 85.) thus, 
 
 il est temps de partir it is time to set out 
 
 vous etes digne d'etre recompense you are worthy of being rewarded. 
 
 272. The infinitive, preceded by the preposition a, is used, 
 1. after the verbs 
 
 chercher, to endeavor 
 consister, to consist 
 disposer, to dispose 
 donner, to give 
 employer, to employ 
 encourager, to encourage rester, to stay 
 engager, to engage travailler, to work 
 
 and generally after such verbs as call for the dative as their comple* 
 ment; see 248, 249. Examples: 
 j'apprends a danser, a dessiner I learn dancing, drawing 
 j'aime a chanter, h jouer Hike to sing, to play 
 
 il m'a invite a diner he has invited me to dinner 
 
 accoutumer, to accustom 
 admettre, to admit 
 aider, to help 
 aimer, to like 
 apprendre, to learn 
 autoriser, to authorize 
 condamner, to condemn 
 
 exhorter, to exhmi 
 inviter, to invite 
 penser, to think 
 persister, to persist 
 porter, to induce 
 
— 148 — 
 
 2. after a nonn to denote a pnrpose or an end, and after Bnch acQeo- 
 
 tives as are usually followed by ^ ; (see 86. ) thus, 
 je n'ai point de temps ti perdre / have no time to lose 
 chambres gamies k loaer fumisheil rooms to lei 
 
 CO fruit est bon k manger this fruit is good to eat 
 
 je suis pret jk partir / am reaJy to dejxirt, 
 
 273. Besides de and 4. the following prepositions are allowed iu 
 French to govern the infinitiTe directly: 
 
 afin de, in order to k force de, by mtatis of par, 6y 
 
 aprts, q^ JQsqa'Ji, Ott pour, in ordtrio^for 
 
 auprte de, near au lieu de, insUad ff sans, tcUAou^ 
 
 kvant de, hffort loin de, Jar from saof kt save 
 
 faute de, from want of k moins de, unUas 
 
 In this relation, the French infinitive is nsoally to be rendered by the 
 English verbal in ing. Examples: 
 
 je I'ai oherch^ sans le troaver I looked for him wUkoui finding him 
 il est parti sans me parler he hoe gone wilhaui epeaklmg to me 
 
 il a M pendu pour avoir void he has been hanged for robbing. > 
 
 [IL lA 14.]^ 
 
 274. The Present Participle ends in ant, and o xpi o s oos a oontinnanoe 
 :i, stiite, or condition. It has the same government as the verb 
 
 it is derived, and remains uninflected. As to its place, it should 
 always Imve a clear reference to the word to which it belongs. Examples: 
 nn homme oraignant Diea a man fearing Ood 
 nne femme oraignant Diea a tooman fearing Ood 
 dee gens craignant Dieu people fearing Ood 
 
 ^tant malade, je ne puis vous aooom- being sickt I cannot accompany you 
 
 pagner 
 je les ai trouv^ buvant et mangeant I found (hem eaUng and drinking, 
 
 275. The present participle is very often preceded by en, which may 
 be rendered by in, by, vheti, ithiie. In this use, it refers to the subject of 
 the sentence; thus, 
 
 je lirai sa lettre en me promenant I shall read his letter when waUcing 
 vous I'avez fait en courant yo^i have done it running. 
 
 276. The proper office of the Past Participle is to form with the auxili- 
 aries avoir and ^tre the compound tenses of the verb from which it comes. 
 
 277. When conjugated with dtre, the past participle agrees in gender 
 
 and number with the subject of the sentence; thus, 
 
 nous avons ^te bien re9\is ?ce have been weU received 
 
 la nuit sera bientot passee the night wiU soon be aver 
 
 ils sont estimes de tout le moude tJiey are esteemed by every body. 
 
— X49 — 
 
 278. The past participle conjugated with avoir, agrees in gender and 
 number vith the direct object of the sentence, when this object precedes the 
 participle. But if the participle precedes the direct object, it remains unin- 
 flected. Examples: 
 les livres que j'ai achetes sont neufs; the hooks I have bought, are new 
 quelle affaire avez-vous entreprise ? what affair have you undertaken? 
 j'ai re9u votre lettre I have received your letter. 
 
 ' 279. Since with reflective verbs the auxiliary ^tre is substituted for 
 avoir, usage has established the rule, that the past participle of these verbs 
 also agrees with the direct object of the sentence, as if conjugated with 
 avoir. That is to •say, the past participle agrees in gender and number 
 with the reflective pronoun imless this pronoun be in the dative case; thus 
 we say: 
 
 cette fiUe s'est blessee (Accus.) this girl has wounded herself 
 
 cette femme s'est donne la mort (Dat.) this woman has put herself to death. 
 
 280. The participles fait, laisse, pu, du, VOUlU, are constantly 
 left unvaried, when belonging to an infinitive expressed, or understood; thus, 
 
 les montres qu'il a fait faire; the watches he ordered to he made 
 
 il a dit toutes les raisons qu'il a voulu; he said all the reasons he would. 
 
 281. Participles very often become adjectives, and agree in gender and 
 number with the nouns they qualify. When so used, they are commonly 
 placed after their nouns; thus, 
 
 une dame obligeante, an obliging lady un livre bien ecrit, a loell-written book 
 des brebis belantes, bleating sheep une lettre bien ecrite, a well-written letter. 
 
 [H. 15, 16.] 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 282. An adverb is a word which qualifies a verb, or adjective, or another 
 adverb, and belongs to the class of indeclinable words called Particles. To 
 this class also belong Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections. Adverbs 
 are usually divided into four classes, namely adverbs of time, of place, of 
 degree, and of manner. 
 
 283. Adverbs of time are those which answer to the questions when ? 
 how long ? how soon ? or, how often ? 
 
 quand? when? alors, then aussitot, directly 
 
 jamais, never depuis, since tard, late 
 
 toujours, always enfin, at last aujourd'hui, to-day 
 
 souvent, often apres, after hier, yesterday 
 
 autrefois, fo7'merly tot, early demain, to-morrow 
 
 auparavant, before plutot, rather maintenant, now 
 
 jadis, formerly bientot, soon a present, at present, etc. 
 
— 150 — 
 
 284. AdverbA of place are those which answer to the qnesticmB whtn f 
 tBkUherf or tohencef 
 
 otf toher^ whUkttf deUk on that Me ailleun, ebmekiBn 
 
 d*oti? tohenoeT deaBOs, over pris, doaeby 
 
 ici, here demaim, uncbr proche, yiaor 
 
 ]k, there dedani, iniide loin, far 
 
 en, from there dehon, outtide en haat, above 
 
 de^ on thia aide partont, everywhere Tia-4-Yis» oppoaUe; etc. 
 
 285. AdTertw of degree are thoee which answer to the question how 
 nrnehf 
 
 oombien? how much? ti^ very ploai I more 
 
 beanconp, nmok tant, ao much da^antage, j 
 
 trop, too much antant, aa nmek moina, leaa 
 
 peu, litUe ammt, enomgh anasi, ) 
 
 trop pea, too lUUe pfeeqoe, olmofi oomme, ) ^^ 
 
 286. Adverbs of manner are those which answer to the qoestton how f 
 comment? how? Traiment» truly non, no 
 
 bien, toeO fiMsilement, eaaOy ne. .pas, not 
 
 pourquoi ? why? oni, yea point dn toat» nolaiaU 
 
 ainsi, thiut oertes, J cerUUnki P*****^**^ perhapa 
 
 ensemble, together oertainement, ) *^^^**^''^ nnUement by no meana 
 
 volontiers, wUHngty asBordment, aaawrecBy probablement, very likely, 
 
 287. Among the adverbs belonging to this olaas. the negative ne calls 
 for special attention, as being often employed in French, where no negative 
 word is reqoired in Knglish This is the case 
 
 1. after a comparative, and after autre, autrement, as already 
 stated above, 78. Examples: 
 
 il eel pliiH riche qn'on ne le croit he is richer than ene thinka 
 il ^rit mieux qu*il ne paVle he wriiea better than he apeaka 
 
 c'est autre choee que je ne croyais U is different from what I ihmight 
 
 2. after the verbs appr^hender, to apprehendy avoir peiir, to be 
 ofraitl, craindre, to fear; emp^cher, to hinder, and prendre 
 ^arde, to take care, when nsed affirmatively; and after doiiter, to 
 doubt, and nier, to deny, when nsed interrogaHvely, or negalively; thus, 
 
 je crains qu'il ne vienne //ear he wOl come 
 
 je ne nie pas que cela ne floit I do not deny thai this is so 
 
 je ne doute pas qu'il ne soit arrive I do not doubt thai he has came, 
 
 3. after the conjunctions ^ moins que, unless^ de cralnte que, 
 for fear, and que used with the signification of unUsa, before, or 
 until; see 303. Examples: 
 
 a moins que vous ne le vouliez ainsi urikss you vDtU har>€ U so 
 je ne vous donnerai pas de montre, I unll not give you a watch, uniU yoa 
 que vous ne parl^pz fhui9ais speak French. 
 
— 151 — 
 
 4. when ne is followed by que with the force of the English only or 
 hut; thus, 
 je n'ai que vingt dollars I have hut twenty dollars 
 
 je n'ai qu'un veritable ami I have only one true friend 
 
 je ne ferai que ce qu'il vous plaira I will only do what you please. 
 
 288. A large number of adverbs of manner are formed from adjectives 
 by means of the derivative ending ment. Adjectives ending in a vowel 
 are generally converted into adverbs by simply adding ment, as: 
 
 poli, polite poliment, politely 
 
 absolu, ahsolute absolument, ah solutely 
 
 troisieme, third troisiemement, thirdly. 
 
 289. Adjectives ending in a consonant, add ment to their feminine 
 termination. Under this description may also be placed the adjectives beau, 
 nice, nouveau, new, fou, foolish, mou, soft,- as: 
 
 heureux, heiureuse, happy heureusement, happily 
 premier, premiere, fii'st premierement, firstly 
 
 mou, moUe, soft mollement, softly. 
 
 290. Excepted from the foregoing rule are nearly all the adjectives 
 ending in nt, which change these letters into mment, to form the cor- 
 responding adverbs, as: 
 
 prudent, prudent prudemment, prudently 
 
 patient, patient patiemment, patiently 
 
 elegant, elegant elegamment, elegantly. 
 
 29 1 i Those adverbs whose signification admits of different degrees, are 
 compared after the manner of adjectives; as: 
 
 souvent, often plus souvent, oftener le plus souvent, oftenest 
 
 doMGement, gently plus doucement, more gently le plus doucement, mos^ gently 
 
 292. The following are irregularly compared: 
 
 bien, icell mieux, hetter le mieux, the hest 
 
 mal, hadly pis, worse le pis, the worst 
 
 peu, little moins, less le moins, the least 
 
 beaucoup, much plus, more le plus, the most. 
 
 293i For the placing of adverbs, no definite general rule can be given; 
 those which relate to verbs in a simple tense, immediately follow them, 
 and those which belong to verbs in a compound tense, are commonly placed 
 between the auxiliary and the participle. 
 
 294. Exceptions are hier, yesterday, aujourd^ui, to-day, de- 
 main, to-morrow, tot, soon, tard, late, ici, here, la, there, and generally 
 all adverbs of place, which follow the participle of a compound tense. 
 
 295. There are, as in English, several customary combinations of 
 words, which are used adverbially. Examples of these are: 
 
 tout a coup, suddenly d'abord, at firot 
 
 peu a peu, hy degrees d'ailleurs, besides 
 
 tout a I'heure, immediately du moins, at least. 
 
— 152 — 
 
 PREPOSITIONS 
 
 296. A preposition is a word lined to show the relations of things, and 
 is always placed before a noun, or pronoun. The following are the principal 
 French prepotiitions: 
 
 k, tOt at dcvant, brfore 
 
 apr^ after diirunt, during 
 
 k traverB, Uirough en, in 
 
 avant, brfort entre, bdween 
 
 aveo, wUh enren, towardg 
 
 ohes, at environ, aboid 
 
 oontxe, atjahisi except^ ) eteeot 
 
 dans, in honnis, f '*''^* 
 
 de, of, froniy 6y malgre, m nj^e cf 
 
 depnis, »\nct moyennant, by vMona qf snr, tipoa 
 
 derrite. behind nonobetant, nottHDMonci- tooohant, ccmiomdng 
 
 d^ frcm ing Tefa, loioanfff 
 
 deasoDs, luidfr nntre, hesidn Toioi, #00 Wv 
 
 devQs, on, npon ^lar, (Arou^A, (y voiUk, amthert. 
 
 297. The prepositions volol, vollf^^ litemlly m0 A«re, Me (htrt, answer 
 closely to the English exprewions hart is, hn-r ar^; ihtrt Ui, th&t art. When 
 referring to a penonal pronoun, they are regarded as verba in the impera- 
 tive, and take the oonjnnotive prononns in the accoaative before them. Ex- 
 amples: 
 
 parmi, anxong 
 pt'udftut, durnig 
 pour, for 
 proche, near 
 KiiuK, without 
 siixif, save 
 m'lou, acconVmg to 
 KOTW, uwler 
 suivant, according to 
 
 voici mon Mare 
 voiltk ma soenr 
 le voici, les void 
 me voil^ nons voiU 
 
 here is myhroiher 
 Okere ismy sister 
 here he is, here thsy are 
 there Tam^ (here we are. 
 
 (L 79. 90.] 
 
 298. The prepositions de, &, en, should always be repeated before 
 several nouns in the same couKtmction, as: llionmie est partoot le meme, 
 en Europe, en Asie, en Afrique et en Amerique; man is everywhere the 
 same ; in Europe, Asia, Africa, and America. 
 
 299. There are also certain Prepositional Phrases in French which re- 
 (luire the prepositions de or ^ after them. Such are: 
 
 a cause de, on accouj^t of an-dessns de, t^xm en suite de, after 
 
 ix cote de, by the side of au-devant de, before faute de, for want of 
 
 au lieu de, instead of hors de, out of 
 au moyen de, by means of loin de, far from 
 au travers de, through pres de, near 
 aupres de, near proche de, nigh to 
 
 autour de, around tout aupres de, dose to 
 
 en depit de, in spite of . vis-a-vis de, opposite 
 par rapport k, with respect to 
 quant a, as for. 
 
 :\ force de, by means of 
 a lV'j:>ard de, in regard to 
 a inoins de, unless 
 a I'opposite de, opposite 
 au dela de, beyond 
 tiU-dessous de, under 
 
 conformement a, according to 
 
 jaequ^k, as far as 
 
— 153 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 300. A conjunction is a word which connects two sentences, or parts of 
 sentences. The following are the principal simple conjunctions in French: 
 
 ainsi, thus 
 aussi, also 
 car, for 
 
 cependant, however 
 comme, as 
 done, then 
 encore, still 
 et, and 
 
 et. .et, both, .and 
 lorsque, when 
 mais, but 
 meme, even 
 
 neanmoins, nevertheless 
 ni, nor 
 
 ni. .ni, neither, .nor 
 or, now 
 
 ou, or; ou. .ou, either, .or 
 
 pourtant, however 
 
 puis, then 
 
 puisque, since 
 
 quand, when 
 
 que, that 
 
 quoique, although, though 
 
 si, if. 
 
 301. Besides these, there are numerous compound conjunctions, consist- 
 ing of two or more words, as: 
 apres que, after depuis que, since pendant que, while 
 
 aussitot que, as soon as parce que, because tandis que, whilst, etc. 
 
 302. The conjunctions that require the governed verb in the subjunc- 
 tive, are: 
 
 en cas que, in case that 
 encore que, though 
 jusqu'a ce que, till 
 loin que, far from 
 
 a nn que, that 
 
 a moins que, unless 
 
 avant que, befoi^e 
 
 au cas que, in case that 
 
 bien que, although, though malgre que, for all that 
 de crainte que, ) . . 
 de peur que, ) 
 
 pour que, that 
 
 pourvu que, provided that 
 
 quoique, although, though 
 
 sans que, without 
 
 soit que . . soit que, ) wheth- 
 
 nonobstant que,/o?' all that soit que . . ou que, ) er. .or 
 non pas que, not that suppose que, suppose that. 
 
 303. The conjunction que, that, is worthy of particular attention on 
 account of its great range of meaning as a substitute for the conjunctions: 
 
 de peur que, lest 
 depuis que, since 
 jusqu'a ce que, till 
 
 afin que, that 
 a moins que, 
 avant que, before 
 cependant, yet 
 
 Examples are: 
 venez ici que je vous parle 
 je n'irai pas le voir qu'il ne m'en 
 
 prie 
 vous ne partirez pas qu'il ne soit jour 
 combien y a-t-il que votre frere est 
 
 mort? 
 attendez qu'il ne pleuve plus 
 que ne repondez-vous pas quand je 
 
 vous parle ? 
 
 parce que, because 
 quand, when 
 pourquoi? why? 
 
 come here that Imay speak to you 
 I will not go and see him unless he in- 
 vites me 
 you shall not depart before it is light 
 how long is it that your brother 
 
 died ? 
 wait till it does not rain any more 
 why do you not answer when I speak 
 to you ? 
 
 304. The conjunction that, frequently understood in English, is always 
 expressed in French, as: je crois que vous avez tort, I think you are wrong. 
 
— 154 — 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 309. An mtarjeetion is a word thrown in to expreas some sadden emo- 
 tion of the mind. The following are the principal interjections, aooording 
 to the emotions which they are genecally intended to indicate: 
 
 of joy: ah! oA/ ^/ bon!iMiB/ 
 
 of sorrow: ah! oA/ aXe!ciA/ h^3aB!€i2a9/ 
 
 of pain or fear: h^Iae ! alas / ah ! oA / eh ! oA / , 
 
 of aTersion: tlfie! fi done ! Jie then! foin de ! otooy wUh 
 
 of calling to attention: eh! eA/ h&\ aht ho]kl hoOot 
 
 of oalling to sHonoe: chat! hiHI huahl motosl sUeno$I st! *sii 
 
— 155 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 k, after adjectives, 86, 
 
 contracted with the article, 42. 
 
 forming the dative, 42. 
 
 .preceding the infinitive, 272. 
 
 preposition, 296. 
 
 repeated, 298. 
 
 with verbs, 245. 248. 249. 
 absolute demonstratives, 130. 
 absolute possessives, 127. 128. 
 accusative, 38. 
 
 of personal pronouns, 113, 
 
 with verbs, 243—245. 
 
 with void, voild, 297. 
 acheter, its conjugation, 208. 
 active verb, 172. 173. 
 
 its auxiliary, 193—195. 
 adjectives, 60—89. 
 
 agreement, 61. 70—72. 
 
 comparison, 73—79. 
 
 definition, 60. 
 
 demonstrative, 129. 
 
 feminine, 63-69. 
 
 government, 84—89. 
 
 of measure, 88. 89. 
 
 place, 80-83. 
 
 plural, 62. 
 
 possessive, 122. 
 
 with the subjunctive, 266. *• 
 adverbial phrases, 295. 
 adverbs, 282—295. 
 
 from adjectives, 288—290. 
 
 by combination, 295. 
 
 comparison, 291. 292, 
 
 definition, 282. 
 
 of degree, 285. 
 
 of manner, 286. 
 
 of place, 284. 294. 
 
 place, 293. 294. 
 
 adverbs, 
 
 of quantity, with de, 57. 
 
 of time, 283. 
 affirmative form of conjugation, 211. 
 agreement of 
 
 absolute possessives, 128. 
 
 adjectives in general, 61. 70, 
 with nous and vous, 71. 
 with several nouns, 72. 
 
 comparatives and superlatives, 75, 
 
 possessive adjectives, 123. 
 
 verbs, 238—242. 
 
 with diiferent persons, 240. 241, 
 with one subject, 238. 
 with relatives, 242. 
 with several subjects, 239—241, 
 aieul, plural, 15. 
 aller, denoting future time, 261. 
 alphabet, 1. 
 
 appeler, its conjugation, 207. 
 apprehender, with ne 287. 2. 
 article, 5. 
 
 contraction, 42. 
 
 definite, 40-42. 
 
 definition, 5. 
 
 elision, 41. 
 
 indefinite, 43. 51, 
 
 no article, 52. 53. 
 
 partitive, 44. 45. 
 
 repeated, 49. 
 
 use, 49—59. 
 aucun, with ne before the verb, 155. 
 
 without ne, 165. 166. 
 
 in questions, 215. 
 
 with the subjunctive, 266. ^. 
 aujourd'hui, its place, 294. 
 
 ' !■ for the degree of equality, 77i 
 
— 166 — 
 
 autre, ) with ne before the rerb fol- 
 ■utrement ) lowing, 78. 287. l- 
 autrui. indefinite pronoun, 159. 164 
 tiniiary verbs, 190-196. 
 
 avoir, 191. 
 
 etre, 192. 
 
 usee, 193-196. 
 ■voir, auxiliary verb 
 
 oonjugatiou, 191. 
 
 1188,198-196. 
 
 beaucoup, followed by de. 67. 
 
 bien, followed by the ddf&nite article, 68. 
 
 capital inHiai letters, 4a 
 cardinal numerals, 91. 
 
 nifKlitioitioiiK, 92. 
 
 used iuHtoAd of th. ■ i m ; . 97. 
 cases, 37. 38. 
 
 ca, used with fire, 134. 231. 232. 
 08 qui, 08 que, 141. 
 ce, cet cette, 129. 
 ceci, ccla. uschI (\hfu)lntely, 131 
 
 in qnoHtionM, 216. 
 
 ,1 demonBtratiTe pro- 
 
 celuM:.. celle^i, V 
 
 celuhli. celle-14. ) """"^ xov-xoo. 
 
 cent, 92. 94. 
 
 certain, indefinite pronoun, 163. 
 
 cesser, pas omitted after it, 213. 
 
 c'est, ce sent 23L 232. 
 
 chacun, indefinite pronoun, 159. 162. 
 
 cheque, indefinite pronoun, 151. 
 
 ci, 1^, appended to demonstratives, 129. 
 
 133. 
 ciel. plural, 15. 
 classification 
 
 of adverbs, 282. 
 
 of nouns, 6. 
 
 of pronouns, 99. 
 
 of verbs, 172-177. 
 collective numerals, 98. !• 
 common nouns. 6. 
 comparatives 
 
 agreeing like adjectives, 75. 
 
 comparatives 
 
 with M«, 78. 287. 1* 
 
 with que or de, 76. 
 cowpiriaoo of 
 
 adjeotireo, 78—79. 
 
 adverbs, 291. 292. 
 compound conjunctions. dOL 
 compound nouns. 16—19. 
 compound personals, 107. 117* ' 
 
 cow pou wd looses. 186. 
 
 fonnation, 199. 
 
 fofmation. 197. 
 
 nao, 262. 263. 
 Bli i io|8 « on, 18a 18a 
 
 of the anziliarieo, 19L 192. 
 
 formo, 811— 81& 
 
 notes, 90(MaOl 
 
 principal parts, 190. 
 
 of irregular Toibs, 934—987. 
 
 of the passiTO rerb, 9ia 
 
 of the refloottTo Terb, 99a 
 
 of regular TOfbo, 909—904. 
 
 of Torbo in oer , ger, eier, der, ier, 
 yer, 906— Sia 
 ooolooetions, 300-304. 
 
 compound, 301. 
 
 simple, 300. 
 
 with the Rubjimctive, 266. <5. 302. 
 conjunctive personals, 102—104. 106. 
 consonants. 2. 
 
 contraction of the article, 42. 
 il convient, with de and the infiniti][e, 
 
 271.2. 
 craindre, with ne, 287. 2- 
 do crainto quo. with ne, 287. 3> 
 
 dative, a, 38. 42. 
 
 after adjectives (d), 86. 
 
 of personal pronouns, 111. 112. 
 
 with verbs, 245. 248. 249. 
 de, after adjectives, 85. 
 
 after comparatives, 76. 
 
 contracted with the article, 42. 
 
 forming the genitive, 42. 
 
16t — 
 
 after words denoting quantily, 57. 
 
 with passive verbs, 243. 
 
 preceding the infinitive, 271. 
 
 preposition, 296. 
 
 repeated, 298. 
 
 replacing the partitive article, 56. 
 
 with verbs, 244. ^46. 247. 
 declension 
 
 of nouns, 39—46. 
 with the definite article,* 40. 
 with the indefinite article, 43. 
 with the partitive article, 44. 46. 
 
 of proper nouns, 46. 
 
 of interrogative pronouns,' 143. 
 
 of personal pronouns, 103—106. 
 
 of relative pronouns, 135. 
 definite article, 5. 40—42. 
 
 after Men and la plupart, 58. 
 
 replacing the possessives, 126. 
 
 uses, 49. 50. 54. 
 definition of the 
 
 adjective, 60. 
 
 adverb, 282. 
 
 article, 5. 
 
 conjunction, 300. 
 
 interjection, 305. 
 
 noun, 6. 
 
 pronoun, 99. 
 
 demonstrative, 129. 
 indefinite, 148. 
 interrogative, 143. 
 personal, 100. 
 possessive, 121. 
 relative, 135. 
 
 verb, 171-177. 
 degree of equality expressed by aussi, 
 
 si, autant, tant, 77. 
 demain, its place, 294. 
 demonstrative pronouns, 129—134. 
 derivation of adverbs, 288—290. 
 dernier, with the subjunctive, 266. *• 
 disjunctive personals, 105. 
 Jont, relative pronoun, 137. 140. 
 douter with ne, 287. 2. 
 dO, participle left unvaried, 280. 
 
 elision of the article, 41. 
 elle-meme, 107. 
 empecher, with ne, 287. 2. 
 employer, its conjugation, 209. 
 en, adverb of place, 115. 
 
 with a participle, 275. 
 
 its place, 119. 
 
 preposition, 296. 
 
 pronoun, 115. 
 
 repeated, 298. 
 est-ce que, in questions, 217. 
 etre, auxiliary, 192. 
 
 of neuter verbs, 193. 2. 
 
 of passive verbs, 192. 
 
 of reflective verbs, 193.1- 221. 
 6tre aime, 219. 
 
 fait, participle left unvaried, 280. 
 il fait, impersonal expression, 233. 
 il faut, impersonal verb, 226. 227. 
 feminine of 
 
 adjectives, 63—69. 
 
 nouns, 23-28. 
 finir, regular verb, 203. 
 formation of the 
 
 plural of nouns, 10—21. 
 
 plural of adjectives, 62. 
 
 tenses, 196-201. 
 forms of conjugation, 211—218. 
 
 afi&rmation, 211. 
 
 negation, 212. 213. 
 
 question, 214-217. 
 
 question with negation, 218. 
 fractional numerals, 98. 2. 
 future tense, 186. 
 
 formation, 197. 
 
 replaced by alter, 261. 
 
 use, 259. 
 
 geler, its conjugation, 208. 
 
 gender of nouns, 22—36. 
 
 as determined by the ending, 34. 35 
 as determined by the meaning, 32. 33 
 of persons and animals, 22—28. 
 of things without life, 31-35. 
 
— 158 — 
 
 twofold— with difforentmeamiigs,89. 
 of the word (je>is, 29. 30i 
 gMiKivt, de, 38. 42. 
 alter adjectives, 86. 
 of penoniil pronouiiH, 110. 
 after snpcrliUivcH, 79. 
 with verbs, 244. 246. 247. 
 its gender, 29. 30. 
 tof 
 a^jeotivea, 84-88. 
 
 with a, 86. • 
 
 with da, 86. 88. 
 
 of measure, 88. 88. 
 
 with other prepoeitioiia, 87. 
 superlatives, 79. 266. «> 
 verba, 843-260. 
 
 intransitive, 846. 848. 
 
 reflective, 247. 249. 
 
 transitive. 943-940. 
 
 Mer, adverb, its place, 991 
 168. 
 with le, lOy 9L note, 
 hyplimi, 12a 214. 
 
 iei, adverb, its place, 994. 
 n est ) impersonal expression, 23L 
 il 6tait, 3 with dc and the inflnitiTe,271.2. 
 il y a. im]>or8onal expreesion, 230. 
 imperative. 182. 
 
 formation, 200. 
 
 with pronouns, 120. 
 
 use, 264. 
 imperfect, 186. 
 
 formation, 198. 
 
 use, 255. 
 impersonal phrases. 229. 
 impersonal verbs. 177. 225—233. 
 
 with de and the intiiiitive, 271. 2, 
 
 with the subjunctive, 266. 3. 
 it Importe, with de and the infinitive, 
 
 271. 2. 
 indefinite article, 5. 43. 
 
 use, 61. 
 
 indefinite pronouns. 148—170. 
 definition, 148. 
 used with nouns only, 149. 
 used with or without nouns, 161 
 used without nouns, 169. 
 used with fpie, 167. 
 
 indicative, 180. 251-261. 
 of the future teases, 989. 
 of the imperfect, 966. 
 of the perfect, 967. 
 of the pluperfect, 908. 
 (if the present, 909—964. 
 of the preterit, 966. 
 of the preterit anterior, 968. 
 
 inflnitivo, 184. 
 
 employed by itself, 270. 
 
 as a notm, 268. 
 
 preceded by a, 979. 
 
 preceded by de, 971. 
 
 preceded by other prepositions, 973. 
 
 principal part of the verb, 196. 
 
 to be rendered by the verbal in ing, 
 973. 
 interjections. 306 017. 
 
 interrogative lorw of conjugation, 914— 
 
 of verlis in e mut<', 216. 
 
 of verbs of one syllable, 217. 
 intowo Qs t i v and negative form of con- 
 jugation, 918. 
 inttrrogativo pronouns. 143—147. 
 
 declension, 143. 
 
 definition, 143. 
 
 uses, 144-147. 
 IstraatHive verbs 
 
 governing the dative, 248. 
 
 governing the genitive, 246. 
 irregular comparison of 
 
 adjectives, 74. 
 
 adverbs, 292. 
 irregular verbs. 234—237. 
 
 1st conjugation, 234. 
 
 2d conjugation, 235. 
 
 3d conjugation, 236. 
 
 4th conjugation, 237. 
 
 jetor, its conjugation, 207* 
 
169 
 
 \k, appended to demonstratiyes, 129.133. 
 
 its place, 294. 
 Iaiss6, participle, left unvaried, 280. 
 le, personal pronoun, expletive, 116. 
 lequel, interrogative pronoun, 145. 
 
 relative pronoun, 135. 138—140. 
 se lever, to rise, 220. 
 Ton, used for o?i, 160. 
 lui-meme, elle-meme, etc., 107. 117. 
 
 manger, its conjugation, 206. 
 meme, indefinite pronoun, 107. 156. 
 mil, mille. 93. 94. 
 modifications of 
 
 cardinal numerals, 92. 
 
 nouns, 7. 
 
 verbs, 178—187. 
 moi-meme, 107. 
 
 a moins que, with ne, 287. 3. 
 mon, ton, son, before feminine nouns, 124. 
 moods, 179—184. 
 
 their uses, 251-281. 
 multiplicative numerals, 98. 3. 
 
 nature of the subjunctive, 183. 265. 
 ne, negative adverb, 286. 287. 
 negation in French and not in English, 
 
 287. 
 negative form of conjugation, 212. 213. 
 negative and interrogative form of con- 
 jugation, 218. 
 neuter verb, 175. 
 nier, with ne, 287. 2. 
 nominative, 38. 
 
 of personal pronouns, 108. 109. 
 notes to the conjugations, 205—210. 
 noun, 6—48. 
 
 cases, 37. 38. 
 
 declension, 39—48. 
 
 definition and classification, 6. 
 
 formation of the plural, 10—21. 
 
 genders, 22—36. 
 
 of measure used instead of adjec- 
 tives, 89. 
 
 modifications, 7. 
 
 numbers, 8. 9. 
 
 of quantity with de, 57. 
 
 nul, always with ne before the verb, 166. 
 numbers, 8. 9. 187. 
 numerals, 90—98. 
 
 cardinals, 91—94. 
 
 collectives, 98. l. 
 
 fractionals, 98. 2. 
 
 multiplicatives, 98. 3. 
 
 ordinals, 95-97. 
 
 oeil, plural, 15. 
 
 office of the past participle, 276. 
 
 omission of 
 
 the article, 59. 
 
 pas and point, 213. 
 
 the conjunction que not allowed, 304. 
 
 relatives not allowed, 142. 
 on, indefinite pronoun, 159. 160. 
 onze, onzifeme, with le, la, 91, note. 
 ordinal numerals, 95. 
 
 derived from the cardinals, 96 
 
 replaced by the cardinals, 97. 
 oser, pas omitted after it, 213. 
 
 par, with passive verbs, 243. 
 parler, regular verb, 202. 
 participles, 274—281. 
 
 employed as adjectives, 281. 
 
 left unvaried, 280. 
 
 past, 276-279. 
 
 present, 274. 275. 
 particles, 282. 
 partitive article, 5. 44. 55. 
 
 omitted, 59. 
 
 replaced bj^ de, 45. 56. 67. 
 parts of speech, 4. 
 
 principal, of conjugation, 196. 
 pas and point omitted, 213. 
 pas un, with ne before the verb, 155. 
 passive verb, 174. 
 
 its conjugation 219. 
 past participle, 276—280. 
 
 agreement, 277—279. 
 
 left unvaried, 280. 
 
 oface, 276. 
 
 principal part, 196. 
 
 used adjectively, 281. 
 
— 160 
 
 w, its oonjogation, 206. 
 perfect 186. 
 
 it8 Uhe, 267. 
 ptrMMl pronouns, 10(>-120i 
 aooiuativc, 113. 
 olaaniioation, 101. 
 oomponod personals, 107. 117. -^ 
 conjunctive personals, 102—104. 106. 
 dative. UL 112. . 
 decloiiHion, 103—106. 
 definition. lOa 
 
 disjunctive personals, 102i 106. 
 genitive, UO. 
 nominative, 106. 108. 
 place, U8-120. 
 after prepositions, 114. 
 refleotiTe 117. 221. 
 for thiu^s without life, 116. 
 use. 108-117. 
 pertoMM, with ne before the verb, 166. 
 without ne, 166. 166. 
 in questions, 216. 
 with the subjunctive, 266. 4- 
 pertont, different, 240. 241. 
 of pronouns, 100. 
 of verbs, 187. 
 plact of 
 adjectives, 80-63. 
 after their nouns, 82. 
 after or before their nouns, 83. 
 before their nouns. 81. 
 adverbs, 293. 294. 
 personal pronoiuiH, 118—120. 
 in the accu&\tive, 119. 
 in the dative, 119. 
 iu the nomiDative, 118. 
 with a verb in the imperative, 120. 
 placer, its conjugation, 206. 
 la plupart, with the definite article, 68. 
 pluperfect, 186. its use, 268. 
 plural, 9. 
 of adjectives, 62. 
 of nouns, 10—21. 
 compound, 16—19. 
 with a difi'erent meaning, 21. 
 irregular, 14. 15. 
 
 of nouns, 
 projMjr, 46. 
 regular, 10—13. 
 wanting, 20. 
 of the present tense, 196. 
 
 omitted, 213. 
 
 pronouns. 121—128. 
 absolute, 127. 128. 
 adjectives, 122. 
 definite article used for, 126. 
 definition, 12L [i24 
 
 fiiOfi, ton, son, before feminine nouns, 
 repeated, 185. 
 
 \ paa omitted after it. 213. 
 \ with the sobjunctive, 266.4. 
 prtndrt gir^, with ne, VIX 
 piiratei, 290. 
 
 principal part, 196. 
 .274.276. 
 
 nature and use, 274. 
 
 preceded by en, 276. 
 
 principal part, 196. 
 
 used a^jecUvely, 281. 
 pcesesl tease, 186* 
 
 pliu^ 196. 
 
 principal part, 196. 
 
 subjunctive, 196. 
 
 used instead of the ftitnre, 264. 
 
 used instead of our perfect. 263. 
 
 used instead of the preterit, 262. 
 preterit tense, 186. 
 
 principal part, 196. 
 
 subjunctive, 201. 
 
 use, 266. 
 preterit anterior. 186. it.s use, 258. 
 principal parts of conjugation, 196. 
 pronouns. 99—170. 
 
 classificatiou, 99. 
 
 definition. 99. 
 
 demonstrative, 129—134. 
 
 indefinite, 148-170. 
 
 interrogative, 143-147. 
 
 personal. 100-120 
 
 possessive, 121—128. 
 } reilective, U7. 221. 223. 
 
161 
 
 pronouns, 
 
 relative, 135—142. 
 
 with the subjunctive, 266.^.5. 
 pronunciation, 3. 
 proper nouns, 6. 
 
 declension, 46. 
 
 plural, 47. 
 pu, participle, left unvaried, 280. 
 
 quatre-vingts, 92. 
 que, conjunction, 
 
 after comparatives, 76. 
 
 never omitted, 304. 
 
 replacing other conjunctions, 303. 
 
 with ne, 287.3. 
 que, interrogative pronoun, 147. 
 que, relative pronoun, 136. 
 qu'est-ce qui, [ interrogative phrases, 
 qu'est-ce que, f 147. 
 quel, interrogative pronoun, 146. 
 quelconque, indefinite pronoun, 152. 
 quel que, ) indefinite pronouns, 
 quelque, \ 150. 168-170. 
 quelqueque, ) with the subjunctive, 266.5. 
 quelqu'un, indefinite pronoun, 161. 
 
 in questions, 215. 
 qui, interrogative pronoun, 143. 144. 
 
 relative pronoun, 135—139. 
 qui est-ce qui, [ interrogative phrases, 
 qui est-ce que, j 144. 
 qui que, with the subjunctive, 266. 5. 
 quiconque, indefinite pronoun, 162. 
 quoi, interrogative pronoun, 147. 
 
 relative pronoun, 141. 
 quoi que, with subjunctive, 266. 5. 
 
 reflective pronouns, 117. 221. 
 
 in a reciprocal sense, 223. 
 reflective verbs, 176. 220—224. 
 
 auxiliary, 221. 
 
 conjugation, 220. 
 
 corresponding to English intransi- 
 tives, 224. 
 
 government, 247. 249. 
 
 object, 221. 
 
 past participle, 279. 
 
 reflective verbs, 
 
 reciprocal sense, 223. 
 
 relation to the passive, 222. 
 regular comparison 
 
 of adjectives, 73. 
 
 of adverbs, 291. 
 regular verbs, 202—204. 
 
 1st conjugation, 202. 
 
 2d conjugation, 203. 
 
 4th conjugation, 204. 
 relative pronouns, 135—142. 
 
 declension, 135. 
 
 definition, 135. 
 
 omission not allowed, 142. 
 
 with the subjunctive, 266. 4. 
 
 uses, 136—142. 
 repetition 
 
 of the article, 49. 
 
 of possessives, 125. 
 
 of prepositions, 298. 
 rien, with ne before the verb, 165. 
 
 without 7ie, 165. 166. 
 
 in questions, 215. 
 
 with the subjunctive, 266. 4. 
 
 seul, with the disjunctive personals, 109. 
 
 with the subjunctive, 266. *. 
 si, adverb, for the degree of equality, 77. 
 si, conjunction, its use, 263. 
 simple conjunctions, 300. 
 simple tenses, 186. 
 singular, 9. 
 soi, 105. 117. 
 soi-meme, 107. 
 subjunctive, 183. 265—267. 
 
 nature, 183. 265. 
 
 tenses, 267. 
 
 with adjectives and pronouns, 266.^.5. 
 
 with conjunctions, 266.6. 302. 
 
 with verbs, 266.1—3. 
 il suffit, with de and the infinitive, 271.2. 
 superlative, 
 
 of adjectives, 73. 74. 
 agreement, 75. 
 formation, 73. 74. 
 government, 79. 266.4. 
 
 of adverbs, 291. 292. 
 
— 162 — 
 
 tiiit, adverb for the degree of equality, 
 
 tvd, adverb, it« place, 394. 
 tel, indefinite pronooii, 157. 
 tMMt. 186.186. 
 
 oomponnd tenses, 186. 
 
 formation, 196—801. 
 
 simple tenses, 186. 
 
 of the subjunctive, 267. 
 , 261-281. 
 I without life, 
 
 gender, 31-38. 
 
 pronomiK. 115. 
 
 tdt adverb, its place, 291 
 lost indefinite pronoun, 168. 
 preceding yens, 88. 
 
 [77, 
 
 with the aconaative, 8i8. 
 
 with the aocnaative together with 
 
 the dative 916. 
 with the aconaative together with 
 
 the genitive, 244. 
 
 tin, une. nnmeral, 98. 
 run rautre, indefinite pronoon, 163. 
 Tunique, with the (mbjonotive, 968. *• 
 uses of tbo 
 Auxiliary verbs, 193—196. (58. 
 
 definite and indefinite articles, 49— 64. 
 moods and tenses, 961—281. 
 conditional, 962. 263. 
 imperative, 964. 
 indicative, 261-261. 
 infinitive, 268-273. 
 participles, 274-281. 
 subjunctive, 266-267. 
 partitive article, 55. 
 personal pronouns, 108—117. 
 in the accuRative, 113. 
 in the dative. 111. 112. 
 in the genitive, 110. 
 in the nominative, 108. 109. 
 after prepositionR. 114. 
 as reflectives, 117. 221. 
 for things without life, 115. 
 
 uses of the 
 relative prononns, 135—142. 
 in the accusative, 136. 
 in the dative, 138. 
 in the genitive, 137. 
 in the nominative, 136. 
 
 vtadrt, regular Tsrb, 904. 
 venir de, expressing past time, 98(K 
 in ing, 973. 
 171-281. 
 agreement, 238-942. 
 amiliarice, 190-196. 
 daaaifioation, 172-177. 
 ooi^jiigation, 188. 189. 
 definition, 171. 
 
 formation of the lenses, 196-901. 
 forms of conjogatkni, 911—918. 
 government, 948-980. 
 infinitive, 988—978. 
 norm or pronoun, 243—260. 
 subjunctive, 966. i— 8. 
 impersonal, 225-233. 
 irregular, 934r-287. 
 modifications, 178—187. 
 notes to the conjugatiomt, 211—218. 
 passive, 219. 
 reflective, 290-224- 
 regular, 902-904. 
 
 uses of itsmoodsand tenser, 251— 28L 
 vmgt 02. 
 void, voHi. prepositions, 297. 
 
 participle, left im varied, 280. 
 , 2. 
 
 whatever. 169. 170. 
 wtiose. 140. 
 
 y, adverb, 115. 
 its place, 119. 
 pronoun, 116. 
 
Third Part. 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 Kote. The plural of French nouns is added only when irregular; adjectives 
 whose feminine differs from the masculine, are always given in full. 
 
 1. FRENCH AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY, 
 
 containing all French words occurring in this book, with their meanings, 
 hut only as itsed in the French Exercises. 
 
 agreable, agreeable, pleasant 
 (j')ai, (I) have 
 aider, to help 
 
 aimable, amiable [Zoue, like 
 
 (il) aime, (he)loves, likes; (j')aime, (I) 
 aimer, to love, like 
 aimer mieux, to prefer, like better 
 aine, ainee, eldest 
 
 ainsi, thus \_sad 
 
 I'air, the look; avoir I'air triste, to look 
 aise, glad; je suis bien aise, I am very 
 aisement, easily \gUxd 
 
 alle, go7ie 
 
 allemand, allemande, German 
 aller, to go ; aller au-devant de quel- 
 qu'un, to go to meet some one; s'en 
 aller, to go away; allez, go, go away 
 (you); avant d'aller, before goin^ 
 allumer, to light 
 Alphonse, Alphonso 
 I'ame (f.), the soul 
 I'Americain (m.), the American 
 I'Amerique (f.), America 
 rami (m. ), the friend 
 I'amie (f.), the friend 
 Tamitie (f. ), the friendship 
 s'amuser, to be amused 
 I'an (m.), the ^y ear 
 Vanglais, English _ ; 
 
 a, has 
 
 % to, at, in; a cause de, on account of; 
 
 a la mode, in the fashion, fashionable; 
 
 a present, now 
 abandonner, to abandon 
 aboyer, to bark 
 accepter, to accept 
 I'accident (m.), the accident 
 accompagner, to accompany 
 achete, bought 
 acheter, to buy 
 
 achever, to complete, erid, finish 
 acquerir, to acquire 
 actif, active, active 
 Taction (f.), the action, deed, share 
 Adele, Adela 
 adieu, good-bye 
 Adolphe, Adolphus 
 adonne, adonnee, addicted 
 I'adresse (f. ), the skill 
 s'adresser, to address one's self 
 I'affaire (f. ), the business, work, affair 
 affliger, s'affiiger, to grieve 
 afin que, in order that, so that 
 I'Afrique (f.), Africa 
 I'age (m. ), the age 
 age, agee, old 
 ftgir, to c^ott behave 
 
— 164 — 
 
 ranimal, lee animauz (m.), the aninuU 
 
 Tanii^ (f. ), the year; chaque ann^ 
 every year; Tann^ bineztile, leap- 
 
 Autoine, ArUhorty [year 
 
 Ao^t (zu.), August (monihj 
 
 ap^rcevoir, i to perceive, noHoe, §e$, 
 
 •'aperoevoir, ) be aware of 
 
 Tapoplezie (f.), apoplexy 
 
 appartenir, to bdong 
 
 appeler, to catt, nam$ 
 
 8*appeler, to he oafled, to be named 
 
 B'appelle, ia caBed 
 
 Tappetit (m. ), the appetUe 
 
 applique, appliqn^ dUigeni 
 
 8*appliquer. td apply <me'a je(f 
 
 lee ap|)ointementii (m.), the salary 
 
 upporter, to 6riju; 
 
 npport«;r remMe, to rwMdjf 
 
 apprendre, to toom, hmr 
 
 appriB, Isami 
 
 8*approoher, to apprwuk 
 
 aprte, cffUr 
 
 aprfta-demain. the dojf qfUr toHnorroM 
 
 rapr^midi {t), the q^lemoon 
 
 aprte qae, e^ter 
 
 I'arbre (m.), the tree 
 
 I'ardoise (f.), thedaie 
 
 Taigent (m. ), the numey, silver; la pi^oe 
 d*argent, the piece of money 
 
 rarm^(f.), (he army 
 
 arranger, to arrange 
 
 s'arreter, to stop (one*8 self) 
 
 en arri^re, backwards 
 
 arriv^ arriv^ arrived 
 
 rarriv^ (f.), the arrival 
 
 arriver, to arrive^ to hcqjpeti ; il est ar- 
 rive qnelqne chose, something has 
 hcq)pened 
 
 arrogant, arrogante, haughty 
 
 arroee, icaiertd 
 
 as, hast 
 
 TAsie (f.), Asia 
 
 s'asseoir, to sit doicn 
 
 aaaez, enough, preity 
 
 Taasiette (f.), the j^late 
 
 •ads, seated; toe a«ii, to 6^ eeated; 
 realeraaaiB, to remom #eatod 
 
 aaaorti, aMortie, supplied 
 
 raanriiment (m.), the assortmmi 
 
 a8Biir6meiit« certainly 
 
 attaoher, to tie 
 
 attaqner, to attack 
 
 attendre, to }QaU 
 
 attentif, attentive, attenttve 
 
 s'attrister, to grieve 
 
 aucun, ancone, any; ne. .ancun, au- 
 ctine, not any 
 
 Angmite, Augustus 
 
 anjourdliai, to-day 
 
 Taune (f.). tU eB 
 
 anprte de, near [as 
 
 anasi, aiso, as; aiuai bien que, as iceS 
 
 aufldtdt que, aa soon as 
 
 r AoBtialie (1 ), AustraUa [as miuck 
 
 antant, as much, a# many; d'autant, 
 
 antoor de, rommi 
 
 Tantre, the other; deferent 
 
 autre ohoae, somtthing dse 
 
 aiitrefoiB, formsriy 
 
 antrement* ettenoiee, dyfersnlly 
 
 antmi, otherst othsr people 
 
 avanoer, to advance [9^>^ 
 
 avant, brfcre; avant d'aller, '^ore 
 
 Tavantage (m.), the advanUige 
 
 avant-hier, the day before yesterday 
 
 avare, avaricious 
 
 aveo, with 
 
 Tavenir (m. ), the future 
 
 avertir, to warn 
 
 (voos) avez, (you) have 
 
 avoir, to have; avoir I'air triste, to 
 look sad; avoir besoin, to be in need 
 of, want; avoir coutume, to 6f acctts- 
 tomed; avoir des ^gards, to have con- 
 sideralion; avoir envie, to have a 
 mind; avoir faim, to be hungry; avoir 
 honte, to be ashamed ; avoir mal anx 
 yeiix, to have sore eyes: avoir pa- 
 tience, to be patiettt; avoir peur, to 
 fear, to be afraid; avoir piti^ to have 
 pity; avoir de quoi vivre, to have 
 
— 165 
 
 means to live (m; avoir raison, io he 
 right; avoir sommeil, to he sleepy; 
 avoir tort, to he vyrong; avoir la vue 
 basse, to he short-sighted; avoir la vue 
 bonne, to lutve good sight 
 
 (nous) avons, (we) havi 
 
 avoTier, to admit 
 
 Avril (m.), April 
 
 babiller, to chatter 
 
 badiner, to joke 
 
 se baigner, to hathe 
 
 le banc, the hench 
 
 le banquier, the hanker 
 
 le bas, the stocking 
 
 bas, basse, low ; avoir la vue basse, to 
 he short-sighted 
 
 batir, to huild; fairs batir, to get huilt 
 
 battre, to heat 
 
 beau, bel, belle, heautifuly fine 
 
 beaucoup, much; beaucoup de bien, a 
 great deal of good; beaucoup de 
 monde, many people 
 
 le beau-frere, the hrother-in-law 
 
 la bequille, the crutch 
 
 le berceau, the arhor [need of, icant 
 
 le besoin, need; avoir besoin, to he in 
 
 le beurre, the huUer 
 
 la bibliotheque, the library 
 
 bien, well; very 
 
 le bien, the henefit, good, that which is 
 right, the property, estate, fortune, 
 wealth; beaucoup de bien, a great 
 deal of good; fairedubien, to do good 
 
 bienfaisant, bienfaisante, liberal 
 
 le bienfaiteur, the henefactor 
 
 bientot, soon 
 
 la biere, the heer 
 
 le billard, the hilliards 
 
 le billet, the note 
 
 blamer, to hlame 
 
 blanc, blanche, white 
 
 blesser, to wound, hurt 
 
 boire, to drink 
 
 la boite, the hox 
 
 bon, bonne, good; de bonne heure, 
 
 early; avoir la vue bonne, to have 
 
 good sight 
 le bonbeur, (the) happiness 
 la bonte, the kindness, goodness; les 
 
 bontes, the kindness, good-will 
 le bord de la mer, the sea-side 
 la botte, the hoot 
 la bouche, the mouth 
 le boucbon, the cork 
 la boue, the mud 
 bouillir, ^0 hoil 
 le boulanger, the haker 
 le bouquet, the nosegay 
 la bourse, the purse; the Exchange 
 le bout, the end 
 la bouteille, the hottle 
 le bras, the arm 
 la brebis, the sheep 
 le brouillard, the fog; il fait dubrouil- 
 
 lard, it is foggy 
 le bruit, the noise 
 Bruxelles, Brussels 
 bu, drunk 
 
 c. 
 
 le cabaret, the inn 
 
 le cadeau, les cadeaux, the present 
 
 le cafe, the coffee 
 
 le cahier, the copy-hook 
 
 la campagne, the country 
 
 le canape, the sofa 
 
 le canif, the penknife 
 
 la canne, the cane 
 
 car, for, as 
 
 la carafe, the decanter 
 
 la carte, the card, map 
 
 le cas, the case Icount of 
 
 la cause, the cause ; a cause de, on ac- 
 
 causer, to cause, give 
 
 le cavalier, the horseman 
 
 la cave, the cellar 
 
 ce, cet, cette, ces, this, that; these, those 
 
 ^ ' !• that which, which, what 
 ce que, ) 
 
 c'est, it is, that is 
 
^ 166 — 
 
 oe sont, fhtst are; ih^ m^ 
 
 eeoi. this 
 
 o6deT, to cede, give, yieid 
 
 oela, t^uit; oela est, it is; oeU im flert 
 
 de rien, that is quite useless 
 celt'brer, to ceteUraie 
 celui, celle, oeox, oell<», thai, Ihom 
 oclui-ci, celle-ci, oenx-ei, oelles^i, 
 
 this, these; the latter 
 celni-lk, celle-lji; oeax-U^ oeUee-U^ 
 
 thai, those; the former 
 oeut, a hufutred; cent on, a hmdted 
 
 and one 
 le, la centi^me, the ^undraM 
 oependftot, yei 
 la oerise, thechtrry 
 osrtain, oertaiii6» e&riokk, mim 
 la oease, ceasing; sans oease^ kneee 
 
 santiy 
 chaonn, ohaoane, each cm, every cme 
 le chagrin, gritf 
 la chaise, the chair 
 la chambre, the room 
 la chandelle, the candte 
 changer, to change 
 la chanson, the eong 
 chanter, to sing 
 
 le chapeau, lee ohapeanx, the kaithotmei 
 chaqne, each, every; chaqtM aan^f, 
 
 every year 
 charm^, charm^ delighied 
 le ch^t, the cat IcomUry-eeat 
 
 le chateau, lee chUeaaz, Gie eaeUe, 
 chatier, to chastise 
 le chatiment, the chastisemeiU 
 chaud, chaude, twrrm 
 le chemiii, the loay, road 
 la chemise, the shirt 
 le chene, the oak 
 cher, chere, dear; cher, deofiy 
 cherche, sought 
 chercher, to seek, look for 
 le cheval, les chevaux, th^ horse 
 le cheval de bois, the rocking-horse 
 •uii cheveu, a single hair; les cheveux, 
 la chevre, the goat Ithe hair 
 
 to, cf at the houee cf; dies noi 
 to, or at my house; chez le boulanger, 
 at the baker's; ohes mon fihee, at 
 my brother's; chez mon ptee, at my 
 father's; chez aoi, at home 
 
 le chien, the dog 
 
 le chooolat, the choookde 
 
 choisir, to choose [tktmg 
 
 lacho(ie,fAf thing; qaelqQecho8e,som*- 
 
 Ghr^en, Christiati 
 
 le ciel, lea cienz, the eky, Bunen 
 
 cinq, five 
 
 cinqaante^ fifty 
 
 le, la dnquitoe, thej^ 
 
 la droooatanoe, ike drewnu tmi m 
 
 le dtron, the lanon 
 
 ekmi, eloo^ anr, nailed to 
 
 le coober, the coachman 
 
 le ocBor, the heart; de toot mon canr, 
 vUhaBmy heart 
 
 leooffre, O^inmk 
 
 la ooltee, (the) anger 
 
 leooll^ the college 
 
 le combat, the eombat, fight 
 
 combien? horn nmekt how mamyf 
 
 laoomMe, the comet 
 
 eommeneer, io begin 
 
 eonuiienl? how? what? looaree 
 
 le oommeroe, the trade, tmebweef imier^ 
 
 oommettze, ioeomimU 
 
 la commiadon, the errand 
 
 commode, contforiabU 
 
 commTmiqner, to oonrnvunioate 
 
 la compagnie, the oompany 
 
 oomplet, complete, oompMe 
 
 le compliment, the eomptimerd 
 
 comprcndre, to comprehend,un d eretand 
 
 le concert, the concert 
 
 concevoir, to conceive 
 
 la condition, the condition 
 
 la conduite, the conduct 
 
 le cong6, the leave; prendre conge, to 
 take leave 
 
 la connaissance, the knowledge, ac- 
 quaintance; des connaiseances, leam- 
 
 connaitre, to know [ing 
 
— 16Y 
 
 connu, known 
 
 le conseil, the advice 
 
 conseiller, to advise^ recommend 
 
 consequent, consistent^ par consequent, 
 
 conserver, to preserve {therefore 
 
 consulter, to consult 
 
 content, contente, contented, pleased 
 
 se contenter, to he contented with 
 
 continuer, to continue 
 
 le contraire, the contrary 
 
 contre, against 
 
 convenir, to suit 
 
 il convient, it is proper j it becomes 
 
 copier, to copy 
 
 la corbeille, the basket 
 
 le cordonnier, the shoemaker 
 
 le corps, the body 
 
 corriger, to correct 
 
 corrompu, corrompue, corrupted 
 
 le cote, the side,- a cote de, by the side 
 
 of, beside 
 se coucher, to go to bed 
 coudre, to sew 
 la couleur, the color 
 la couple, the couple 
 le courage, courage 
 courir, to run 
 court, courte, short 
 le cousin, the (male) cousin 
 la cousine, the (female) cousin 
 le couteau, les couteaux, the knife 
 coiiter, to cost 
 la coutume, custom,' avoir coutume, to 
 
 be accustomed 
 le couvert, shelter- se mettre a convert, 
 
 to get under shelter 
 couvrir, to cover,- se couvrir, to put on 
 
 one's hat,- to get cloudy (of the sky) 
 craindre, to fear, to be afraid 
 craintif, craintive, timid 
 la cravate, the cravat 
 le crayon, the pencil 
 le creancier, the creditor 
 le credit, the credit 
 credule, credulous 
 cree, creee, created 
 
 crever, to burst 
 
 croire, to believe, think, be of opinion 
 
 (je) crois, (I) believe 
 
 croitre, to grow 
 
 (vous) croyez, (you) believe, think 
 
 cruel, cruelle, cruel, fierce 
 
 cueillir, gather 
 
 la cuiller, la cuillere, the spoon 
 
 cuire, to cook, bake; faire cuire, to cook 
 
 la cuisine, the kitchen; faire la cuisine, 
 
 to cook 
 le cuivre, (the) copper 
 
 D. 
 
 la dame, the lady 
 
 le danger, the danger 
 
 dangereusement, dangerously 
 
 dans, in; dans peu de temps, in a short 
 
 danser, to dance \iime 
 
 davantage, more 
 
 de, by, of , from 
 
 le de, the thimble 
 
 debout, upright, standing; etre debout, 
 to be standing 
 
 Decembre (m.), December 
 
 decevoir, to deceive 
 
 le defaut, the defect, fault 
 
 defendre, to defend, forbid 
 
 les degats (m.)j damage 
 
 deja, already 
 
 dejeuner, to breakfast 
 
 delicieux, delicieuse, delicious 
 
 demain, to-morrow; demain matin, to- 
 morrow morning; demain soir, to- 
 morrow evening 
 
 demander, to demand, beg, ask, ask 
 for; je vous demande pardon, I beg 
 your pardon 
 
 demeurer, to live, dwell 
 
 demi, demie, half 
 
 une demi-douzaine, half a dozen 
 
 la demoiselle, th^ young lady 
 
 la dent, the tooth 
 
 se depecher, to make haste 
 
 dependre, to depend 
 
 <Jepenser, to spend 
 
— 168 — 
 
 d^plaire, to dispUast 
 
 depai8,5m<;^ayo; fivm; depoiii qiuindf 
 since wheti* hoic long? 
 
 lo deruier, la demiire, the last 
 
 derriere, befihul 
 
 lies (jue, as soon as, tohen [down 
 
 (l<'scondro, to descend, come doten, go 
 
 le desespoir, despair 
 
 d&drcr, to desire, vithfor 
 
 dteld, dtel^ ^Mrtseed 
 
 le deesin, (he drawing; le maltra de 
 desfdn, the drawing-maater 
 
 d(*88iner, to draw 
 
 « u detail, retaU 
 
 (U'teiiir, to detain 
 
 <loux, two; deux foiB, ittiee 
 
 'lovant, before; de i\e\nnU from before; 
 oUer au-devant de qtielqu'uii, to go 
 to meet some one; devaui soi, before 
 one*s self; le de^'aI]t, the front 
 
 devenir, to Itecome; (elle) devient, (she) 
 
 doviner, to guess \becomes 
 
 devoir, to owe, must, ought 
 
 lo devoir, the duty 
 
 dieter, to dictate 
 
 1 > dictionnaire, the dicHonary 
 
 Dicu, Gi)fi 
 
 h\ difft'n'iioo, the differemoe 
 
 ilifticilo, (ii^icult 
 
 dinmucbe (m.), Sunday 
 
 diutr, to dine 
 
 lo diner, (the) dinner 
 
 <liro, /() say, tell 
 
 Jiro a I'oreille, to ichisper to 
 
 h\ disposition, the disposition 
 
 distiugner, to distinguish 
 
 tlites, say, teU 
 
 so divertir, to play 
 
 dix, ten 
 
 dix-huit, eighteen 
 
 le, la dix-liuitieme, the eighteenth 
 
 le, la dixieme, iJie tenth 
 
 dix-neuf, Jiineteen 
 
 I', \;\ dix-neuvieme, the nineteenth 
 
 dix-sept, seventeen 
 
 le, la dix-fieptieme, ihe seventeenth 
 
 le doigt, the finger 
 le dollar, the dollar 
 
 le dommage, the damage; o*e8t dom- 
 
 m%Se, it is a pity 
 done, then 
 
 donn^ given [me 
 
 donner, to give; donnes-moi, give (to) 
 dent, whose, of vchom 
 dormi, slept 
 dormir, to sleep; dormir In gruae ma- 
 
 tin^e, to sleep late in the morning 
 d*oii? whence? 
 
 doQcement, sofUy, gently, dowty 
 la dooceor, {the) genUeneea 
 la donlcur, the pain [iainiy 
 
 le donte, the doubt; wana doaia, oer- 
 donter, to doM 
 donter fort, to doubt very nmek 
 douteax, doutenM, doubfful 
 doxa, donoe, sweet, gantte 
 ladonndne, thedoaen 
 doQze, twetve 
 
 le, la donzi^e, the iweifth 
 le drap, the etoth; de bon dzap^ aomo 
 
 good doth; dn dxap bleu, some bhte 
 k droiie, (to the) right [cloth 
 
 dnr, dure, hard 
 
 E. 
 
 Teau, les eaox (f.). the y rater 
 Tedair (m. ), the lightning; faire des 
 flairs, to lighten 
 Teoole (f. ), the school 
 I'ecolier (m.), the scholar 
 ^conome, saving 
 ^center, to listen, listen to 
 ^crire, to torite 
 ecrit, icritien 
 
 Tecriture (f. ), the vriiing, handwriting 
 nn ecu, a crown, dollar 
 I'ecurie (f.), the stable 
 eflfacer, to efface, strike out 
 Teflfort (m.), the effort; fiaire tons aea 
 efforts, to do one's utmost 
 
— 169 — 
 
 efirayer, to frighten 
 
 des egards (m. ), consideration 
 
 I'eglise (f.), the church 
 
 I'eleve (m. & f.)> the pupil 
 
 eleve, elevee, educated 
 
 elever, to bring up, educate 
 
 Elise, Eliza 
 
 elle, she, it; elles, they, them 
 
 elle-meme, herself 
 
 elles-memes, themselves 
 
 Elvire, Elvira 
 
 embarrasse, embarrassee, troubled 
 
 Emilie, Emily 
 
 empecher, to prevent, hinder 
 
 Templette (f.), the purchase 
 
 Femploi (m.), the office 
 
 employer, to employ, spend 
 
 en, in, on, by; of him, of her, of it; of 
 
 them; with him, with her, with it, with 
 
 them; some, any 
 encore, still, yet, again; encore tin,mie, 
 
 another; encore une fois, once more 
 encourager, to encourage 
 I'encre (f.), the ink; de I'encre, some 
 
 ink, any ink 
 I'encrier (m.), the inkstand 
 s'endormir, to fall asleep 
 I'enfant (m. & f.), the child; des en- 
 
 fants, some children, any children 
 enfin, at last 
 s'enfnir, to rim away 
 enroue, enrouee, hoarse 
 enseigner, to teach 
 ensemble, together 
 entendre, to hear 
 entendu, heard 
 entre, between, among, in 
 r entree (f. ), the entrance, admission 
 I'entreprise (f.), the undertaking 
 entrer (dans), to come in{to), to go in{to) 
 s'entretenir, to talk, converse 
 envers, towards, to 
 Ten vie (f.), the desire; avoir envie, to 
 
 have a mind 
 envier, to envy 
 envoye, senJt 
 
 envoyer, to send 
 
 epais, epaisse, thick, heavy 
 
 epargner, to spare 
 
 I'erreur (f . ), the mistake 
 
 esperer, to hope 
 
 Tesprit (m.), the mind; de I'esprit, ioi<, 
 
 intelligence 
 essayer, to try 
 i'essuie-main (m. ), the towel 
 essuyer, to wipe, dry up 
 est, is 
 
 est a, belongs to 
 I'estampe (f.), the engraving 
 estropie, estropiee, crippled 
 et, and 
 
 I'etang (m.), the pond 
 I'etat (m.), the state 
 les Etats-Unis (m.), the United States 
 ete, been 
 
 I'ete (m.), the summer 
 Etienne, Stephen 
 I'etoflfe (f.), the stuff, goods 
 s'etonner, to wonder 
 etouffant, etouffante, s^dtry 
 etourdi, etourdie, thoughtless, giddy 
 I'etranger (m. ), the stranger 
 etre, to be; etre assis, to be seated; 
 
 etre debout, to be standing ; etre a 
 
 plaindre, to be to be pitied 
 I'etude (f.), the study 
 Tetndiant {m.), the student 
 en, had 
 
 I'Europe (f.), Europe 
 eux, they, them 
 eux-memes, themselves 
 eveiller, to wake up 
 eviter, to avoid 
 exagerer, to exaggerate 
 excellent, excellente, excellent 
 I'exception (f. ), the exception 
 Texemple (m.), the example; par ex- 
 
 emple, for instance 
 expliquer, to explain 
 s'exposer, to expose one's self 
 I'extremite (f.), extremity; etre a Tex- 
 
 tremite, to be dying 
 
— ito — 
 
 k toriqoa» HU mnmifiuktf 
 
 Hoh^ fachee, atujry, sorry 
 
 86 i&cber, to get anyry 
 
 fftcile, tasy 
 
 1a iacilite, eaae^ JiMimcif 
 
 Irtibli', {^ea^' 
 
 Li faim,/)foti/fr; avoir faiin,to 6f Aunyry 
 
 faire, /<> makt, do, cause; faire bolir, 
 to tjet built; (adxe du bien« to do <;K>od; 
 faire caire, to cook; faire la cuisine, 
 to cook; £aire des eclairs, to lighUn; 
 fidre tons ses efforts, to do <m«*ir ut- 
 most; faire place, to make room; 
 fiBdre preuve, to makt a trial; faire 
 noe promenade, to take a icaik^ ne 
 ftdie qne, to do nothuig bid; (aire n^ 
 toilette, to dress; iaiie le ionr, to 
 tooOc around; laire Tenir, to smtdfor; 
 faire Toir, to let see 
 
 ♦"iit, CA«^ makes ; made; paid (of a 
 visit); il fait, t/ m; il fait dn brouil- 
 lard, it hf foggy; il fait nn brouillard 
 tr^s-^paiji, it is vtryfotjgy; il fait de 
 la pooasiere, H is dusty; ii fiiit da 
 Tent, it is witidy; il fait beauooop 
 de vent, t^ Car very windy 
 
 faites, nuUce, do 
 
 ftdloir, to be neoesmary 
 
 la famille, the famU^f 
 
 h\ farine, the JUntr, meal 
 
 fatigue, fatign^ tired 
 
 il faut, it is neeesmtry 
 
 la faute, the faulty mistake; mna iknle, 
 without fail 
 
 le fauteuil, the arm-chair 
 
 faux, fausse, fnlsey treacherous^ tfitfm- 
 
 la femme, the troman [eere 
 
 la fenetre, the wiruiou) 
 
 le fer, (the) iron 
 
 former, to close, shut 
 
 la fete, the feast, birthday 
 
 le feu, les feux, ihfi fire 
 
 feu, late, deceased 
 
 la fcuille, the leaf 
 
 Feyrier (m.), ^ruary 
 
 ildMeme&l^ faithfully 
 
 86 fier ^ to trust 
 
 la figure, the figure^ face 
 
 la fiUe, the daughter, girl 
 
 le fila, the son 
 
 fln, fine, fine 
 
 ftni, finished 
 
 ftnir, to finish 
 
 lefisaU:ni, the flatterer 
 
 la flenr, the flower; des fleon, tfo#it# 
 
 floweret any flowers; do belletf fleur>, 
 
 some beauty flowers 
 laflate, fA«^to 
 la fois, the time; nne fois, onor; deux 
 
 fois, twice; one autre fois, another 
 
 ttnuB 
 le fond, the hack 
 font, maik« 
 la foret, the forest 
 former, toform^ ienprove 
 fort, forte, sirotuj 
 fort, very, very much; fort ik propoa, 
 
 quite opportunely 
 la fi)rtune, the fortune 
 le foH8^, /A« di/cA 
 fouetter, to irift^, drtM on 
 la fourcbette, the fork 
 foumir, to furnish (with) 
 f^ais, firaiche, fresh, new 
 lafiraise, the strawberry 
 le franc, thefranc, twenty cents 
 fran^aia, fran9aiae, I>)rench; le fran- 
 
 9ai8, FNnch 
 la France, Erance 
 Fran9oiH, Fhincis 
 frapper, to strike 
 Frederic, Frederic 
 le frere, ttie brother 
 froid, froide, cM 
 le fromage, the cheese 
 le fruit, the fruit; de bons fruits, some 
 
 good fruit f des fruits murs, some 
 
 ripe fruit 
 fair, to flee, run away 
 lafaite, the flight 
 
— Ill — 
 
 G. 
 
 gagner, to gain, make 
 
 gai, gaie, lively 
 
 la gaite, cheerfulness 
 
 galoper, to gallop 
 
 le gant, the glove 
 
 le gar9on, the boy, waiter, fellow 
 
 la garde, care^ prendre garde, to take 
 
 garder, to keep {care 
 
 garni, garnie, furnished 
 
 le gateau, les gateaux, the cake 
 
 gater, to spoil 
 
 a gauche, (to the) left 
 
 la gazette, the gazette 
 
 geler, to freeze 
 
 le general, les generaux, the general 
 
 les gens (m. & f.), people 
 
 Geoffiroi, Godfrey; Jeffrey 
 
 Georges, George 
 
 la gloire, the glory 
 
 Godefroi, Godfrey 
 
 le gout, taste 
 
 la goutte, the drop 
 
 le grain, the corn 
 
 grand, grande, large, long, tall, great 
 
 grandir, to grow tall 
 
 la grand'mere, the grandmother 
 
 gras, grasse, fat; dormir la grasse 
 
 matinee, to sleep late in the morning 
 le gre, (the) liking; a son gre, to his 
 
 (her) satisfaction; savoir bon gre, 
 
 to take kindly 
 le grec, Greek 
 greler, to hail 
 grimper sur, to climb up 
 gronder, to peal [wholesale 
 
 gros, grosse, large, coarse; en gros, 
 ne . . guere, scarcely, hardly 
 guerir, to cure 
 la guerre, the war 
 Guillaume, William 
 la guitare, the guitar 
 
 H. 
 
 habile, skillful 
 
 les habillements (m.), the clothing 
 
 s'habiller, to dress one^s self 
 
 I'habit (m. ), the coat, dress, garment 
 
 habiter, to inhabit 
 
 I'habitude (f.), the habit, custom 
 
 hair, to hate 
 
 I'haleine (f. ), the breath ; a perte d'ha* 
 
 leine, out of breath 
 la harpe, the harp 
 se hater, to make haste, to hurry 
 haut, haute, high; plus haut, louder 
 Henri, Henry 
 
 I'herbe (f.), the herb, grass; mauvaise 
 le heros, the hero [herbe, ill weed 
 
 le hetre, the beech 
 I'heure (f. ), the hour, time of the day; 
 
 tout a I'heure presently, just now; de 
 
 bonne heure, early; a I'heure qu'il 
 
 est, at this hour 
 heureux, heureuse, happy, fortunate 
 hier, yesterday; hier matin, yesterday 
 
 morning; hier soir, yesterday evening 
 I'histoire (f.), the story 
 I'homme (m. ), the man 
 honnete, honest 
 I'honneur (m.), the honor 
 honorer, to honor 
 
 la honte, shame; avoir honte, to be 
 hors de, outside {ashamed 
 
 I'hote (m. ), the landlord 
 I'hotel de ville (m.), the (My-Hall 
 I'huile (f. ), the oil 
 huit, eight; huit jours, a week 
 le, la huitieme, the eighth 
 I'humeur (f. ), the temper; de mauvaise 
 
 humeur, in a bad temper 
 I'hyene (f.), the hyena 
 
 I. 
 
 ici, here 
 
 I'idee (f.), the idea 
 
 ignorant, ignorante, ignorant 
 
 il, he, it; il aime, he loves, likes; il est, 
 it is, that is; il est arrive quelque 
 chose, something has happened; il 
 fait, he makes; it is; il trouve, he 
 finds; il vend, he sells 
 
— 172 — 
 
 il y a, therf is, therf are, it is; fujo; i\ 
 y a nn mow, a month ago; iJ y a 
 quelqu'nn, there is somebody 
 il y a>'rtit, tfitre loas, there wert 
 ils, they 
 
 H'imaginer, to imagine 
 iiiimortel, immortelle, immortal 
 I'impertiuonce (f.), the impertinence 
 important, importante, important 
 u'importe, no matter 
 en impoeer, to deceive 
 impoflsible, impossHfle 
 rimproHsion (f. ), the im pn at Um 
 iucouHolable, inconaohbU 
 incroyable, incredible 
 riudigence (f.), nieed, povmi^ 
 indinpofl^ indinpoa^ iMtpOMd 
 I'indulgence (f. ), fofbearanee 
 ingrat, ingrate, ungrai^fid, wnihmk^ 
 I'ingratitnde (f.), ingroHbtde 
 iujiistement, w^uaOy 
 I'inuocence (f.)f Umocenoe 
 iuqniet, inqai^ta, anoBkmg 
 rinntant (m.). the monmd; 1^ l*iiiilaiil 
 
 meme, at this very moment 
 iustrnit, instrnite, lecmned 
 intelligent, intelligcnte, iideBlgent 
 riutention (f.), the inientUm 
 int&ressant, intdreaBante, hnierettb^ 
 int^reeser, to inieresi 
 inutile, useless [yUe to dbmer 
 
 inviter, to invite; inviter & diner, to h^ 
 
 J. 
 
 Jacqnes, James 
 
 jamais, et'er 
 
 1e jambon, the ham 
 
 Jii-ivier (m.), January 
 
 le jardin, the garden 
 
 le jardinier, the gardener (vu) 
 
 la jardiniere, the gardener (f.) 
 
 je, /; j'ai, / have; j'ai raison, / am 
 right; j'ai tort, lam icrong; j'aime, 
 / lovcy I like; je parle, / speak; je 
 pense k vous, / think of you 
 
 Joan, John 
 
 Joannettc, Jane, Jenny 
 
 Jeter, /o throw, throw atcay 
 
 le jeu, los jeux, the play, gftme 
 
 jeudi (m.), Thursday 
 
 jenne, young 
 
 la jemiesKt', youth 
 
 joU, jolif, preity [(at) hiUiarde 
 
 jouer, to play; joner an billard, to play 
 
 le jonr, the day; huit joors, a tieekf 
 
 par jour, daily , a day 
 le journal, the (n€we)paper 
 la joum^ the day 
 Joillet (m. ), July 
 Join (m.)t J^tne 
 
 Jolea, JuUua [iSU io-day 
 
 jnaqoe, a» far as; jallqa*a^jonrdllui. 
 JiuAe, juai^ right, rightecua 
 jnstemmt exactly 
 
 L. 
 
 la, the; her, it 
 
 lik, there; de lu, Uicncx, frum Vicre; U^ 
 
 baa, yonder 
 laborieox, laborienae, indMlriom 
 laiaaer, to Id, to Uave 
 le lait, the mSk 
 la langne, theUMnguage 
 large, wide 
 lalarme, Ihetootr 
 laa. laase, <ir«(l 
 le latin, Xotffi 
 86 layer, to wash one*s sdf 
 le, the; Aim, it; le leur, it to them; le 
 
 lui, i7 to him 
 la le^on, the lesson 
 la lecture, reading 
 l^ger, l^g^, light 
 les legumes (m.), the vegeialAes 
 lentement, sloicly 
 lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesqnelles, 
 
 which ? who, which 
 les, the, them; les leurs, them to them; 
 
 les lui, them to him 
 la lettre, the letter 
 leur, leurs, their 
 le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs 
 
ITS — 
 
 leur, them, to them 
 
 leur en, some to them 
 
 leve, lifted [gei up 
 
 lever, to lift, raise; se lever, to rise, 
 
 le libraire, the bookseller 
 
 au lieu de, instead of 
 
 la ligne, the line 
 
 le linge, the linen 
 
 le lion, the lion 
 
 lire, to read 
 
 le lit, the bed 
 
 le livre, the book 
 
 la livre, the pound 
 
 se livrer a, to give one's self up to 
 
 le logis, the house, dwelling 
 
 la loi, the law 
 
 loin, /ar; de loin, f7'om afar 
 
 le loisir, (/Ae) leisure 
 
 Londres, London 
 
 long, longue, long; au long, a^ /engr^/i 
 
 longtemps, a long time 
 
 lorsque, wheyi, at the time when 
 
 louer, to praise; to let 
 
 Louis, Louis 
 
 Louise, Louisa 
 
 lourd, lourde, he/ivy 
 
 lu, read 
 
 lui, he, him; to him, to her, to it; lui 
 
 en, some to him, to her, to it 
 lui-meme, himself 
 liiire, to shine 
 la lumiere, the light 
 lundi (m.), Monday 
 la lune, the moon 
 
 M. 
 
 madame, Mrs.; mesdames, Mesdames 
 mademoiselle. Miss; mesdemoiselles, 
 
 Misses 
 magnifiqiie, magnificent 
 Mai (m.), May 
 maigre, thin, meagre 
 la main, the hand 
 le maire, the Mayor 
 mais, but [home 
 
 la maison, the house; a la maison, at 
 
 le maitre, the master, teacher; le maitre 
 de dessin, the drawing-master 
 
 mal, badly 
 
 le mal, les maux, the evil, complaint; 
 avoir mal aux yeux, t% luwe sore 
 eyes; mal a la tete, the headache 
 
 malade, sick, ill 
 
 la maladie, the sickness 
 
 le malheur, the misfortune 
 
 malheureux, malheureuse, unhappy^ 
 unfortunate 
 
 la malle, the box, trunk 
 
 le manege, the riding-school 
 
 mange, eaten 
 
 manger, to eat 
 
 la maniere, the manner 
 
 le marbre, the marble 
 
 le marchand, the tradesman 
 
 marchander, to bargain 
 
 le marche, the market 
 
 marcher, to walk, march 
 
 mardi (m.), Tuesday 
 
 Marie, Mary 
 
 Mars (m.), March 
 
 Martin, Martin 
 
 Mathilde, Matilda 
 
 le matin, the morning; tous les matins, 
 every morning 
 
 la matinee, the morning; dormir la 
 grasse matinee, to sleep late in the 
 morning 
 
 Matthieu, Matthew 
 
 mauvais, mauvaise, bad; mauvaise 
 herbe, ill weed; mauvaise humeur, 
 bad temper 
 
 me, me, to me; m'en, some to me; me 
 le, it to me; me les, them to me 
 
 mechant, mechante, naughty, mali- 
 cious {of beasts) 
 
 le medecin, the physician 
 
 medire, to slander 
 
 meilleur, meilleure, better; le meilleur, 
 la meilleure, the best; le meilleur 
 homme de la ville, the best man in 
 town 
 
 se meler de, to meddle with 
 
— i74 — 
 
 Ic meme, la memo, let memei, the 
 
 name; meme, self; even 
 la memoire, the memory 
 la memice, the threat 
 luener, to lead, tjuUiet bring 
 le meii8oiige« Ute lie 
 le meuteur, the liar 
 mentir, to lie 
 le menuiHicr, thejoitwr 
 mepruier, to despise 
 mcrci, thank you 
 mercredi (m.). Wednesday 
 la m^ the nwiherf mon pte« et ma 
 
 m^, myparenU 
 le m^te» the merU 
 m^ter, la deserve 
 \e m^tal, lea m^uz, the mdal 
 le metier, the trade 
 mettre, to p\d, jAaot^ jnd en; Minettfe 
 
 k convert, to get tmderaheiter; mettre 
 
 a profit, to t\im to aceomU; se mettve 
 
 a tiihle, to sit down to t4Me 
 K« meubles (m.), the fiantiture 
 midi (m. ), midday, noon; midi et 
 
 demi, hfilf past ticeive 
 le mien, la miexme, les miena, let 
 
 miennet, mvM 
 luieux, better: il Taut mienx, U is belter; 
 
 aimer mieux, to prefer, like btUer; la 
 
 mienx, best 
 mil, thousand 
 le milien, the middle; le bean milieu, 
 
 the very middle 
 luille, thottsand; le miUe, the mile 
 lo, la milliome, tfie thousandth 
 hi mine, the mine 
 ininuit (m.), midnight 
 h\ minnte, the minute 
 uiis, pidy laid 
 hi misere, the misery 
 la mode, the fashion; k la mode, in the 
 
 fashion, fashionable 
 mod^re, moderee, moderate 
 moderer, to moderate 
 modeste, modest 
 la modestie, mcdetitg 
 
 la modiste, the miUhm 
 
 moi, /, me; moi-memt^ i 
 
 le moineaii, les moineanx, the sparrow 
 
 moinH, less; moins. .moiiia, tlie less. . 
 
 the less; le moinH, least 
 le moia, the month 
 la moitie, the half; la moiti^ de la 
 
 ▼ille, half the town 
 le moment, themameiU 
 mon, ma, met, my 
 le moodtb the woHd, people; beauoonp 
 
 de monde, many people; pins de 
 
 monde, more people; toni le monde, 
 
 everybody 
 momieinr, 16r,f aMtriton, MBetn,f 
 
 oe mamieiir, this gen/Umtim 
 la montagne, the moimtaifi 
 monter k oheval, to Hde on kormbaek 
 monter en Toitora, to get into the oat' 
 la montra, the wateh [riage 
 
 montrer, to <^oie 
 
 le morcean, Icm morceaux, (he pieoe 
 mordre, to bit' 
 la mort, deaUi 
 mortel, mortelle, mortal 
 le mot, the toord 
 
 le monchoir, the pocket^handkerehi^ 
 monrir, to die; se moorir, to be dying 
 la moutarde, the mustard 
 m€ir, m^re, r^ 
 
 If. 
 
 naitre, to be bom; je snia n^ I {have 
 been) taw bom 
 
 n6, bom 
 
 ne..gnere, scarcely, hardly; ne.. ja- 
 mais, not ever, never; ne. .pas, not, 
 no; ne. .pins, not more, no more, no 
 longer; ne . . point, not at all, no; ne 
 . .plus jamais, never again; ue. .qne, 
 only, but, nothing but 
 
 necessaire, necessary 
 
 n^Iiger, to neglect 
 
 le negociant, the merchant 
 
 neiger, to snoio 
 
 nettciyer, to dean 
 
 \ 
 
175 
 
 tlie news 
 
 neuf, neuve, new 
 
 neuf, nine 
 
 le, la neuvieme, the ninth 
 
 le neveu, the nephew 
 
 ni, nor; iii . . ni, neither . . nor 
 
 Nicolas, Nicolas 
 
 noir, noire, black 
 
 la noix, the nut 
 
 le nom, ihe name 
 
 le nombre, the number 
 
 nombreux, nombreuse, numerous 
 
 non, no; non plus, either 
 
 notre, nos, our 
 
 le notre, la notre, les notres, ours 
 
 nous, we, us, to us; nous en, some to 
 
 us; nous le, it to us; nous les, them 
 
 to us 
 nous-memes, ourselves 
 nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new 
 la nouvelle, ) 
 les nouvelles, ) 
 Novembre (m.), November 
 le nuage, the cloud 
 nuisible, hurtful 
 la nuit, the night 
 nul, nulle, wo, no one 
 
 o. 
 
 obeir, to obey 
 
 oblige, obligee, obliged 
 
 observer, to observe 
 
 obtenir, to obtain, get 
 
 I'occasion (f. ), the opportunity 
 
 occupe, occupee, busy 
 
 s'occuper, to occupy one's self 
 
 Octobre (m. ), October 
 
 I'odeur (f.), the odor, smell 
 
 I'oeil, les yeiix (m.), the ey$ 
 
 offenser, to offend 
 
 I'officier (m.), the officer 
 
 offrir, to offer 
 
 I'oiseau, les oiseaux (m.), the bird 
 
 oisif, oisive, idle 
 
 I'oisivete (f. ), idleness 
 
 I'ombre (f. ), the shadow 
 
 OUfV on, one, people; Ton salt, one knows 
 
 I'oncle (m.), the uncle 
 
 I'ondee (f.), the flood 
 
 onze, deven 
 
 le, la onzieme, the eleventh 
 
 I'opinion (f.), the opinion 
 
 I'orage (m. ), the storm 
 
 ordinairement, usually; generally 
 
 ordonner, to order 
 
 en ordre, in order [whisper to 
 
 I'oreille (f. ), the ear; dire a I'oreille, to 
 
 oser, to dare 
 
 oter, to take out 
 
 ou, or; ou ou, either or 
 
 ou, where? d'ou, whence'/ 
 
 oublier, to forget 
 
 oui, yes 
 
 ouvert, ouverte, open 
 
 I'ouvrier (m.), the workman 
 
 ouvrir, to open 
 
 P. 
 
 la page, the page 
 
 le pain, the bread; du pain, some bread, 
 any bread; de bon pain, some or 
 any good bread 
 
 la paire, the pair 
 
 le pantalon, the trowsers 
 
 le papier, the paper 
 
 par, by 
 
 paraitre, to appear 
 
 le pare, the park 
 
 parce que, because 
 
 parcourir, to run thrmigh 
 
 par-dessus, over 
 
 le pardon, (the) pardon; je vous de- 
 mande pardon, / beg your pardon 
 
 pardonner, to forgive, excuse 
 
 les parents (m.), the relatives; mes 
 parents, my parents 
 
 paresseux, paresseuse, idle 
 
 parfume, parfumee, scented 
 
 (je) parle, (I) speak 
 
 parle, spoken 
 
 parler, to speak 
 
 la parole, the speech, word; tenir pa- 
 role, to keep one's word 
 
— 176 — 
 
 ^ pttl^ Ofidt, qp^ 
 
 ptftegvor, <o«Aan,dMI» 
 
 parti, partie, gone away, Mi cut, d^ 
 
 parted, storied 
 hi partie, the pari 
 
 }>artir, to go away, depart, set oui^ etart 
 I)artoui, everywhere 
 Ic poB, thp step 
 1)08 de, no; pas dn tont, not at all; pas 
 
 grand' choHe, not much} ne. .paM, not 
 \yam6, paoofa, paai, tost 
 lifloior, to spend (time) 
 la paoricm, love, affecHon 
 la pattenoe, (the) patience; avoir pa- 
 tience, to he patient 
 pauTre, poor 
 payer, to pay, pay for 
 le pays, the country 
 lo pajsago, the landscape 
 \& peine, the pain, trmMe; 4 peine. . 
 
 que, scarcely , . when; valoir la peine, 
 
 to be worth whUe 
 pendant, during 
 p^niblc, painfid 
 i'U p^iitence, as a j^enance 
 penaer, to think: j»- i^uho k rcfoa, I 
 
 think of you 
 perdre, to lose 
 perdu, lost 
 le p^ the father; mon p^ et ma 
 
 mere, my parents 
 l>ermettre, to permit, attow 
 la permiKsion, the permission, leave 
 persecutcr, to persecute 
 l^>ersonne. .ne, no one 
 la personne, the person 
 Ik^rsiiade, persuad^ convinced 
 1a perte, the loss; k perte dlialeine, 
 
 mtt of breath 
 ])etit, petite, smaUy short, little 
 l>eu, little, few; trop pen, too little; daij3 
 
 peu de temps, in a short time 
 le peuple, the people 
 la peur, fear: avoir peur, to fear, be 
 (11 se) peut, (it) may be [(rfraid 
 
 peut-etre, perhaps 
 
 la pbarmarie, (he d ny i<or> 
 
 Pbiladelphie, Philadelphia 
 
 l'hilipi>e, Phil^ 
 
 le piano, the piano 
 
 lapi^ the piece; lapi^ce d*argent, (he 
 
 pieeeqf money 
 la pierre, the stone 
 pire, worse 
 pis, wares 
 
 la piti^ pity; avoir piti^ to hone pity 
 la place, the piaee, room; faire place, 
 
 to.makeroom 
 placer, to put, place, lay; ae plaoor, to 
 
 takea seat 
 plaindre, to pity; tee ipkdndre, iohe 
 
 to be pitied; se plaindre, to complain 
 pHtdx^, to pieaee; aepitdTe, to take plea- 
 sure, to etgoy amfe aeff; je me plais 
 
 ici, / tike being hers 
 le plaiair, the pteaewrt 
 la plante, the plant 
 planter, to plant 
 pleor^ cried, wqd 
 pleorer, to cry, toeep 
 pleuToir, to rain 
 le plomb, (the) lead 
 la plnie, the rain 
 la plume, the pen 
 la plapart, Me greater pari 
 plus, morr; non plus, either; le plus, 
 
 (^ most; plus plus, <A« more. . . 
 
 the more; plus bant, louder; plus tdi, 
 
 sooner 
 plusieurs, several, many 
 point du tout, not at aU; ne. .point, not 
 la poire, the pear 
 le poisson, the fish 
 le poivre, the pepper 
 poli, polie, polite 
 la pomme, /A« <ipp^; dee pommes, 
 
 some apples, any apples 
 la porcelaine, (he porcelain 
 la porte, the door 
 porter, to carry, wear; se porter, (to 
 
 carry one*s sdf) to be; se porter bien, 
 
 tobeweXL 
 
— m — 
 
 la portiere, the (carriage-) door 
 
 positif, positive, positive 
 
 posseder, to possess 
 
 possible, possible 
 
 la poste, the post-office 
 
 pour, for, to, in order to 
 
 pour que, in order that, so that 
 
 pourquoi? why? 
 
 poursuivre, to pursue 
 
 pourtant, however, yet, nevertheless 
 
 pourvu, provided 
 
 la poussiere, the dust; il fait de la 
 
 poussiere, it is dusty 
 pouvoir, to he able 
 le pouvoir, the power 
 la prairie, the meadow 
 la preference, the preference 
 preferer, to prefer 
 le premier, la premiere, the first 
 prendre, to take, catch; s'y prendre, to 
 
 manage; prendre conge, to take 
 
 leave; prendre garde, to take care 
 a present, now 
 
 presque, almost; presque pas, scarcely 
 presse, pressee, in a hurry 
 presumer, to suppose 
 pret, prete, ready 
 prete, leiit 
 
 preter, to lend [make a trial 
 
 la preuve, the trial; faire preuve, to 
 prier, to beg 
 le printemps, the spring 
 pris, taken 
 le prix, the price 
 probablement, probably 
 la probite, honesty 
 prochain, prochaine, next 
 le prochain, the neighbor 
 le profit, the profit; mettre a profit, to 
 
 turn to accoxmt 
 profondement, soundly, deeply 
 leprogres, the progress- 
 es^ promenade, the walk, promerutde; 
 
 la promenade a cheval, the ride on 
 
 horseback; faire ime promenade, to 
 
 take a walk 
 
 se promener, to walk, take a walk; se 
 promener en voiture, to ride in a 
 carriage 
 
 (tu) promets, (thou) promisest 
 
 promettre, to promise 
 
 promis, promised 
 
 promptement, quickly 
 
 prononcer, to pronounce 
 
 la prononciation, the pronunciation 
 
 a propos, opportunely; fort a propos, 
 quite opportunely 
 
 proposer, to propose 
 
 propre, proper; clean, neat 
 
 proteger, to protect 
 
 prudent, prudente, prudent 
 
 la prune, the plum 
 
 puis-je ? may I ? 
 
 puisque, since, as 
 
 punir, to punish 
 
 Q. 
 
 la qualite, the quality {when ? 
 
 quand ? when ? depuis quand ? since 
 
 quarante, forty 
 
 le, la quarantieme, the fortieth 
 
 le quart, the quarter 
 
 quatorze, fourteen 
 
 le, la quatorzieme, the fourteenth 
 
 quatre, four 
 
 quatre-vingts, eighty 
 
 le, la quatre- vingtieme, the eightieth 
 
 quatre-vingt-dix, ninety [tieth 
 
 ^le, la quatre- vingt-dixieme, the nine- 
 
 quatre-vingt-un, eighty one 
 
 le, la quatrieme, the fourth 
 
 que ? what ? que ! how ! 
 
 que, that, than, as; whom, which, that 
 
 quel, quelle, quels, quelles, which, what; 
 quel que, quelle que, &c., whatever 
 
 quelconque, whatever 
 
 quelque, some, any; however, as, what- 
 ever; quelque chose, something 
 
 quelquefois, sometimes 
 
 quelqu'un, quelqu'une, quelques-uns, 
 quelques-unes, some one, some 
 
— 178 — 
 
 k qiMnHnii, tk$ ij^mMm; il est qoes- 
 
 tioD, the yiK rt i tf n i» 
 qui, tMo, irAicA, Ma<; iMo f qui que 
 
 ce Hoit, who&otr k^ way 6« 
 quiconque, tMoiMT, Miryted^ toAo 
 les quillni (f.), (Kb akmUt (kKkfimt) 
 le quintal, les q nin ta wx , </U Ai wdrw^ 
 
 i\\\\\\ud^fiflmi; qain&e joaxB, afoftirigki 
 
 Us la quinzitoe, the J^UmiK 
 
 I pi i iter, to leave 
 
 i|uui ? toAol f qnoi qua oe soit, whatever 
 
 quoiqae, although [tt m^y b$ 
 
 R. 
 
 raeonter, fo /*•//, rdaie 
 
 niifion, riijht; j'ai niition, / am right; 
 
 la raiaon, the reason 
 raisoxmable, reasonable 
 le lameao, les rameaax, the bnmeh 
 rare, rare 
 
 rarement, seldom, rarely 
 le xat, the rat 
 reoevoir, (o reoslne 
 r^cbapper, to escape 
 la r^oompenae, i!he reioorti 
 r^mpenser, (o reioorti 
 (je) reoonnais, ^/^ reoogniie 
 reconnftiwmit, reooninkMnto, gnd^ 
 xeoonDaltre, to recogmse, kmow agaka 
 reooavrer, to recover 
 16911, received 
 refuser, to refuse 
 
 regarder, to look at * 
 
 le regiment, the regimerU 
 la r^le, the rvk 
 regler, to rule 
 regretter, to regrd 
 la reine, the queen 
 se rejouir, to rejoice, to be rejoiced 
 relier, to birid 
 remarqaable, remarkable 
 le remede, the remedy; apporter re- 
 
 mede, to remedy 
 remercier, to thank 
 remettre, to rermi, put back, hand over 
 
 U* rempart, the rttmpart 
 remplir, to fill, to fulfil 
 rencontrer, to meet 
 88 rendormir, to fall asleep again 
 TetDdn^ to give back, to restore; to make; 
 88 randre, toyield, surrender; rendro 
 aenioa, to do (render) a service 
 rendu, paid (of a visU) 
 renfermer, to contain 
 reotrcr, to come in again; rentrer chas 
 8oi, toretumhome 
 rtDToyer, to put off 
 86 repentir, to repejU 
 r^pondre, to answer, reply 
 lar^ponaa, (Kiamamer 
 ler^poB, Ihepeacs, repoes 
 86 repoaer, to resit 
 le reproohe, the reproaek; fitiie des 
 
 reptowMBi (0 Tspmeu^ 
 IniipateJtum^ Ae reputation 
 lareate, the remainder 
 
 raster, to remain, stay; rerter mssia, 
 io remain eeaied; reeler ohes aoi, to 
 etayathoms 
 
 88 rdlablir, to get better 
 
 retmeg, keq^ remember 
 
 retenir, to keep, keep bade 
 
 da retour, ffhmdng, on ret u n d ng 
 
 retoumer, to return, go back 
 
 rteasir, to succeed 
 
 rdreiUer, to wake up 
 
 revenir, to return, come back 
 
 rerenu, returned 
 
 les reyenns (m.), the income 
 
 revoir, to see again 
 
 ricbe, rich 
 
 les richesses (f. ), riches 
 
 rien. . .ne, nothing; rien du tout, nO' 
 thing at all 
 
 iin rien, a trifle 
 
 rincer, to rinse 
 
 rire, to laugh 
 
 la robe, the goum, dress 
 
 Robert, BobeH 
 
 le roi, the king 
 
rrr. 11% = 
 
 la rose, the rose,' ruban rose, pink rib- 
 
 rotir, to broily roast [bon 
 
 rouge, red 
 
 le ruban, the ribbon,- ruban rose, pink 
 
 la rue, the street [iibbon 
 
 la ruse, the cunning, trick 
 
 la Eussie, Eussia 
 
 sage, wise, good (as to conduct) 
 
 la sagesse, (the) wisdom 
 
 la saison, the season 
 
 (il. Ton) salt, (he, one) knows 
 
 sale, dirty 
 
 salir, to soil, dirty 
 
 la salle, the room 
 
 le salon, the drawing-room 
 
 samedi (m.), Saturday 
 
 sans, without,' sans faute, without fail 
 
 la sante, the health 
 
 le sapin, the fir 
 
 s'appelle, is called 
 
 la satisfaction, the satisfaction 
 
 sauter, to jump [escape 
 
 sauver, to save,- se sauver, to make one's 
 
 savant, savante, learned 
 
 savoir, to know, know how, be able,- sa- 
 
 voir bon gre, to take kindly, thank 
 le savon, the soap 
 la science, (the) knowledge 
 se, himself, herself, itself, themselves, 
 
 one another, each other 
 sec, secbe, dry 
 
 le second, la seconde, the second 
 la seconde, the second (of a time) 
 secourir, to help 
 le sein, the bosom 
 seize, sixteen 
 
 le, la seizieme, the sixteenth 
 le sel, the salt 
 la semaine, the week 
 (il) semble, (it) seems 
 sense, sensee, sensible 
 sentir, to feel, smell; sentir bon, to 
 
 smell nice; sentir le brule, to smell 
 
 burnt; sentir mauvais, to smell bad 
 
 sept, seven; sept heures et demie, half 
 past seven 
 
 Septembre (m.), September 
 
 le, la septieme, the seventh 
 
 (il) serait a souhaiter, (it) would be 
 
 serieux, serieuse, serious {desirable 
 
 la servante, the maid-servant 
 
 le service, the service; rendre service, 
 to do a service 
 
 la serviette, the napkin 
 
 servir, to serve, wait on; servir a, to 
 serve for, to be of use to; servir de, 
 to serve for, or instead of; se servir 
 de, to make use of; a quoi sert cela ? 
 what is the use of that ? cela ne sert 
 de rien, that is quite useless; on a 
 servi, they have served up 
 
 seul, seule, only, alone 
 
 seulement, only 
 
 si, so; if, as, whether 
 
 si ne, if not 
 
 s'il vous plait, if you please 
 
 le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, 
 
 simple, simple [his, hers, its 
 
 (de) sitot, so soon, 
 
 six, six 
 
 le, la sixieme, the sixth 
 
 sobrement, soberly 
 
 la societe, the society, conipa7iy 
 
 la sceur, the sister 
 
 soi, one's self; cbez soi, at home 
 
 soi-meme, one's self 
 
 la sole, the silk [thirsty 
 
 la soif, the thirst; avoir soif, to be 
 
 le soir, the evening 
 
 la soiree, the evening; toute la soiree, 
 
 soixante, sixty [all the evening 
 
 soi Xante et dix, seventy 
 
 soixante et onze, seventy one 
 
 soixante-douze, seventy two 
 
 le, la soixantieme, the sixtieth 
 
 le, la soixante-dixieme, the seventieth 
 
 le soldat, the soldier 
 
 le soleil, the sun 
 
 le sommeil, (the) sleep; avoir som- 
 meil, to be sleepy 
 
— 180 
 
 ■on, M, ses, his, Mp, U$ 
 
 Bonger, to think 
 
 sonner, to strike, ring 
 
 sont, are; sont k, belong (o, areto 
 
 Sophie, Sophia 
 
 le sort, the lot 
 
 Borti, 8ortie, gone out 
 
 sortir, to go out 
 
 le Bot, la sotte, (A« /ool 
 
 le son, the sou, eeni 
 
 Booffiir, to sv^er 
 
 Boohaiter, to xti^ il sendt k aoohai- 
 
 ter, it ipould be desirable 
 lo Hoolier, the ehoe 
 la Bonpe, the 8<nq> 
 souper, to sup 
 m)iiH, under 
 
 Kontenir, to susMn^ qffirm 
 le Hontiou, the suffpori 
 se souvenir de, to remember 
 Kouvont, often 
 
 \i) spectacle, the theatre, the sight 
 lo sncc^ the success 
 lo Hucre, th^ su/jar 
 l\ Suisse*, Siritzrrland 
 la Boita, the mtite; Unai de snito^ i 
 
 diateig, at once 
 sui\Te, to foiUow 
 suj^erbe, spiendid 
 sur, on, tipon 
 sur. Hure, sure 
 sui. ment, certotnly 
 siirvivre a, to 8%avive 
 
 T. 
 
 la table, the tahie: h table, at table 
 
 le tableau, les tableaux, the picture 
 
 la tache, the task. 
 
 tailler, to nit, mend (of a pen) 
 
 le ti\illeur, the tailor 
 
 se taire, to he silent 
 
 tandis que, whilst 
 
 tant, so much, so mangy so 
 
 la tante, the aunt 
 
 tard, late 
 
 tarder, to loiter 
 
 latMM, theeup 
 
 te, thee, to thee; i*en, some to thee; te 
 
 le, i7 to thee; te les, them to thee 
 tel, telle, such^ mang a one 
 le temps, the t'utie, loeaiher; dans pea 
 
 de temps, in a short time; k temps, 
 tenes, here [in time 
 
 tenir, to hold, keep; tenir parole, (o 
 
 keep one*s utord 
 tenter, to tempt 
 la terre, the earth; les terree, the land; 
 
 4 terra, onthegrou^ 
 la idle, flto head; mal i la tdte, head- 
 Xeih^thetea [ache 
 
 UthUkn, the theatre 
 le thkne, the esteretse 
 le tien, la ticnne, lea tifltts, leatiennei^ 
 le tigre, the tiger [thine 
 
 le tiroir, the drawer 
 toi, ttou, thee; toi-mtae, thysetf 
 la toil^ the ttnen 
 
 la toUette, the toilet; fidxe aa toaett^ 
 le toit, the roof [to dress 
 
 tomber, to fall 
 ton, ta, tee, (Ay 
 tenner, to thunder 
 letomiflRe, thetkmder 
 toit, teron^; j*ai tort, lam wrong 
 t6t, soon; pins tot, sooner 
 toaoher, to touch 
 toajonrs, akcays 
 le tour, the turn; faire le tour, to walk 
 
 aroitnd 
 le tonrbillou, the whirl 
 tourmenter, to vex 
 tous les jours, every day 
 tout, everything, all; quite; le tout, the 
 
 whole 
 tout, toute, tons, toutes, all; tout a 
 
 ITieure, presently, just now; tout de 
 
 suite, immediately, at once; tout le 
 
 monde, everybody 
 traduire, to translate 
 traduit, traduite, translated 
 la tranche, the piece, slice 
 tranquiUe, ^uiet 
 
— 181 -- 
 
 tranquillement, quietly 
 
 le travail, les travaux, the work 
 
 travailler, to work 
 
 treize, thirteen 
 
 le, la treizieme, the thirteenth 
 
 trente, thirty 
 
 trente et un, thirty-one 
 
 trente-deux, thirty-two 
 
 le, la trentieme, the thirUetk 
 
 tres, very 
 
 triste, sad; avoir Tairtriste, tolooksad 
 
 trois, three 
 
 le, la troisieme, the third 
 
 tromper, to deceive; se tromper, to de- 
 ceive one's self, to be mistaken 
 
 trop, too much, too mxmy; trop peu, 
 too little 
 
 trotter, to trot 
 
 le troTipeau, les troupeaux, the flock 
 
 (il) trouve, (he) finds 
 
 trouve, found 
 
 trouver, to find, meet with, like; setrou- 
 ver bien, mal, to feel well, HI 
 
 tu, thou 
 tuer, to kiU 
 
 V. 
 
 un, line, a, an; one; encore un, une, 
 another 
 
 I'un, I'une, the one 
 
 I'un I'autre, les uns les autres, one an- 
 other, each other; I'un et I'autre, both 
 
 I'lisage (m.), the use 
 
 utile, usefid 
 
 (il) va, (it) will directly; va venir, is 
 going to come, is coming; va-t*-en, go 
 away (thou) 
 
 vaincre, to vanquish, defeat 
 
 le vaisseau, les vaisseaux, the ship 
 
 la valeur, the value 
 
 valoir, to be worth; valoir la peine, to 
 he worth while 
 
 le vase, the vessel, vase 
 (il) vaut mieux, (it) is better 
 (il) vend, (he) sells 
 vendre, to sell 
 vendredi (m.), ^Priday 
 vendu, sold 
 venez, come 
 venir, to come 
 
 le vent, the wind; il fait du vent, it is 
 windy; il fait beaucoup de vent, it 
 is very windy 
 venu, come 
 veritable, true 
 la verite, the truth 
 le verre, the glass 
 
 vers, towards, to 
 
 verser, to pour 
 
 vert, verte, green 
 
 la vertu, the virtue 
 
 vertueux, vertueuse, virtuous 
 
 veuillez, be so kind 
 
 (il) veut, (he) wishes 
 
 la veuve, the widow 
 
 (je) veux bien, (I) amperfectly willing, 
 most willingly, with pleasure 
 
 la viande, the meat; de la viande, 
 some, any meat; de mauvaise viande, 
 some bad meat 
 
 le vice, (the) vice 
 
 vide, empty 
 
 la vie, (the) life; en vie, living 
 
 Vienne, Vienna 
 
 vieux, vieil, vieille, oU 
 
 vif, vive, lively 
 
 le village, the village 
 
 la ville, the town 
 
 le vin, the wine 
 
 le vinaigre, the vinegar 
 
 vingt, twenty 
 
 vingt-deux, twenty-two 
 
 vingt et un, twenty-one 
 
 le, la vingt et unieme, the twenty-first 
 
 le, la vingtieme, the twentieth 
 
 le violon, the violin 
 
 la visite, the visit 
 
 vite, quickly i fast 
 
— 182 — 
 
 vivrc, to live; YiTre da, lo lire on; 
 
 avoir de quoi vivre, to hOoe meant 
 
 to live on 
 voici, here is, here are 
 voih\ there is, iktre are 
 voir, io see 
 
 le voisin, ) , ... , ^ , 
 
 lavoUine, r*'"'^'^'^'^- •*•/-» 
 hi voiture, the carria^j' 
 hi voix, the txfiee 
 v(^loulierH, wiUingly 
 votre,*voe, yofur 
 le, la T6tre, les ^dtres, yourg 
 (je) voiidraiH, (l) should triM, Wee; 
 
 je voudmiH bien, / ahoM Uhe very 
 
 much; on Yoadrait, one (they) woM 
 
 wish 
 vondric2-voDB? uxndd you have the 
 
 kindness f 
 voulea^voiiB ? do you wiahf 
 
 ▼ouloir, to xoisht he itiUing^ have a mind, 
 
 to grand 
 ▼oolo, wished 
 ▼eras, you, to ymi; voufl en, some to 
 
 you; vous le, i7 to you; vons lea, 
 
 themtoyou 
 ▼OQS-mdmee, youra4ce$ 
 le Toyage, the voyage 
 voyager, to travel 
 Yiai, vraie, real 
 vraiment, really 
 ▼u, seen 
 la vne, the eight; k vne d*oeil, visibly; 
 
 j'ai la Tue basse, / am short-sighted; 
 
 j'ai la Toe bofnne, / have good sight 
 
 y, there, thither, tcithin; to it, to them 
 lea Jens (m.), the eyes; j'ai mal aoz 
 y enz, / have sore eyes 
 
— 183 — 
 
 2. ENGLISH AND FRENCH VOCABULARY, 
 
 containing all English words occurring in this book, with their meanings, 
 btU only as iised in. the English Edcercises, 
 
 A. 
 
 a, an, nn, nne 
 
 to abandon, abandonner 
 
 able, habile; to be able, pouvoir, savoir 
 
 to accept, accepter 
 
 the accident, I'accident (m.) 
 
 to accompany, accompagner 
 
 on account of, a cause de 
 
 accustomed, accoutume; to be accus- 
 tomed, avoir coutume 
 
 the acquaintance, la connaissance 
 
 to acquire, acquerir 
 
 to act, agir 
 
 the action, Taction (f. ) 
 
 active, actif, active 
 
 addicted, adonne, adonnee 
 
 to address one's self, s'adresser 
 
 Adekt, Adele 
 
 the admission, I'entree (f.) 
 
 to admit, avouer 
 
 Adolphus, Adolphe 
 
 to advance, avancer 
 
 the advantage, I'avantage (m.) 
 
 the advice, le conseil 
 
 to advise, conseiller 
 
 afar, loin; from afar, de loin 
 
 the affair, I'affaire (f. ) 
 
 (the) affection, la passion 
 
 to affirm, soutenir 
 
 afraid, effraye, effrayee; to be afraid, 
 avoir peur, craindre 
 
 Africa, I'Afrique (f.) 
 
 after, apres, apres que 
 
 the afternoon, I'apres-midi (f. ) 
 
 again, encore; to see again, revoir 
 
 against, centre 
 
 the age, I'age (m. ) 
 
 aged, age, agee 
 
 ago, depuis, il y a; a month ago, il y a 
 
 agreeable, agreable [un mois 
 
 all, tout, toute, tous, toutes; tout 
 
 to allow, permettre 
 
 almost, presque 
 
 alone, seul, seule 
 
 Alphonso, Alphonse 
 
 already, deja 
 
 also, aussi 
 
 to alter, changer 
 
 although, quoique 
 
 always, toujours 
 
 America, I'Amerique (f.) 
 
 the American, I'Americain (m.) 
 
 amiable, aimable 
 
 among, entre 
 
 and, et 
 
 (the) anger, la colere [facher 
 
 angry, fache, fachee; to get angry, se 
 
 the animal, Tammal, les animaux(m.) 
 
 (the) annoyance, le chagrin 
 
 another, encore un, une 
 
 the answer, la reponse 
 
 to answer, repondre 
 
 Anthony, Antoine 
 
 anxious, inquiet, inqi^te 
 
 any, en, quelque 
 
 apart, a part 
 
 (the) apoplexy, I'apoplexie (t. ) 
 
 to appear, paraitre 
 
 the appetite, I'appetit (m.) 
 
 the apple, la pomme; some apples, aivy 
 
 apples, des pommes 
 to approach, approcher 
 
— 184 
 
 AprU, Avril (m.) 
 
 the arbor, Id beroeaa 
 
 are, sont; tare going, allei 
 
 the arm, \e bras 
 
 tfie arm-chair, le faateoil 
 
 Vie army, rarmee (f. ) 
 
 to arrange, arranger 
 
 the arrival, Tarrivee (f.) 
 
 to arrive, arrivor 
 
 arrived, arrive, arivwj 
 
 as, que, car; si, aossi; ptUflqao;quel- 
 que; as far as, joaqae; as mmiy, 
 as much, tant, autant; as sipon as, 
 AVumtJbi qae, des que; as weU as, 
 aofsi bien que 
 
 Asia, FAsie (f.) 
 
 aside, k part [demander 
 
 to ask, prier, demander; to ask for, 
 
 asleep, endormi; to fall asleep, B'en- 
 dormir; to fall asleep again; ae xen- 
 dormir 
 
 Ike assorimad, TasBoitiment (m.) 
 
 at, k\ at the Urns uhsn, loraque; at the 
 house of, ohec; at the baker*s, ohes 
 le boulanger; at mjf father's, chas 
 mon p^; at home, ohes aoi; to or 
 at my house, cbes moi 
 
 to attack, attaqner 
 
 attentive, attentif, attentiTe 
 
 August (month), Ao^ (m.) 
 
 Augustus, Augnste 
 
 the aunt, la tante 
 
 Australia, TAiistralie (f.) 
 
 avaricious, avaie 
 
 to avoid, ^viter 
 
 atoare, instruit, instniite; to be aware, 
 apercevoir, s'apercevoir 
 
 B. 
 
 the back, le fond 
 backwards, en arriere 
 bad, manyais, mauTaise 
 badly, mal 
 to bake, cuire 
 
 the baker, le boulanger; at the baker's, 
 chez le boulanger 
 
 the banker, le baaqider 
 
 to bargain, marchander 
 
 to bark, aboyer 
 
 the basket, la corbeiUe 
 
 to bathe, se baigner 
 
 to be, etre; to be able, pouvoir, sit voir; 
 to be accustomed, avoir coutume ; to 
 be qfraidi, avoir pear, craindre; to 
 be amused, a'anmser; to be ashamed, 
 avoir honte; to be aware, s'aperce- 
 voir; to be bom, naltre; to be valltd, 
 8*appeler; to be contented, se con- 
 tfloter de; to be dying, se moorir, 
 etre k reztr&nit^; to be hungry, 
 avoir laim; to be mistaken, se trom- 
 per; to be named, s*appeler; to be 
 necessary, (alloir; to 6e tn need, 
 avoir beeoiu ; to 6e qf oplnton, croire ; 
 to be patient, avoir patienoe ; to &c to 
 be pitied, dtre k plaindre; to be re- 
 joiced, te r^ooir; to be right, avoir 
 raison; to be seated, etxe assis; to be 
 sUent, se taire; to be rietpy, avoir 
 sommeil; to be thirsty, avoir soif; 
 to be qf use to, senrir k; tobe well, 
 se porter bien; to be willing, vouloir; 
 to be worth, valoir; tobe wrong, avoir 
 tort 
 
 toheat, battle^ frapper 
 
 beautiful, bean, bel, belle 
 
 because, paroeqne 
 
 to become, devenir: she becomes, elle 
 devient; it becomes, il oonvient 
 
 thebed,\em 
 
 the beech, le hetre 
 
 been,M 
 
 the beer, la bi^ 
 
 brfore, avant, devant; from b^ore, de 
 devant; before going, avant d'aller; 
 b^ore one*s self, devant soi 
 
 to beg, prior, demander; / beg your 
 pardon, je vous demande pardon 
 
 to begin, commencer 
 
 tob^ve, agir 
 
 behind, derrito 
 
 to bdieve, croire; (I) believe, (je) crois 
 
— 185 
 
 hdong, sont a; belongs tOy est a; to he- 
 long, appartenir 
 
 the bench, le banc 
 
 the benefactor, le bienfaiteur 
 
 the benefit, le bien 
 
 beside, a cote de 
 
 the best, le meilleur, la meilleure; le 
 mieux; the best man iniown, le meil- 
 leur homme de la ville 
 
 better, meilleur, meilleure; mieux, ; it 
 is better, il vaut mieux; to get better, 
 se retablir 
 
 between, entre 
 
 (the) billiards, le billard 
 
 to bind. Teller 
 
 the bird, Toiseau, les oiseaux (m.) 
 
 the birthday, la fete 
 
 to bite, mordre 
 
 black, noir, noire 
 
 to blame, blamer 
 
 the body, le corps 
 
 to boil, bouillir 
 
 fjie bonnet, le cbapeau, les chapeaux 
 
 ihe book, le livre 
 
 the bookseller, le libraire 
 
 the boot, la botte 
 
 bom, ne; to be born, naitre; I (have 
 been) was born, je suis ne 
 
 the bosom, le sein 
 
 both, I'un et I'autre 
 
 tJie bottle, la bouteille 
 
 bought, achete 
 
 ihe box, la boite, le coflfre, la malle 
 
 the boy, le gar9on 
 
 the branch, le rameau, les rameaux 
 
 the bread,le pain; some bread, any bread, 
 du pain ; some, any good bread, de bon 
 
 to break, casser [pain 
 
 to breakfast, dejeiiner 
 
 the breath, rhaleine (f. ) ; out of breath, 
 a perte d'haleine 
 
 to bring, mener, apporter 
 
 to bring up, elever 
 
 to broil, rotir 
 
 the brother, le frere; to my brother s, 
 ohez mou frere 
 
 the brother-in-laWi le beau-frere 
 
 Brussels, Bruxelles 
 
 to build, batir; to get built, fairebatir^ 
 
 to burst, crever 
 
 the business, le commerce, Taffaire. (f. ) 
 
 busy, occupe, occupee 
 
 but, mais ; ne . . que 
 
 the butter, le beurre 
 
 to buy, acheter 
 
 by, en; par; de 
 
 c. 
 
 the cake, le gateau, les gateaux 
 
 to call, appeler; is called, s'appelle 
 
 the candle, la chandelle 
 
 tfie cane, la canne 
 
 the card, la carte [garde 
 
 the care, la garde; to take care, prendre 
 
 ihe carriage, la yoiture; to get into ihe 
 
 carriage, monter en voiture 
 the carriage-door, la portiere 
 to carry, porter; (to carry one's self) 
 
 to be, se porter 
 the case, le cas 
 
 the castle, le chateau, les chateaux 
 the cat, le chat 
 to catch, prendre 
 Gatherine, Catherine 
 to cause, faire, causer 
 to cede, ceder 
 to celebrate, celebrer 
 the cellar, la cave 
 the cent, le sou 
 certain, certain, certaine 
 certainly, surement, sans doute, as. 
 
 surement 
 the chair, la chaise 
 to change, changer 
 to chastise, chatier 
 the chastisement, le chatiment 
 to chatter, babiller 
 (the) cheerfulness, la gaite 
 ihe cheese, le fromage 
 ihe cherry, la cerise 
 ihe child, I'enfant (m. & f.) ; some child' 
 
 ren, any children, des enfants 
 
— 186 — 
 
 (he chocolate, le chooolat 
 
 to choose, cboisir 
 
 Christian, Chretien 
 
 the church, 1 eglise (f. ) 
 
 the circuinstarice, la circoustanoe 
 
 the City-llali, I'botel de ville (m.) 
 
 clean, propre 
 
 io clean, nettoyer 
 
 io climb up, grimper snr 
 
 to close, fermer 
 
 tlie doth, le drap; some good eloih, de 
 
 bon drop; some blue doth, da drop 
 
 bleu 
 the clnthing, lee babillementB (m.) 
 the cloud, le nnage 
 cloudy t nnagenx, noageota; to gel 
 
 eUmdy, se couTrir 
 the coachman t le ooober 
 coarse, gros, groaee 
 the coat, lliftbit (m.) 
 the coffee, le caf^ 
 cold, fruid, froide; U is cold, il fidt 
 
 froid 
 the college, le collie 
 tlie color, la couleur 
 the comhai, le combat 
 to come, Tenir; to come batk, rerenir; 
 
 to come in, entrer; to come in o^crfn, 
 
 xentrer; is coming, va venir 
 come, yenn; venes 
 io come down, desoendre 
 the comet, la comdte 
 conrforlable, commode 
 to commit, commcttre 
 to communicaie, commoniquer 
 the company, la compAgnie, la sod^ 
 io compUUn, se plaindre 
 the complamt, le mal 
 complete, complet, compl^ 
 to compHete, achever 
 the compliment, le compliment 
 io comprehend, comprendrv 
 to conceive, concevoir 
 the concert, le concert 
 the condUion, la condition 
 the conduct, la conduite 
 
 (thej consideraikm, regard (m.); io 
 have coneideraiion, avoir dee ^gaxda 
 
 ioconsuU, oonaolter 
 
 io contain, renfermer 
 
 contented, oonteut, contente; to be covi- 
 tented with, se oontenter de 
 
 to continue, oontinner 
 
 the contrary, le oontroire 
 
 to converee, s'entretenir 
 
 convinced, persnad^ penoad^ 
 
 to ooofc, coire; &ire cuire, £Edre la oni- 
 
 (the) copper, le cnivre [sine 
 
 to copy, copier 
 
 the copy-book, le oahier 
 
 the cork, le boncbon 
 
 ihecom, le grain 
 
 to correct, oorriger 
 
 comipted, oorrompo, oorrompna 
 
 to coei, ooAtar 
 
 the oowUry, le paja, la oampagne 
 
 the oountry-eeat, le chfttean, les cb&- 
 
 the coiuple, la conple [teanx 
 
 (the) courage, le oonrege 
 
 the couein (m. df.), le cousin, la con- 
 to cover, couTrir [sine . 
 
 the cravat, la crovate 
 
 created, orw, crooo 
 
 the credU, le credit 
 
 the creditor, le cr^ancier 
 
 credulous, or^dnle 
 
 cried, plenr6 
 
 crippled, estropi^ estropi^ 
 
 a crown (coin), nn ^cn 
 
 crud, cruel, cmelle 
 
 the crutch, la braille 
 
 to cry, pleurer 
 
 (the) cunning, la ruse 
 
 the cup, la taese 
 
 to cure, guerir 
 
 the custom, Tbabitude (f.), la cou- 
 tnme; to be accustomed, avoir cou- 
 
 to cut, tailler [tume 
 
 D. 
 
 (the) damage, les degats (m. ) 
 todance, danser 
 
— 187 — 
 
 the danger, le danger 
 
 dangerously, dangereusement 
 
 to dare, oser 
 
 the daughter, la fille 
 
 a day, daily, par jour 
 
 the day, le jour, la joumee; the day 
 after to-morrow, apres-demain; the 
 day before yesterday, avant-hier 
 
 (the) death, la mort 
 
 the decanter, la carafe 
 
 deceased, feu 
 
 to deceive, decevoir, en imposer, trom- 
 per; to deceive one's self, se tromper 
 
 December, Decembre (m.) 
 
 the deed. Taction (f.) 
 
 deeply, profondement 
 
 to defeat, vaincre 
 
 the defect, le defaut 
 
 to defend, defendre 
 
 delicious, delicieux, delicieuse 
 
 delighted, charme, charmee 
 
 to demand, demander, prier 
 
 to depart, partir 
 
 departed, parti 
 
 to depend, dependre 
 
 to descend, descendre 
 
 to deserve, meriter 
 
 to desire, desirer 
 
 the desire, I'envie (f. ) 
 
 (the) despair, le desespoir 
 
 to despise, mepriser 
 
 to detain, detenir 
 
 to dictate, dieter 
 
 the dictionary, le dictionnaire 
 
 to die, mourir 
 
 the difference, la difference 
 
 different, autre 
 
 differently, autrement 
 
 difficult, difficile 
 
 diligent, applique, appliquee 
 
 to dine, diner 
 
 (the) dinner, le diner 
 
 directly, immediatement; it will direct- 
 dirty, sale \ly, il va 
 
 to dirty, salir 
 
 to displease, deplaire 
 
 the disposition, la disposition 
 
 to distinguish, distinguer 
 
 distressed, desole, desolee 
 
 the ditch, le fosse 
 
 to divide, partager 
 
 to do, faive; to do (one's duty ),remplir; 
 
 do, faites; to do good, faire du bien; 
 
 to do nothing but, ne faire que ; to do 
 
 one's utmost, faire tons ses efforts; 
 
 to do a service, rendre service; do 
 
 you wish ? voulez-vous ? 
 the dog, le chien 
 the dollar, I'ecu (m.), le dollar 
 the door, la porte 
 to doubt, douter; to doubt very mv^h, 
 
 douter fort 
 doubtful, douteux, douteuse 
 the dozen, la douzaine 
 to draw, dessiner 
 the drawer, le tiroir 
 the drawing, le dessin 
 the drawing-master, le maitre de dessin 
 the drawing-room, le salon 
 the dress, la robe, rhabit (m.) 
 to dress, faire sa toilette 
 to dress one's self, s'habiller 
 to drink, boire 
 to drive on, fouetter 
 the drop, la goutte 
 the drug-store, la pharmacie 
 drunk, bu 
 dry, sec, seche 
 to dry up, essuyer 
 during, pendant 
 the dust, la poussiere; it is dusty, il 
 
 fait de la poussiere 
 the duty, le devoir 
 to dwell, demeurer 
 
 the dwelling, le logis [mite 
 
 to he dying, se mourir, etre a I'extre- 
 
 E. 
 
 each, chaque; each year, chaque an- 
 
 nee 
 each one, chacun, chacune; each other ^ 
 
 I'lm I'autre, les uns les autres 
 
-- 1S8 — 
 
 mrty, de bonne henrt 
 
 the earth, la iene 
 
 the ease, la faoilitd 
 
 e(»i/y, aiatoant 
 
 tasyt facile 
 
 to eo/, manger 
 
 eiiUix^ mange 
 
 to educcU€t clever 
 
 educated, eleve 
 
 to ^oee, e£hoer 
 
 eight, hnit 
 
 (ifjhtren, dix-huit 
 
 ilkt eUjhteeiitK le. In (lix-hiutKiiio 
 
 (he eighth, 1<^« la huitit'mc 
 
 the eightietfiy le, la qaatxe-Tingtitoie 
 
 eighty, (|iuitre-Tingt« 
 
 eu;Aty-orit^ quatre-vingi-un 
 
 et(A«r, non plus; either. . .or, ou. . .ou 
 
 eldest, aind, ainee 
 
 eieven, onze 
 
 <Ae eleveniK l^ 1a onzi^e 
 
 ^tsa, Elise 
 
 the eU, I'ftune (f.) 
 
 Emily. Emilio 
 
 to employ, employer 
 
 eiixpty, vide 
 
 to enooiwrage, encoorager 
 
 the end, le boat 
 
 to end, aohever 
 
 England, TAngleterre (!) 
 
 Ikglish, Tanglais (m.) 
 
 the engravituj, Testampe (f. ) 
 
 to enjoy one's self, se plairo 
 
 enovgh, assez 
 
 the en/ra?ice, I'entree (t) 
 
 to emy, envier 
 
 Ernest, Ernest 
 
 the errand, la commission, 
 
 to escape^ recbapper 
 
 the estate, le bien 
 
 Europe, I'Europe (f.) 
 
 even, meme 
 
 the evening, le soir, la soir^; aU the 
 
 evening, tonte la soir^ 
 ever, jamais 
 
 etvry, cbaqae, tout, tonte; everybody f 
 tont le monde; everybody toko, qni- 
 conqne; every dcty, tons lee jours; 
 every morning, tons les matins; every 
 one, chacnn, chacune; everything, 
 tout 
 
 everyxohere, portout 
 
 the evil, le mal, lee manz 
 
 exactly, jnstement, pr^isdment 
 
 to eB ug gerate, ezag^r 
 
 th$ MBompft, Tezemple (m.) 
 
 exceBenl. *" t. excellente 
 
 the excel - ptioii (f.) 
 
 the BBchange, la boarse 
 
 the eoBmreite, le ihkmt 
 
 to explain, ezpliqner 
 
 to expoae one*s self, s*expoHer 
 
 the eye, roeil, les yenz (m. > 
 Mff eyet, J*ai mal anx yeu:^ 
 
 P. 
 
 the face, la iQgiixe 
 
 tAe/oii, lkttnib;wUhouifail, sans faute 
 
 /otfVW. fldila 
 
 femfnOy, fidMement 
 
 (o/alZ, tomber; (oybSoflef), s'endor- 
 
 mir; to fail asleep Qqojifi^, se rendor- 
 
 mir 
 faUe, fiun, firasse 
 thefamOy, la.iamille 
 far, loin; as far a.<r, jtwque 
 the fashion, la mode; /rM^iona&2e, in 
 
 /A« fashimi, a la mode 
 /(M<, vite 
 (A« father, le p^; <rf my father's, cbez 
 
 mon pere 
 (/)« /au//, la faute, le defaut 
 the fear, la peur 
 to fear, craindre, avoir peur 
 the feast, la fete 
 February, Fevrier (m.) 
 to feel, sentir; to fed voeU, tU, se trou- 
 
 ver bien, mal 
 the fellow, le gar^on 
 fevD, pen; fewer, moins 
 fierce, cruel, cruelle 
 
189 — 
 
 fifteen, quinze 
 
 the fifteenth, le, la quinzieme 
 
 the fifth, le, la cinquieme 
 
 the fiftieth, le, la cinquantieme 
 
 fifty, cinquante 
 
 the fight, le combat 
 
 the figure, la figure 
 
 to fill, remplir 
 
 to find, trouver 
 
 (he) finds, (il) trouve 
 
 fine, beau, bel, belle; fin, fine 
 
 the finger, le doigt 
 
 to finish, finir, achever 
 
 finished, fini 
 
 the fir, le sapin 
 
 the fire, le feu, les feux 
 
 the first, le premier, la premiere 
 
 the fish, le poisson 
 
 five, cinq 
 
 the flatterer, le flatteur 
 
 to flee, fuir 
 
 the flight, la fuite 
 
 the flock, le troupeau, les troupeaux 
 
 the flood, I'ondee (f. ) 
 
 the flour, la farine 
 
 the flower, la fleur; some or any heauti- 
 ful flowers, de belles fleurs 
 
 (the) fluency, la facilite 
 
 the flute, la flute 
 
 the fog, le brouillard; it is foggy, il 
 fait du brouillard; it is very foggy, 
 il fait un brouillard tres-epais 
 
 to folloic, suivre 
 
 the fool, le sot, la sotte 
 
 for, car; pour, pendant 
 
 (the) forbearance, Tindulgence (f.) 
 
 to forbid, defendre 
 
 the forest, la foret 
 
 to forget, oublier 
 
 to forgive, pardonner 
 
 the fork, la fourchette 
 
 to form, former; se former 
 
 the former, celui-la 
 
 formerly, autrefois 
 
 the fortieth, le, la quarantieme 
 
 a fortnight, quinze jours 
 
 fortunate, henreux, heureuse 
 the fortune, le bien 
 forty, quarante 
 found, trouve 
 fcmr, quatre 
 fourteen, quatorze 
 the fourteenth, le, la quatorzieme 
 the fourth, le, la quatrieme 
 a franc, un franc (twenty cents) 
 France, la France 
 Francis, Fran9ois 
 Frederic, Frederic 
 to freeze, geler 
 
 French, le fran9ais; fran9ais, fran9aise 
 fresh, frais, fraiche 
 Friday, vendredi (m.) 
 the friend (m. &f.), Tami, Tamie 
 the friendship, I'amitie (f.) 
 to frighten, efirayer 
 from, de, depuis 
 the front, le devant 
 the fruit, le fruit; some good fruit, de 
 bons fruits ; some ripe fruit, des fruits 
 to fulfll, remplir [murs 
 
 to furnish, foumir 
 furnished, garni, garnie 
 the furniture, les meubles (m. ) 
 the future, I'avenir (m.) 
 
 G. 
 
 to gain, gagner 
 
 to gallop, galoper 
 
 the game, le jeu, les jeux 
 
 the garden, le jardin 
 
 the gardener (m. & f), le jardinier, 
 
 la jardiniere 
 the garment, I'habit (m. ) 
 to gather, cueillir 
 the gazette, la gazette 
 the general, le general, les generaux 
 generally, ordinairement 
 gentle, doux, douce 
 this gentleman, ce monsieur 
 the gentleness, la douceur 
 gently, doucement 
 George, Georges 
 
— 100 
 
 Chrman, ftllemand, 
 
 to geiy obteiiir; to gd angry ^ se dehor; 
 to get better^ se retablir; to get buUt^ 
 (aire batir; to get into the carriage, 
 monter en voiture; to get clomly, se 
 couvrir; to get cooked, faire cuire; 
 to get under sh flier, se mettre k cou- 
 Yert; to get up, se lever 
 
 giddy, ^nnli, etourdio 
 
 the girl, la fiUo 
 
 to give, donner, ctiler, cauner; gii'f (to 
 me), douue3>moi; to give Ixick, 
 rendre; to give one's atif up tn, w> 
 lirreik 
 
 given, doiin^ 
 
 glad, aise ; / am very glad, je sols bieu 
 
 the glass, le verre [aiae 
 
 ^ glory, la gloire 
 
 the glove, le gant 
 
 go, allez; to go, aller; go auooy (thou), 
 va-t*-en; go away (you), aUes-TouA- 
 ea; to go atcay, s'en aller, partir; 
 to go back, retoumcr; to go to bed, 
 se concher; to go down, deaoendre; 
 to go to meet some one, aller an-de- 
 Tant de quelqa'nn; to go out, sortir; 
 btfore going, avant d'aller; is going 
 to come, Ta Tenir 
 
 Cfod, Diea 
 
 Godfrey, Oodefroi, Geoffiroi 
 
 gone, all4 allee; gone away, parti, par- 
 tie; gone out, sorti, sortie 
 
 good, bon« bonne; sage; the goodrVciU, 
 les bont^ (f.); the good, that which 
 is right, le bien; good-bye, adieu 
 
 the goodness, la bont^ 
 
 the gown, la robe 
 
 the grandmother, la grand'm^ 
 
 to grant, vonloir 
 
 gral^uL, reconnaissant, reoonnaissante 
 
 great, grand, grande; a great deal of 
 good, beaucoup de bien 
 
 Cfreek, le grec 
 
 green, vert, verte 
 
 (the) grief, le chagrin 
 
 to grieve, s^affiigcr, sattrister, affliger 
 
 on the ground, k terre 
 
 to grow, croitre; to grow tall, grandir 
 
 to guess, deviner 
 
 to guide, mencr 
 
 the guitar, la guitare 
 
 H. 
 
 had, CXI 
 
 to hail, pn'ltT 
 
 a (simjlf) hair, on oheren; the hair, 
 
 1«'H chevtux 
 half, di'ini, deniie; half a dozen, une 
 
 d**mi - (lou/jiine; half past twelve, 
 
 in'uVi ft (Icmi 
 /' half, hi moitie; half the town, la 
 
 moitie de la Tille 
 the ham^ le jambon 
 thehimd, la main 
 to hand over, remeitre 
 the (hand)wrUitig, Vieriture (f.) 
 to happen^ arriver; something fuis hap-' 
 
 pened, il est arriT^ quelque ohoee 
 (the) h(q)pme8s, le bonhenr 
 happy, heoreox, hooreofle 
 hard, dor, dure 
 hardly, ne . . gu^ 
 (the) harm, le mal 
 the harp, la harpe 
 has, a 
 
 hast, BB [d^peohey 
 
 (the) hasie, la h&te; to make haste, se 
 the hat, le chapean, lee chapeaux, le 
 to hate, hair [bonnet 
 
 haughty, arrogant, arrogante 
 (J) have, j'ai; toe have, nous ayons; 
 
 you have, vons avez 
 to have, avoir; to have consideration, 
 
 avoir dee egards; to have means to 
 
 live on, avoir de quoi vivre; to havi 
 
 a mind, vonloir, avoir envie 
 he, il, lui; he finds, il trouve; he likes, 
 
 loves, il aime; he makes, il fait; he 
 
 sells, il vend 
 the head, la tete 
 the headache, mal a la tete 
 the health, la sante 
 
191 
 
 to hear, apprendre, entendre 
 
 heard, entendu 
 
 the heart, le cceur; with all my heart, 
 
 de tout mon cceur 
 Heaven, le ciel, les cieux 
 heavy, lourd, lourde; epais, epaisse 
 to help, secourir, aider 
 Henry, Henri 
 her, son, sa, ses 
 
 her, la, elle; to her, lui; of her, en 
 /lere, ici^ tenez; here is, here are, voici 
 the hero, le heros 
 
 hers, le sien, la sienne, les siens, les 
 herself, se ; elle-meme [siennes 
 
 high, haut, haute 
 
 him, le, lui; to him, lui; of him, en 
 himself, se, lui-meme 
 to hinder, empecher 
 his, son, sa; ses; le sien, la sienne, 
 
 les siens, les siennes 
 hoarse, enroue, enrouee 
 to hold, tenir 
 at home, chezsoi, alamaison, aulogis; 
 
 to return home, rentier chez soi, to 
 
 stay at home, rester chez soi 
 honest, honnete 
 the honor, I'honneur (m.) 
 to honor, honorer 
 to hope, esperer 
 
 the horse, le cheval, les chevaux 
 the horseman, le cavalier 
 the hour, I'heure (f.); at this hour, a 
 
 I'heure qu'il est 
 the house, la maison, le logis 
 how ? comment ? how many ? com- 
 
 bien? how much? combien? how 
 
 long ? depuis quand? 
 however, pourtant; quelque. .que 
 a hundred, cent 
 a hundred and one, cent un 
 the hundredweight, le quintal, les 
 
 quintaux 
 the hundredth, le, la centieme 
 (the) hunger, la faim; to he hungry ^ 
 
 avoir faim 
 to hurry, se hater 
 
 in a hurry, presse, pressee 
 
 to hurt, blesser 
 
 hurtful, nuisible 
 
 the hyena, I'hyene (f.) 
 
 I. 
 
 I, je, moi, I am right, j'ai raison; I 
 am icrong, j'ai tort; I like, love, 
 j'aime; I speak, je parle; I think of 
 you, je pense a vous 
 
 the idea, I'idee (f.) [sive 
 
 idle, paresseux, paresseuse; oisif, oi- 
 
 (the) idleness, I'oisivete (f.) 
 
 if, si; if not, si. . . .ne; if you please^ 
 s'il vous plait 
 
 ignorant, ignorant, ignorante 
 
 ill, malade; ill weed, mauvaise herbe 
 
 the illness, la maladie 
 
 to imagine, s'imaginer 
 
 immediately, aussitot, tout de suite 
 
 immortal, immortel, immortelle 
 
 (the) impertinence, I'im pertinence (f.) 
 
 important, important, importante 
 
 impossible, impossible 
 
 the impression, I'impression (f. ) 
 
 to improve, former 
 
 in, dans, a, en; in a short time, dans 
 peu de temps 
 
 incessantly, sans cesse 
 
 the income, les revenus (m.) 
 
 inconsolable, inconsolable 
 
 incredible, incroyable 
 
 indisposed, indispose, indisposee 
 
 industrious, laborieux, laborieuse 
 
 (the) ingratitude, I'ingratitude (f.) 
 
 to inhabit, habiter [de I'encre 
 
 the ink, I'encre (f») ; some ink, any ink, 
 
 the inkstand, I'encrier (m*) 
 
 the inn, le cabaret 
 
 (the) innocence, I'innocence (f.) 
 
 insincere, faux, fausse 
 
 the instance, I'exemple (m.); for in- 
 stance, par exemple 
 
 instead of, au lieu de 
 
 intelligence, de I'esprit 
 
 intelligent, intelligent, intelligente 
 
— 192 — 
 
 fhehOmdhn, Hntention (f.) 
 A« kiitrcourat, le oommerce 
 to Merest, in td r e t wn r 
 
 interesting, int^refMint, int^reesanto 
 
 to invite, inviter; to invite to dinner, 
 inviter k diner 
 
 (the) iron, le fer 
 
 is, est; is called, s'nppelle 
 
 it, il, eUe; le, Ui; to it, Ini; y; of U, 
 en; it to fiim, le Ini; it to me, me le; 
 it to thee, te le; it to them, tc lenr; it 
 k> us, nous le; it to you, vom* le; i7 
 if, c*6st, oela est, il est, U Cut; it is 
 better, il vaut mieux 
 
 its, son, sa, ses; le aien, la sienne, lea 
 
 itseif, 86, Boi [siena, lea sfaimeB 
 
 J. 
 
 James, Jaoqnes 
 
 Jane, Jeannette 
 
 January, Janvier (m.) 
 
 Jeffrey, Geoffroi 
 
 Jb/in, Jean 
 
 the joiner, le menoiaier 
 
 to joke, badiner 
 
 the journey, le voyage 
 
 Jkdius, JnlcH 
 
 Jtily, JuiUet (m.) 
 
 to jump, santer 
 
 June, Juin (m.) 
 
 just, juste 
 
 just now, k present 
 
 K, 
 
 to keep, garder, tenir, retenir; keep, 
 retenez; to keep bock, retenir; to 
 keep one's tcord, tenir parole 
 
 to kill, tner 
 
 he so kind, venillez 
 
 kindly, avec bonte; to take it kindly, 
 awoir bon gr^ 
 
 the kindnessy la bonte, les bontfe; haiye 
 the kindness, ayez la bonte, veuillez; 
 uxndd you have the kindness ? vou- 
 
 the king, le roi [driez-vons ? 
 
 the kitchen, la cuisine 
 
 the knife, le couteau, les couteauk 
 to know, connaltre; to know hoie, sa- 
 
 voir; to know again, reconnaitre 
 the knowledge, la connaissance, la 
 known, connu [acienco 
 
 (he, one) knows, (il. Ton) salt 
 
 L. 
 
 the lady, la dame, the young lady, la 
 
 laid, plac^ mis [demoiselle 
 
 the land, la tcrro; lea terrea 
 
 the landlord, lli5te 
 
 the landscape, le paysage 
 
 the language, la langue 
 
 large^ groa, groaae; grand, grande 
 
 the kut, le dernier, la demito 
 
 last, paaad, paaade; at last, euiin 
 
 laie (deceased), feu 
 
 late,tud 
 
 £a<a^ le latin 
 
 the latter, celoi-ci 
 
 to laugh, rin; 
 
 the law, la loi 
 
 to lay, placer 
 
 (the) lead, le plomb 
 
 to lead, mener 
 
 thelettf,]h feuille 
 
 (the) leap-yepr, Tann^ bissextile 
 
 to Uam, apprendre [Ktruite 
 
 (earned^ savant, savante; instruit, in* 
 
 learning, des comuuBaancea (f.) 
 
 learnt, appria 
 
 the least, le moins 
 
 the leave, la permission, le conge; to 
 
 take leave, prendre cong^ 
 to leave, laisser; quitter 
 (to the) left, a gauche 
 (the) leisure, le loisir 
 the lemon, le citron 
 to lend, preter 
 erf length, au long 
 
 lent, prete [moiui? 
 
 less, moins; the less, .the less, moins. . 
 the lesson, la le9on 
 
 to lei, laisser; louer; to let see, feire 
 the letter, la lettre [voir 
 
— 193 — 
 
 the liar J le menteur 
 
 liberal, bienfaisant, bienfaisante 
 
 the library^ la bibliotheque 
 
 the lie, le mensonge 
 
 to lie, mentir 
 
 the life, la vie 
 
 to lift, lever 
 
 lifted, leve 
 
 light, leger, legere 
 
 the light, la lumiere 
 
 to light, allumer 
 
 to lighten, faire des eclairs 
 
 the lightning, I'eclair (m.) 
 
 to like, aimer; trouver; Hike, j'aime, 
 
 je voudrais; he likes, il aime; to like 
 
 better, aimer mieux; I should like 
 
 very much, je voudrais bien; I like 
 
 being here, je me plais ici 
 the line, la ligne 
 the linen, la toile, le linge 
 the lion, le lion 
 to listen, listen to, ecouter 
 little, pen; too little, trop peu 
 to live, demeurer, vivre; to live on, vivre 
 
 de; to have means to live on, avoir 
 
 de quoi vivre 
 lively, vif, vive; gai, gaie 
 living, en vie 
 to loiter, tarder 
 London, Londres 
 
 long, long, longue; grand, grande; 
 long, a long time, longtemps 
 to look for, chercber; to look at, re- 
 
 garder; to look sad, avoir I'air triste 
 to lose, perdre 
 lost, perdu 
 the lot, le sort 
 louder, plus haut 
 Louis, Louis 
 Louisa, Louise 
 (the) love, la passion 
 to love, aimer; Hove, j'aime ;/ie loves, 
 
 11 aime 
 low, bas, basse 
 
 M. 
 
 made, fait 
 
 magnificent, magnifiqne 
 
 the maid-servant, la servante 
 
 to make, faire, rendre; make, faites; 
 
 they make, font; he makes, il fait; 
 
 to make one's escape, se sauver; to 
 
 make haste, se hater, se depecher; 
 
 to make room, faire place, to make 
 
 a trial, faire preuve; to make use, 
 
 se servir 
 the man, I'bomme (m.) 
 to manage, s'y prendre 
 the manner, la maniere 
 the manufactory, la fabriqne 
 many, beaucoup, plusieurs; too many, 
 
 trop; many people, beaucoup de 
 the map, la carte [monde 
 
 the marble, le marbre 
 March, Mars (m.) 
 to march, marcher 
 the market, le marche 
 Martin, Martin 
 Mary, Marie 
 the master, le maitro 
 Matilda, Mathilde 
 no matter, n'importe 
 Matthew, Matthieu 
 May, Mai (m.) 
 it may be, il se pent 
 may I? puis-je? 
 the Mayor, le maire 
 me, me, moi; to me, me 
 the meadow, la prairie 
 meagre, maigre 
 the meal, la farine 
 
 (the) means, les moyens (m. ) ; to have 
 , means to live on, avoir de quoi vivre 
 the meat, la viande; some meat, any 
 
 meat, de la viande; some or any bad 
 
 meat, de mauvaise viande 
 to meddle with, se meler de 
 to meet, rencontrer; to meet with, trou- 
 the memory, la memoire [ver 
 
 to mend (a pen), tailler 
 the merchant, le negociant 
 
— 104 — 
 
 the merit, \e m6git^ 
 
 Mesdames, mesdames 
 
 Messrs. t messimun 
 
 the metal, le ni^tal, leo m^tanT 
 
 mifidnij, midi (m.) 
 
 the middle, le milieu; the very mSddkt 
 
 le bciiu milieu 
 midmght, miimit (m.) 
 the mile, le mille 
 thf Jiiilk', le Iftit 
 the niilliiirr, bi modiste 
 the mind^ ToHprit; to haveamind^ TOO- 
 
 loir, avoir envie 
 mine, le mien, 1a mienne, lee inieiis» 
 the mine, la mine [lea nriwifwin 
 
 thf miyiute, la minuto 
 thr jyii.frn/, la miH^re 
 f "■' 'ortinie, le malhenr 
 
 V >. ilia UmoiHclle; Misses, mesde- 
 
 moiiielles 
 Oie mistake, la faute; to be ndatake% 
 
 Be tromper 
 moderate, mod^rd, modMe 
 to moderate, modi6m 
 modesty modeste 
 (the) nwdesty, la modeetie 
 the moment, le moment; at Udt twy 
 
 moment, a riustant mtee 
 Monday, londi (m.) 
 the money, Targent (m. ) ; the pttcs af 
 
 money, la piece d*argent 
 the monthj le mois; a nuMOt ago, il y a 
 
 im mois 
 the moon, la lune 
 more, plus, dayantage; more peopte, 
 
 plus de monde; once more, encore 
 
 une fois; the more. . .the more, plus 
 
 . ..pins 
 the mortting, le matin, la mating; aU 
 
 the morning, tout© la matinee; every 
 
 morning, tons les matins; the fat 
 
 morning, la grasse matinee; to sleep 
 
 late in the momlTig, donnir la grasse 
 
 matinee 
 mortal, mortel, mortelle 
 the most, le plus 
 
 Vie mother, la m^ 
 
 the mowUain, la montuffne 
 
 the mouth, la bouobe 
 
 Mr., monsieur 
 
 Mrs,, niadaroe 
 
 much, beauooup; too mudt, trup; fiow 
 
 muchf oombien? not muck, pa« 
 the mud, la boue [grand'obotie 
 
 fiMMf, deroir; I must have some money, 
 
 il iaut que j*aie de Tai^geiit 
 the mustard, la moutarde 
 my, man, ma, mas 
 myself, moi-mdine 
 
 >. 
 
 nailed to, clone, clone sur 
 the name, le nom 
 .to name, appelrr 
 the napkin. In Krrvittto 
 naughty, meobaut, iniVhante 
 near, anpr^ de 
 nsai, propre 
 fMoetfory, neoenaire; it is neMssary, 
 
 il taut; to be neeessary, fiilloir 
 (the) need, rindigenoe (f ), le besoin; 
 
 (0 6e In ne$d qf, avoir beeoin de 
 tonc^M, n^JUger 
 the neighbor (m. A J.), le voisin, la 
 
 Toisine; le proobain 
 ntiXher, non plus; nfHAker. .fwr, ni. .ni 
 Ike nephew, le neveo 
 never, ne. .jamais; never again, ne. . 
 
 plus jamais 
 nwmiheless, pourtant 
 new, neuf, neuve; nouTcau, nouvel, 
 
 nouvelle; frais, fraicbe 
 the netcs, la nouvelle, les nouvelles 
 the newspaper, le journal 
 the next, le procbain, la procbaine 
 Xicolas, NicoL^ 
 the night, la nuit 
 nine, neuf 
 nineteen, dix-neuf 
 the nineteenth, le, la dix-neuviem« 
 the ninetieth, le,la quatre-vingt-dixieme 
 ninety, quatre-viugt-dix 
 
— 195 — 
 
 the nintht le, la neuTieme 
 
 710, non, pas de, ne. .pas, ne. .point; 
 
 710 longer, ne plus; no more, neplus; 
 
 no one, personne. .ne; aucun, au- 
 
 cune; mil, nuUe 
 nobody, personne. .ne 
 the noise, le bruit 
 noon, midi (m. ) 
 7ior, ni 
 
 the nosegay, le bouquet 
 not, ne. . .pas; ne. . .point; not any, 
 
 ne. .aucun, aucune; not at all, ne. . 
 
 point, pas du tout, point du tout; 
 
 not ever, ne. .jamais; not more, ne. . 
 
 plus; nx)t much, pas grand'chose 
 the note, le billet 
 nothing, rien. . .ne; nothing hut, ne. . 
 
 que; nothing at all, rien du tout 
 to notice, apercevoir, s'apercevoir 
 November, Novembre (m.) 
 now, a present; just now, tout a I'heure 
 the number, le nombre 
 numerous, nombreux, nombreuse 
 the nut, la noix 
 
 O. 
 
 the oak, le cbene 
 to obey, obeir 
 obliged, oblige, obligee 
 to observe, observer 
 to obtain, obtenir 
 to occupy one's self, s'occuper 
 October, Octobre (m.) 
 the odor, I'odeur (f. ) 
 of, de; of it, en 
 to offend, offenser 
 to offer, o£frir 
 the office, I'emploi (m.) 
 the officer, Tofficier (m.) 
 often, souvent 
 the oil, riiuile(f.) 
 old, vieux, vieil, vieille; age, agee 
 071, sur, en 
 
 once, une fois; at once, tout de suite; 
 once ffiore, encore une fois 
 
 one, nn, une; one another, Tun Tautre; 
 les uns les autres, se; the one, I'un, 
 
 OTie's self, soi, soi-meme [I'une 
 
 only, seul, seule; seulement; ne. .que 
 
 open, ouvert, ouverte 
 
 to open, ouvrir 
 
 the opinion, I'opinion (f.); to be of 
 opinion, croire 
 
 opportunely, a propos; quite opportune- 
 ly, fort a propos 
 
 the opportunity, I'occasion (f.) 
 
 or, ou 
 
 to order, ordonner 
 
 in order, en ordre 
 
 in order that, afin que, pour que 
 
 in order to, pour 
 
 the other, I'autre 
 
 other people, others, autrui 
 
 otherwise, autrement 
 
 ought, devoir 
 
 mir, notre, nos 
 
 (Mrs, le, la notre, les notres 
 
 ourselves, nous-memes 
 
 out of breath, a perte d'haleine 
 
 outside, bors de 
 
 over, par-dessus 
 
 to owe, devoir 
 
 the page, la page 
 
 paid (of a visit), fait, rendu 
 
 the pain, la douleur, la peine 
 
 painful, penible 
 
 the pair, la paire 
 
 the paper, le papier 
 
 the (news)paper, le journal 
 
 the pardon, le pardon; I beg your par- 
 don, je vous demande pardon 
 
 my parents, mes parents, mon pere et 
 ma mere 
 
 the park, le pare 
 
 the part, la partie; the greater pari, la 
 
 past, passe, passee [plupart 
 
 (the) patience, la patience 
 
 to pay, pay for, payer 
 
 the peace, le repos 
 
— 196 
 
 it>p$oL gtaader 
 
 (he pear, 1a poire 
 
 the p«7i, la plume 
 
 as a penance, en p^tenoe 
 
 the pencil, le crayon 
 
 the penknife, le canif 
 
 the people, le people; people, les gens 
 
 (nL&l), le monde, on, Ton; many 
 
 people, beauconp de monde; mort 
 
 people, pins de monde; olher people, 
 
 autmi 
 the pepper, le poivre 
 to perceive, apercevoir, ^*aperoeToir 
 perhaps, peat^tre 
 ih^ptfrndatioii, l^pennMkm 
 top«rmK, permettre 
 ioperaeentU, penfenter 
 the person, la personne 
 Philadelphia, Philad«lpliU 
 PkOip, FhUippe 
 the physician, le nMeoin 
 the piano, le piano 
 the picture, le tableau, lea tableaux 
 the piece, le moroean, lee moxoeanx, la 
 
 tranche, lapi^; the pises qf money, 
 
 la pikoe d'argent 
 pink ribbon, mban roee 
 (the) pity, la piti^; it is a pity, c*e8t 
 
 dommage, to have pity, avoir piti^ 
 to pity, plaindre; to be to be pilied, Stre 
 the place, la place [k plaindre 
 
 to place, mettre, placer 
 the plaiii, la plante 
 to plaiit, planter 
 the plate, I'assiette (t) 
 the play, le jeu, les jenx 
 to play, jouer; so divertir; to play {at) 
 
 billiards, joner an billard 
 pleasant, agr^able [plait 
 
 to please, plaire ; 1/ you please, 8*il vous 
 pleased, content, contente 
 the pleasure, le plaisir; trith pleasure, 
 
 ayec plaisir, je veux bien; to lake 
 
 pleasure, se plaire 
 the plum, la prune 
 the pocke^handkerchief, le mouchoir 
 
 polite, poli, polie 
 
 the pond, r^tang (m.) 
 
 poor, pauvre 
 
 the porcelain, la poroelaine 
 
 theposUion, I'tet (m.) 
 
 positive, positii; poaitiTe 
 
 to possess, po wS d or 
 
 possibU, ponible 
 
 the post-qffics, lapoata 
 
 thepowikd, laliTze 
 
 to pour, Teraar 
 
 (the) poverty, I'indigenoe (L) 
 
 the power, le pouvoir 
 
 topraise, looer 
 
 to prefer, ptMtei, aimer mieuz 
 
 (ke pr^erence, Upt^Unaob 
 
 ths prts &iU, leeadean, leacadeauz 
 
 prtsenHy, toot k Vhenxe 
 
 iopremrvs, oooaerver 
 
 l^retty, Joli,Jolie;aMB 
 
 to prtvenl, em pte her 
 
 Ihs prioe, lepriz 
 
 pnAMy, piobablement 
 
 the progress, le piogrte 
 
 the prcmmadis, la promenade 
 
 toprondss, promettre 
 
 promised, prookia 
 
 (thou) pnmissst, (in) ptometa 
 
 to pronounce, proiumoer 
 
 the prommelation, la prononciation 
 
 proper, propie; it is proper, il convient 
 
 the property, le bien 
 
 to propose, propoaer 
 
 to protect, prot^ger 
 
 provided, pourvu 
 
 prudent, prudent, prudente 
 
 to punish, punir 
 
 the pupU, r^ve (m. & f.) 
 
 the purchase, Femplette (f.) 
 
 the purse, la bourse 
 
 to pursue, poursuivre 
 
 put, mis 
 
 to put, placer, mettre; to pvU back, 
 remettre; to put off, renvoyer; to 
 put on, mettre; to put on one's hat, 
 se couvrii 
 
197 — 
 
 Q. 
 
 the quality, la qualite 
 
 the quarter, le quart 
 
 the queen, la reine 
 
 the question, la question; the question 
 
 is, il est question 
 quickly, vite, promptement 
 quiet, tranquille 
 quietly, tranquillement 
 quite, tout; quite opportunely, fort a 
 
 propos 
 
 R. 
 
 the rain, la pluie 
 
 to rain, pleuvoir 
 
 to raise, lever 
 
 raised, leve 
 
 the rampart, le rempart 
 
 rare, rare 
 
 rarely, rarement 
 
 the rat, le rat 
 
 read, lu 
 
 to read, lire 
 
 (^^/le j reading, la lecture 
 
 ready, pret, prete 
 
 rea?, vrai, vraie 
 
 reaZ^^/' ^raiment 
 
 the reason, la raison 
 
 reasonable, raisonuable 
 
 to receive, recevoir 
 
 received, re9U [je reconnais 
 
 to recognize, reconnaitre; I recognize, 
 
 to recommend, conseiller 
 
 to recover, recouvrer 
 
 red, rouge 
 
 to refuse, refuser 
 
 the regiment, le regiment 
 
 to regret, regretter 
 
 to rejoice, rejouir 
 
 to relate, raconter 
 
 the relatives, les parents 
 
 to remain, rester; to remain seated, 
 
 rester assis 
 the remainder, le reste 
 remained, rest^ 
 remarkable, remarquabje 
 
 the remedy, le remade 
 
 to remedy, apporter remede 
 
 to remember, se souvenir de; remember, 
 
 retenez 
 to remit, remettre 
 to render, rendre ; to render a service, 
 
 rendi-e service 
 to repent, se repentir 
 to reply, repondre 
 the repose, le repos 
 the reproach, le reproche 
 to reproach, faire des reproches 
 the reputation, la reputation 
 to rest, se reposer 
 to restore, rendre 
 retail, en detail 
 to return, retourner, revenir; to return 
 
 home, rentrer chez soi 
 returned, revenu, de retour 
 on returning, de retour 
 the revjard, la recompense 
 to reward, recompenser 
 the ribbon, le ruban; pink ribbon, 
 rich, riche [ruban rose 
 
 riches, les richesses (f.) 
 the ride on horseback, la promenade a 
 
 cheval; to ride on horseback, monter 
 
 a cheval; to ride in a carriage, se 
 
 promener en voiture 
 the riding -school, le manege 
 right, raison; J am right, j'ai raison; 
 
 that lohich is right, le bien; 7'ight, 
 
 juste; (to the) right, a droite 
 righteous, juste 
 to ring, sonner 
 to rinse, rincer 
 ripe, mur, miire 
 to rise, se lever 
 the road, le chemin 
 to roast, rotir 
 Robert, Robert 
 
 the rocki7ig-horse, le cheval de bois 
 the roof, le toit 
 the room, la chambre, la salle, la place; 
 
 to make room, faire place 
 the rose, la rose 
 
— 198 — 
 
 round, antonr de 
 
 the ruUy la r^le 
 
 to ruk, r^ler 
 
 to run, courir; to run away, fuir, 8*en- 
 
 fuir; to run through, parcourir 
 Itmsia, la Bnane 
 
 S. 
 
 aad, tariste; iolookaad, aToirrairtriste 
 
 fki Bokarjf, 1« AppoialanmtB (m.) 
 
 iheaaU, le sel 
 
 the actme, le, la mAme 
 
 the 9cUisf action, UaattsflMStioii; to ki$ 
 
 (her) MtisfaeHonj k mm gr6 
 Saturday, samedi (m.) 
 to save, aaaver 
 saving, ^ooiiomd 
 say, dites 
 to 8ay, dire 
 soaroelif, ne. .godte, presqoe pas; 
 
 soareety .lohm, 4 peine que 
 scented, perftun^ parfum^ 
 the scholar, T^colier (m.) 
 the school, Tecole (f.) 
 the sea-side^ le bord da la mer 
 Uie season, la aaiaon 
 seaied, aaaia; to 66 seated, toe aaaia; 
 
 to remain seated, reeter aniB 
 the itecotui, le second, la seoonde 
 a secomU une seconde 
 to see, voir, aperoeyoir, s'aperccroir, 
 
 to let see, fedie voir 
 to 9M Of/am, revoir 
 /o seek, chercher 
 it seettis, il semble 
 seen, vn 
 
 selctom, rarement 
 self, meme 
 
 to sell, vendre; (he) sells, il vend 
 to sendy envoyer; to send /or, faire venir 
 sensible^ sense, sensee 
 .sen/, envoye 
 
 September, Septembre (m.) 
 serious, serieax, seriense 
 the servant (m. db /.), 1© domestique, 
 
 la dometitique 
 
 to serve, servir; to «ert'e for, to he qf 
 use to, servir k\ to sert^ for or in- 
 stead cf, servir de; t^iey have served 
 up, onaservi 
 
 the service, le serrloe; to do a service, 
 lendrs service 
 
 to set out, partir; set out, parti 
 
 tosetik, xiifia 
 
 seven, sepi 
 
 setMNlMM, dix-sept 
 
 the seventeenth, le, la dix-septitoae 
 
 <^ MtwO;^ le, la aeptikne 
 
 the ssvenMh, le, k soixante-dizitoe 
 
 ssvmdy, toiiante et diz 
 
 aev sni y o m, soixante et onxe 
 
 s e v en ty tw o , toizante-douie 
 
 several, phuienzs 
 
 toseie, oondre 
 
 the shadouf, Tombre (f.) 
 
 (the) shame, la honte; to be ashamed, 
 avoir honte 
 
 the share. Taction (f. ) 
 
 toshare, partager 
 
 «^elle 
 
 the sksep, la brebis 
 
 the sMisr, le comTert; to get under 
 Miter, se mettre k convert 
 
 to shine, Inire 
 
 the sh^, le vaiasean, les vaiaseanx 
 
 the shirt, la chemise 
 
 the shoe, le sonlier 
 
 the shoemaker^ le cordonnler 
 
 short, coort, conrte; in a short time, 
 dans pen de temps; to be short- 
 sighted, avoir la vue basse 
 
 (I) should wish, (je) voudrais 
 
 (you) should have seen, it fallait voir 
 
 to show, montrer 
 
 to shut, fermer 
 
 sick, malade [a cote de 
 
 the side, le cote; by the side of, beside, 
 
 the sight, le spectacle, la vue; / am 
 short-sighted, j'ai la vne basse; / 
 have good sigfd, j'ai la vue bonne 
 
 th^ silver, I'argent (m.) 
 
 simple, simple 
 
199 — 
 
 since,depuis;5mcew/ienf depnisquand? somey quelque, certain; some one, 
 
 to sing, chanter 
 
 the sister, la soeur 
 
 to sit down, s'asseoir; to sit down to 
 
 table, se mettre a table 
 six, six 
 sixteen, seize 
 
 the sixteenth, le, la seizieme 
 the sixth, le, la sixieme 
 the sixtieth, le, la soixantieme 
 sixty, soixante 
 the skill, I'adresse (f.) 
 skillful, habile 
 the skittles, les quilles (f.) 
 the sky, le ciel, les cieux 
 to slander, medire 
 the slate, I'ardoise (f. ) 
 (the) sleep, le sommeil; to he sleepy, 
 
 avoir sommeil 
 to sleep, dormir; to sleep late in the 
 
 morning, dormir la grasse matinee 
 slept, dormi 
 the slice, la tranche 
 slowly, doucement, lentement 
 small, petit, petite 
 the smell, I'odeur (f. ) 
 to smell, sentir, to smell had, sentir 
 
 mauvais; to smell burnt, sentir le 
 
 brule; to smell nice, sentir bon 
 to snow, neiger 
 so, si, tant; so many, tant; so much, 
 
 tant, antant; so that, afin que, pour 
 
 que 
 the soap, le savon 
 soberly, sobrement 
 the society, la societe 
 the sofa, le canape 
 softly, doucement 
 to soil, salir 
 sold, vendu 
 the soldier, le soldat 
 some, en; some to him, to her, to it, 
 
 lui en; some to me, m'en; some to 
 
 thee, t'en; some to them, leur en; 
 
 some to us, nous en; some to you, 
 
 vous en 
 
 some, quelqu'un, quelqu'une, quel- 
 
 ques-uns, quelques-unes 
 something, quelque chose; something 
 
 else, autre chose; something has hap- 
 
 pened, il est arrive quelque chose 
 sometimes, quelquefois 
 the son, le fils 
 the song, la chanson 
 soon, bientot; sooner, plus tot; so soon, 
 
 (de) sitot 
 Sophia, Sophie 
 sorry, fache, fachee 
 the sou,le sou 
 sought, cherche 
 the soul, I'ame (f . ) 
 soundly, profondement 
 the soup, la soupe 
 to spare, epargner 
 
 the sparrow, le moineau, les moineaux 
 to speak, parler; I speak, je parle 
 the speech, la parole 
 to spend, employer, depenser, passer 
 
 (of time) 
 splendid, superbe 
 to spoil, gater 
 
 the spoon, la cuiller, cuillere 
 the spring, le printemps 
 the stable, I'ecurie (f,) 
 standing, debout; to be standing, etre 
 
 debout 
 to start, partir 
 started, parti, partie 
 the sto^gjl'etat (m. ) ; the United States, les 
 
 Etats-Unis 
 to stay, rester; to stay at home, rester 
 
 chez soi 
 stayed behind, reste, restee 
 the step, le pas 
 still, encore 
 the stocking, le bas 
 the stone, la pierre 
 to stop (one's self), s'arreter 
 the storm, Torage (m. ) 
 the story, I'histoire (f. ) 
 the stranger, Tetranger (m, ) 
 
— 200 - 
 
 the strawberry, Ik fniat 
 
 (he street, la nie 
 
 to strike^ frapper, Honuer; to .ttrikt 
 
 stroiuj, fort, forte [mrf, eflKcer 
 
 the siudent, lY'tudiant (m.) 
 
 the study, letade (f.) 
 
 to succeed, reushir 
 
 the successt le succcsb 
 
 such, tel, telle 
 
 to suffer, Boufl&rir 
 
 the sugar, lo tmcre 
 
 to suit, convenir 
 
 sultry, ^ufB^nt, ^toufftmte 
 
 the sun, lo Boleil 
 
 Sunday, dimancho (m.) 
 
 to siq>, sonper 
 
 supj^ied, aaaorti, aasortie 
 
 the support, le soutiim 
 
 to suppose, pr^sunier 
 
 sure, 8Ur, sfire 
 
 fo surretuter, ae renilro 
 
 to survive, 8tin'i>Te 
 
 to sustain, sout^^'uir 
 
 sweet, doux, douce 
 
 Swiixertand, la Suisse 
 
 T. 
 
 the tatit, la table; to sit down to tafJt, 
 se mettre k table; at table^ k table 
 
 the tailor, le tailleur 
 
 to take, prendre; to take care, prendre 
 garde; to take kindly, savoir bon gre; 
 to take leave, prendre conge; to take 
 . out, oter; to take piensure, se plaire; 
 to take a seat, se placer; to take a 
 walk, se promener, faire une pro- 
 menade 
 
 taken, pris 
 
 t(dl, grand, grande ;tv ^ . uuir 
 
 the task, h\ tache 
 
 the taste, le gout 
 
 the tea, le the 
 
 to teach, enseigner 
 
 the teacher, le maitre 
 
 the tear, la larme 
 
 ^o teii, dire, raconter; tell, ditee 
 
 fhe temper, ninmeur (f. ) ; in a had 
 
 temper, de maavaise humenr 
 to tempt, tenter 
 ten, dix 
 
 the ten-pins, lee qnilles (f ) 
 the tenth, le, la diziime 
 than, que 
 
 to thaidc, remercier: thank you, merci 
 that, those, CO, cct, cetto, ccs; celui; 
 
 celle, ceux. cellos; celui-Uk, celle-U^ 
 
 ccuz-l^ celles-E 
 thai, cela; that is, c'est, il est, cela est; 
 
 that which, cequi, ceque; th/it trhirh 
 
 is right, le bien 
 that (reiaL), qui, que; thatfcohj. , , vj.u 
 the, le, la, lea 
 
 the theater, le thMtre, le spectacle 
 thee, toi. te 
 their, leur, leurs 
 theirs, le lour, la leur, les leurs 
 titem, eux, ellee, les; to them, Icur, y; 
 
 cf them, en; Uiem to him, le« lui; 
 
 Mem to me, me lea; them to thee, te 
 
 les; them to you; vous les; Oiem to 
 
 them, les leun; them to tts, les nous 
 themselves, se, enx-mdmeB,elle8-mgmeB 
 thence, de Ik 
 there, ]k, j; there is, there are, il y a; 
 
 there is srmebody, il y a quelqu'un; 
 
 there w€Ls, there tcere, il y avait ;/rom • 
 
 there, de ]k 
 therefore, par cons^uent 
 these are, ce sont 
 
 they, ils, eux, ellee; they are, ce sont 
 thick, epais, ^paisse 
 the thimNe, le d6 
 thin, maigre 
 thine, le tien, la tienne, lee tiens, les 
 
 tiennes 
 the thing, la chose 
 to think, penser, songer, croire; I think 
 
 of you, je pense a vous; you think, 
 
 vous croyez 
 the third, le la troisi^e 
 (t?ie) thirst, la soif ; to he thirsty, avoir 
 
 soif ; to be very thirsty, avoir bien soif 
 
— 201 — 
 
 ihirieen, treize 
 
 the thirteenth, le, la treizieme 
 
 the thirtieth, le, la trentieine 
 
 thirty, trente 
 
 thirty-one, trente et tin 
 
 thirty-two, trente deux 
 
 this, these, ce, cet, cette, ces; celui, 
 
 celle, ceux, celles; celui-ci, celle-ci, 
 
 ceux-ci, celles-ci; this, ceci 
 thither, y 
 thou, toi, tu 
 
 thoughtless, etourdi, etourdie 
 thousand, miUe, mil 
 the thousandth, le, la millieme 
 the threat, la menace 
 three, trois 
 
 to throw, throw away, jeter 
 the thunder, le tonnerre 
 to thunder, tonner 
 Thursday, jeudi (m.) 
 thus, ainsi 
 thy, ton, ta, tes 
 thyself, toi-meme 
 to tie, attacher 
 the tiger, le tigre 
 tm, jusque; till to-day, jusqu' aujour- 
 
 d'hui 
 the time, le temps; la fois; the time (of 
 
 the day), Theure; at the time when, 
 
 lorsque ; in time, a temps ; three times, 
 
 trois fois; in a short time, dans pen 
 
 de temps 
 timid, craintif, craintive 
 tired, las, lasse; fatigue, fatiguee 
 to, a, vers, envers, pour ; /o mi/ brother's, 
 
 chez mon frere; to or at my house, 
 
 chez moi 
 to-day, aujourd'hui 
 to-morrow, demain 
 together, ensemble 
 too, aussi; trop; too little, trop peu; too 
 
 many, too much, trop 
 the tooth, la dent 
 to touch, toucher 
 towards, vers, envers 
 the towel, ressuie-main (m.) 
 
 the town, la ville; half the town, la 
 
 moitie de la ville 
 (the) trade, le commerce, le metier 
 the tradesman, le marchand 
 to translate, traduire 
 translated, traduit, traduite 
 to travel, voyager 
 treacherous, faux, fausse 
 the tree, I'arbre (m. ) [preuve 
 
 the trial, la preuve, to m<ike a trial, faire 
 the trick, la ruse 
 a trifle, un rien 
 to trot, trotter 
 the trouble, la peine 
 troubled, embarrasse, embarrassee 
 the trowsers, le pantalon 
 true, veritable 
 
 the trunk, la malle, le coffre 
 to trust, se fier (a) 
 the truth, la verite 
 to try, essayer 
 Tuesday, mardi (m.) 
 to turn to account, mettre a profit 
 the twelfth, le, la douzieme 
 twelve, douze 
 
 the twentieth, le, la vingtieme 
 twenty, vingt 
 
 the twenty-first, le, la vingt-et-unieme 
 twenty-one, vingt-et-un 
 twenty-two, vingt-deux 
 twice, deux fois 
 two, deux 
 
 U. 
 
 the uncle, I'oncle (m.) 
 under, sous 
 
 to understand, comprendre 
 understood, compris, entendu 
 the undertaking, I'entreprise (f. ) 
 unfortunate, malheureux, malheureuse 
 ungrateful, ingrat, ingrate 
 unhappy, malheureux, malheureuse 
 united, uni, unie; the United States, 
 
 les Etats-Unis (m.) 
 unjustly, injustement 
 unless, si. .n© 
 
-. 202 — 
 
 untharUeful, ingrat, iugmto 
 
 up iOy juaque 
 
 tqxm, siir 
 
 us, to uSt nouB 
 
 the %jue, I'liBage (m.) 
 
 to use, se servir de 
 
 usrfult ntile 
 
 uaeleast inntile; that U quUe 
 
 oda ne sert de rien 
 usuaUyt ordinairement 
 
 the txitue, la valeor 
 
 to vanquish, Taincro 
 
 the vasty le vase 
 
 the vegetabies, les legumes (m.) 
 
 t>ery, trts, bien, fort 
 
 the vessdt le vase 
 
 to vex, tonrmenter 
 
 (the) vice, le vice 
 
 yiennOy Vienne 
 
 the vUlagty le village 
 
 the vinegar, le \inaigre 
 
 the violin^ le violon 
 
 (the) virtue^ la vertu 
 
 r\rt<ious, vertueux, Tertoetifle 
 
 risihlij, i\ \'\ie d'oeil 
 
 (fit' visitt, hi visito 
 
 the voicej la voii 
 
 w. 
 
 to xoait for, attendre; to ujoU on, servir 
 the VMiier, le gar^on 
 to toake \q>, eveiller, reveiller 
 the uxiUcj la promenade ; to take a teaOc, 
 se promener, faire one promenade 
 to toaUc, se promener, marcher 
 to tDoIk round, feire le tour 
 to want, avoir besoin de 
 the war, la guerre 
 warm, chaud, cbaade 
 to team, avertir 
 the waich, la montre 
 the waier, I'eau, les eaux (1) 
 tcatered, arrose 
 the wayt le chemin 
 
 ice, nous 
 
 weak, fidble 
 
 to wear, porter 
 
 the weather, le temps 
 
 Wednesday, mercredi (m.) 
 
 (the) u>eed, Yhethe {t); HI ufted, man- 
 Taiaeherbe 
 
 (he week, laBWimine; a week, buit jonrs 
 
 to weep, pleorer 
 
 xM, bien; at toeB <u, mubi bieu que 
 
 tMp(, pleore 
 
 10^ / que? quoit quel, quelle, quels, 
 qoelles? comment? what is the inai' 
 fertoU^youf qii*aTes-T0ii8? what is 
 the use qf that? I^quoi sert oela? 
 
 wkakver, qneloooque; quelqne; quel 
 que, quelle que* quels que, quellee 
 que; whatever If may be, quoi que 
 ceaoit 
 
 when, quftnd, lorsque, dhs que 
 
 whence? d*oti? 
 
 tohere? oh7 
 
 which, qvd, que; quel, quelle, quels, 
 quelles; oe qui« ce que 
 
 the while, le temps, le moment; to be 
 worth white, valoir la peine 
 
 whitst, tandis que 
 
 to whip, fouetter 
 
 the whirl, le tourbillon 
 
 to whisper, dire k Foreille 
 
 white, blanc, blanche 
 
 who, qui? of whom, de qui? from 
 whom, de qui ? to whom, k qui ? for 
 whom, pour qiii? who, qui, lequel, 
 laquelle, lesquels, lesqnelles 
 
 tMoetTer, quiconque; whoever he may 
 he, qui que ce soit 
 
 whole, tout, toute; the whole, le tout 
 
 wholesale, en gros 
 
 why ? pourqnoi ? 
 
 wide, large 
 
 the widow, la veuve 
 
 (U) will directly, (il) va 
 
 TFifliam, Guillaume 
 
 to be willing, vouloir; lam perfectly 
 wUUng, je veux bien 
 
— 20S — 
 
 willingly, volontiers; most willingly, je 
 
 le veux bien 
 the wind, le vent; it is windy; il fait 
 du vent; it is very windy, il fait 
 beaucoup de vent 
 the window, la fenetre 
 the wine, le vin 
 to wipe, essuyer 
 (the) icisdom, la sagesse 
 toise, sage 
 
 to wish, desirer, souhaiter, vouloir; to 
 wish for, desirer; I should wish, je 
 voudrais; one (they) would wish, 
 on voiidrait 
 wished, voulu 
 he wishes, il veut 
 (the) wit, resprit(m.) 
 with, ayec; with him, loith her, with it, 
 
 with them, en 
 within, y 
 
 without, sans; without fail, sans faute 
 the woman, la femme 
 to wonder, s'etonner 
 the word, le mot, la parole; to keep 
 
 one's word, tenir parole 
 the work, I'affaire (f.), le travail, les 
 
 travanx 
 to work, travailler 
 the xoorkman^ I'ouvrier (nu) 
 
 the world, le monde 
 
 worse, pire; pis 
 
 to he loorth, valoir; to he worth while, 
 
 valoir la peine 
 would you have the kindness ? voudriez* 
 
 vous ? 
 it would he desirable, il serait a desirer 
 one would wish, on voudrait 
 to wound, blesser 
 to icrite, ecrire 
 the writing, I'ecriture (f.) 
 written, ecrit 
 wrong, tort; lam wrong, j'ai tort 
 
 the year, I'an (m.)> Tannee (f.); each 
 
 year, chaque annee 
 yes, oui 
 yesterday, hier 
 
 yet, cependant, encore, pourtant 
 to yield, ceder, se rendre 
 yonder, la-bas 
 
 you, to you, vous [moiselle 
 
 young, jeune; the young lady, la de- 
 your, votre, vos 
 
 yours, le votre, la votre, les votrea 
 yourself, vous-meme 
 yourselves, vous-memes 
 youthj la jeunesse 
 
t 
 
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
 University of Califorr^ia Library 
 or to the 
 NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 BIdg. 40a Richmond Field Station 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 • 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 
 (510)642-6753 
 
 • 1 -year loans may be recharged by bringing 
 books to NRLF 
 
 • Renewals and recharges may be made 4 
 days prior to due date. 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 APR1120D0 
 
 12,000(11/95) 
 
YB 01083 
 
 STEIGER'S German Series. 
 
 Edited by W. 
 
 S German Primer 
 
 A.UEBT. Boards $0.45. 
 
 S Oertnan Reading Charts. 25 
 
 tea with Hand-book lor Teachers. By 
 
 P. Henn. $1.00 
 
 same. The 25 Plates mounted on 13 
 irds. '$4.50.— Varnished $6.00. 
 S German Script Charts. 4 Plates 
 unted on 4 boards, varnished $1.25. 
 
 S First Gennan Booh. By Dr. P. 
 NN. (Exercises in Beading, Writing, 
 jUing, Translation, and Conversation, 
 nted in bold type and containing a very 
 ge amount of German Script. De- 
 aed for the lowest two grades.) Boards 
 25. 
 
 S Second German Book. By Dr. P. 
 NN. (Exercises in Writing, Beading, 
 mslation, and Conversation. Contain- 
 • much German Script. With Paradigms 
 1 Vocabularies.^ Boards $0.45, Half 
 
 rhese 
 'S E 
 age. 
 
 AHN'S Second Germam, Reader. With 
 Notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. Henn. 
 Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.20. 
 
 The same. With Foot-notes and Vocabu- 
 lary. Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.20. 
 
 Key to same. Boards $0.50. 
 
 AHN'S Rudiments of the German Lan^ 
 guage. (Edition of 1870.) Boards $0.35. 
 
 AHN'S Method of Learning the Ger- 
 man Language. Revised by Gustavtjb 
 Fischer. First Course, Boards $0.50. Sec- 
 ond Course, Boards $0.50. Both Courses 
 bound together. Half Roan $1.00. 
 
 Key to same. Boards $0.30. 
 
 AHN'S New Practical and Easy Method 
 of Learning the Getnnan Language. 
 With Pronunciation by J. C. Oehlschlae- 
 GEH. Edition of 1873. First Course. (Prac- 
 tical Part.) Boards $0.60. Second Course. 
 (Theoretical Part.) Boards $0.40. Both 
 toeether. Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.25. 
 
 -Vith 
 
 otes 
 irds 
 tier, 
 
 lan 
 md 
 
 3tes 
 
 on. 
 
 ing 
 ge. 
 
 and 
 irst 
 iry. 
 Dnd 
 ,rds 
 ind 
 ). 
 
 in- 
 
 _ *^' 
 
 GRAIJERT'S Manual of the German 
 Language. First Part, Boards $0.40 ; 
 Second Part, Boards $0.40. Both together. 
 Boards $0.70, Half Roan $0.90. 
 
 KEFFELT'S First Book for School and 
 Souse. With Vocabulary. Boards $0.30. 
 
 REFFELT'S Second Book for School and 
 House. With Vocabulary. Boards $0.50. 
 
 SCHLEGEL'S Getmian Grammar for Be- 
 ginners. Half Roan $1.25. 
 
 SCHLEGEL'S First Classical Get-man 
 Reader. With Notes and Vocabulary. 
 Half Roan $1.00. — Second Classical 
 German Reader. With Notes and Voca- 
 
 M122844 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 ards 
 nan 
 i Fir 
 the 
 This 
 Gen 
 to A 
 ngn 
 'S 2 
 ;nn. 
 
 toi 
 
 P. ] 
 'S i 
 Hen: 
 
 to 
 
 Dr. 
 'S li 
 age. 
 lis c 
 
 urth ^ ^_ 
 
 00, HaK Roan $1.25. 
 
 'S Complete Method of the Gertnan 
 
 <nguage. By Dr. P. Henn. (Ahn- 
 
 nn's Firsts Second^ Third, and 
 
 airth German Books together.) 
 
 ongly bound in Half Roan $1.75. 
 
 S Synojisis of German Grammar. 
 
 Dr. P. Henn. Boards $0.60, HaK 
 an $0.80. 
 
 'S First German Reader. With Notes 
 1 Vocabulary. By Dr. P. Henn. Boards 
 60, Half Roan $0.80. 
 
 same. With Foot-notes aaid Vocabulary, 
 ards $0.60, Half Roan $0.80. 
 
 to same. Boards $0.30. 1 bulary. Half Roan $1.50. 
 
 The several Keys above enumerated will be supplied only 
 on the direct application of a teacher to the publisher, 
 
 E. Steig-er, 25 Park Place, Kew York 
 
AHjrs 
 
 ^^ AM 
 
 STEIGER'S French SeHen. 
 
 reach Ri 
 
 Ro.'i dor 
 
 *tf*r-\ riter. 
 
 <^ollcyuitc Loi: 
 
 '^rPDch Gran} war. 
 
 The $eperat Keys above enumerated vui be .< 
 fji^ jii'.rf ^yy^plicQ/ion of a teacher lo the pf/hlM^^r. 
 
 B. Steij^er, 25 Tark Place. >; w York